The following document contains information on Cypress products.
FUJITSU SEMICONDUCTOR
CONTROLLER MANUAL
CM71-10127-2E
FR60Lite
32-BIT MICROCONTROLLER
MB91260B Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
FR60Lite
32-BIT MICROCONTROLLER
MB91260B Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
Be sure to refer to the “Check Sheet” for the latest cautions on development.
“Check Sheet” is seen at the following support page
URL : http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/microelectronics/product/micom/support/index.html
“Check Sheet” lists the minimal requirement items to be checked to prevent problems beforehand in system development.
FUJITSU LIMITED
PREFACE
■ Purpose of this document and intended reader
We sincerely thank you for your continued use of Fujitsu semiconductor products.
The FR family is a line of single-chip microcontrollers based on a 32-bit high-performance RISC CPU and
integrating a variety of I/O resources for embedded control applications which require high - performance,
high-speed CPU processing.
The MB91260B is designed to be best suited for embedded applications which require high-performance
processing power of the CPU, such as DVD players, printers, TV sets, and the PDP control.
The MB91260B series is a line of CPUs in the FR60Lite implemented by FR family.
This manual describes the functions and operations of the MB91260B Series for engineers who develop
products using the MB91260B Series. Please read through this manual.
■ Trademarks
FR is the abbreviation of FUJITSU RISC CONTROLLER, which is a product of Fujitsu Limited.
■ License
Purchase of Fujitsu I2C components conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent Rights to use, these
components in an I2C system provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as
defined by Philips.
■ Sample Program
We provide sample programs free of charge to operate peripheral functions of the F2MC-16LX family. The
programs can be used to check the operational specification and usage of our microcontroller device.
MPU/MCU Support Information
http://www.fujitsu.com/global/services/microelectronics/product/micom/support/index.html
Note: The sample programs are subject to change without notice. The software is designed to show the
standard operation and usage of the product, therefore, it must be used after full evaluation before
using it on your system. Moreover, we assume no liability for any damage resulting from or caused
by the use of the programs.
■ Organization of this document
This manual consists of the following 18 chapters and appendix.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
This chapter provides basic information for understanding the MB91260B series as a whole, covering
its features, block diagram, and functions.
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING DEVICES
This chapter provides precautions on caution of using devices the MB91260B series.
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
This chapter describes the basics of the architecture, specifications, and instructions of the MB91260B
series of CPU cores to introduce their features.
i
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
This chapter outlines the I/O ports and describes the configuration and functions of their registers.
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
This chapter outlines the interrupt control, describes its register configuration/functions and its
operations, and gives an example of using the hold request cancel request.
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
This chapter describes the external interrupt and NMI controller, the configuration and functions of
registers, and operation of the external interrupt and NMI controller.
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
REALOS-related hardware is used by the realtime OS. Therefore, when using REALOS, the hardware
cannot be used with the user program.
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
This chapter describes the 16-bit reload timer, the configuration and functions of registers, and 16-bit
reload timer operation.
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
This chapter describes the overview of the PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator) timer, the
configuration and functions of registers, and the operation of the PPG timer.
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
This chapter explains the overview of the pulse width counter (PWC), the register configuration and
functions and the counter operation.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
This chapter explains the overview of the multifunction timer, the configuration and functions of
registers, and operation of the multifunction timer.
CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for UART Baud Rate Generation)
This chapter describes the U-TIMER, the configuration and functions of registers, and U-TIMER
operation.
CHAPTER 13 UART
This chapter describes the overview of the UART, the configuration and functions of registers, and
UART operation.
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
This chapter describes the overview of the 8/10-bit A/D converter, the configuration and functions of
registers, and the operation of the 8/10-bit A/D converter.
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
This chapter explains the overview of the multiply and accumulate circuit, the configuration and
functions of registers, and the macro (the definition and each instruction) of the multiply and
accumulate circuit.
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
This chapter explains the overview of the DMA controller (DMAC), the configuration and functions of
registers, and DMAC operation.
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
This chapter describes an overview of flash memory and the configuration and functions of registers,
access modes, automatic algorithm and sector protect operations.
ii
CHAPTER 18 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
This chapter describes basic configuration of serial programming and examples of the connection.
APPENDIX
This appendix contains the following items: I/O map, interrupt vector, pin status list, notes when little
endian area is used, instruction lists, and the precautions on handling.
iii
•
•
•
•
•
•
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice.
Customers are advised to consult with FUJITSU sales representatives before ordering.
The information, such as descriptions of function and application circuit examples, in this document are presented solely for the
purpose of reference to show examples of operations and uses of Fujitsu semiconductor device; Fujitsu does not warrant proper
operation of the device with respect to use based on such information. When you develop equipment incorporating the device
based on such information, you must assume any responsibility arising out of such use of the information. Fujitsu assumes no
liability for any damages whatsoever arising out of the use of the information.
Any information in this document, including descriptions of function and schematic diagrams, shall not be construed as license
of the use or exercise of any intellectual property right, such as patent right or copyright, or any other right of Fujitsu or any third
party or does Fujitsu warrant non-infringement of any third-party' s intellectual property right or other right by using such
information. Fujitsu assumes no liability for any infringement of the intellectual property rights or other rights of third parties
which would result from the use of information contained herein.
The products described in this document are designed, developed and manufactured as contemplated for general use, including
without limitation, ordinary industrial use, general office use, personal use, and household use, but are not designed, developed
and manufactured as contemplated (1) for use accompanying fatal risks or dangers that, unless extremely high safety is secured,
could have a serious effect to the public, and could lead directly to death, personal injury, severe physical damage or other loss
(i.e., nuclear reaction control in nuclear facility, aircraft flight control, air traffic control, mass transport control, medical life
support system, missile launch control in weapon system), or (2) for use requiring extremely high reliability (i.e., submersible
repeater and artificial satellite).
Please note that Fujitsu will not be liable against you and/or any third party for any claims or damages arising in connection with
above-mentioned uses of the products.
Any semiconductor devices have an inherent chance of failure. You must protect against injury, damage or loss from such
failures by incorporating safety design measures into your facility and equipment such as redundancy, fire protection, and
prevention of over-current levels and other abnormal operating conditions.
If any products described in this document represent goods or technologies subject to certain restrictions on export under the
Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law of Japan, the prior authorization by Japanese government will be required for export
of those products from Japan.
Copyright ©2005-2006 FUJITSU LIMITED All rights reserved.
iv
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
CHAPTER 2
2.1
OVERVIEW ................................................................................................... 1
Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 2
Block Diagram .................................................................................................................................... 4
Package Dimension ............................................................................................................................ 5
Pin Assignment ................................................................................................................................... 7
Pin Description .................................................................................................................................... 9
I/O Circuit Types ............................................................................................................................... 18
HANDLING DEVICES ................................................................................ 21
Handling Devices .............................................................................................................................. 22
CHAPTER 3
CPU AND CONTROL UNITS ..................................................................... 25
3.1
Memory Space ..................................................................................................................................
3.2
Internal Architecture ..........................................................................................................................
3.3
Programming Model .........................................................................................................................
3.4
Data Structure ...................................................................................................................................
3.5
Word Alignment ................................................................................................................................
3.6
Memory Map .....................................................................................................................................
3.7
Branch Instructions ...........................................................................................................................
3.8
EIT (Exception/Interrupt/Trap) ..........................................................................................................
3.8.1
Interrupt Level ..............................................................................................................................
3.8.2
ICR (Interrupt Control Register) ...................................................................................................
3.8.3
SSP (System Stack Pointer) ........................................................................................................
3.8.4
TBR (Table Base Register) .........................................................................................................
3.8.5
Multi-EIT Servicing ......................................................................................................................
3.8.6
Operation .....................................................................................................................................
3.9
Operation Modes ..............................................................................................................................
3.10 Reset (Device Initialization) ..............................................................................................................
3.11 Clock Generation Control .................................................................................................................
3.11.1 PLL Control ..................................................................................................................................
3.11.2 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time and PLL Lock Wait Time ......................................................
3.11.3 Clock Distribution .........................................................................................................................
3.11.4 Clock Frequency Division ............................................................................................................
3.11.5 Block Diagram of the Clock Generation Control Unit ..................................................................
3.11.6 Registers in the Clock Generation Control Unit ...........................................................................
3.11.7 Peripheral Circuits in the Clock Control Unit ...............................................................................
3.12 Device Status Control .......................................................................................................................
CHAPTER 4
4.1
4.2
4.3
26
28
33
40
41
42
45
48
49
51
52
53
56
58
62
64
70
71
72
74
75
76
77
90
93
I/O PORTS ................................................................................................ 101
Overview of I/O Ports ...................................................................................................................... 102
Registers of I/O Port ....................................................................................................................... 104
Analog Input Ports .......................................................................................................................... 110
v
CHAPTER 5
5.1
5.2
5.3
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 114
Interrupt Control Registers .............................................................................................................. 118
Operation of Interrupt Controller ..................................................................................................... 120
CHAPTER 6
6.1
6.2
6.3
142
143
144
145
146
148
16-BIT RELOAD TIMER ........................................................................... 151
Overview .........................................................................................................................................
16-bit Reload Timer Block Diagram ................................................................................................
16-bit Reload Timer Registers ........................................................................................................
Operation of 16-bit Reload Timer ...................................................................................................
CHAPTER 9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE .......................................................... 141
Delayed Interrupt Module ...............................................................................................................
Register of Delayed Interrupt Module .............................................................................................
Operation of Delayed Interrupt Module ...........................................................................................
Bit Search Module ..........................................................................................................................
Register of Bit Search Module ........................................................................................................
Operation of Bit Search Module ......................................................................................................
CHAPTER 8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER ............................... 129
Overview of External Interrupt/NMI Controller ................................................................................ 130
Registers of External Interrupt/NMI Controller ................................................................................ 132
Operation of External Interrupt/NMI Controller ............................................................................... 134
CHAPTER 7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER ................................................................... 113
152
153
154
158
PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator) ................................................. 163
Overview .........................................................................................................................................
Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................
Register of PPG ..............................................................................................................................
Operation Explanation ....................................................................................................................
164
168
172
177
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement) ....................... 183
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
Overview .........................................................................................................................................
Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................
Register of PWC .............................................................................................................................
Operation Explanation ....................................................................................................................
184
185
186
192
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER ................................................................... 203
11.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................
11.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................................................
11.3 Pins of Multifunctional Timer ...........................................................................................................
11.4 Multifunctional Timer Register ........................................................................................................
11.4.1 Compare Clear Buffer Register (CPCLRBH, CPCLRBL) /Compare Clear Register (CPCLRH,
CPCLRL) 218
11.4.2 Timer Data Register (TCDTH, TCDTL) .....................................................................................
11.4.3 Timer State Control Register (TCCSH, TCCSL) .......................................................................
11.4.4 A/D Trigger Control Register (ADTRGC) ...................................................................................
vi
204
206
212
213
220
221
226
11.4.5
Output Compare Buffer Register (OCCPBH0 to OCCPBH5, OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5) / Output
Compare Register (OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to OCCPL5)
227
11.4.6 Compare Control Register (OCSH0 to OCSH5, OCSL0 to OCSL5) ......................................... 229
11.4.7 Compare Mode Control Register (OCMOD) .............................................................................. 234
11.4.8 Input Capture Data Registers (IPCPH0 to IPCPH3, IPCPL0 to IPCPL3) .................................. 236
11.4.9 Input Capture State Control/PPG Output Control Register (ICSH23, ICSL23, PICSH01, PICSL01)
237
11.4.10 16-bit Dead Timer Register (TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2) ............................. 244
11.4.11 16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR0 to DTCR2) ........................................................... 245
11.4.12 Waveform Control Register (SIGCR1, SIGCR2) ....................................................................... 251
11.4.13 A/D Activation Compare Register (ADCOMP0, ADCOMP1, ADCOMP2, ADCOMPC) ............. 254
11.5 Multifunctional Timer Interrupt ........................................................................................................ 256
11.6 Operation of Multifunctional Timer .................................................................................................. 260
11.6.1 Operation of 16-bit Free-run Timer ............................................................................................ 261
11.6.2 Operation of 16-bit Output Compare ......................................................................................... 267
11.6.3 Operation of 16-bit Input Capture .............................................................................................. 277
11.6.4 Waveform Generator Operation ................................................................................................ 279
11.6.4.1 Operation of Timer Mode ........................................................................................................ 283
11.6.4.2 Operation During Dead Time Timer Mode ............................................................................. 285
11.6.4.3 DTTI Pin Control Operation .................................................................................................... 289
11.6.5 A/D Activation Compare Operation ........................................................................................... 291
11.7 Notes on Using Multifunctional Timer ............................................................................................. 292
11.8 Program Example of Multifunctional Timer ..................................................................................... 294
CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for UART Baud Rate Generation) .................... 297
12.1
12.2
12.3
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 298
Description of Registers .................................................................................................................. 299
Description of Operation ................................................................................................................. 302
CHAPTER 13 UART ........................................................................................................ 303
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
Overview .........................................................................................................................................
Detail Description of Registers .......................................................................................................
Operation of UART .........................................................................................................................
Example of Using the UART ...........................................................................................................
Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload Values ......................................................
304
307
313
319
321
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER ..................................................................... 323
14.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................
14.2 Configuration ..................................................................................................................................
14.3 Pin ...................................................................................................................................................
14.4 Registers .........................................................................................................................................
14.4.1 A/D Channel Control Register (ADCH) ......................................................................................
14.4.2 A/D Mode Setting Register (ADMD) ..........................................................................................
14.4.3 A/D Control Status Register (ADCS) .........................................................................................
14.4.4 A/D Data Register (ADCD) ........................................................................................................
14.4.5 Analog Input Control Register (AICR) .......................................................................................
14.5 Interrupt ..........................................................................................................................................
vii
324
325
328
330
331
333
336
339
340
341
14.6
14.7
14.8
Operation Explanation .................................................................................................................... 342
A/D Conversion Data Protection Function ...................................................................................... 346
Precautions on Using ...................................................................................................................... 347
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR .............................. 349
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
Overview .........................................................................................................................................
Register Description .......................................................................................................................
Operation Explanation ....................................................................................................................
Instruction Detail Explanation .........................................................................................................
350
355
359
363
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller) ......................................................................... 367
16.1
16.2
16.3
16.4
16.5
16.6
16.7
16.8
Overview .........................................................................................................................................
Register Details Explanation ...........................................................................................................
Operation Explanation ....................................................................................................................
Setting Up Transfer Request ..........................................................................................................
Transfer Sequence .........................................................................................................................
Overview of DMA Transfer .............................................................................................................
Operation Flow ...............................................................................................................................
Data Path ........................................................................................................................................
368
371
385
387
388
390
398
400
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY ..................................................................................... 403
17.1 Overview of Flash Memory .............................................................................................................
17.2 Flash Memory Registers .................................................................................................................
17.2.1 Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR) .....................................................................................
17.2.2 Flash Wait Register (FLWC) ......................................................................................................
17.3 Access Modes of Flash Memory .....................................................................................................
17.4 Starting the Flash Memory Automatic Algorithm ............................................................................
17.5 Automatic Algorithm Execution Status ............................................................................................
17.6 Sector Protect Operation ................................................................................................................
404
409
410
412
414
416
420
426
CHAPTER 18 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION .............................................. 431
18.1
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 432
APPENDIX ......................................................................................................................... 437
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX C
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX E
APPENDIX F
I/O Map ................................................................................................................................
Vector Table .........................................................................................................................
Pin Status In Each CPU State .............................................................................................
Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used ...............................................................................
Instruction Lists ....................................................................................................................
Precautions on Handling ......................................................................................................
438
446
450
453
460
475
INDEX................................................................................................................................... 479
viii
Main changes in this edition
Page
i
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
■ Sample Program is added.
23
● Note on Operation in PLL Clock Mode is changed.
53
Table 3.8-3 Vector Table (1 / 3) is changed.
(Instruction break exception → System-reserved)
(Operand break trap → System-reserved)
66
● Watchdog reset is changed.
(WPR (watchdog reset defer register) → CTBR (timebase counter clear register))
70
■ Selecting the Source Clock Signal is changed.
(φ is the base clock that is generated from the source clock divided by two or by using the PLL oscillation.
Therefore, the system base clock is a clock generated in the above-mentioned internal base clock generation.
is added.)
76
Figure 3.11-1 Block Diagram of the Clock Generation Control Unit is changed.
(The WPR register part of [Watchdog controller] is deleted.)
78
The table in [bit9, bit8] WT1,WT0 (Watchdog interval Time select) is changed.
(WPR → CTBR)
78
■ STCR: Standby Control Register is changed.
83
■ CTBR: Timebase Counter Clear Register is changed.
(Note, however, that the FF is cleared automatically when the CPU is not operating such as in the stop or
sleep mode or during DMA transfer. If such a condition develops, therefore, a watchdog reset is deferred
automatically. For details, see the section "3.11.7 Peripheral Circuits in the Clock Control Unit". is added.)
85
■ WPR: Watchdog Reset Defer Register in 3.11.6 Registers in the Clock Generation Control Unit is deleted.
90
[Deferring the generation of a watchdog reset] in ● Watchdog timer is changed.
(WPR (watchdog reset defer register) → CTBR (timebase counter clear register))
96
● Sleep mode is changed.
97
● Stop mode is changed.
121
Table 5.3-1 Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (1 / 3) is changed.
(Instruction break exception → System-reserved)
(Operand break trap → System-reserved)
137
■ Precautions when Returning from STOP State Using External Interrupt is added.
138
■ Return Operation from STOP State is added.
304
■ Features of UART is changed.
(• The DMAC interrupt source is cleared by the writing operation to the DRCL register. is deleted.)
305
■ Register List is changed.
(DRCL part is deleted.)
312
■ DRCL is deleted.
318
■ Precautions on Usage is changed.
(Write to the DRCL register before starting DMA transfer by an interrupt for the first time. is deleted.)
ix
Page
Changes (For details, refer to main body.)
362
Notes: is added.
445
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map is changed.
(*3: These are reserved registers. These access are prohibited. is added.)
447
Appendix Table B-1 Vector Table (1 / 3) is changed.
(Instruction break exception → System reserved)
(Operand break trap → System reserved)
475
● Low-power consumption mode is changed.
439, 443
The sections of the following registers in Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map are changed.
(DRCL0, DRCL1, DRCL2, WPR)
x
CHAPTER 1
OVERVIEW
This chapter provides basic information for
understanding the MB91260B series as a whole,
covering its features, block diagram, and functions.
1.1 Overview
1.2 Block Diagram
1.3 Package Dimension
1.4 Pin Assignment
1.5 Pin Description
1.6 I/O Circuit Types
1
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.1
Overview
The MB91260B series is a line of Fujitsu's general-purpose 32-bit RISC microcontrollers
designed for embedded control applications which require high-speed processing. The
MB91260B contains an FR60Lite CPU core compatible with the FR family of CPUs.
■ Features
● FR60Lite CPU
• 32-bit RISC, load/store architecture, five pipelines
• Maximum operating frequency: 33 MHz (oscillation frequency of 4.192 MHz multiplied by 8 (by PLL
clock multiplication)
• 16-bit fixed-length instructions (basic instructions)
• Instruction execution speed: 1 instruction per cycle
• Instructions including memory-to-memory transfer, bit manipulation, and barrel shift instructions:
Instructions suitable for embedded applications
• Function entry and exit instructions and register multi-load/store instructions: Instructions compatible
with the C language
• Register interlock function: Facilitating assembly-language coding
• Built-in multiplier with instruction-level support
• Signed 32-bit multiplication: 5 cycles
• Signed 16-bit multiplication: 3 cycles
• Interrupts (PC/PS saving): 6 cycles (16 priority levels)
• Harvard architecture enabling simultaneous execution of both program access and data access
• Instruction-compatible with the FR family
● Built-in peripheral resources
• Built-in ROM capacity and type
MASK ROM:
128 KB (MB91263B), 256 KB (MB91264B)
FLASH ROM: 256 KB (MB91F264B)
• Built-in RAM capacity: 8 KB
• A/D converters (successive approximation type)
Resolution: 10 bits:8 channels × 1 unit, 2 channels × 2 units
Conversion time: 1.2 µs (minimum conversion time at a system clock of 33 MHz)
1.35 µs (minimum conversion time at a system clock of 20 MHz)
• External interrupt inputs: 10 channels
• Bit search module (used by REALOS)
This feature searches for the first bit position causing a 1-to-0 transition in the MSB (most significant
bit) of a word.
2
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
• UART (full duplex, double buffering): 3 channels
Choice of enabling/disabling parity
Choice of clock asynchronous (start-stop) or synchronous communication
Dedicated baud rate timer (U-TIMER) integrated for each channel
Capable of using an external clock as a transfer clock
Detection of parity, frame, and overrun errors
• 8/16-bit PPG timer: 16 channels (in 8-bit mode) / 8 channels (in 16-bit mode)
• 16-bit reload timer: 3 channels (cascade mode available, with no output of reload timer 0)
• 16-bit free-running timer: 1 channel
• 16-bit PWC timer: 2 channels
• Input capture unit: 4 channels (interlocking with the free-running timer)
• Output compare unit: 6 channels (interlocking with the free-running timer)
• Waveform generator
Capable of generating various waveforms using the output compare unit's output, 16-bit PPG timer 0,
and 16-bit dead timer.
• Multiplier-accumulator
RAM: Instruction RAM 256 × 16 bits
XRAM 64 × 16 bits
YRAM 64 ×16 bits
Executes a multiply-accumulate operation (16 bits × 16 bits + 40 bits) in one instruction cycle.
Extracts the operation result by rounding from 40 bits to 16 bits.
• DMAC (DMA Controller): 5 channels
Capable of starting transfer of built-in peripheral interrupts by means of software
• Watchdog timer
• Low-power consumption modes
Sleep and stop modes
● Others
• Package: QFP-100, LQFP-100
• CMOS 0.35 µm technology
• Single power supply [Vcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V]
3
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.2
Block Diagram
This section shows a block diagram of the MB91260B series.
■ Block Diagram
Figure 1.2-1 Block Diagram
FR 60Lite
CPU Core
32
32
DMAC 5ch
Bit search
Multiplyaccumulate macro
Bus
Converter
ROM 128KB /
ROM 256KB /
Flash 256KB
RAM 8 KB
X0,X1
MD0 to MD2
INIT
32
32 to 16
Adapter
Clock
control
16
Interrupt
controller
INT0 to INT9
NMI
10ch
external interrupt
PORT I/F
3ch
16-bit reload timer
2ch
SIN0 to SIN2
SOT0 to SOT2
SCK0 to SCK2
16-bit PWC timer
3ch
UART
PORT
TIN0 to TIN2
TOT1 to TOT2
PWI0 to PWI1
8ch
8/16-bit PPG timer
PPG0 to PPG15
3ch
U-TIMER
AVcc
ADTG0
AN0 to AN7
AVRH0
ADTG1
AVRH1
AN8 to AN9
ADTG2
AVRH2
AN10 to AN11
4
Multifunction timers
8ch input
8/10bit A/D-0
2ch input
8/10bit A/D-1
2ch input
8/10bit A/D-2
Free Run Timer 1ch
CKI
Input Capture 4ch
IC0 to IC3
Output compare 6ch
Waveform generator
RTO0 to RTO5
DTTI
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.3
Package Dimension
This section shows the package dimension of FPT-100P-M06 and FPT-100P-M05.
■ Package Dimension
Figure 1.3-1 FPT-100P-M06 Package Dimensions
100-pin plastic QFP
Lead pitch
0.65 mm
Package width ×
package length
14.00 × 20.00 mm
Lead shape
Gullwing
Sealing method
Plastic mold
Mounting height
3.35 mm MAX
Code
(Reference)
P-QFP100-14×20-0.65
(FPT-100P-M06)
100-pin plastic QFP
(FPT-100P-M06)
Note 1) * : These dimensions do not include resin protrusion.
Note 2) Pins width and pins thickness include plating thickness.
Note 3) Pins width do not include tie bar cutting remainder.
23.90±0.40(.941±.016)
* 20.00±0.20(.787±.008)
80
51
81
50
0.10(.004)
17.90±0.40
(.705±.016)
*14.00±0.20
(.551±.008)
INDEX
Details of "A" part
100
1
30
0.65(.026)
"A"
C
0.25(.010)
+0.35
3.00 –0.20
+.014
.118 –.008
(Mounting height)
0~8˚
31
2002 FUJITSU LIMITED F100008S-c-5-5
0.32±0.05
(.013±.002)
0.13(.005)
M
0.17±0.06
(.007±.002)
0.80±0.20
(.031±.008)
0.88±0.15
(.035±.006)
0.25±0.20
(.010±.008)
(Stand off)
Dimensions in mm (inches).
Note: The values in parentheses are reference values.
5
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Figure 1.3-2 FPT-100P-M05 Package Dimensions
100-pin plastic LQFP
Lead pitch
0.50 mm
Package width ×
package length
14.0 × 14.0 mm
Lead shape
Gullwing
Sealing method
Plastic mold
Mounting height
1.70 mm MAX
Weight
0.65g
Code
(Reference)
P-LFQFP100-14×14-0.50
(FPT-100P-M05)
100-pin plastic LQFP
(FPT-100P-M05)
Note 1) * : These dimensions do not include resin protrusion.
Note 2) Pins width and pins thickness include plating thickness.
Note 3) Pins width do not include tie bar cutting remainder.
16.00±0.20(.630±.008)SQ
* 14.00±0.10(.551±.004)SQ
75
51
76
50
0.08(.003)
Details of "A" part
+0.20
100
26
1
25
C
6
2003 FUJITSU LIMITED F100007S-c-4-6
0.20±0.05
(.008±.002)
0.08(.003)
M
0.10±0.10
(.004±.004)
(Stand off)
0˚~8˚
"A"
0.50(.020)
+.008
1.50 –0.10 .059 –.004
(Mounting height)
INDEX
0.145±0.055
(.0057±.0022)
0.50±0.20
(.020±.008)
0.60±0.15
(.024±.006)
0.25(.010)
Dimensions in mm (inches).
Note: The values in parentheses are reference values.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.4
Pin Assignment
This section shows the pin assignment of the MB91260B series.
■ Pin Assignment
P22/SCK0
P21/SOT0
P20/SIN0
P17
P16/PPG15
X0
X1
Vss
Vcc
P15/PPG14
P14/PPG13
P13/PPG12
P12/PPG11
P11/PPG10
P10/PPG9
P07/PPG8
P06/PPG7
P05/PPG6
P04/PPG5
P03/PPG4
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
Figure 1.4-1 QFP-100
P23/SIN1
1
80
P02/PPG3
P24/SOT1
2
79
P01/PPG2
P25/SCK1
3
78
P00/PPG1
P26/INT6
4
77
INIT
P27/INT7
5
76
MD0
MD1
P50
6
75
P51/TIN0
7
74
MD2
P52/TIN1
8
73
NMI
P53/TIN2
9
72
P77/ADTG2
P54/INT0
10
71
P76/ADTG1
P55/INT1
11
70
P75/ADTG0
P56/INT2
12
69
P74/PWI1
P57/INT3
13
68
Vss
PG0/CKI/INT4
14
67
Vcc
PG1/PPG0/INT5
15
66
P73/PWI0
PG2
16
65
P72/DTTI
Vcc
17
64
P71/TOT2
Vss
18
63
P70/TOT1
C
19
62
P63/INT9
PG3/SIN2
20
61
P62/INT8
PG4/SOT2
21
60
P61/IC3
PG5/SCK2
22
59
P60/IC2
P40
23
58
P37/IC1
P41
24
57
P36/IC0
P42
25
56
P35/RTO5
P43
26
55
P34/RTO4
P44
27
54
P33/RTO3
P45
28
53
P32/RTO2
P46
29
52
P31/RTO1
P47
30
51
P30/RTO0
TOP VIEW
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
PE1/AN11
PE0/AN10
AVRH2
ACC
AVcc
AVRH1
AVss
PD1/AN9
PD0/AN8
AVRH0
PC7/AN7
PC6/AN6
PC5/AN5
PC4/AN4
PC3/AN3
PC2/AN2
PC1/AN1
PC0/AN0
Vcc
Vss
FPT-100P-M06
7
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
8
P24/SOT1
P23/SIN1
P22/SCK0
P21/SOT0
P20/SIN0
P17
P16/PPG15
X0
X1
Vss
Vcc
P15/PPG14
P14/PPG13
P13/PPG12
P12/PPG11
P11/PPG10
P10/PPG9
P07/PPG8
P06/PPG7
P05/PPG6
P04/PPG5
P03/PPG4
P02/PPG3
P01/PPG2
P00/PPG1
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
Figure 1.4-2 LQFP-100
P25/SCK1
1
75
INIT
P26/INT6
2
74
MD0
P27/INT7
3
73
MD1
P50
4
72
MD2
P51/TIN0
5
71
NMI
P52/TIN1
6
70
P77/ADTG2
P53/TIN2
7
69
P76/ADTG1
P54/INT0
8
68
P75/ADTG0
P55/INT1
9
67
P74/PWI1
P56/INT2
10
66
Vss
P57/INT3
11
65
Vcc
64
P73/PWI0
PG0/CKI/INT4
12
PG1/PPG0/INT5
13
PG2
14
TOP VIEW
63
P72/DTTI
62
P71/TOT2
Vcc
15
61
P70/TOT1
Vss
16
60
P63/INT9
P62/INT8
C
17
59
PG3/SIN2
18
58
P61/IC3
PG4/SOT2
19
57
P60/IC2
56
P37/IC1
FPT-100P-M05
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
AVRH1
AVss
PD1/AN9
PD0/AN8
AVRH0
PC7/AN7
PC6/AN6
PC5/AN5
PC4/AN4
PC3/AN3
PC2/AN2
PC1/AN1
PC0/AN0
Vcc
Vss
P30/RTO0
P31/RTO1
P32/RTO2
AVcc
51
32
25
ACC
P33/RTO3
P44
31
P34/RTO4
52
AVRH2
53
24
30
23
P43
PE0/AN10
P42
29
P35/RTO5
PE1/AN11
54
28
22
P47
P36/IC0
P41
27
55
26
21
P46
20
P40
P45
PG5/SCK2
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.5
Pin Description
This section shows the pin description of the MB91260B series.
■ Pin Description
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (1 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
SIN1
1
2
99
D
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled when UART1 data input is disabled.
SOT1
UART1 data output. This function is enabled when UART1 data output is enabled.
100
D
1
D
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when UART1 clock output is
disabled.
P25
INT6
5
2
E
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
INT7
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
3
4
E
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
P50
C
8
5
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled in single-chip mode.
Reload timer 0 external trigger input. Since this input is used as required when
trigger input is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
TIN0
7
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
P26
P27
6
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when UART1 data output is
disabled.
UART1 clock input/output. This function is enabled when UART1 clock output is
enabled.
SCK1
4
UART1 data input. Since this input is used as required when UART1 is performing
input operation, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
P23
P24
3
Function
C
P51
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when reload timer 0 external
clock input is disabled.
TIN1
Reload timer 1 external trigger input. Since this input is used as required when
trigger input is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
6
C
P52
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when reload timer 1 external
clock input is disabled.
9
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (2 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
Reload timer 2 external trigger input. Since this input is used as required when
trigger input is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
TIN2
9
7
C
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when reload timer 2 external
clock input is disabled.
P53
INT0
10
11
12
13
14
15
8
E
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
INT1
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
E
P55
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
INT2
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
10
E
P56
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
INT3
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
11
13
E
P57
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
CKI
Free-running timer external clock input pin. Since this input is used as required
when selected as the external clock input for the free-running timer, the port output
must remain off unless used intentionally.
INT4
E
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
PG0
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled when free-running timer external
clock input and external interrupt input are disabled.
PPG0
PPG timer 0 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 0 output is enabled.
INT5
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
PG1
10
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
P54
9
12
Function
E
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled when PPG timer 0 output and
external interrupt input are disabled.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (3 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
16
14
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
PG2
C
General-purpose I/O port.
D
UART2 data input. Since this input is used as required when UART2 is performing
input operation, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
SIN2
20
18
PG3
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled when UART2 data input is disabled.
SOT2
21
19
UART2 data output. This function is enabled when UART2 data output is enabled.
D
PG4
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled when UART2 data output is disabled.
UART2 clock input/output. This function is enabled when UART2 clock output is
enabled.
SCK2
22
Function
20
D
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when UART2 clock output is
disabled.
PG5
23
21
P40
C
General-purpose I/O port.
24
22
P41
C
General-purpose I/O port.
25
23
P42
C
General-purpose I/O port.
26
24
P43
C
General-purpose I/O port.
27
25
P44
C
General-purpose I/O port.
28
26
P45
C
General-purpose I/O port.
29
27
P46
C
General-purpose I/O port.
30
28
P47
C
General-purpose I/O port.
G
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR2 register
specifies analog input.
AN11
31
29
PE1
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN10
32
38
39
41
30
G
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR2 register
specifies analog input.
PE0
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN9
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR1 register
specifies analog input.
36
G
PD1
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN8
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR1 register
specifies analog input.
37
G
PD0
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN7
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
39
G
PC7
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
11
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (4 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
AN6
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
40
G
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN5
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
41
G
PC5
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN4
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
42
G
PC4
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN3
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
43
G
PC3
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN2
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
44
G
PC2
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN1
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
45
G
PC1
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
AN0
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
46
G
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when analog input is disabled.
RTO0
49
J
RTO1
50
J
RTO2
51
J
P32
12
Multifunction timer waveform generator output. This pin outputs a specified
waveform to the waveform generator. The waveform output is enabled when
waveform generator output is enabled.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when waveform generator output
is disabled.
P31
53
Multifunction timer waveform generator output. This pin outputs a specified
waveform to the waveform generator. The waveform output is enabled when
waveform generator output is enabled.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when waveform generator output
is disabled.
P30
52
A/D converter analog input. This function is enabled when the AICR0 register
specifies analog input.
PC6
PC0
51
Function
Multifunction timer waveform generator output. This pin outputs a specified
waveform to the waveform generator. The waveform output is enabled when
waveform generator output is enabled.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when waveform generator output
is disabled.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (5 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
RTO3
54
52
J
RTO4
53
J
RTO5
57
58
59
60
54
Multifunction timer waveform generator output. This pin outputs a specified
waveform to the waveform generator. The waveform output is enabled when
waveform generator output is enabled.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when waveform generator output
is disabled.
P34
56
Multifunction timer waveform generator output. This pin outputs a specified
waveform to the waveform generator. The waveform output is enabled when
waveform generator output is enabled.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when waveform generator output
is disabled.
P33
55
Function
J
Multifunction timer waveform generator output. This pin outputs a specified
waveform to the waveform generator. The waveform output is enabled when
waveform generator output is enabled.
P35
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when waveform generator output
is disabled.
IC0
Input capture 0 trigger input. The trigger can be input when the input capture trigger
input and input port are set. Since this input is used as required when selected as the
input capture input, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
55
D
P36
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when input capture trigger input
is disabled.
IC1
Input capture 1 trigger input. The trigger can be input when the input capture trigger
input and input port are set. Since this input is used as required when selected as the
input capture input, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
56
D
P37
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when input capture trigger input
is disabled.
IC2
Input capture 2 trigger input. The trigger can be input when the input capture trigger
input and input port are set. Since this input is used as required when selected as the
input capture input, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
57
D
P60
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when input capture trigger input
is disabled.
IC3
Input capture 3 trigger input. The trigger can be input when the input capture trigger
input and input port are set. Since this input is used as required when selected as the
input capture input, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
58
D
P61
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when input capture trigger input
is disabled.
13
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (6 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
INT8
61
62
59
E
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
INT9
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
60
E
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when external interrupt input is
disabled.
TOT1
61
Reload timer 1 output. This function is enabled when reload timer output is enabled.
C
P70
TOT2
64
62
C
DTTI
63
D
P72
69
70
71
64
Input signal for controlling multifunction timer waveform generator outputs RTO0 to
RTO5. This function is enabled when DTTI input is enabled.
PWC timer 0 pulse width counter input. This function is enabled when PWC timer 0
pulse width counter input is enabled.
D
P73
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PWC timer 0 pulse width
counter input is disabled.
PWI1
PWC timer 1 pulse width counter input. This function is enabled when PWC timer 1
pulse width counter input is enabled.
67
D
P74
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PWC timer 1 pulse width
counter input is disabled.
ADTG0
A/D converter 0 external trigger input. Since this input is used as required when
selected as the A/D converter trigger source, the port output must remain off unless
used intentionally.
68
C
P75
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when A/D converter 0 external
trigger input is disabled.
ADTG1
A/D converter 1 external trigger input. Since this input is used as required when
selected as the A/D converter trigger source, the port output must remain off unless
used intentionally.
69
C
P76
14
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when reload timer output is
disabled.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when DTTI input is disabled.
PWI0
66
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when reload timer output is
disabled.
Reload timer 2 output. This function is enabled when reload timer output is enabled.
P71
65
External interrupt input. Since this input is used as required when the corresponding
external interrupt is enabled, the port output must remain off unless used
intentionally.
P62
P63
63
Function
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when A/D converter 1 external
trigger input is disabled.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (7 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
ADTG2
72
70
C
Function
A/D converter 2 external trigger input. Since this input is used as required when
selected as the A/D converter trigger source, the port output must remain off unless
used intentionally.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when A/D converter 2 external
trigger input is disabled.
P77
73
71
NMI
H
NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) input.
74
72
MD2
K
Mode pin 2. The setting of this pin determines the basic operation mode. Connect
the pin to Vcc or Vss.
75
73
MD1
K
Mode pin 1. The setting of this pin determines the basic operation mode. Connect
the pin to Vcc or Vss.
76
74
MD0
K
Mode pin 0. The setting of this pin determines the basic operation mode. Connect
the pin to Vcc or Vss.
77
75
INIT
I
External reset input.
PPG1
78
76
PPG timer 1 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 1 output is enabled.
C
P00
PPG2
79
77
PPG timer 2 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 2 output is enabled.
C
P01
PPG3
80
78
C
PPG4
79
C
PPG5
80
C
PPG6
81
C
PPG7
82
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 6 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 7 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 7 output is enabled.
C
P06
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 5 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 6 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 6 output is enabled.
P05
84
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 4 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 5 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 5 output is enabled.
P04
83
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 3 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 4 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 4 output is enabled.
P03
82
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 2 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 3 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 3 output is enabled.
P02
81
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 1 output is
disabled.
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 7 output is
disabled.
15
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (8 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
PPG8
85
83
PPG timer 8 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 8 output is enabled.
C
P07
PPG9
86
84
C
PPG10
85
C
PPG11
86
C
PPG12
87
C
PPG13
88
C
PPG14
89
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 13 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 14 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 14 output is enabled.
C
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 14 output is
disabled.
P15
94
92
X1
A
Clock (oscillation) output.
95
93
X0
A
Clock (oscillation) input.
PPG15
96
94
PPG timer 15 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 15 output is enabled.
C
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 15 output is
disabled.
C
General-purpose I/O port.
D
UART0 data input. Since this input is used as required when UART0 is performing
input operation, the port output must remain off unless used intentionally.
P16
97
95
P17
SIN0
98
96
P20
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled when UART0 data input is disabled.
SOT0
99
97
UART0 data output. This function is enabled when UART0 data output is enabled.
D
P21
16
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 12 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 13 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 13 output is enabled.
P14
91
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 11 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 12 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 12 output is enabled.
P13
90
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 10 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 11 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 11 output is enabled.
P12
89
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 9 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 10 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 10 output is enabled.
P11
88
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when PPG timer 8 output is
disabled.
PPG timer 9 output. This function is enabled when PPG timer 9 output is enabled.
P10
87
Function
General-purpose I/O port. This port is enabled when UART0 data output is disabled.
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.5-1 Pin Description (9 / 9)
Pin No.
QFP
LQFP
Pin
Name
I/O
Circuit
Type
UART0 clock input/output. This function is enabled when UART0 clock output is
enabled.
SCK0
100
98
Function
D
General-purpose I/O port. This function is enabled when UART0 clock output is
disabled.
P22
[Power-supply and ground pins]
Table 1.5-2 Pin Description
Pin No.
Pin Name
Function
QFP
LQFP
18, 50, 68, 93
16, 48, 66, 91
Vss
GND pins. Use all of these pins at equal potential.
17, 49, 67, 92
15, 47, 65, 90
Vcc
Power-supply pins. Use all of these pins at equal potential.
35
33
AVcc
Analog power-supply pin for A/D converter
33
31
AVRH2
Analog reference power-supply pin for A/D converter 2
36
34
AVRH1
Analog reference power-supply pin for A/D converter 1
40
38
AVRH0
Analog reference power-supply pin for A/D converter 0
37
35
AVss
19
17
C
34
32
ACC
Analog GND pin for A/D converter
Capacitor coupling pin for internal regulator
Analog capacitor coupling pin
17
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1.6
I/O Circuit Types
This section shows I/O circuit types of the MB91260B series.
■ Input/Output Circuit Types
Table 1.6-1 Input/Output Circuit Type (1 / 3)
Classification
Circuit Type
Remarks
X1
Clock input
A
Oscillation feedback resistor for high-speed
operation (at main clock oscillation
frequency): About 1 MΩ
X0
Standby control
Pull-up control
• CMOS level output
• CMOS level input
Digital output
• Standby control
C
Digital output
• Control with pull-up resistor
Pull-up resistance = About 50 kΩ (Typ)
R
• IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
Standby control
Pull-up control
• CMOS level output
• CMOS level hysteresis input
Digital output
• Standby control
D
Digital output
• Control with pull-up resistor
Pull-up resistance = About 50 kΩ (Typ)
R
• IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
Standby control
18
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 Input/Output Circuit Type (2 / 3)
Classification
Circuit Type
Remarks
Pull-up control
• CMOS level output
• CMOS level hysteresis input
Digital output
• No standby control
E
Digital output
• Control with pull-up resistor
Pull-up resistance = About 50 kΩ (Typ)
R
• IOL = 4 mA
Digital input
• Analog/CMOS level I/O pins
G
Digital output
- CMOS level output
Digital output
- CMOS level input
(With standby control)
R
Digital input
Standby control
- Analog input
(The analog input is enabled with the
AICR's corresponding bit set to "1".)
Analog input
• IOL=4 mA
• CMOS level hysteresis input
• No standby control
H
R
Digital input
• CMOS level hysteresis input
R
• With pull-up resistor
Pull-up resistance = About 50 kΩ (Typ)
I
• No standby control
R
Digital input
19
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
Table 1.6-1 Input/Output Circuit Type (3 / 3)
Classification
Circuit Type
Remarks
• CMOS level output
• CMOS level hysteresis input
Digital output
• Standby control
J
Digital output
• IOL = 12 mA
R
Digital input
Standby control
• CMOS level input
• No standby control
K
R
Digital input
20
CHAPTER 2
HANDLING DEVICES
This chapter provides precautions on caution of using
devices the MB91260B series.
2.1 Handling Devices
21
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING DEVICES
2.1
Handling Devices
This section explains precautions on CAUTION OF USING DEVICES the MB91260B
series including prevention of latch-up, treatment of pins and so on.
■ Handing Devices
● Prevention of Latch-up
Latch-up may occur in a CMOS IC if a voltage greater than Vcc or less than Vss is applied to an input or
output pin or if a voltage exceeding the rating is applied between Vcc and Vss. If latch-up occurs, the
supply current increases rapidly, sometimes resulting in thermal breakdown of the device. Therefore, use
meticulous care not to let any voltage exceed the maximum rating.
● Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Leaving unused input pins open may cause a malfunction. These pins must therefore be connected to a
pull-up or pull-down resistor.
● Treatment of Power-Supply Pins
When provided with multiple Vcc pins or Vss pins, the device is designed such that the pins to have equal
potential are interconnected internally to prevent malfunctions such as latch-up. All of these pins must
however be connected to the equal-potential power supply and ground externally to reduce unwanted
radiation, prevent the strobe signal from malfunctioning due to a rise of ground level, and to follow the
standards of total output current. In addition, the power pins should be connected to Vcc and Vss of this
device at the lowest possible impedance from the current supply source.
It is also advisable to connect a ceramic capacitor of approximately 0.1 µF, as a bypass capacitor, between
Vcc and Vss near this device.
● Crystal Oscillator Circuit
Noise in the vicinity of the X0 and X1 pins can cause this device to malfunction. When designing a printed
circuit board that uses the device, therefore, place the X0/X1 pins, crystal (or ceramic) oscillator, and the
bypass capacitor leading to the ground as close to one another as possible. It is also strongly recommended
to design the artwork for the PC board such that the X0 and X1 pins are surrounded by a ground plane as
stable operation can be expected with such a layout.
● Mode Pins (MD0 to MD2)
Connect the mode pins (MD0 to MD2) directly to Vcc or Vss. To prevent the device from entering test
mode accidentally due to noise, minimize the lengths of the patterns between the individual mode pins and
Vcc or Vss on the PC board as possible and connect them with as low an impedance as possible.
● Turning the Power On
Immediately after turning the power on, be sure to a setting initialization reset (INIT) using the INIT pin.
Immediately after that, also, hold the low-level input to the INIT pin for the stabilization wait time required
for the oscillator circuit to take the oscillation stabilization wait time for the oscillator circuit and the
stabilization wait time for the regulator. (For INIT via the INIT pin, the oscillation stabilization wait time
is initialized to the minimum value.)
22
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING DEVICES
● Oscillation Input in Power-on Sequence
When turning the power on, be sure to maintain clock input until the device is released from the oscillation
stabilization wait state.
● Note on Operation in PLL Clock Mode
On this microcontroller, if in case the crystal oscillator breaks off or an external reference clock input stops
while the PLL clock mode is selected, a self-oscillator circuit contained in the PLL may continue its
operation at its self-running frequency. However, Fujitsu will not guarantee results of operation if such
failure occurs.
● Note on Using an External Clock
When an external clock is used, in principle, supply the X0 pin with a clock signal and the X1 pin with a
clock signal opposite in phase to the signal to the X0 pin simultaneously. To use the STOP mode
(oscillation stop mode) along with the external clock, in which the X1 pin is disabled with "H" output, you
should insert an external resistor of about 1kΩ to prevent a collision between outputs.
Given below is an example of using an external clock.
Figure 2.1-1 Example of Using an External Clock
X0
X1
MB91260B series
● C Pin
As the MB91260B series contains a regulator, be sure to connect a bus capacitor of about 0.1 µF for the
regulator to the C pin.
Figure 2.1-2 C Pin
C
MB91260B series
0.1 µF
Vss
GND
23
CHAPTER 2 HANDLING DEVICES
● ACC Pin
As the MB91260B series contains an A/D converter, be sure to insert a capacitor of about 0.1 µF between
the ACC and AVss pins.
Figure 2.1-3 ACC Pin
ACC
MB91260B series
AVss
24
0.1 µF
CHAPTER 3
CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
This chapter describes the basics of the architecture,
specifications, and instructions of the MB91260B series
of CPU cores to introduce their features.
3.1 Memory Space
3.2 Internal Architecture
3.3 Programming Model
3.4 Data Structure
3.5 Word Alignment
3.6 Memory Map
3.7 Branch Instructions
3.8 EIT (Exception/Interrupt/Trap)
3.9 Operation Modes
3.10 Reset (Device Initialization)
3.11 Clock Generation Control
3.12 Device Status Control
25
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.1
Memory Space
The MB91260B series has 4 Gbytes of logical address space (232 addresses) which can
be linearly accessed by the CPU.
■ Direct Addressing Area
Each of the following areas in the address space is used for input/output.
This area is referred to as the direct addressing area which allows an instruction to directly specify the
address of a location in that area as the instruction's operand.
The direct addressing area varies as shown below depending on the size of data accessed:
• Byte data access
: 000H to 0FFH
• Halfword data access
: 000H to 1FFH
• Word data access
: 000H to 3FFH
■ Memory Map
Figure 3.1-1 Memory Map
0000 0000 H
Byte data
0000 0100 H
Halfword data
0000 0200 H
Word data
0000 0400 H
000F FC00 H
Vector table
initialization area
000F FFFF H
FFFF FFFF H
26
Direct
addressing area
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Figure 3.1-2 MB91F264B and MB91264B's Memory Map
Single-chip mode
0000 0000H
I/O
Direct addressing area
I/O
Refer to I/O map
0000 0400H
0001 0000H
Access disabled
0003 E000H
Built-in RAM 8KB
0004 0000H
Access disabled
000C 0000H
0010 0000H
Built-in ROM
256KB
Access disabled
FFFF FFFFH
Figure 3.1-3 MB91263B's Memory Map
Single-chip mode
0000 0000H
I/O
Direct addressing area
I/O
Refer to I/O map
0000 0400H
0001 0000H
Access disabled
0003 E000H
Built-in RAM 8KB
0004 0000H
Access disabled
000E 0000H
0010 0000H
Built-in ROM
256KB
Access disabled
FFFF FFFFH
27
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.2
Internal Architecture
The FR60Lite CPU is a high performance core based on the RISC architecture while
incorporating high-level function instructions for embedded applications.
■ Features
•
RISC architecture
Basic instructions: 1 instruction per cycle
•
32-bit architecture
32-bit general-purpose register × 16
•
4 Gbytes of linear memory space
•
Built-in multiplier
32-bit × 32-bit multiplication: 5 cycles
16-bit × 16-bit multiplication: 3 cycles
•
Enhanced interrupt processing function
Quick response speed (6 cycles)
Multiple-interrupt support
Level mask function (16 levels)
•
Enhanced instructions for I/O operation
Memory-to-memory transfer instruction
Bit manipulation instruction
•
High coding efficiency
Basic instruction word length: 16 bits
•
Low-power consumption
•
Clock frequency divide ratio setting function
Sleep mode and stop mode supported
■ Internal Architecture
The FR60Lite CPU employs the Harvard architecture in which the instruction and data buses are independent
of each other.
The 32-bit↔16-bit bus converter is connected to a 32-bit bus (F-bus) to provide the interface between the
CPU and peripheral resources. The Harvard↔Princeton bus converter is connected to both of the I-bus and
D-bus to provide the interface between the CPU and the bus controller.
28
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Figure 3.2-1 Internal Architecture
FR CPU
I-bus
Internal
RAM
Internal
ROM
D-bus
32
32
32
32
Harvard Princeton
Bus converter
F-bus
32
32
X-bus 32
32
External Bus
24
Address
32bits ↔ 16bits
Bus converter
Bus controller
Data
16
16
R-bus
Peripheral/Port
Note:
No external bus feature is supported.
29
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ CPU
The CPU is a compact implementation of a 32-bit RISC based FR architecture.
The CPU employs a five-stage instruction pipeline to execute one instruction in one cycle.
The pipeline consists of the following stages:
•
Instruction fetch (IF) ......... Outputs the instruction address to fetch the instruction.
•
Instruction decode (ID) .... Decodes the fetched instruction.
Also, reads a register.
•
Execution (EX) ................. Executes the operation.
•
Memory access (MA)........ Access memory for loading or storing.
•
Write back (WB) .............. Writes the operation result (or loaded memory data) to the register.
Figure 3.2-2 Instruction Pipeline
CLK
Instruction 1
WB
Instruction 2
MA
WB
Instruction 3
EX
MA
WB
Instruction 4
ID
EX
MA
WB
Instruction 5
IF
ID
EX
MA
WB
IF
ID
EX
MA
Instruction 6
WB
Instructions are not executed out of order. That is, if instruction A enters the pipeline ahead of instruction
B, instruction A always reaches the writeback stage before instruction B.
In principle, instructions are executed at a rate of one instruction per cycle. Note, however, that a load/
store instruction involving a memory wait state, a branch instruction with no delay slot, or a multi-cycle
instruction requires more than one cycle for execution. Also, a delay in supplying an instruction slows
down the execution speed of the instruction.
■ 32-bit↔16-bit Bus Converter
This bus converter provides the interface between the 32-bit F-bus for fast access and the 16-bit R-bus,
enabling data access from the CPU to built-in peripheral resources.
When the CPU attempts to make a 32-bit access, this bus converter converts it to two 16-bit accesses to the
R-bus. Some of the built-in peripheral circuits have an access width restriction.
■ Harvard↔Princeton Bus Converter
This bus converter delivers consistency between CPU instruction access and data access to provide a
smooth interface to the external bus.
The CPU has the Harvard architecture in which the instruction and data buses are independent of each
other. In contrast, the bus controller for controlling the external bus has the Princeton architecture with a
single bus. This bus converter assigns priorities to CPU instruction and data accesses to control access to
the bus controller. This always optimizes the order of accesses to the external bus.
30
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Instruction Overview
The FR family supports a set of general RISC instructions and the logical operation, bit manipulation, and
direct addressing instructions optimized for embedded controller applications as well. The entire
instruction set is listed in APPENDIX E. Individual instructions are 16 bits long (some instructions are 32
or 48 bits long), allowing memory to be used efficiently.
The instruction set is divided into the following function groups:
•
Arithmetic operation
•
Load and store
•
Branch
•
Logical operation and bit manipulation
•
Direct addressing
•
Other
● Arithmetic operation
This group of instructions includes typical arithmetic operation instructions (add, subtract, compare) and
shift instructions (logical shift, arithmetic operation shift). The add and subtract instructions can also serve
for the carry producing operation used for a multiword operation and the operation with fixed flag value
useful for address calculation.
This group also includes 32×32-bit and 16×16-bit multiply instructions and a 32/32-bit step divide
instruction.
Also included are the immediate-value transfer instruction which sets an immediate value to a register and
the register-to-register transfer instruction.
All of the arithmetic operation instructions perform operations using the general-purpose and
multiplication/division registers in the CPU.
● Load and store
The load and store instructions read from and write to external memory. These are also used to read from
and write to on-chip peripheral resources (I/O).
The load and store instructions support three different access lengths: byte, halfword, and word. They also
support general register-indirect memory addressing, and some of them support register-indirect memory
addressing with displacement and register-indirect memory addressing with register increment/decrement
as well.
● Branch
This group of instructions serves for branching, calling, interrupting, and returning, Some of the branch
instructions have a delay slot and the others do not, allowing optimization for specific applications. The
branch instructions are detailed later in Section 3.6 "Branch Instructions".
● Logical operation and bit manipulation
The logical operation instructions can perform a logical operation of AND, OR, or EOR either between
general-purpose registers or between a general-purpose register and memory (or an I/O). The bit manipulation
instructions can directly manipulate the content of memory (or an I/O). This group of instructions supports
general register-indirect memory addressing.
31
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● Direct addressing
The direct addressing instructions are used for access between an I/O and either a general-purpose register
or memory. This group of instructions enables fast and efficient access by directly addressing the address of
the I/O in the instruction instead of indirect addressing using a register. Some of these instructions support
register-indirect memory addressing with register increment/decrement as well.
● Other
This group of instructions includes those for PS register flag setting, stack manipulation, sign/zero
extension. It also includes the function entrance/exit applicable to high-level languages and register multiload/store instructions.
32
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.3
Programming Model
This section explains the programming model of the MB91260B series.
■ Basic Programming Model
32 bits
[Initial value]
R0
XXXX XXXXH
R1
General-purpose
registers
R12
R13
AC
R14
R15
Program counter
PC
Program status
PS
Table base register
TBR
Return pointer
RP
System stack pointer
SSP
User stack pointer
USP
XXXX XXXXH
FP
0000 0000H
SP
−
ILM
−
SCR
CCR
Multiply & Divide registers MDH
MDL
33
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Registers
● General-purpose registers
32 bits
[Initial value]
R0
XXXX XXXXH
R1
R12
R13
R14
R14
AC
FP
SP
XXXX XXXXH
0000 0000H
Registers R0 to R15 are general-purpose registers. These are used as accumulators for various operations and
memory access pointers.
Of these 16 registers, the registers listed below are intended for special applications, for which some
instructions are enhanced.
R13: Virtual accumulator
R14: Frame pointer
R15: Stack pointer
The initial values of R0 to R14 after a reset are indeterminate. The initial value of R15 is "00000000H"
(SSP value).
● PS (Program Status) register
This register holds the program status. It is divided into three parts (registers): ILM, SCR, and CCR.
The undefined bits in the following illustration are all reserved bits. Reading any of these bits always
returns "0".
An attempt to write to this register is ignored.
Bit position → 31
20
16
10
ILM
SCR
8 7
0
CCR
● CCR (Condition Code Register)
7
–
34
6
–
5
S
4
I
3
N
2
Z
1
V
0
C
[Initial value]
-00XXXXB
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit5] S: Stack flag
This flag specifies the stack pointer to be used as R15.
Value
Description
0
Selects the SSP to be used as R15.
The bit is set to "0" automatically when an EIT occurs.
(Note, however, that the value saved to the stack is the one existing before the bit is
cleared.)
1
Selects the USP to be used as R15.
This bit is cleared to "0" at a reset.
Set the bit to "0" for execution of the RETI instruction.
[bit4] I: Interrupt enable flag
This flag controls the enabling or disabling of user interrupt requests.
Value
Description
0
Disables user interrupts.
The bit is cleared to "0" upon execution of the INT instruction.
(Note, however, that the value saved to the stack is the one existing before the bit is
cleared.)
1
Enables user interrupts.
The masking of user interrupt requests is controlled by the value held in the ILM register.
This bit is cleared to "0" at a reset.
[bit3] N: Negative flag
This flag indicates the sign to be used for the operation result regarded as an integer represented in two's
complement.
Value
Description
0
Indicates the operation result as a positive value.
1
Indicates the operation result as a negative value.
The initial state after a reset is indeterminate.
[bit2] N: Zero flag
This flag indicates whether the operation result is "0".
Value
Description
0
Indicates that the operation result is a value other than "0".
1
Indicates that the operation result is "0".
The initial state after a reset is indeterminate.
35
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit1] V: Overflow flag
This flag indicates whether an operand using the operation regarded as an integer represented in two's
complement has resulted in an overflow.
Value
Description
0
Indicates that the operation has resulted in no overflow.
1
Indicates that the operation has resulted in an overflow.
The initial state after a reset is indeterminate.
[bit0] C: Carry flag
This flag indicates whether an operation has generated a carry or borrow from the MSB.
Value
Description
0
Indicates that the operation has generated neither a carry nor borrow.
1
Indicates that the operation has generated a carry or borrow.
The initial state after a reset is indeterminate.
● SCR (System Condition code Register)
10
9
8
D1
D0
T
[Initial value]
XX0B
[bit10, bit9] D1, D0: Step division flag
This flag holds intermediate data during execution of step division.
Do not update the content of this flag during execution of the division process.
To execute another process during execution of step division, save and return the values in the PS register
so that the step division can be resumed correctly.
The initial state after a reset is indeterminate.
The flag is set by executing the DIV0S instruction to refer the dividend and divisor.
The flag is forced to be cleared by executing the DIV0U instruction.
[bit8] T: Step trace trap flag
This flag enables or disables step trace traps.
Value
Description
0
Disables step trace traps.
1
Enables step trace traps.
This disables all of user NMIs and user interrupts.
This bit is initialized to "0" at a reset.
The step trace trap function is used by the emulator. When it is being used by the emulator, it cannot be
used in the user program.
36
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● ILM (Interrupt Level Mask) register
20
19
18
17
16
ILM4
ILM3
ILM2
ILM1
ILM0
[Initial value]
01111B
The ILM register holds the interrupt level mask value to be used for level masking.
An interrupt request to the CPU is accepted only when its interrupt level is higher than the level held in the
ILM register.
The level value ranges from 0 (00000B) for the highest level to 31 (11111B) for the lowest.
The level value which can be set from the program is limited.
When the original value is 16 to 31:
The new value which can be set is 16 to 31. After an instruction which sets a value of 0 to 15 is
executed, a value of (the specified value + 16) is transferred.
When the original value is 0 to 15:
Any value from 0 to 31 can be set.
This register is initialized to 15 (01111B) at a reset.
[Notes on the PS register]
Since some instructions manipulate the PS register earlier, the following exceptions may cause the interrupt
service routine to break or the PS flag to update its display setting when the debugger is being used.
As the device is designed to carry out reprocessing correctly upon returning from such an EIT event in
either case, it performs operations before and after the EIT as specified.
1. The following operations may be performed when the instruction immediately followed by a DIV0U/
DIV0S instruction is (a) accepted by a user interrupt or NMI, (b) single-stepped, or (c) breaks in
response to a data event or emulator menu:
(1) The D0 and D1 flags are updated earlier.
(2) The EIT service routine (user interrupt/NMI or emulator) is executed.
(3) Upon returning from the EIT, the DIV0U/DIV0S instruction is executed and the D0 and D1 flags
are updated to the same values as those in (1) above.
2. The following operations are performed when the ORCCR/STILM/MOV Ri and PS instructions are
executed to enable interrupts when a user interrupt or NMI trigger event has occurred.
(1) The PS register is updated earlier.
(2) The EIT service routine (user interrupt/NMI) is executed.
(3) Upon returning from the EIT, the above instructions are executed and the PS register is updated to
the same value as that in (1) above.
37
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● PC (Program Counter)
31
0
PC
[Initial value]
XXXXXXXXH
[bit31 to bit0]
The program counter contains the address of the instruction currently being executed.
When the PC is updated as an instruction is executed, bit0 is set to "0". Bit0 may be set to "1" only when
an odd-numbered address is specified as the branch destination address. Even in that case, however, bit0 is
invalid and the instruction must be placed at an address that is a multiple of the number 2.
The initial value after a reset is indeterminate.
● TBR (Table Base Register)
31
0
TBR
[Initial value]
000FFC00H
The table base register contains the start address of the vector table used for servicing EIT events.
The initial value after a reset is 000FFC00H.
● RP (Return Pointer)
31
0
RP
[Initial value]
XXXXXXXXH
The return pointer contains the return address of a subroutine.
When the CALL instruction is executed, the value in the PC is transferred to the RP.
When the RETI instruction is executed, the value in the RP is transferred to the PC.
The initial value after a reset is indeterminate.
● SSP (System Stack Pointer)
31
SSP
0
[Initial value]
00000000H
The SSP is a system stack pointer.
It serves as R15 of the general-purpose register when the S-flag contains "0".
The SSP can be explicitly specified. The SSP is also used as the stack pointer that specifies the stack for
saving the PS and PC when an EIT event occurs.
The initial value after a reset is "00000000H".
38
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● USP (User Stack Pointer)
31
0
USP
[Initial value]
XXXXXXXXH
The USP is a user stack pointer.
It serves as R15 of the general-purpose register when the S-flag contains "1".
The USP can be explicitly specified.
The initial value after a reset is indeterminate.
This pointer cannot be used by the RETI instruction.
● Multiply & Divide registers : MDH, MDL
31
0
MDH
MDL
These registers hold the results of a multiplication or division. Each of them is 32 bits long.
The initial value after a reset is indeterminate.
When a multiplication is performed:
The operation result of a multiplication of 32 bits × 32 bits is 64 bits long, which are stored in the
multiply & divide result storage registers as follows:
MDH: Upper 32 bits
MDL: Lower 32 bits
The result of a 16 × 16-bit multiplication is stored as follows:
MDH: Indeterminate
MDL: Result of 32 bits long
When a division is performed:
The dividend is stored in the MDL at the start of the calculation.
When the division is performed by the DIV0S/DIV0U, DIV1, DIV2, DIV3, or DIV4S instruction, the
results are stored in the MDL and MDH as follows:
MDH: Remainder
MDL: Quotient
39
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.4
Data Structure
The MB91260B series uses the following two data ordering methods:
• Bit ordering
• Byte ordering
■ Bit Ordering
The FR family uses the little endian method for bit ordering.
Figure 3.4-1 Bit Ordering
bit
31
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
MSB
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
0
LSB
■ Byte Ordering
The FR family uses the big endian method for byte ordering.
Figure 3.4-2 Byte Ordering
Memory
bit7
40
0
Address n
10101010B
Address (n + 1)
11001100B
Address (n + 2)
11111111B
Address (n + 3)
00010001B
MSB
LSB
bit31
23
15
7
0
10101010B 11001100B 11111111B 00010001B
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.5
Word Alignment
Since instruction and data are accessed in byte units, the addresses to be placed
depend on the instruction length and data width.
■ Program Access
Programs for the MB91260B series must be located at an address that is a multiple of the number 2.
Bit0 in the PC (program counter) is set to "0" when the PC is updated as an instruction is executed. Bit0
may be set to "1" only when an odd-numbered address is specified as the branch destination address. Even in
that case, bit0 is invalid and the instruction must be placed at an address that is a multiple of the number 2.
There is no odd-numbered address exception.
■ Data Access
When accessing data, the FR family forces alignment of the address depending on the access width as
follows:
Word access
: The address is a multiple of the number 4 (with the two LSBs forced to be "00B").
Half word access
: The address is a multiple of the number 2 (with the LSB forced to be "0").
Byte access
:–
When word or halfword access is performed, some of the bits in the effective address obtained by
calculation are forced to be "0". In the addressing mode with @(R13, Ri), for example, the register before
addition (e.g., even with the LSB containing "1") is used for calculation as it is and the lower bits in the
result of addition are masked. The register before calculation is not masked.
[Example] : LD@ (R13, R2) , R0
R13
0 0 0 0 2 2 2 2
H
R2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3
H
+)
Result of addition
Address pin
0 0 0 0 2 2 2 5 H
↓ Lower two bits are forced to be masked.
0 0 0 0 2 2 2 4 H
41
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.6
Memory Map
This section shows the memory map of the MB91260B series.
■ Memory Map
The address space is a 32-bit, linear space.
Figure 3.6-1 shows the memory map.
Figure 3.6-1 Memory Map
0000 0000 H
Byte data
0000 0100 H
Halfword data
0000 0200 H
Word data
0000 0400 H
000F FC00 H
Vector table
initialization area
000F FFFF H
FFFF FFFF H
42
Direct
addressing area
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Figure 3.6-2 MB91F264B, MB91264B's Memory Map
Single-chip mode
0000 0000H
I/O
Direct addressing area
I/O
Refer to I/O map
0000 0400H
0001 0000H
Access disabled
0003 E000H
Built-in RAM 8KB
0004 0000H
Access disabled
000C 0000H
0010 0000H
Built-in ROM
256KB
Access disabled
FFFF FFFFH
Figure 3.6-3 MB91263B's Memory Map
Single-chip mode
0000 0000H
I/O
Direct addressing area
I/O
Refer to I/O map
0000 0400H
0001 0000H
Access disabled
0003 E000H
Built-in RAM 8KB
0004 0000H
Access disabled
000E 0000H
0010 0000H
Built-in ROM
256KB
Access disabled
FFFF FFFFH
43
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Direct Addressing Area
Each of the following areas in the address space is used for input/output. The area allows direct addressing,
where the address of operand can be directly specified in an instruction.
The size of the directly addressable area varies as shown below depending on each data length:
•
Byte data
•
Halfword data
(8 bits) : 000H to 0FFH
(16 bits) : 000H to 1FFH
•
Word data
(32 bits) : 000H to 3FFH
■ Vector Table Initial Area
The area from "000FFC00H" to "000FFFFFH" is an EIT vector table initial area.
The vector table used for servicing EIT events can be located in an arbitrary address by rewriting the TBR.
When the device is initialized by a reset, however, the vector table is relocated to this address.
44
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.7
Branch Instructions
A operation with or without a delay slot can be specified for a branch instruction.
■ Branch Operation with Delay Slot
● Instructions
The instructions listed below perform a branch operation with delay slot:
JMP:D
@Ri
CALL:D label12
CALL:D @Ri
RET:D
BRA:D
label9
BNO:D
label9
BEQ:D
label9
BNE:D
label9
BC:D
label9
BNC:D
label9
BN:D
label9
BP:D
label9
BV:D
label9
BNV:D
label9
BLT:D
label9
BGE:D
label9
BLE:D
label9
BGT:D
label9
BLS:D
label9
BHI:D
label9
● Explanation of operation
In the operation with delay slot, a branch occurs after the instruction immediately following the branch
instruction (called delay slot) is executed, then the instruction at the branch destination is executed. Since
the instruction in the delay slot is executed before the delayed branch itself takes place, the execution speed
is apparently one cycle. When an effective instruction cannot be put in the delay slot, however, the NOP
instruction must be placed instead.
[Example]
;
Instruction listing
ADD
BRA:D
MOV
...
LABEL : ST
R1, R2
LABEL
R2, R3
;
; Branch instruction
; Delay slot:
Executed before branching
R3, @R4 ; Branch target
When a conditional branch instruction with delay slot is processed, the instruction put in the delay slot is
executed even if the branch condition is not satisfied.
When a delayed branch instruction is encountered, some instructions look executed in reverse order.
However, the changed order applies only to the update of the PC; the other operations (including register
updates and references) are executed exactly in the order in which they are coded.
How the delay slot works is precisely described below.
(1) The Ri referred to by the JMP:D @Ri or CALL:D @Ri instruction is not affected even when the
instruction in the delay slot updates the Ri.
[Example]
LDI:32
JMP:D
LDI:8
...
#Label,
@R0
#0,
R0
R0
; Branch to Label
; No effect on branch destination address
45
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
(2) The RP referred to by the RET:D instruction is not affected even when the instruction in the delay slot
updates the RP.
[Example]
RET:D
; Branch to address pointed to by previously set RP
MOV
R8, RP
; No effect on return operation
...
(3) The flag referred to by the Bcc:D rel instruction is not affected by the instruction in the delay slot.
[Example]
ADD
#1,
R0
; Update flag
BC:D
Overflow
; Branch depending on execution result of above instruction
ANDCCR#0
; This flag update is not referred to by above branch instruction
...
(4) When the instruction in the delay slot of the CALL:D instruction refers the RP, the content of the
update made by the CALL:D instruction is read.
[Example]
CALL:D Label
MOV
RP, R0
...
; Update RP and branch
; Transfer RP value resulting from execution of above CALL:D
● Restrictions
(1) Instructions that can be executed in a delay slot
The instructions satisfying the following conditions can be executed in the delay slot:
•
One-cycle instruction
•
Non-branch instruction
•
Instruction not affecting the operation even when the execution order is changed
The "one-cycle instruction" means an instruction marked with "1", "a", "b", "c", or "d" in the "CYCLE"
column (the number of cycles required) in the instruction list in Appendix E.
(2) Step trace trap
A step trace trap does not occur between the execution of a branch instruction with delay slot and the
delay slot.
(3) Interrupt or NMI
No interrupt or NMI is accepted between the execution of a branch instruction with delay slot and the
delay slot.
(4) Undefined instruction exception
If an undefined instruction is put in a delay slot, an undefined instruction exception does not occur. In
this case, the undefined instruction works as the NOP instruction.
46
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Branch Operation without Delay Slot
● Instructions
The instructions listed below perform a branch operation without delay slot:
JMP
@Ri
CALL label12
CALL @Ri
RET
BRA label9
BNO
label9
BEQ label9
BNE label9
BC
label9
BNC
label9
BN
BP
BV
label9
BNV
label9
BLT label9
BGE label9
BLE label9
BGT
label9
BLS
BHI
label9
label9
label9
label9
● Explanation of operation
When a branch operation without delay slot is encountered, instructions are executed exactly in the order in
which they are coded. The instruction that follows is never executed before the branch takes place.
[Example]
;
Instruction listing
ADD
R1, R2
;
BRA
LABEL
; Branch instruction (without delay slot)
MOV
R2, R3
; Not executed
...
LABEL
ST
R3, @R4 ; Branch target
The branch instruction without delay slot requires two execution cycles when it branches control or one
execution cycle otherwise.
Compared to the branch instruction with delay slot with NOP specified, the branch instruction without
delay slot can improve instruction coding efficiency because there is no effective instruction acceptable to
the delay slot.
Select a branch operation with delay slot when an effective instruction can be put in the delay slot.
Otherwise, select an operation without delay slot. This improves both of execution speed and coding
efficiency.
47
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8
EIT (Exception/Interrupt/Trap)
EIT indicates that a program being executed is suspended by an event for the purpose
of executing another program. EIT is a generic term for exception, interrupt, and trap.
■ EIT (Exception, Interrupt, and Trap)
An exception is an event that occurs in relation to the current context. The CPU resumes execution of the
suspended program from the instruction that caused the exception.
An interrupt is an event that occurs independently of the current context. The event is generated by
hardware (event source).
A trap is also an event that occurs in relation to the current context. Some traps are programmed as system
calls. The CPU resumes execution of the suspended program from the instruction immediately following
the instruction that caused the trap.
■ Features
•
Multiple-interrupt support
•
Interrupt level masking function (15 levels available to the user)
•
Trap instruction (INT)
•
Emulator trigger EIT (hardware or software)
■ EIT Sources
EIT sources are as follows:
•
Reset
•
User interrupt (internal resource or external interrupt)
•
NMI (nonmaskable interrupt)
•
Delayed interrupt
•
Undefined instruction exception
•
Trap instruction (INT)
•
Trap instruction (INTE)
•
Step trace trap
•
Coprocessor absence trap
•
Coprocessor error trap
■ Return from EIT
RETI instruction is executed to return from EIT.
48
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8.1
Interrupt Level
Interrupt levels are 0 to 31; they are managed with five bits.
■ Interrupt Levels
Each interrupt level is assigned as follows.
Table 3.8-1 Interrupt Levels
Level
Interrupt source
Binary
Decimal
00000B
0
(System-reserved)
...
...
...
...
...
...
00011B
3
(System-reserved)
00100B
4
INTE instruction
{Step
trace trap
00101B
5
(System-reserved)
...
...
...
...
...
...
01110B
14
(System-reserved)
01111B
15
NMI (for user)
10000B
16
Interrupt
10001B
17
Interrupt
...
...
...
...
...
...
11110B
30
Interrupt
11111B
31
–
Note
When the original ILM value is 16 to 31, the
ILM register cannot be set to a value in that
range by a program.
No user interrupt is allowed with the ILM
register set.
No interrupt is allowed with the ICR set.
Interrupt levels 16 to 31 can be operated.
Interrupt levels have no effect on the undefined instruction exception, coprocessor absence trap,
coprocessor error trap, or INT instruction. Neither they change the ILM value.
49
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ I-flag
This flag enables or disables interrupts. It is provided as CCR bit 4 in the PS register.
Value
Description
0
Disables interrupts.
The flag is cleared to "0" when the INT instruction is executed.
(Note that the value saved to the stack is the one existing before the flag is cleared.)
1
Enables interrupts.
The masking of interrupt requests is controlled by the level value held in the ILM register.
■ ILM Register
The interrupt level mask (ILM) register is the PS register (bit20 to bit16) that holds an interrupt level mask
value.
An interrupt request to the CPU is accepted only when its interrupt level is higher than the level indicated
in the ILM register.
The highest level value is 0 (00000B); the lowest is 31 (11111B).
The level value which can be set in the program is limited. When the original value is 16 to 31, the new
value which can be set is 16 to 31. After an instruction which sets a value of 0 to 15 is executed, a value of
(the specified value + 16) is transferred.
When the original value is 0 to 15, any value from 0 to 31 can be set. The STILM instruction is used to set
this register.
■ Interrupt/NMI Level Masking
If an NMI or interrupt request occurs, the interrupt level of the interrupt source (see Table 3.8-1) is
compared with the level mask value held in the ILM register. The request is masked and rejected when the
following condition is satisfied:
Interrupt level of the source ≥ Level mask value
50
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8.2
ICR (Interrupt Control Register)
The interrupt control register (ICR) is provided in the interrupt controller to set a level
for each interrupt request. This register is prepared for each interrupt request input.
The register is mapped in the I/O space and accessed from the CPU through a bus.
■ ICR Bit Configuration
ICR00 to ICR47
Address
000440H to 00046FH
7
–
–
6
–
–
5
–
–
4
ICR4
R
3
ICR3
R/W
2
ICR2
R/W
1
ICR1
R/W
0
ICR0
R/W
Initial value
---11111B
[R/W, R]
[bit4] ICR4
ICR4 always contains "1".
[bit3 to bit0] ICR3 to ICR0
These are the lower four bits indicating the interrupt level of the corresponding interrupt source.
The ICR, consisting of these bits and bit4, can set a value between 16 and 31.
These bits can be read and written.
■ ICR Mapping
Table 3.8-2 shows the relationship between the interrupt source, interrupt control register, and interrupt
vector.
See CHAPTER 5 "INTERRUPT CONTROLLER" for detail of the interrupt.
Table 3.8-2 Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Control Registers, and Interrupt Vectors
Corresponding interrupt vector
Interrupt
source
Interrupt control register
Number
Hex
Dec
Address
IRQ00
ICR00
00000440H
10H
16
TBR + 3BCH
IRQ01
ICR01
00000441H
11H
17
TBR + 3B8H
IRQ02
ICR02
00000442H
12H
18
TBR + 3B4H
...
...
IRQ45
...
...
ICR45
...
...
0000046DH
...
...
3DH
...
...
61
...
...
TBR + 308H
IRQ46
ICR46
0000046EH
3EH
62
TBR + 304H
IRQ47
ICR47
0000046FH
3FH
63
TBR + 300H
TBR initial value: "000FFC00H"
51
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8.3
SSP (System Stack Pointer)
The system stack pointer (SSP) serves as the pointer that points to the stack for saving
data to upon receipt of an EIT or for restoring data from upon recovery from the EIT.
The pointer value is decremented by "8" when an EIT is serviced and incremented by "8" when the RETI
instruction is executed to return from the EIT.
31
0
SSP
[Initial value]
00000000H
The SSP serves also as the general-purpose register R15 when the S-flag in the CCR (condition code
register) contains "0".
The initial value after a reset is "00000000H".
■ Interrupt Stack
The interrupt stack is the area pointed to by the SSP, to/from which the PC and PS values are saved/
restored. After an interrupt occurs, the PC and PS values are stored at the address held in the SSP and at
the address of (SSP + 4), respectively.
Figure 3.8-1 Interrupt Stack
Example:
SSP
[Before interrupt]
80000000H
[After interrupt]
SSP
7FFFFFF8H
Memory
80000000 H
52
80000000 H
7FFFFFFC H
7FFFFFFC H
7FFFFFF8 H
7FFFFFF8 H
PS
PC
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8.4
TBR (Table Base Register)
The table base register (TBR) indicates the start address of the EIT vector table.
■ TBR (Table Base Register)
31
0
TBR
[Initial value]
000FFC00H
The vector address is obtained by adding the offset value determined for the EIT source and the TBR value.
The initial value after a reset is "000FFC00H".
■ EIT Vector Table
The EIT vector area is 1 Kbyte long, starting from the address shown in the TBR.
The area size per vector is 4 bytes, and the relationship between vector number and vector address is
expressed as follows:
vctadr
= TBR + vctofs
= TBR + (3FCH - 4 × vct)
vctadr:
Vector address
vctofs:
Vector offset
vct:
Vector number
The lower 2 bits of the addition result are always handled as "00B".
The area from "000FFC00H" to "000FFFFFH" is the initial area for the vector table upon a reset.
Special functions are assigned to some of the vectors.
Table 3.8-3 shows the vector table on the architecture.
Table 3.8-3 Vector Table (1 / 3)
Interrupt source
Reset*
Mode vector*
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
Coprocessor absence trap
Coprocessor error trap
INTE instruction
System-reserved
System-reserved
Step trace trap
NMI request (tool)
Undefined instruction exception
Interrupt No.
Dec
Hex
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
Interrupt level
Offset
TBR default address
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3FCH
3F8H
3F4H
3F0H
3ECH
3E8H
3E4H
3E0H
3DCH
3D8H
3D4H
3D0H
3CCH
3C8H
3C4H
000FFFFCH
000FFFF8H
000FFFF4H
000FFFF0H
000FFFECH
000FFFE8H
000FFFE4H
000FFFE0H
000FFFDCH
000FFFD8H
000FFFD4H
000FFFD0H
000FFFCCH
000FFFC8H
000FFFC4H
53
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Table 3.8-3 Vector Table (2 / 3)
Interrupt source
NMI request
External interrupt 0
External interrupt 1
External interrupt 2
External interrupt 3
External interrupt 4
External interrupt 5
External interrupt 6
External interrupt 7
Reload timer 0
Reload timer 1
Reload timer 2
UART0 (Reception)
UART0 (Transmission)
DTTI
DMAC0 (Termination, Error)
DMAC1 (Termination, Error)
DMAC2/3/4 (Termination, Error)
UART1 (Reception complete)
UART1 (Transmission complete)
UART2 (Reception complete)
UART2 (Transmission complete)
Multiply-accumulate
PPG0
PPG1
PPG2/3
PPG4/5/6/7
PPG8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15
External interrupt 8/9
Waveform 0 (Underflow)
Waveform 1 (Underflow)
Waveform 2 (Underflow)
Timebase timer overflow
Free-running timer (Compare clear)
Free-running timer (Zero detection)
A/D0
A/D1
A/D2
54
Interrupt No.
Dec
Hex
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
Interrupt level
Offset
TBR default address
Fixed at 15(FH)
3C0H
3BCH
3B8H
3B4H
3B0H
3ACH
3A8H
3A4H
3A0H
39CH
398H
394H
390H
38CH
388H
384H
380H
37CH
378H
374H
370H
36CH
368H
364H
360H
35CH
358H
354H
350H
34CH
348H
344H
340H
33CH
338H
334H
330H
32CH
000FFFC0H
000FFFBCH
000FFFB8H
000FFFB4H
000FFFB0H
000FFFACH
000FFFA8H
000FFFA4H
000FFFA0H
000FFF9CH
000FFF98H
000FFF94H
000FFF90H
000FFF8CH
000FFF88H
000FFF84H
000FFF80H
000FFF7CH
000FFF78H
000FFF74H
000FFF70H
000FFF6CH
000FFF68H
000FFF64H
000FFF60H
000FFF5CH
000FFF58H
000FFF54H
000FFF50H
000FFF4CH
000FFF48H
000FFF44H
000FFF40H
000FFF3CH
000FFF38H
000FFF34H
000FFF30H
000FFF2CH
ICR00
ICR01
ICR02
ICR03
ICR04
ICR05
ICR06
ICR07
ICR08
ICR09
ICR10
ICR11
ICR12
ICR13
ICR14
ICR15
ICR16
ICR17
ICR18
ICR19
ICR20
ICR21
ICR22
ICR23
ICR24
ICR25
ICR26
ICR27
ICR28
ICR29
ICR30
ICR31
ICR32
ICR33
ICR34
ICR35
ICR36
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Table 3.8-3 Vector Table (3 / 3)
Interrupt source
PWC0 (Measurement complete)
PWC1 (Measurement complete)
PWC0 (Overflow)
PWC1 (Overflow)
ICU 0 (Capture)
ICU 1 (Capture)
ICU 2/3 (Capture)
OCU0/1 (Match)
OCU2/3 (Match)
OCU4/5 (Match)
Delayed interrupt source bit
System-reserved (Used by REALOS)
System-reserved (Used by REALOS)
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
System-reserved
Used by INT instruction
Interrupt No.
Dec
Hex
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
to
255
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
to
FF
Interrupt level
Offset
TBR default address
ICR37
ICR38
ICR39
ICR40
ICR41
ICR42
ICR43
ICR44
ICR45
ICR46
ICR47
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
328H
324H
320H
31CH
318H
314H
310H
30CH
308H
304H
300H
2FCH
2F8H
2F4H
2F0H
2ECH
2E8H
2E4H
2E0H
2DCH
2D8H
2D4H
2D0H
2CCH
2C8H
2C4H
2C0H
2BCH
to
000H
000FFF28H
000FFF24H
000FFF20H
000FFF1CH
000FFF18H
000FFF14H
000FFF10H
000FFF0CH
000FFF08H
000FFF04H
000FFF00H
000FFEFCH
000FFEF8H
000FFEF4H
000FFEF0H
000FFEECH
000FFEE8H
000FFEE4H
000FFEE0H
000FFEDCH
000FFED8H
000FFED4H
000FFED0H
000FFECCH
000FFEC8H
000FFEC4H
000FFEC0H
000FFEBCH
to
000FFC00H
–
*: Even when the TBR value is changed, the reset vector and mode vector are always fixed at addresses "000FFFFCH" and
"000FFFF8H", respectively.
55
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8.5
Multi-EIT Servicing
If two or more EIT sources occur simultaneously, the CPU selects and receives
one EIT source, executes the EIT sequence, then detects another EIT source,
repeatedly.
If there is no more EIT source detected to be received, the CPU executes the
instruction of the handler for the EIT source received last.
When two or more EIT sources occur simultaneously, therefore, the execution
order of their respective handlers is determined by the following two elements:
• Reception priority of EIT source
• Masking of other sources after reception
■ Reception Priority of EIT Source
The reception priority of EIT source determines the order in which EIT sources are selected for
executing the EIT sequence where the PS and PC values are saved, the PC is updated, and
other sources are masked (as required).
The handlers of EIT sources received earlier are not always executed earlier on a first-in firstout basis.
Table 3.8-4 lists the reception priorities of EIT sources along with the masking levels of other
sources.
Table 3.8-4 Reception Priorities of EIT Sources and the Masking of Other Sources
Reception priority
Source
Masking of other sources
1
Reset
Discard other sources
2
Undefined instruction exception
Cancel
3
INTE instruction
ILM=4
Discard other sources
4
INT instruction
I-flag = 0
5
Coprocessor absence trap
Coprocessor error trap
6
User interrupt
ILM = Level of received source
7
NMI (for user)
ILM=15
8
NMI (for emulator)
ILM=4
9
Step trace trap
ILM=4
–
Considering the masking of other sources after an EIT source is received, the handlers for the
simultaneously generated EIT sources are executed in the order shown in Table 3.8-5.
56
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Table 3.8-5 EIT Handler Execution Order
Handler execution order
Source
1
Reset*
2
Undefined instruction exception
3
INTE instruction*
4
Step trace trap
5
NMI (for user)
6
INT instruction
7
User interrupt
8
Coprocessor absence trap, Coprocessor error trap
*: Other sources are discarded.
Example:
Figure 3.8-2 Multi-EIT Servicing
Main routine
NMI handler
INT instruction
handler
Priority
(High) NMI generated
(Low) INT instruction
executed
① Executed first
② Executed next
57
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.8.6
Operation
This section explains the operation of EIT.
The "PC" (program counter) as the source of transfer hereafter indicates the address of
an instruction where each EIT source has been detected. The "next instruction's
address" indicates as follows depending on the EIT-detected instruction:
• LDI: 32 → PC value + 6
• LDI: 20, COPOP, COPLD, COPST, COPSV → PC value + 4
• Else → PC value + 2
Parentheses ( ) in [Processing] below enclose the address specified by the relevant
register.
■ Operation of User Interrupt/NMI
When a user interrupt or user NMI interrupt request is issued, the acceptance of the request is determined in
the following order:
[Determining the acceptance of interrupt request]
1. The interrupt levels of requests issued simultaneously are compared and the request of the highest level
(smallest value) is selected.
The level of a maskable interrupt is compared with the value held in the corresponding ICR and that of
an NMI is compared with a predetermined constant.
2. If two or more interrupt requests of the same level are issued, the interrupt request of the smallest
interrupt number is selected.
3. The selected interrupt request is masked and rejected if its interrupt level is equal to or greater than the
level mask value.
When the interrupt level is smaller than the level mask value, go to step 4. below.
4. If the selected interrupt request is maskable, the interrupt request is masked and rejected when the I-flag
is "0". When the I-flag is "1", go to step step 5. below.
If the selected interrupt request is an NMI, go to step step 5. below regardless of the value in the I-flag.
5. When the above conditions are satisfied, the interrupt request is accepted at a break of instruction
processing.
If a user interrupt/NMI request is received upon detection of an EIT request, the CPU performs the
following steps using the interrupt number corresponding to the accepted interrupt request.
[Processing]
1. SSP-4
→ SSP
2. PS
→ (SSP)
3. SSP-4
→ SSP
4. Next instruction's address
→ (SSP)
5. Interrupt level of accepted request → ILM
6. "0"
→ S-flag
7. (TBR + vector offset of accepted interrupt request) → PC
The CPU tries to detect a new EIT before executing the first instruction in the handler upon completion of
the interrupt sequence. If an acceptable EIT has occurred, the CPU enters the EIT servicing sequence.
58
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Processing of INT Instruction
INT #u8
This instruction causes a branch to the interrupt handler of the vector indicated by u8.
[Processing]
1. SSP - 4
→ SSP
2. PS
→ (SSP)
3. SSP - 4
→ SSP
4. PC + 2
→ (SSP)
5. "0"
→ I-flag
6. "0"
→ S-flag
7. (TBR + 3FCΗ - 4 × u8)
→ PC
■ Processing of INTE Instruction
INTE
This instruction causes a branch to the interrupt handler of the vector with vector No. #9.
[Processing]
1. SSP - 4
→ SSP
2. PS
→ (SSP)
3. SSP - 4
→ SSP
4. PC + 2
→ (SSP)
5. "00100B"
6. "0"
→ ILM
7. (TBR + 3D8Η)
→ PC
→ S-flag
Do not use an INTE instruction in another INTE instruction or in a step trace trap service routine. The
INTE instruction does not generate an EIT during single stepping.
■ Processing of Step Trace Trap
If the T-flag in the SCR in the PS register is set to enable the step trace function, a trap occurs at the
execution of every instruction, causing a break.
[Step trace trap detection conditions]
• T-flag = 1
• The instruction is not a delayed branch instruction.
• During execution other than the INTE instruction and step trace trap service routine.
• If the above conditions are satisfied, a break is inserted between the executions of instructions.
[Processing]
1. SSP - 4
→ SSP
2. PS
→ (SSP)
3. SSP - 4
→ SSP
4. Next instruction's address → (SSP)
59
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
→ ILM
5. "00100B"
6. "0"
→ S-flag
7. (TBR + 3CCH)
→ PC
If the T-flag is set to enable the step trace trap function, user NMIs and user interrupts are disabled. In
addition, the INTE instruction no longer generates an EIT.
A trap is generated at the execution of the instruction immediately after setting the T-flag.
■ Processing of Undefined Instruction Exception
If an instruction is found undefined during instruction decoding, an undefined instruction exception occurs.
[Undefined instruction exception detection conditions]
• Instruction found undefined during instruction decoding
• Placed outside the delay slot (not immediately after the delayed branch instruction)
• If the above conditions are satisfied, an undefined instruction exception occurs, causing a break.
[Processing]
1. SSP - 4
→ SSP
2. PS
→ (SSP)
3. SSP - 4
→ SSP
4. PC
→ (SSP)
5. "0"
→ S-flag
6. (TBR + 3C4H)
→ PC
The PC saves the address of the instruction where the undefined instruction exception was detected.
■ Coprocessor Absence Trap
A coprocessor absence trap occurs if a coprocessor instruction which attempts to use an absent coprocessor
is executed.
[Processing]
1. SSP - 4
→ SSP
2. PS
→ (SSP)
3. SSP - 4
→ SSP
4. Next instruction's address → (SSP)
60
5. "0"
→ S-flag
6. (TBR + 3E0H)
→ PC
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Coprocessor Error Trap
A coprocessor error trap occurs if an error occurs when a coprocessor is being used and if a coprocessor
instruction which attempts to operate the coprocessor is executed then.
[Processing]
1. SSP - 4
→ SSP
2. PS
→ (SSP)
3. SSP - 4
→ SSP
4. Next instruction's address → (SSP)
5. "0"
→ S-flag
6. (TBR + 3DCH)
→ PC
■ Processing of RETI Instruction
The RETI instruction returns control from an EIT service routine.
[Processing]
1. (R15)
→ PC
2. R15 + 4
→ R15
3. (R15)
→ PS
4. R15 + 4
→ R15
The RETI instruction must be executed with the S-flag containing "0".
Note:
The delay slot following a branch instruction has a restriction on EITs.
See Section 3.7 "Branch Instructions".
61
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.9
Operation Modes
Operation modes of the MB91260B series are divided into bus modes and access
modes.
However, only single chip mode is supported.
■ Operation Modes
Bus modes
Single chip
● Bus mode
Bus mode controls the operations of internal ROM and the external access functions according to the mode
pins (MD2 to MD0).
Note:
The MB91260B series does not support the external bus mode.
■ Bus Modes
See Section 3.6 "Memory Map".
● Single-chip mode
This mode enables access to internal I/O, internal RAM, and internal ROM while disabling access to any
other area. External pins serve as peripheral resources or general-purpose ports but not as bus pins.
■ Mode Setting
The FR family uses the mode pins (MD2 to MD0) and the mode data to set the operation mode.
● Mode pins
Three mode pins MD2, MD1, and MD0 are used to specify a mode vector and reset vector fetch.
The mode pins must not be set to any combination of values other than listed in the table below:
Mode pins
MD2 MD1 MD0
Mode name
Reset vector
access area
000B
Internal ROM mode vector
Internal
Note:
MD2, MD1, MD0: The settings without 000B are prohibited.
62
Remarks
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● Mode data
The data written to the internal mode register (MODR) using a mode vector fetch (see "■Reset Sequence"
in "3.10 Reset (Device Initialization)") is called mode data.
After the mode register is set, the device operates in the operation mode corresponding to the register
setting.
Although the mode register is set by all reset sources, user programs cannot write data to the register.
<Mode data description>
31
20
29
28
27
26
25
24
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Operation mode setting bits
[bit31 to bit24] Reserved bits
Be sure to set these bits to "00000111B". Setting them to any other value may result in an unpredictable
operation.
Note:
Mode data to be set at a mode vector must be placed as byte data at "0x000FFFF8H".
As the MB91260B series uses the big endian method for byte ordering, place the mode data in the
high-order byte from bit31 to bit24 as illustrated below.
31
24 23
16 15
8 7
0
Wrong
0x000FFFF8H
XXXXXXXXB
XXXXXXXXB
XXXXXXXXB
Mode
Right
0x000FFFF8H
Mode
XXXXXXXXB
XXXXXXXXB
XXXXXXXXB
0x000FFFFCH
Reset Vector
63
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.10
Reset (Device Initialization)
This section describes the reset operation that is initialization of the MB91260B series.
When a reset source occurs, the device stops all of the program and hardware
operations and initializes the device status. This initialized state is called the reset
state.
When the reset source is eliminated, the device restarts program and hardware
operations from the initial state. A series of steps taken by the device from the reset
state to the beginning of the restart is called the reset sequence.
■ Reset Levels
The MB91260B series resets itself at either of the two levels which are different in the cause of reset and
the effect of initialization. Each reset level is described below.
● Setting initialization reset (INIT)
The setting initialization reset (INIT) is the highest level of reset that initializes all settings.
The major settings initialized by the setting initialization reset (INIT) are listed below.
•
Device operation mode (bus mode and external bus width settings)
•
All of the settings concerning the internal clock (clock source selection, PLL control, and divide ratio
settings)
•
All of the settings for the external bus CS0 area
•
All of the settings concerning other pin states
•
All of the sections initialized by the operation initialization reset (RST)
For details on each setting item, see the description of the relevant function.
Note that the setting initialization reset (INIT) must always be performed via the INIT pin immediately
after the power is turned on.
● Operation initialization reset (RST)
The operation initialization reset (RST) is the normal level of reset that initializes program operation.
The setting initialization reset (INIT) involves the operation initialization reset (RST).
The major settings initialized by the operation initialization reset (RST) are listed below.
•
Program operation
•
CPU and internal bus
•
Register settings for peripheral circuits
•
I/O port settings
•
Device operation mode (bus mode and external bus width settings)
For details on each setting item, see the description of the relevant function.
64
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Reset Sources
Reset sources which occurred in the past can be identified by reading the RSRR (reset source register).
For information on the registers and flags mentioned below, see "3.11.5 Block Diagram of the Clock
Generation Control Unit" and "3.11.6 Registers in the Clock Generation Control Unit".
The following describes each source of a reset and the generated reset level.
● Input to the INIT pin (setting initialization reset pin)
The external INIT pin serves as the setting initialization reset pin.
The setting initialization reset (INIT) request remains issued while the INIT pin maintains low-level input.
High-level input to the INIT pin cancels the INIT request.
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) occurs at the request of this pin, the INIT bit (bit15) in the RSRR
(reset source register) is set.
The setting initialization reset (INIT) request via the INIT pin is the highest level of all reset sources,
overriding any other input, operation, or state.
Note that the setting initialization reset (INIT) must always be performed via the INIT pin immediately
after the power is turned on. Immediately after turning it on, also, keep the "L" level input to the INIT pin
for the stabilization wait time required for the oscillator circuit so that the oscillator circuit stabilizes its
oscillation within that time. (For INIT via the INIT pin, the oscillation stabilization wait time setting is
initialized to the minimum value.)
: "L" level input to the external INIT pin
•
Reset source
•
Cancel source : "H" level input to the external INIT pin
•
Reset level
•
Indication flag : bit15 (INIT bit)
: Setting initialization reset (INIT)
● Writing to the STCR SRST bit (Software reset)
Writing "0" to the SRST bit (bit4) in the STCR (standby control register) generates a software reset request.
The software reset request is an operation initialization reset (RST) request.
When the request is accepted and an operation initialization reset (RST) is generated, the software reset
request is canceled.
When an operation initialization reset (RST) is generated by a software reset request, the SRST bit (bit11)
in the RSRR (reset source register) is set.
When the SYNCR bit (bit9) in the TBCR (timebase counter control register) has been set (synchronous
reset mode), the operation initialization reset (RST) owing to a software reset request occurs only after
every bus access is terminated.
Depending on the service states of the buses, therefore, it may take time before the operation initialization
reset (RST) can be generated.
•
Reset source
: Writing "0" to the SRST bit (bit4) in the STCR (standby control register)
•
Cancel source : Occurrence of an operation initialization reset (RST)
•
Reset level
•
Indication flag : bit11 (SRST bit)
: Operation initialization reset (RST)
65
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● Watchdog reset
When data is written to the RSRR (watchdog timer control register), the watchdog timer is activated. A
watchdog reset request occurs unless A5H/5AH writing to the CTBR (timebase counter clear register) is
performed within the period set by the WT1 and WT0 bits (bit9 and bit8) in the RSRR.
The watchdog reset request is a setting initialization reset (INIT) request. When the request is accepted and
a setting initialization reset (INIT) or operation initialization reset (RST) is generated, the watchdog reset
request is canceled.
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) is generated by a watchdog reset request, the WDOG bit (bit13) in
the RSRR (reset source register) is set.
Note that the oscillation stabilization wait time setting is not initialized when a setting initialization reset
(INIT) is generated by a watchdog reset request. Note also that the oscillation stabilization wait time is not
taken unless main oscillation is stopped during a main run or sub-run.
•
Reset source
: Watchdog timer time-out
•
Cancel source : Occurrence of a setting initialization reset (INIT) or operation initialization reset (RST)
•
Reset level
•
Indication flag : bit13 (WDOG bit)
: Setting initialization reset (INIT)
■ Reset Sequence
When a reset source is eliminated, the device starts executing the reset sequence.
The steps performed in the reset sequence vary with the reset level.
The following describes the steps in the reset sequence for each reset level.
● Reset sequence for setting initialization reset (INIT)
When the setting initialization reset (INIT) request is cleared, the device performs the following steps
sequentially.
Note, however, that the device does not take the oscillation stabilization wait time in step (2) for a
watchdog reset when main oscillation is not stopped during a main run or sub-run.
(1) Cancels the setting initialization reset (INIT) and enters the oscillation stabilization wait state.
(2) Maintains the operation initialization reset (RST) state and the internal clock suspended for the
oscillation stabilization wait time (set by the OS1 and OS0 bits, or bit3 and bit2 in the STCR).
(3) Enters the operation initialization reset (RST) state and starts internal clock operation.
(4) Cancels the operation initialization reset (RST) and enters to the normal operating state.
(5) Reads a mode vector from address "000FFFF8H".
(6) Writes the mode vector to the MODR (mode register).
(7) Reads a reset vector from address "000FFFFCH".
(8) Writes the reset vector to the PC (program counter).
(9) Starts program operation from the address shown in the PC (program counter).
66
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● Reset sequence for operation initialization reset (RST)
This reset is generated by a software reset.
When the operation initialization reset (RST) request is cleared, the device performs the following steps
sequentially.
(1) Cancels the operation initialization reset (RST) and enters to the normal operating state.
(2) Reads a mode vector from address "000FFFF8H".
(3) Writes the mode vector to the MODR (mode register).
(4) Reads a reset vector from address "000FFFFCH".
(5) Writes the reset vector to the PC (program counter).
(6) Starts program operation from the address shown in the PC (program counter).
■ Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
Upon returning from a state in which the device's source oscillation has been (seemingly) suspended, the
device enters the oscillation stabilization wait state automatically. This feature prevents the device from
using the oscillator output not yet stable after the start of oscillation.
During the oscillation stabilization wait time, the supply of clock signals to the internal and external
resources is stopped while only the internal timebase counter operates, waiting until the oscillation
stabilization wait time set in the STCR (standby control register) has passed.
The transition to the oscillation stabilization wait state is detailed below.
● Sources of transition to oscillation stabilization wait state
The transition to the oscillation stabilization wait state is caused as follows:
(1) Upon cancellation of a setting initialization reset (INIT)
Immediately after a setting initialization reset (INIT) is canceled by the sources, the device enters the
oscillation stabilization wait state.
When the oscillation stabilization wait time has passed, the device then enters the operation initialization
reset (RST) state.
Note that, after initialization via the INIT pin, the oscillation stabilization wait time is set to the minimum
value and thus the device does not wait for oscillation to become stable. Keep the oscillation stabilization
wait time using the input width of the INIT pin.
(2) Upon returning from the stop mode
Immediately after being released from the stop mode, the device enters the oscillation stabilization wait
state. If the device is released from it in response to a setting initialization reset (INIT) request, however,
the device enters the setting initialization reset (INIT) state instead. The device then enters the oscillation
stabilization wait state after the setting initialization reset (INIT) is canceled.
When the oscillation stabilization wait time has passed, the device then enters the state corresponding to the
source that canceled the stop mode:
•
When returning from stop mode in response to an effective external interrupt request input (including
an NMI)
→ The device enters to the normal operating state.
•
When returning from stop mode in response to a setting initialization reset (INIT) request
→ The device enters the setting initialization reset (INIT) state.
(3) Upon returning from an abnormal state with the PLL selected
67
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
If any PLL control error* occurs when the PLL has been serving as the source clock, the device enters the
oscillation stabilization wait state automatically to ensure the PLL lock time.
When the oscillation stabilization wait time has passed, the device then enters to the normal operating state.
*: Examples are an attempt to change the multiplier (multiplication factor) while the PLL is being used
and a corruption of the PLL operation enable bit.
● Selecting the oscillation stabilization wait time
The oscillation stabilization wait time is counted by the internal timebase counter.
When an oscillation stabilization wait source occurs and the device enters the oscillation stabilization wait
state, the internal timebase counter is initialized and starts measurement of the oscillation stabilization wait
time.
The oscillation stabilization wait time setting can be selected from among four options using the OS1 and
OS0 bits (bit3 and bit2) in the STCR (standby control register).
Once selected, the oscillation stabilization wait time setting is not initialized unless the setting initialization
reset (INIT) via the external INIT pin occurs. Even when a setting initialization reset (INIT) by any other
source or an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs, the oscillation stabilization wait time set before the
occurrence of such a reset remains in effect.
The following four options are available as the oscillation stabilization wait time settings for their specific
cases:
•
OS1, OS0 = 00B :No oscillation stabilization wait time
(The PLL oscillator stops operation with the main oscillation left working in stop
mode.)
Note:
For returning from the STOP mode with OSCD1 = 0 when the main PLL clock is being used as the
clock source, be sure to set the OS1 and OS0 bits in the STCR to a value other than 00B to ensure
the lock wait time for the main PLL.
•
OS1, OS0 = 01B : PLL lock wait time
(The oscillator does not stop operation with the external clock input or in stop
mode.)
•
OS1, OS0 = 10B : Oscillation stabilization wait time (Intermediate)
(A quickly stabilizing type of oscillator is being used, such as a ceramic resonator.)
•
OS1, OS0 = 11B : Oscillation stabilization wait time (Long)
(A general crystal oscillator is being used.)
Note that the setting initialization reset (INIT) via the INIT pin must always be performed immediately
after the power is turned on.
In the conditions listed below, also, keep the low-level input to the INIT pin for the oscillation stabilization
wait time required for the oscillator circuit so that the oscillator circuit stabilizes its oscillation within that
time. (For INIT via the INIT pin, the oscillation stabilization wait time setting is initialized to the
minimum value.)
• Immediately after the power is turned on
• In STOP mode with oscillation off
• When main oscillation is off with the sub-clock selected as the clock source
For stable oscillation, therefore, keep the INIT pin input at "L" level for the main clock oscillation
stabilization wait time.
68
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Reset Operation Modes
The operation initialization reset (RST) has two modes: normal (asynchronous) reset and synchronous reset
modes. Either can be selected with the SYNCR bit (bit9) in the TBCR (timebase counter control register).
The reset mode setting is initialized only at a setting initialization reset (INIT).
The setting initialization reset (INIT) is always performed as an asynchronous reset.
The operation in each reset mode is detailed below.
● Normal reset operation
The normal reset operation means the operation of prompt transition to the operation initialization reset
(RST) state as soon as an operation initialization reset (RST) request is issued.
On receipt of a reset (RST) request in the normal reset mode, the device enters the reset (RST) state
promptly regardless of the operation status of internal bus access.
This mode does not guarantee the result of the bus access being performed at the transition to each state.
The mode can however accept the operation initialization reset (RST) request without fail.
The normal reset mode is selected when the SYNCR bit (bit9) in the TBCR (timebase counter control
register) contains "0".
The initial value immediately after a setting initialization reset (INIT) occurs selects the normal reset mode.
● Synchronous reset operation
The synchronous reset operation means the operation of transition to the operation initialization reset (RST)
state after all bus accesses stop when an operation initialization reset (RST) request is issued.
In the synchronous mode, even though a reset (RST) request is received, the device does not enter the reset
(RST) state while any internal bus access is being performed.
When the above request is received, a sleep request is issued to the internal buses. When each internal bus
terminates operation to enter the sleep state, the device enters the operation initialization reset (RST) state.
Since all bus accesses stop before the device enters each state in this mode, their results are guaranteed. If
any bus access does not stop for some reason, however, the device cannot accept the reset request in that
period of time. (Even in this case, the setting initialization reset (INIT) takes effect immediately.)
Bus access won't terminate in the following cases.
•
When RDY (ready request) has been input to the external extended bus interface, enabling the bus wait
state.
The initial value immediately after a setting initialization reset (INIT) occurs returns the device to the
normal reset mode.
Note:
The DMA controller does not delay the transition to each state as it stops transfer on receipt of each
request.
The synchronous reset mode is selected when the SYNCR bit (bit9) in the TBCR (timebase counter
control register) contains "1".
69
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11
Clock Generation Control
The generation and control of each type of clock signal are described below.
The internal operation clock signals for the MB91260B series are generated as follows:
• Base clock signal:
A base clock signal is generated by frequency-halving the
source clock signal or PLL oscillation.
• Internal clock signals: Operation clock signals to be supplied to different parts are
generated by frequency-dividing the base clock.
For information on the registers and flags mentioned below, see "3.11.5 Block Diagram
of the Clock Generation Control Unit" and "3.11.6 Registers in the Clock Generation
Control Unit".
■ Selecting the Source Clock Signal
The source clock signal is selected as follows.
The oscillating signal generated by the internal oscillator circuit with an oscillator connected to the external
oscillation pins X0 and X1 is used as the source clock signal.
The MB91260B series itself is the source of all clock signals available, including the external bus clock
signal.
The main clock signal can be selected arbitrarily during operation between the external oscillation pins and
internal oscillator circuit.
• Main clock signal: Generated from the X0/X1 pin input to be used as a high-speed clock signal.
The internal base clock signal to be generated is selected from among the following source clock signals:
• Generated by frequency-halving the main clock signal
• Generated by multiplying the main clock signal using a PLL
φ is the base clock that is generated from the source clock divided by two or by using the PLL oscillation.
Therefore, the system base clock is a clock generated in the above-mentioned internal base clock
generation.
The source clock signal is selected by setting the CLKR (clock source control register).
70
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.1
PLL Control
The PLL oscillator circuit for the main clock can be controlled to enable/disable its
operation (oscillation) and to set the multiplier (multiplication factor).
The CLKR (clock source control register) is used to control the PLL oscillator circuit for
both items.
■ Enabling/disabling PLL Operation
The PLL1EN bit (bit10) in the CLKR (clock source control register) is used to enable or disable the
oscillation of the main PLL.
After a setting initialization reset (INIT) occurs, the PLL1EN bit is then initialized to "0", causing the main
PLL to stop oscillation. The main PLL output cannot be selected as the source clock signal while the main
PLL has its oscillation stopped.
When the device starts program operation, set the multiplier of the main PLL to be used as the clock
source, enable the PLL for oscillation, then switch the source clock after the PLL lock wait time has passed.
For this PLL lock wait time, it is recommended to use a timebase timer interrupt.
When the main PLL output has been selected as the source clock, the PLL cannot stop operation. An
attempt to write to the register is ignored. To stop the PLL, for example, before entering the stop mode,
select the frequency-halved main clock signal as the source clock signal before stopping the PLL.
If the OSCD1 bit (bit0) in the STCR (standby control register) has been set to stop oscillation during the
stop mode, the PLL stops it automatically when the device enters the stop mode, eliminating the need for
setting the stop of oscillation. When the device returns from the stop mode, the PLL restarts oscillation
automatically. If the PLL has been set to stop oscillation during the stop mode without stopping main
oscillation, the main oscillation does not stop automatically. (For returning from the stop mode then, be
sure to keep the PLL lock wait time.) In this case, stop PLL oscillation before entering the stop mode as
required.
■ PLL Multiplier
The multiplier (multiplication factor) of the main PLL is set by using the PLL1S2, PLL1S1, and PLL1S0
bits (bit14 to bit12) in the CLKR (clock source control register).
After a setting initialization reset (INIT) occurs, all of these bits are then initialized to "0".
● Setting of PLL multiplier
To change the PLL multiplier setting from the initial value, start program operation and set the new value
either before or at the same time as enabling the PLL for oscillation. After changing the multiplier, switch
the source clock after the lock wait time has passed. For this PLL lock wait time, it is recommended to use
a timebase timer interrupt.
Before changing the PLL multiplier setting during operation, switch the source clock to any resource other
than the PLL. After changing the multiplier, switch the source clock after the lock wait time has passed in
the same way as above.
The PLL multiplier setting can be changed while the PLL is being used. In this case, however, the device
enters the oscillation stabilization wait state automatically after updating the PLL multiplier and stops
program operation until the oscillation stabilization wait time has passed. When the clock source is
switched to any resource other than the PLL, the device does not stop program operation.
71
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.2
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time and PLL Lock Wait Time
The oscillation stabilization wait time is required when the clock selected as the source
clock is not yet stable in oscillation.
(See "■Oscillation stabilization wait time" in Section 3.10 "Reset (Device Initialization)".)
The PLL requires the lock wait time until the output stabilizes at the preset frequency
after starting oscillation.
■ Wait Times after the Power is Turned on
After the power is turned on, the oscillation stabilization wait time of the oscillator circuit for the main
clock is required first.
The oscillation stabilization wait time setting is initialized to be the minimum value by the INIT pin input
(setting initialization reset pin). The oscillation stabilization wait time required in this case is kept based on
the time for which low-level input to the INIT pin lasts.
Since the PLL is not enabled for oscillation in either state, you do not have to consider the lock wait time in
this case.
■ Wait Times after Setting Initialization
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) is canceled, the device enters the oscillation stabilization wait
state. The preset oscillation stabilization wait time is generated internally in this state.
In the first oscillation stabilization wait state after INIT pin input, the setting time is initialized to the
minimum value. Therefore, the device leaves this state soon and enters the operation initialization reset
(RST) state. Note also that the device does not take the oscillation stabilization wait time for a watchdog
reset when main oscillation is not stopped during a main run or sub-run.
Since the PLL is not enabled for oscillation in any of these states, you do not have to consider the lock wait
time in this case.
■ Wait Times after PLL Operation is Enabled
When the stopped PLL is enabled for oscillation after the start of program operation, the PLL output must
not be used until the lock wait time has passed.
If the main PLL has not been selected as the source clock, the device can perform program operation even
during the lock wait time. For the PLL lock wait time in this case, it is recommended to use a timebase
timer interrupt.
■ Wait Times after the PLL Multiplier is Changed
When the PLL is enabled for oscillation after the start of program operation, the PLL output must not be
used until the lock wait time has passed.
If the main PLL has not been selected as the source clock, the device can perform program operation even
during the lock wait time. For the PLL lock wait time in this case, it is recommended to use a timebase
timer interrupt.
■ Wait Times after Returning from Stop Mode
When returning from the stop mode after the start of program operation, the programmed oscillation
stabilization wait time is generated internally.
If the clock oscillator circuit selected as the source clock has been set to stop in the stop mode, the
72
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
oscillation stabilization wait time for the oscillator circuit or the used PLL lock wait time, whichever time
is longer, is required. Set the longer oscillation stabilization wait time before entering the stop mode.
If the clock oscillator circuit selected as the source clock has been set to operate even in the stop mode, the
PLL stops operation. Set the oscillation stabilization wait time to a value other than OS1, OS0 = 0, 0
before entering the stop mode.
73
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.3
Clock Distribution
The operation clock signals for various functions are produced based on the base clock
signal generated from the source clock.
The MB91260B series has a total of three types of internal operation clock signals, each
of which can be set independently for the frequency divide ratio.
■ CPU Clock Signal (CLKB)
This clock signal is used for the CPU, internal memory, and internal buses.
The circuits using this clock signal include:
•
CPU
•
Internal RAM and internal ROM
•
Bit search module
•
I-bus, D-bus, F-bus, and X-bus
•
DMA controller
•
On-chip Debug Support Unit (DSU)
Do not set a combination of the multiplier and divide ratio which results in a frequency higher than the
maximum operating frequency.
■ Peripheral Clock Signal (CLKP)
This clock signal is used for peripheral resources and peripheral buses.
The circuits using this clock signal include:
• Peripheral buses
• Clock control unit (only the bus interface unit)
• Interrupt controller
• I/O ports
• External interrupt inputs, UART, 16-bit timer, and other peripheral resources
Do not set a combination of the multiplier and divide ratio which results in a frequency higher than the
maximum operating frequency.
■ External Bus Clock Signal (CLKT)
This clock signal is used for the external extended bus interface.
The circuits using this clock signal include:
• External extended bus interface
• External CLK outputs
Do not set a combination of the multiplier and divide ratio which results in a frequency higher than the
maximum operating frequency. However, the MB91260B series does not support the external bus mode.
74
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.4
Clock Frequency Division
For each type of internal operation clock signal, the divide ratio relative to the base
clock frequency can be set. This feature allows the optimum operating frequency to be
set for each circuit.
The divide ratio is set by the combination of the DIVR0 (base clock frequency division setting register 0)
and DIVR1 (base clock frequency division setting register 1). Each of the registers has four setting bits for
each type of clock signal. The divide ratio of a clock signal relative to the base clock frequency is
expressed as "the register value for that signal + 1". Even though a divide ratio setting is an odd number,
the duty ratio is always 50%.
When the divide ratio setting is changed, the new setting takes effect at the next rise of the clock signal.
Even when an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs, the divide ratio setting is not initialized but
remains unchanged. It is initialized only at a setting initialization reset (INIT). Before changing the source
clock to a faster one from the initial state, be sure to set the divide ratio.
Note:
If you set a combination of the source clock, main PLL multiplier, and divide ratio, which results in a
frequency higher than the maximum operating frequency, the operation of the device is not
guaranteed. Use meticulous care not to set such a combination of values (in particular, do not select
the source clock and change settings in wrong order).
75
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.5
Block Diagram of the Clock Generation Control Unit
This section provides a block diagram of the clock generation control unit. For
information on the registers in the diagram, see "3.11.6 Registers in the Clock
Generation Control Unit".
[Clock generator]
External bus clock
frequency division
CPU clock signal
Stop control
Peripheral clock
frequency division
Selector
CPU clock
frequency division
Selector
DIVR0, DIVR1
registers
Selector
R-bus
Figure 3.11-1 Block Diagram of the Clock Generation Control Unit
Peripheral clock
signal
External bus
clock signal
X0
X1
Oscillator
circuit
Main
oscillation
Selector
CLKR register
PLL
1/2
[Stop/sleep controller]
Internal interrupt
STCR register
Internal reset
Stop status
State
transition
control
circuit
Sleep status
Reset generation F/F
Reset generation F/F
Internal reset (RST)
Internal reset (INIT)
[Reset source circuit]
INIT pin
RSRR register
[Watchdog controller]
Watchdog F/F
Counter clock signal
Time-base counter
CTBR register
Selector
TBCR register
Overflow detection F/F
Interrupt enable
The MB91260B series does not support the external bus mode.
76
Time-base timer
interrupt request
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.6
Registers in the Clock Generation Control Unit
This section describes the function of the registers to be used in the clock generation
control unit.
■ RSRR: Reset Source Register/watchdog Timer Control Register
Bit
Address: 000480H
Initial value (INIT pin)
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
INIT
R
1
*
×
–
R
0
*
×
WDOG
R
0
*
×
–
R
0
×
*
SRST
R
0
×
*
–
R
0
*
×
WT1
R/W
0
0
0
WT0
R/W
0
0
0
*: Variable with the reset source
×: Not initialized
This register holds the source of the most recently generated reset, sets the time interval for the watchdog
timer, and controls its activation.
Read access to this register clears the reset source held there after it is read. If two or more resets occur
before it is read, multiple reset source flags are accumulated and set.
Write access to this register activates the watchdog timer. From then on, the watchdog timer keeps on
operating until a reset (RST) occurs.
[bit15] INIT (INITialize reset occurred)
This bit indicates whether a reset (INIT) by INIT pin input has occurred.
0
INIT by INIT pin input has not occurred.
1
INIT by INIT pin input has occurred.
•
The bit is initialized to "0" immediately after a read.
•
A read is possible; a write does not affect the bit value.
[bit14] (reserved bit)
[bit13] WDOG (WatchDOG reset occurred)
This bit indicates whether a reset (INIT) by the watchdog timer has occurred.
0
INIT by watchdog timer has not occurred.
1
INIT by watchdog timer has occurred.
•
The bit is initialized to "0" immediately after either a reset (INIT) by INIT pin input or a read.
•
A read is possible; a write does not affect the bit value.
[bit12] (reserved bit)
77
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit11] SRST (Software ReSeT occurred)
This bit indicates whether a reset (RST) by writing to the SRST bit (software reset) in the STCR register
has occurred.
0
RST by software reset has not occurred.
1
RST by software reset has occurred.
• The bit is initialized to "0" immediately after either a reset (INIT) by INIT pin input or a read.
• A read is possible; a write does not affect the bit value.
[bit10] (reserved bit)
[bit9, bit8] WT1,WT0 (Watchdog interval Time select)
These bits are used to specify the time interval required for the watchdog timer.
The combination of values written to these bits selects the time interval for the watchdog timer from among
the four options listed below.
WT1
WT0
Minimum write-to-CTBR interval
required for suppressing watchdog
reset
Time from last 5AH write to CTBR until
watchdog reset
0
0
φ × 216 (Initial value)
φ × 216 to φ × 217
0
1
φ × 218
φ × 218 to φ × 219
1
0
φ × 220
φ × 220 to φ × 221
1
1
φ × 222
φ × 222 to φ × 223
(φ represents the internal base clock period.)
•
These bits are initialized to "00B" at a reset (RST)
•
A read is possible; a write is valid only once after a reset (RST). Any further write is invalid.
■ STCR: Standby Control Register
Bit
Address: 000481H
Initial value (INIT pin)
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
7
6
STOP SLEEP
R/W
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
HIZ
R/W
1
1
×
SRST
R/W
1
1
1
OS1
R/W
0
×
×
OS0
R/W
0
×
×
–
R/W
1
1
×
OSCD1
R/W
1
1
×
This register controls the operation mode of the device.
The register controls the transition to each of the two standby modes (stop and sleep modes), controls the
pin status and oscillation disable mode during the stop mode, sets the oscillation stabilization wait time, and
issues a software reset.
78
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Note:
For transition to standby mode, select the synchronous standby mode (using the SYNCS bit (bit8) in
the TBCR (timebase counter control register)) and be sure to use the following sequence:
/* Writing STCR */
ldi
#_STCR, R0
; STCR register (0x0481)
ldi
#Val_of_Stby, rl
; Val_of_Stby is the write data to STCR.
stb
rl,@r0
; Writing to STCR
/* Writing STBR */
ldi
#_CTBR, r2
; CTBR register (0x0483)
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (1)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (2)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
/* Clearing the time base counter in here */
ldub
@r0, rl
; Reading STCR
/* Starting synchronous standby transition */
ldub
@r0, rl
; Reading dummy STCR
; NOP × 5 for timing adjustment
nop
nop
nop
nop
nop
Each bit in the standby control register (STCR) functions as follows:
[bit7] STOP (STOP mode)
This bit selects whether to cause a transition to the stop mode. If "1" is written to both of this bit and the
SLEEP bit (bit6), this bit overrides the other, causing a transition to the stop mode.
0
Do not enter stop mode. (Initial value)
1
Enter stop mode.
• The bit is initialized to "0" either at a reset (RST) or when a stop-mode return source is generated.
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit6] SLEEP (SLEEP mode)
This bit selects whether to cause a transition to the sleep mode. If "1" is written to both of this bit and the
STOP bit (bit7), the STOP bit (bit7) overrides this bit, causing a transition to the stop mode.
0
Do not enter sleep mode. (Initial value)
1
Enter sleep mode.
79
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
• The bit is initialized to "0" either at a reset (RST) or when a sleep-mode return source is generated.
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit5] HIZ (HIZ mode)
This bit controls the pin status during the stop mode.
0
Maintain the pin status existing prior to transition to stop mode.
1
Keep pin output in high impedance state during stop mode. (Initial value)
• The bit is initialized to "0" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit4] SRST (Software ReSeT)
This bit issues a software reset (RST).
0
Issue software reset.
1
Do not issue software reset. (Initial value)
• The bit is initialized to "1" at a reset (RST).
• A read and a write are possible. Reading the bit always returns "1".
[bit3, bit2] OS1, OS0 (Oscillation Stabilization time select)
These bits are used to specify the oscillation stabilization wait time to be waited for immediately after a
reset (INIT) or a return from the stop mode.
The combination of values written to these bits selects the oscillation stabilization wait time from among
the four options listed below.
OS1
OS0
Oscillation stabilization wait time
Main oscillation at 4 MHz
0
0
φ × 21 (Initial value)
1.0 [µs]
0
1
φ × 211
1.0 [ms]
1
0
φ × 216
32.7 [ms]
1
1
φ × 222
2.0 [s]
(φ represents the internal base clock period; it is twice the main oscillation.)
•
These bits are initialized to "00B" at a reset (INIT) by INIT pin input.
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit1] (reserved bit)
• This bit is a reserved bit. Always write "1" to this bit.
[bit0] OSCD1 (Oscillation Disable mode for XIN1)
This bit controls the stopping of oscillation at main oscillation inputs (X0, X1) during the stop mode.
0
Do not stop main oscillation but PLL oscillation during stop mode.
1
Stop main oscillation during stop mode. (Initial value)
• This bit is initialized to "1" at a reset (INIT).
80
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
• A read and a write are possible.
Note:
For returning from the STOP mode with OSCD1 = 0 when the main PLL clock is being used as the
clock source, be sure to set the OS1 and OS0 bits in the STCR to a value other than 00B to ensure
the lock wait time for the main PLL.
■ TBCR: Timebase Counter Control Register
Bit
Address: 000482H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
15
14
13
12
11
10
TBIF
R/W
0
0
TBIE
R/W
0
0
TBC2
R/W
×
×
TBC1
R/W
×
×
TBC0
R/W
×
×
–
R/W
×
×
9
8
SYNCR SYNCS
R/W
R/W
0
0
×
×
This register controls timebase timer interrupts.
The register enables timebase timer interrupts, selects the interrupt time interval, and sets optional functions
for reset operation.
Each bit in the timebase counter control register (TBCR) functions as follows:
[bit15] TBIF (TimeBasetimer Interrupt Flag)
This bit serves as the timebase timer interrupt flag.
The flag indicates that the timebase counter has expired the time interval (set by the TBC2 to TBC0 bits, or
bit13 to bit11).
If this bit is set to "1" with the TBIE bit (bit14) enabling interrupts (TBIE = "1"), a timebase timer interrupt
request is generated.
Clear source
"0" is written by instruction.
Set source
Specified time interval has passed (falling edge of timebase counter output is detected).
• The bit is initialized to "0" at a reset (RST).
• A read and a write are possible. Note, however, that only "0" can be written. An attempt to write "1"
has no effect on the bit value. Note also that reading the bit using a read modify write instruction always
returns "1".
[bit14] TBIE (TimeBasetimer Interrupt Enable)
This bit serves as the timebase timer interrupt request output enable bit.
The bit controls interrupt request output when the timebase counter has expired the time interval. When the
TBIF bit (bit15) is set to "1" with this bit containing "1", a timebase timer interrupt request occurs.
0
Disable timebase timer interrupt request output. (Initial value)
1
Enable timebase timer interrupt request output.
• The bit is initialized to "0" at a reset (RST).
• A read and a write are possible.
81
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit13 to bit11] TBC2 to TBC0 (TimeBasetimer Counting time select)
These bits are used to set the time interval required for the timebase counter used for the timebase timer.
The combination of values written to these bits selects the time interval for the timebase counter from
among the eight options listed below.
TBC2
TBC1
TBC0
Timer interval
Oscillation frequency of 4 MHz
and PLL multiplier of 8x
0
0
0
φ × 211
64 µs
0
0
1
φ × 212
128 µs
0
1
0
φ × 213
256 µs
0
1
1
φ × 222
131 ms
1
0
0
φ × 223
262 ms
1
0
1
φ × 224
524 ms
1
1
0
φ × 225
1048 ms
1
1
1
φ × 226
2097 ms
(φ represents the internal base clock period, or the main PLL output period.)
• The initial value is indeterminate. Be sure to set a value before enabling interrupts.
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit10] (reserved bit)
This bit is a reserved bit. The value read is indeterminate. A write to this bit has no effect on any function
of the register.
[bit9] SYNCR (SYNChronous Reset enable)
This bit serves as the synchronous reset operation enable bit.
The bit selects one of the two types of reset operation to be performed when an operation initialization reset
(RST) request or hardware standby request has occurred. One is the normal reset operation for prompt
transition to the reset (RST) or hardware standby state as soon as the request is issued. The other is the
synchronous reset operation for transition to the operation initialization reset (RST) or hardware standby
state after all bus accesses terminate.
0
Normal reset operation (Initial value)
1
Synchronous reset operation
• The bit is initialized to "0" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
82
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit8] SYNCS (SYNChronous Standby enable)
This bit serves as the synchronous standby operation enable bit.
To use the standby mode (sleep mode or stop mode), be sure to set the bit to "1".
0
Normal standby operation (Initial value)
1
Synchronous standby operation
• The bit is initialized to "0" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
■ CTBR: Timebase Counter Clear Register
Bit
Address: 000483H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
W
×
×
D6
W
×
×
D5
W
×
×
D4
W
×
×
D3
W
×
×
D2
W
×
×
D1
W
×
×
D0
W
×
×
This register initializes the timebase counter.
When "A5H" and "5AH" are written to this register in succession, all the bits in the timebase counter are
cleared to "0" immediately after the "5AH" write. There is no restriction on the interval between "A5H"
write and "5AH" write. If any data other than "5AH" is written following the "A5H" write, however, "A5H"
must be written again before "5AH" is written in order to clear the timebase counter.
Note, however, that the FF is cleared automatically when the CPU is not operating such as in the stop or
sleep mode or during DMA transfer. If such a condition develops, therefore, a watchdog reset is deferred
automatically. For details, see the section "3.11.7 Peripheral Circuits in the Clock Control Unit".
The value read from this register is indeterminate.
Note:
Clearing the timebase counter using this register temporarily changes the oscillation stabilization wait
time, watchdog timer interval, and timebase timer interval.
■ CLKR: Clock Source Control Register
Bit
Address: 00000484H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
15
–
R/W
0
×
14
13
12
PLL1S2 PLL1S1 PLL1S0
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
0
0
×
×
×
11
–
R/W
0
×
10
9
8
PLL1EN CLKS1 CLKS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
0
0
0
×
×
×
This register selects the clock source as the internal base clock and controls the main PLL.
Use this register to select the clock source, enable or disable main PLL operation, and select the PLL
multiplier.
[bit15] (reserved bit)
This bit is a reserved bit. Always write "0" to this bit.
83
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[bit14 to bit12] PLL1S2, PLL1S1, PLL1S0 (PLL1 ratio Select 2 to 0)
These bits are used to select the multiplier of the main PLL.
Select one of the following combinations of values to specify the multiplier of the main PLL.
These bits must not be updated with the main PLL selected as the clock source. Do not set the bits to a
multiplier which results in a frequency higher than the maximum operating frequency.
PLL1S2
PLL1S1
PLL1S0
Main PLL multiplier
At main oscillation frequency of
4 MHz
0
0
0
×1 (Equal frequency) *
φ = 250 ns (at 4 MHz)
0
0
1
×2 (Double)
φ = 125 ns (at 8 MHz)
0
1
0
×3 (Treble)
φ = 83.33 ns (at 12 MHz)
0
1
1
×4 (Quadruple)
φ = 62.50 ns (at 16 MHz)
1
0
0
×5 (Quintuple)
φ = 50.00 ns (at 20 MHz)
1
0
1
×6 (Sextuple)
φ = 41.67 ns (at 24 MHz)
1
1
0
×7 (Septuple)
φ = 35.71 ns (at 28 MHz)
1
1
1
×8 (Octuple)
φ = 31.25 ns (at 32 MHz)
*: Please input 8MHz or more at ×1 multiplier.
(φ represents the internal base clock period.)
• These bits are initialized to "000B" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit11] (reserved bit)
This bit is a reserved bit. Always write "0" to this bit.
[bit10] PLL1EN (PLL1 ENable)
This bit is the main PLL operation enable bit.
It is prohibited to update the bit with the main PLL selected as the clock source. It is also prohibited to
select the main PLL as the clock source with this bit containing "0".
(See the settings of the CLKS1 and CLKS0 bits (bit9 and bit8).)
When the OSCD1 bit (bit1) in the STCR contains "1", the main PLL stops operation during the stop mode
even with this bit containing "1". The PLL is enabled for operation after the device returns from the stop
mode.
0
Stop main PLL. (Initial value)
1
Enable main PLL operation.
• The bit is initialized to "0" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit9, bit8] CLKS1, CLKS0 (CLocK source Select)
These bits are used to set the clock source to be used.
84
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
The combination of values written to the bits selects one of the following three types of clock source as
shown below.
CLKS1
CLKS0
Clock source setting
0
0
Frequency-halved version of oscillation input from X0/X1 (Initial value)
0
1
Setting disabled
1
0
Main PLL
1
1
Setting disabled
• These bits are initialized to "00B" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
Notes:
• The value of the CLKS0 bit (bit8) cannot be changed with the CLKS1 bit (bit9) containing "1".
[Combination that can be changed]
"00B" → "10B"
"10B" → "00B"
• The bits must not be set to any other combination of values.
■ DIVR0: Base Clock Divide Ratio Setting Register 0
bit
Address: 000486H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
B3
R/W
0
×
B2
R/W
0
×
B1
R/W
0
×
B0
R/W
0
×
P3
R/W
0
×
P2
R/W
0
×
P1
R/W
1
×
P0
R/W
1
×
This register controls the frequency divide ratio for each type of internal clock signal relative to the base
clock signal.
The register sets the divide ratios for the CPU/internal bus clock signal (CLKB) and for the peripheral
circuit/peripheral bus clock signal (CLKP).
If you set a combination of the source clock, main PLL multiplier, and divide ratio, which results in a
frequency higher than the maximum operating frequency, the operation of the device is not guaranteed.
Use meticulous care not to set such a combination of values. Also be careful not to select the source clock
and change settings in wrong order.
When the divide ratio setting in this register is changed, the new setting takes effect at the next clock rate.
[bit15 to bit12] B3, B2, B1, B0 (clkB divide select 3 to 0)
These bits are used to set the CPU clock (CLKB) frequency divide ratio.
The clock frequency divide ratio set by these bits applies to the clock signal (CLKB) for the CPU, internal
85
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
memory, and internal buses.
The combination of values written to these bits selects the divide ratio (clock frequency) for the CPU/
internal bus clock signal relative to the base clock signal, from among the 16 types listed below.
Do not set the bits to a divide ratio which results in a frequency higher than the maximum operating
frequency.
86
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
B3
B2
B1
B0
Clock divide ratio
Clock frequency: Oscillation frequency
of 4 MHz and main PLL multiplier of 8×
0
0
0
0
φ
32 MHz (Initial value)
0
0
0
1
φ × 2 (Divide by 2)
16 MHz
0
0
1
0
φ × 3 (Divide by 3)
10.7 MHz
0
0
1
1
φ × 4 (Divide by 4)
8 MHz
0
1
0
0
φ × 5 (Divide by 5)
6.4 MHz
0
1
0
1
φ × 6 (Divide by 6)
5.33 MHz
0
1
1
0
φ × 7 (Divide by 7)
4.57 MHz
0
1
1
1
φ × 8 (Divide by 8)
4 MHz
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
φ × 16 (Divide by 16)
2 MHz
(φ represents the internal base clock period.)
• These bits are initialized to "0000B" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
[bit11 to bit8] P3, P2, P1, P0 (clkP divide select 3 to 0)
These bits are used to set the peripheral clock (CLKP) frequency divide ratio.
The clock frequency divide ratio set by these bits applies to the clock signal (CLKP) for peripheral circuits
and peripheral buses.
The combination of values written to these bits selects the divide ratio (clock frequency) for the peripheral
circuit/peripheral bus clock signal relative to the base clock signal, from among the 16 types listed below.
Do not set the bits to a divide ratio which results in a frequency higher than the maximum operating
frequency.
P3
P2
P1
P0
Clock divide ratio
Clock frequency: Oscillation frequency of
4 MHz and main PLL multiplier of 8×
0
0
0
0
φ
32 MHz
0
0
0
1
φ × 2 (Divide by 2)
16 MHz
0
0
1
0
φ × 3 (Divide by 3)
10.7 MHz
0
0
1
1
φ × 4 (Divide by 4)
8 MHz (Initial value)
0
1
0
0
φ × 5 (Divide by 5)
6.4 MHz
0
1
0
1
φ × 6 (Divide by 6)
5.33 MHz
0
1
1
0
φ × 7 (Divide by 7)
4.57 MHz
0
1
1
1
φ × 8 (Divide by 8)
4 MHz
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
φ × 16 (Divide by 16)
2 MHz
(φ represents the system base clock period.)
• These bits are initialized to "0011B" at a reset (INIT).
•
A read and a write are possible.
87
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ DIVR1: Base Clock Divide Ratio Setting Register 1
Bit
Address: 000487H
Initial value (INIT)
Initial value (RST)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
T3
R/W
0
×
T2
R/W
0
×
T1
R/W
0
×
T0
R/W
0
×
–
R/W
0
×
–
R/W
0
×
–
R/W
0
×
–
R/W
0
×
This register controls the frequency divide ratio for each type of internal clock signal relative to the base
clock signal.
The register sets the divide ratio for the external extended bus interface clock signal (CLKT).
If you set a combination of the source clock, main PLL multiplier, and divide ratio, which results in a
frequency higher than the maximum operating frequency, the operation of the device is not guaranteed.
Use meticulous care not to set such a combination of values. Also be careful not to select the source clock
and change settings in wrong order.
When the divide ratio setting in this register is changed, the new setting takes effect at the next clock rate.
[bit7 to bit4] T3, T2, T1, T0 (clkT divide select 3 to 0)
These bits are used to set the external bus clock (CLKT) frequency divide ratio.
The clock frequency divide ratio set by these bits applies to the clock signal (CLKT) for the external bus
interface.
The combination of values written to these bits selects the divide ratio (clock frequency) for the external
extended bus interface relative to the base clock signal, from among the 16 types listed below.
Do not set the bits to a divide ratio which results in a frequency higher than the maximum operating
frequency.
T3
T2
T1
T0
Clock divide ratio
Clock frequency: Oscillation frequency of
4 MHz and main PLL multiplier of 8×
0
0
0
0
φ
32 MHz (Initial value)
0
0
0
1
φ × 2 (Divide by 2)
16 MHz
0
0
1
0
φ × 3 (Divide by 3)
10.7 MHz
0
0
1
1
φ × 4 (Divide by 4)
8 MHz
0
1
0
0
φ × 5 (Divide by 5)
6.4 MHz
0
1
0
1
φ × 6 (Divide by 6)
5.33 MHz
0
1
1
0
φ × 7 (Divide by 7)
4.57 MHz
0
1
1
1
φ × 8 (Divide by 8)
4 MHz
...
...
...
...
...
...
1
1
1
1
φ × 16 (Divide by 16)
2 MHz
(φ represents the system base clock period.)
• These bits are initialized to "0000B" at a reset (INIT).
• A read and a write are possible.
It is advisable to set the bits to "1111B" (divide by 16) because the external bus interface is not used by the
MB91260B series.
88
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
Note:
The MB91260B series does not support the external bus mode.
[bit3 to bit0] (reserved bit)
• These bits are initialized to "0000B" at a reset (INIT).
• Always write "0000B" to these bits.
89
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.11.7
Peripheral Circuits in the Clock Control Unit
This section describes peripheral circuits in the clock control unit.
■ Timebase Counter
The clock control unit incorporates a 26-bit timebase counter operating with the internal base clock.
The timebase counter is used for measurement of the oscillation stabilization wait time (detailed in
"■ Oscillation stabilization wait time" in Section 3.10 "Reset (Device Initialization)") and for the following
applications as well:
- Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer for detecting system runaway performs measurement using the bit output of the
timebase counter.
- Timebase timer
The timebase timer generates an interval interrupt using the timebase counter output.
These functions are described below:
● Watchdog timer
The watchdog timer is a runaway detection timer using the timebase counter output. If a program runs
out of control, preventing the watchdog reset defer function from being executed within the set interval,
for example, the watchdog timer generates a setting initialization reset (INIT) request for a watchdog
reset.
[Activating the watchdog timer and setting its time interval]
The watchdog timer is activated upon the first write to the RSRR (reset source register/watchdog timer
control register) after a reset (RST). At this time, the WT1 and WT0 bits (bit9 and bit8) are used to set
the time interval for the watchdog timer. Only the time interval set at the first write to the RSRR takes
effect; the settings made at any further writes are ignored.
[Deferring the generation of a watchdog reset]
Once the watchdog timer is activated, "A5H" and "5AH" must be written, in this order, periodically to
the CTBR (timebase counter clear register) by a program. This initializes the watchdog reset generation
flag.
[Generating a watchdog reset]
The watchdog reset generation flag is set at the falling edge of the timebase counter output during the
set interval. If the flag has been set when the second falling edge is detected, a setting initialization
reset (INIT) request is generated for a watchdog reset.
[Stopping the watchdog timer]
Once the watchdog timer is activated, it cannot be stopped until an operation initialization reset (RST)
occurs.
In the following states in which an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs, the watchdog timer stops
and will not function until it is programmed to be reactivated.
90
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
- Operation initialization reset (RST) state
- Setting initialization reset (INIT) state
- Oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state
[Suspending the watchdog timer (deferring automatic generation)]
The watchdog timer initializes the watchdog reset generation flag to defer the generation of a watchdog
reset when the CPU is suspending program operation. Put briefly, the CPU suspends program operation
in the following states:
- Sleep state
- Stop state
- Oscillation stabilization wait RUN state
- During DMA transfer to the D-bus (data bus)
- During a break when the emulator debugger is being used
Note that, when the timebase counter is cleared, the watchdog reset generation flag is also initialized at
the same time, deferring the generation of a watchdog reset.
● Timebase timer
The timebase timer generates an interval interrupt using the timebase counter output. This timer is
suitable for applications which involve time measurement for relatively long time up to {base clock
signal × 227} cycles, such as the main PLL lock wait time or subclock oscillation stabilization wait
time.
The timebase timer generates a timebase timer interrupt request upon detection of that falling edge of
the timebase counter output which corresponds to the set interval.
[Activating the timebase timer and setting its time interval]
The time interval for the timebase timer is set by the TBC2, TBC1, and TBC0 bits (bit13 to bit11) in the
TBCR (timebase counter control register).
Since that falling edge of the timebase counter output which corresponds to the set interval is always
detected, clear the TBIF bit (bit15) first after setting the time interval and then set the TBIE bit (bit14)
to "1" to enable the interrupt request output.
Before changing the time interval, set the TBIE bit (bit14) to "0" to disable the interrupt request output.
The timebase counter keeps counting without being affected by these settings. To obtain the accurate
interval interrupt time, therefore, clear the timebase counter before enabling interrupts. Otherwise, an
interrupt request may occur immediately after interrupts are enabled.
[Clearing the timebase counter using a program]
When "A5H" and "5AH" are written, in this order, to the CTBR (timebase counter clear register), all the
bits in the timebase counter are cleared to "0" immediately after the "5AH" write. There is no restriction
on the interval between "A5H" write and "5AH" write. If any data other than "5AH" is written following
the "A5H" write, however, "A5H" must be written again before "5AH" is written in order to clear the
timebase counter.
When the timebase counter is cleared in this way, the watchdog reset generation flag is initialized at the
same time, temporarily deferring the generation of a watchdog reset.
91
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[Clearing the timebase counter by device state]
All the bits in the timebase counter are cleared to "0" when the device causes a transition to the
following states:
- Stop state
- Setting initialization reset (INIT) state
- Hardware standby state
When the device enters the stop state, in particular, the timebase timer may cause an unintentional
interval interrupt as the timebase counter is used for measurement of oscillation stabilization wait time.
Before setting the stop mode, therefore, disable timebase timer interrupts and stop using the timebase
timer.
When the device enters any other state, an operation initialization reset (RST) occurs and thus timebase
timer interrupts are disabled automatically.
92
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
3.12
Device Status Control
This section describes each status of the MB91260B series and its control.
■ Device States and State Transitions
The MB91260B series takes transitions as illustrated below:
Figure 3.12-1 Transition of Device Status
1 INT pin = 0 (INIT)
2 INIT pin = 1 (INIT cancel)
3 End of oscillation stabilization wait state
4 Reset (RST) cancel
5 Software reset (RST)
6 Sleep (instruction write)
7 Stop (instruction write)
8 Interrupt
9 Clock-free external interrupt
10 Watchdog reset (INIT)
Transition request priorities
Power on
Highest
↓
↓
↓
↓
Lowest
1
Setting initialization reset (INIT)
End of oscillation stabilization wait state
Operation initialization reset (RST)
Interrupt request
Stop
Sleep
Setting Initialization
(INIT)
2
Main clock mode
1
Main stop
Main oscillation
stabilization wait reset
9
1
3
1
Program reset
(RST)
Oscillation
stabilization wait RUN
1
3
7
1
Main sleep
6
5
4
10
Main RUN
1
8
The MB91260B series has the following operating states.
● RUN state (normal operating state)
This state is the program execution state.
In this state, all of the circuits can operate with all the internal clock signals supplied. Note, however, that
only the 16-bit peripheral bus has only the bus clock stopped when no access is being made.
Although each state transition request is acceptable, state transitions in response to certain requests in the
synchronous reset mode are different from those in the normal reset mode. For details, see "●Synchronous
reset operation" in Section 3.10 "Reset (Device Initialization)".
93
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
● Sleep state
This state is the program idle state. The device enters the state by program operation.
Only the CPU stops program execution while peripheral circuits can operate. Various built-in memory
modules and internal/external buses remain idle until requested by the DMA controller.
When a valid interrupt request occurs, the device is released from this state and enters the RUN state
(normal operating state).
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the device enters the setting initialization reset
(INIT) state.
When an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the device enters the operation initialization
reset (RST) state.
● Stop state
This state is a device idle state. The device enters the state by program operation.
All of the internal circuits stop operation. All of the internal clock signals are stopped. The oscillator
circuit and main PLL can be stopped by making the settings. It is also possible to place external pins (with
some exceptions) in a high impedance state by making the settings.
When a specific (clock-free) valid interrupt request occurs, the device enters the oscillation stabilization
wait RUN state.
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the device enters the setting initialization reset
(INIT) state.
When an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the device enters the oscillation stabilization
wait reset (RST) state.
● Oscillation stabilization wait RUN state
This state is a device idle state. The device enters the state when returning from the stop state.
All of the internal circuits stop operation, excluding the clock generation control unit (timebase counter and
device status control unit). Although all of the internal clock signals are stopped, the oscillator circuit and
the enabled main PLL are working.
This state cancels high-impedance control applied to external pins in the stop state.
The device enters the RUN state (normal operating state) as the set oscillation stabilization wait time has
passed.
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the device enters the setting initialization reset
(INIT) state.
When an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the device enters the oscillation stabilization
wait reset (RST) state.
● Oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state
This state is a device idle state. The device enters the state when returning from the stop state or setting
initialization reset (INIT) state.
All of the internal circuits stop operation, excluding the clock generation control unit (timebase counter and
device status control unit). Although all of the internal clock signals are stopped, the oscillator circuit and
the enabled main PLL are working.
This state cancels high-impedance control applied to external pins in the stop state.
94
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
An operation initialization reset (RST) is output to the internal circuitry.
The device enters the oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state as the set oscillation stabilization wait
time has passed.
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the device enters the setting initialization reset
(INIT) state.
● Operation initialization reset (RST) state
This state is the program initialized state. The device enters the state either on receipt of an operation
initialization reset (RST) request or upon termination of the oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state.
The CPU stops program execution and the program counter is initialized. Most of the peripheral circuits
are initialized. All of the internal clocks, oscillator circuit, and the enabled main PLL are working.
An operation initialization reset (RST) is output to the internal circuitry.
When the operation initialization reset (RST) request is eliminated, the device enters the RUN state (normal
operating state) and executes the operation initialization reset sequence. When returning from the setting
initialization reset (INIT) state, the device executes the setting initialization reset sequence instead.
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the device enters the setting initialization reset
(INIT) state.
● Setting initialization reset (INIT) state
This state is the state in which all settings are initialized. The device enters the state upon receipt of a
setting initialization reset (INIT) request.
The CPU stops program execution and the program counter is initialized. All of the peripheral circuits are
initialized. The oscillator circuit operates while the main PLL stops operation. All of the internal clocks
operate except when the external INIT pin maintains "L" level input.
A setting initialization reset (INIT) and an operation initialization reset (RST) are output to the internal
circuitry.
When the setting initialization reset (INIT) request is eliminated, the device is released from this state and
enters the oscillation stabilization wait reset (RST) state. The device then enters the operation initialization
reset (RST) state and executes the setting initialization reset sequence.
● Priorities of state transition requests
State transition requests follow their priorities given as shown below regardless of the current state. Note,
however, that some requests are generated only under specific conditions; they are made valid only in such
conditions.
[Highest]
Setting initialization reset (INIT) request
↓
End of oscillation stabilization wait time (Occurs only in the oscillation
stabilization wait reset or oscillation stabilization wait RUN state.)
↓
Operation initialization reset (RST) request
↓
Valid interrupt request (Occurs only in the RUN, sleep, or stop state.)
↓
Stop mode request (register write) (Occurs only in the RUN state.)
[Lowest]
Sleep mode request (register write) (Occurs only in the RUN state.)
95
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
■ Low-power Consumption Modes
This section describes the individual low-power consumption modes of the MB91260B series and explains
how to use them.
The MB91260B series has the following low-power consumption modes:
•
Sleep mode
The device enters the sleep state in response to a register write.
•
Stop mode
The device enters the stop state in response to a register write.
Each of these modes is detailed below.
● Sleep mode
Writing "1" to the SLEEP bit (bit6) in the STCR (standby control register) establishes the sleep mode and
causes the device to enter the sleep state. The device remains in the sleep state until a sleep-state return
source (an event that triggers the device to return from the sleep state) is generated.
For information about the sleep state, see "● Sleep state" of the section 3.12 "Device Status Control" as
well.
[Transition to sleep mode]
For transition to sleep mode, select the synchronous standby mode (using the SYNCS bit (bit8) in the
TBCR (timebase counter control register)) and be sure to use the following sequence:
/* Writing STCR */
ldi
#_STCR, R0
; STCR register (0x0481)
ldi
#Val_of_Stby, rl
; Val_of_Stby is the write data to STCR.
stb
rl,@r0
; Writing to STCR
/* Writing STBR */
ldi
#_CTBR, r2
; CTBR register (0x0483)
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (1)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (2)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
/* Clearing the time base counter in here */
ldub
@r0, rl
; Reading STCR
/* Starting synchronous standby transition */
ldub
nop
@r0, rl
; Reading dummy STCR
; NOP × 5 for timing adjustment
nop
nop
nop
nop
If "1" is written to both of this bit and the STOP bit (bit7) in the STCR (standby control register), the STOP
bit (bit7) overrides the other, causing the transition to the stop state.
96
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[Circuits which stop in the sleep state]
CPU during program execution
The following circuits work when DMA transfer occurs:
• Bit search module
• Built-in memory modules
• Internal/external buses
However, the MB91260B series does not support the external bus mode.
[Circuits which do not stop in the sleep state]
• Oscillator circuit
• Operation-enabled main PLL
• Clock generation control unit
• Interrupt controller
• Peripheral circuits
• Watch timer
• Main oscillation stabilization wait timer
• DMA controller
• On chip Debug Support Unit (DSU)
[Sleep-state return sources]
•
Occurrence of a valid interrupt request
When a request for an interrupt not disabled (1111B) in the ICR register occurs, the sleep mode is
canceled and the device enters the RUN state (normal operating state). In this case, set the I-flag in the
PS register of the CPU to "1" to enable interrupts and execute the interrupt handler after returning from
the sleep state.
The sleep mode is not canceled even when a request for an interrupt disabled (1111B) in the ICR
register occurs.
•
Occurrence of a setting initialization reset (INIT) request
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the device enters the setting initialization reset
(INIT) state unconditionally.
•
Occurrence of an operation initialization reset (RST) request
When an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the device enters the operation
initialization reset (RST) state unconditionally.
For the priority of each type of source, see "● Priorities of state transition requests" of the section 3.12
"Device Status Control".
[Synchronous standby operation]
When the SYNCS bit (bit8) in the TBCR (timebase counter control register) contains "1", the synchronous
standby operation is enabled. In this case, the device does not enter the sleep state only by writing to the
SLEEP bit. It enters the sleep state by reading the STCR register after that.
To enter the sleep mode, be sure to use the sequence given in [Transition to sleep mode].
● Stop mode
Writing "1" to the STOP bit (bit7) in the STCR (standby control register) establishes the stop mode,
causing the transition to the stop state. The device remains in the stop state until a stop-state return source
(an event that triggers the device to return from the stop state) is generated.
97
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
For information about the stop state, see "● Stop state" of the section 3.12 "Device Status Control" as well.
[Transition to stop mode]
For transition to stop mode, select the synchronous standby mode (using the SYNCS bit (bit8) in the TBCR
(timebase counter control register)) and be sure to use the following sequence:
/* Writing STCR */
ldi
#_STCR, R0
; STCR register (0x0481)
ldi
#Val_of_Stby, rl
; Val_of_Stby is the write data to STCR.
stb
rl,@r0
; Writing to STCR
/* Writing STBR */
ldi
#_CTBR, r2
; CTBR register (0x0483)
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (1)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (2)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
/* Clearing the time base counter in here */
ldub
@r0, rl
; Reading STCR
/* Starting synchronous standby transition */
ldub
nop
@r0, rl
; Reading dummy STCR
; NOP × 5 for timing adjustment
nop
nop
nop
nop
If "1" is written to both of this bit and the SLEEP bit (bit6) in the STCR (standby control register), the
STOP bit (bit7) overrides the other, causing the transition to the stop state.
[Circuits which stop in the stop state]
All of the internal circuits except the following:
[Circuits which do not stop in the stop state]
•
Oscillator circuit not set to stop operation
When the OSCD1 bit (bit0) in the STCR (standby control register) contains "0", the main clock
oscillator circuit does not stop operation even in the stop state.
•
Main oscillator circuit connected to the operation-enabled oscillator circuit not set to stop operation
When the OSCD1 bit (bit0) in the STCR (standby control register) contains "0" and the PLL1EN bit
(bit10) in the CLKR (clock source control register) contains "1", the main oscillator circuit does not
stop operation even in the stop state but the PLL oscillator circuit stops operation.
[High-impedance control of pins in the stop state]
When the HIZ bit (bit5) in the STCR (standby control register) contains "1", the outputs of some pins in the
stop state remain in a high impedance state. For the pins to be subjected to this control, see Appendix C
"Pin Status in Each CPU State".
When the HIZ bit (bit5) in the STCR (standby control register) contains "0", the outputs of some pins in the
stop state maintain the values existing prior to the transition to the stop state. For details, see APPENDIX
C "Pin Status In Each CPU State".
98
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
[Stop-state return sources]
•
Occurrence of a specific (clock-free) valid interrupt request
Only some external interrupt and NMI input pins are valid.
When a request for an interrupt not disabled (1111B) in the ICR register occurs, the stop mode is
canceled and the device enters the oscillation stabilization wait RUN state. In this case, set the I-flag in
the PS register of the CPU to "1" to enable interrupts and execute the interrupt handler after returning
from the stop state.
The stop mode is not canceled even when a request for an interrupt disabled (1111B) in the ICR register
occurs.
•
Occurrence of a setting initialization reset (INIT) request
When a setting initialization reset (INIT) request occurs, the device enters the setting initialization reset
(INIT) state unconditionally.
•
Occurrence of an operation initialization reset (RST) request
When an operation initialization reset (RST) request occurs, the device enters the operation
initialization reset (RST) state unconditionally.
For the priority of each type of source, see "● Priorities of state transition requests" of the section 3.12
"Device Status Control".
[Selecting the clock source for the stop mode]
In self-oscillation mode, select the frequency-halved version of the main clock signal as the source clock
signal before setting the stop mode. For details, see Section "3.11.1 PLL Control" therein.
Note that the restrictions on the divide ratio setting are the same as those for normal operation.
[Synchronous standby operation]
When the SYNCS bit (bit8) in the TBCR (timebase counter control register) contains "1", the synchronous
standby operation is enabled. In this case, the device does not enter the stop state only by writing to the
STOP bit. It enters the stop state by reading the STCR register after that.
To enter the stop mode, be sure to use the sequence given in [Transition to stop mode].
99
CHAPTER 3 CPU AND CONTROL UNITS
100
CHAPTER 4
I/O PORTS
This chapter outlines the I/O ports and describes the
configuration and functions of their registers.
4.1 Overview of I/O Ports
4.2 Registers of I/O Port
4.3 Analog Input Ports
101
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
4.1
Overview of I/O Ports
This LSI can use its pins as I/O ports when they are set not to serve for input to or
output from their respective external bus interfaces or peripherals.
■ Basic Block Diagram of I/O Ports
An I/O port with pull-up resistor comprises the following registers:
• PDR (Port Data Register)
• DDR (Data Direction Register)
• PFR (Port Function Register)
• PCR (Pull-up Control Register)
The following diagram shows a basic configuration of an I/O port.
Figure 4.1-1 Basic Block Diagram of I/O Ports
Peripheral input
Port Bus
Pull-up resistor
(About 50 kΩ)
0
1
Peripheral output
PDR read
PDR
1
Pin
0
PFR
DDR
PCR
PCR = 0: No pull-up resistor
PCR = 1: Pull-up resistor provided
DDR: Data Direction Register
PDR: Port Data Register
PFR: Port Function Register
PCR: Pull-up Control Register
■ Mode for I/O Ports
● In port input mode (PFR=0 & DDR=0)
PDR read: The level at the corresponding external pin is read.
PDR write:A setting value is written to the PDR.
● In port output mode (PFR=0 & DDR=1)
PDR read: The PDR value is read.
PDR write:The PDR value is output to the corresponding external pin.
102
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
● In peripheral output mode (PFR=1 & DDR=x)
PDR read: The output value from the corresponding peripheral is read.
PDR write:A setting value is written to the PDR.
Notes:
• Access each port in bytes.
• In stop mode (HIZ=0), the setting in the pull-up resistor control register is preferential.
• In stop mode (HIZ=1), the setting is the pull-up resistor control register is invalid.
103
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
4.2
Registers of I/O Port
This section explains the configuration and the function of registers which are used in
I/O ports.
■ Port Data Registers (PDR:PDR0 to PDR7, PDRC, PDRD, PDRE and PDRG)
PDR0
Address: 00000000H
PDR1
Address: 00000001H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
Access
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
R/W
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR2
Address: 00000002H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR3
Address: 00000003H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
PDR4
Address: 00000004H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
Access
P47
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
–
–
–
–
P63
P62
P61
P60
----XXXXB
R/W
PDR5
Address: 00000005H
PDR6
Address: 00000006H
PDR7
Address: 00000007H
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
XXXXXXXXB
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
Initial value
XXXXXXXXB
PDRD
Address: 0000000DH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
–
–
–
–
–
–
PD1
PD0
- - - - - - X XB
R/W
PDRE
Address: 0000000EH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
–
–
–
–
–
–
PE1
PE0
- - - - - - X XB
R/W
PDRG
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
Address: 00000010H
–
–
PG5
PG4
PG3
PG2
PG1
PG0
--XXXXXX B
R/W
PDRC
Address: 0000000CH
R/W
PDR0 to PDR7, PDRC, PDRD, PDRE and PDRG are I/O data registers of the I/O port. These are
controlled for input/output by their respective DDR0 to DDR7, DDRC, DDRD, DDRE, DDRG, PFR0 to
PFR2, PFR7 and PFRG.
104
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
■ Data Direction Registers (DDR:DDR0 to DDR7, DDRC, DDRD, DDRE and DDRG)
DDR0
Address: 00000400H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
00000000B
R/W
DDR1
Address: 00000401H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
00000000B
R/W
DDR2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
R/W
Address: 00000402H
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
00000000B
DDR3
Address: 00000403H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P37
P36
P35
P34
P33
P32
P31
P30
00000000B
R/W
DDR4
Address: 00000404H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
00000000B
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
R/W
DDR5
Address: 00000405H
DDR6
Address: 00000406H
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
00000000B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access
–
–
–
–
P63
P62
P61
P60
Initial value
----0000B
R/W
DDR7
Address: 00000407H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
00000000B
R/W
DDRC
Address: 0000040CH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
00000000B
R/W
DDRD
Address: 0000040DH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
–
–
–
–
–
–
PD1
PD0
- - - - - - 0 0B
R/W
DDRE
Address: 0000040EH
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access
–
–
–
–
–
–
PE1
PE0
Initial value
- - - - - - 0 0B
DDRG
Address: 00000410H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
–
–
PG5
PG4
PG3
PG2
PG1
PG0
--000000 B
R/W
R/W
DDR0 to DDR7, DDRC, DDRD, DDRE and DDRG control the I/O direction of each bit in the corresponding
I/O port.
When PFR = 0 DDR = 0: Port input
DDR = 1: Port output
When PFR = 1 DDR = 0: Peripheral input
DDR = 1: Peripheral output
105
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
■ Pull-up Control Registers (PCR:PCR0 to PCR7 and PCRG)
PCR0
Address: 00000600H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P07
P06
P05
P04
P03
P02
P01
P00
00000000B
R/W
PCR1
Address: 00000601H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P17
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
00000000B
R/W
PCR2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
R/W
Address: 00000602H
P27
P26
P25
P24
P23
P22
P21
P20
00000000B
PCR3
Address: 00000603H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P37
P36
–
–
–
–
–
–
00------B
R/W
PCR4
Address: 00000604H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P47
P46
P45
P44
P43
P42
P41
P40
00000000B
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
R/W
PCR5
Address: 00000605H
PCR6
Address: 00000606H
PCR7
Address: 00000607H
PCRG
Address: 00000610H
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
00000000B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Access
–
–
–
–
P63
P62
P61
P60
Initial value
- - - - 0 0 0 0B
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
00000000B
R/W
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
–
–
PG5
PG4
PG3
PG2
PG1
PG0
--000000B
R/W
PCR0 to PCR7 and PCRG control the pull-up resistor for the corresponding I/O port.
PCR = 0: No pull-up resistor
PCR = 1: Pull-up resistor provided
P30 to P35, PC0 to PC7, PD0, PD1, PE0 and PE1 have no pull-up resistor.
106
R/W
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
■ Port Function Registers (PFR:PFR0 to PFR2, PFR7 and PFRG)
PFR0
Address: 00000420H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
PPG8E PPG7E PPG6E PPG5E PPG4E PPG3E PPG2E PPG1E 00000000B
PFR1
Address: 00000421H
7
PFR2
7
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
R/W
Initial value
Access
-0000000B
R/W
0
Initial value
Access
–
--00-00 -B
R/W
0
Initial value
Access
- - - - - - 0 0B
R/W
PPG15E PPG14E PPG13E PPG12E PPG11E PPG10E PPG9E
6
Access
Address: 00000422H
–
–
PFR7
Address: 00000427H
7
6
5
4
3
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
PFRG
Address: 00000430H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
Access
–
–
–
–
PPG0E
–
- - 0 0 - - 0 -B
R/W
SCK1E SO1E
SCK2E SO2E
–
SCK0E SO0E
1
TO2E TO1E
PFR0 to PFR2, PFR7 and PFRG control each bit in the output of the corresponding peripheral.
Be sure to write "0" to unused bits.
107
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
The following table lists individual PFR registers, their initial values and functions:
Register Name
Bit
Bit Name
0
PPG1E
1
2
3
Setting value
Function
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 1 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 2 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 3 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 4 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 5 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 6 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 7 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 8 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 9 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 10 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 11 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 12 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 13 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 14 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 15 output
[Initial value]
[Initial value]
PPG2E
[Initial value]
PPG3E
[Initial value]
PPG4E
PFR0
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
PFR1
3
4
5
6
108
[Initial value]
PPG5E
[Initial value]
PPG6E
[Initial value]
PPG7E
[Initial value]
PPG8E
[Initial value]
PPG9E
[Initial value]
PPG10E
[Initial value]
PPG11E
[Initial value]
PPG12E
[Initial value]
PPG13E
[Initial value]
PPG14E
PPG15E
[Initial value]
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
Register Name
Bit
Bit Name
1
SO0E
2
Setting value
Function
0
General-purpose port
1
UART0 data output
0
General-purpose port
1
UART0 clock input/output
0
General-purpose port
1
UART1 data output
0
General-purpose port
1
UART1 clock input/output
0
General-purpose port
1
Reload timer 1 output
0
General-purpose port
1
Reload timer 2 output
0
General-purpose port
1
PPG timer 0 output
0
General-purpose port
1
UART2 data output
0
General-purpose port
1
UART2 clock input/output
[Initial value]
[Initial value]
SCK0E
PFR2
4
5
0
[Initial value]
SO1E
[Initial value]
SCK1E
[Initial value]
TO1E
PFR7
1
1
PFRG
4
5
[Initial value]
TO2E
[Initial value]
PPG0E
[Initial value]
SO2E
[Initial value]
SCK2E
109
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
4.3
Analog Input Ports
This section shows a block diagram and register configuration of 8/10-bit A/D converter pin.
■ Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter Pin
Figure 4.3-1 AN0 to AN11 Pin Block Diagram
AICR0,
AICR1,
AICR2
PDR (port data register)
Analog input
Internal bus data
PDR read
Output latch
PDR write
Pin
DDR (port direction register)
Direction latch
DDR write
DDR read
Standby control
Notes:
• To use a pin as an input port, set its bit in the corresponding DDR register to "0" and add a pull-up
resistor to the external pin. Also set the corresponding bit in the AICR register to "0".
• To use a pin as an analog input pin, set the corresponding bit in the AICR register to "1". The
value read from the PDR register at this time matches the PDR register value.
110
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
■ Analog Input Control Register (AICR:AICR0 to AICR2)
AICR0
Address: 0000007EH
7
6
5
4
3
2
AICR1
Address: 00000086H
7
6
5
4
3
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
AICR2
7
6
5
4
3
2
Address: 0000008EH
1
0
Initial value
AN7E AN6E AN5E AN4E AN3E AN2E AN1E AN0E 00000000B
–
–
–
–
–
–
1
0
AN9E AN8E
1
0
AN11E AN10E
Access
R/W
Initial value
Access
------00B
R/W
Initial value
Access
------00B
R/W
AICRs control the pins of their respective I/O ports as follows:
AICR = 0: Port input mode
AICR = 1: Analog input mode
Cleared to "0" at reset.
111
CHAPTER 4 I/O PORTS
112
CHAPTER 5
INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
This chapter outlines the interrupt control, describes its
register configuration/functions and its operations, and
gives an example of using the hold request cancel
request.
5.1 Overview
5.2 Interrupt Control Registers
5.3 Operation of Interrupt Controller
113
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
5.1
Overview
The interrupt controller controls interrupt acceptance and arbitration.
■ Hardware Configuration
This module consists of the following:
• ICR registers
• Interrupt priority evaluation circuit
• Interrupt level and interrupt number (vector) generator
• Hold request cancel request generator
■ Major Functions
This module provides the following functions:
• NMI request/interrupt request detection
• Priority evaluation (by interrupt level and number)
• Transfer of prioritizing interrupt level (to the CPU)
• Transfer of prioritizing interrupt number (to the CPU)
• Request (to the CPU) for returning from stop mode in response to an NMI/interrupt request with
interrupt level other than "11111B"
• Generation of a hold request cancel request to DMAC
114
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ Register List
Figure 5.1-1 Register List (1/2)
Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
← Bit No.
00000440H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR00
00000441H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR01
00000442H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR02
00000443H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR03
00000444H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR04
00000445H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR05
00000446H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR06
00000447H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR07
00000448H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR08
00000449H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR09
0000044AH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR10
0000044BH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR11
0000044CH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR12
0000044DH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR13
0000044EH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR14
0000044FH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR15
00000450H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR16
00000451H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR17
00000452H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR18
00000453H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR19
00000454H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR20
00000455H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR21
00000456H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR22
00000457H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR23
00000458H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR24
00000459H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR25
0000045AH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR26
0000045BH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR27
0000045CH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR28
0000045DH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR29
0000045EH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR30
0000045FH
–
–
–
ICR4
R
ICR3
R/W
ICR2
R/W
ICR1
R/W
ICR0
R/W
ICR31
115
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Figure 5.1-1 Register List (2/2)
116
Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
← Bit No.
00000460H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR32
00000461H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR33
00000462H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR34
00000463H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR35
00000464H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR36
00000465H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR37
00000466H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR38
00000467H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR39
00000468H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR40
00000469H
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR41
0000046AH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR42
0000046BH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR43
0000046CH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR44
0000046DH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR45
0000046EH
–
–
–
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
ICR46
0000046FH
–
–
–
MHALTI
–
–
ICR3
R/W
LVL3
R/W
ICR2
R/W
LVL2
R/W
ICR1
R/W
LVL1
R/W
ICR0
R/W
LVL0
R/W
ICR47
00000045H
ICR4
R
LVL4
R
HRCL
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ Block Diagram
Figure 5.1-2 Block Diagram
UNMI
WAKEUP ('1' when LEVEL is not 111111B)
Priority evaluation
NMI
NMI
servicing
5
LVL4 to LVL0
HLDREQ
cancel
request
Level evaluation
Level/
vector
generation
ICR00
RI00
•
•
•
•
•
•
ICR47
MHALTI
Vector
evaluation
6
VCT5 to VCT0
RI47
(DLYIRQ)
R-bus
117
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
5.2
Interrupt Control Registers
This section describes register configuration and functions of interrupt controller.
■ Interrupt Control Register (ICR:ICR00 to ICR47)
ICR00 to ICR47
Bit No. →
Address
000440H to 00046FH
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
ICR4
R
3
ICR3
R/W
2
ICR2
R/W
1
ICR1
R/W
0
ICR0
R/W
Initial value
---11111B
An interrupt control register (ICR) is provided for each interrupt input and is used to set the interrupt level
of the corresponding interrupt request.
[bit4 to bit0] ICR4 to ICR0
These bits are interrupt level setting bits to specify the interrupt level of the corresponding interrupt request.
If the interrupt level set in this register is higher than the level mask value set in the ILM register in the
CPU, an interrupt request is masked on the CPU side.
The register is initialized to "11111B" at reset.
Table 5.2-1 below lists the available combinations of values of the interrupt level setting bits and their
respective interrupt levels.
Table 5.2-1 Interrupt Level Setting Bit Values and Interrupt Levels
ICR4
ICR3
ICR2
ICR1
ICR0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
14
0
1
1
1
1
15
NMI
1
0
0
0
0
16
Highest level available
1
0
0
0
1
17
1
0
0
1
0
18
1
0
0
1
1
19
1
0
1
0
0
20
1
0
1
0
1
21
1
0
1
1
0
22
1
0
1
1
1
23
1
1
0
0
0
24
1
1
0
0
1
25
1
1
0
1
0
26
1
1
0
1
1
27
1
1
1
0
0
28
1
1
1
0
1
29
1
1
1
1
0
30
(Low)
1
1
1
1
1
31
Interrupt-disabled
The ICR4 bit is fixed at "1"; it cannot be set to "0".
118
Interrupt Level
System-reserved
(High)
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ Hold Request Cancel Level Register (HRCL)
Address
000045H
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
← Bit No.
MHALTI
–
–
LVL4
R
LVL3
R/W
LVL2
R/W
LVL1
R/W
LVL0
R/W
HRCL
0--11111B (Initial value)
R/W
This register is an interrupt level setting register for generating a hold request cancel request.
[bit7] MHALTI
MHALTI suppresses DMA transfer by an NMI request. This bit is set to "1" by an NMI request; writing
"0" to the bit clears it. Clear the bit at the end of the NMI routine in the same way as with an ordinary
interrupt routine.
[bit4 to bit0] LVL4 to LVL0
These bits are used to set the interrupt level for issuing a hold request cancel request to the bus master.
If an interrupt request having a higher level than that set in this register is generated, a hold request cancel
request is issued to the bus master.
The LVL4 bit is fixed at "1"; it cannot be set to "0".
119
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
5.3
Operation of Interrupt Controller
This section explains operations of interrupt controller including the following.
• Priority evaluation
• Non Maskable interrupt (NMI)
• Hold request cancel/request
• Returning from standby mode (Stop or sleep mode)
■ Priority Evaluation
This module selects the interrupt source of the highest priority from among the interrupt sources occurring
at the same time and outputs the interrupt level and interrupt number of the selected interrupt source to the
CPU.
The criteria for evaluating the priorities of interrupt sources are as follows:
1. NMI
2. Interrupt sources satisfying the following conditions:
• Interrupt sources with an interrupt level value other than 31. ("31" disables interrupts.)
• Interrupt sources with the smallest interrupt level value
• Interrupt source with the smallest interrupt number among above
If any interrupt source is not selected according to the above criteria, the interrupt controller outputs an
interrupt level of 31 (11111B), where the interrupt number is indeterminate.
Table 5.3-1 lists interrupt sources, interrupt numbers, and interrupt levels.
120
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 5.3-1 Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (1 / 3)
Interrupt No.
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Level
Offset
TBR Default
Address
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Reset
0
00
–
3FCH
000FFFFCH
–
Mode vector
1
01
–
3F8H
000FFFF8H
–
System-reserved
2
02
–
3F4H
000FFFF4H
–
System-reserved
3
03
–
3F0H
000FFFF0H
–
System-reserved
4
04
–
3ECH
000FFFECH
–
System-reserved
5
05
–
3E8H
000FFFE8H
–
System-reserved
6
06
–
3E4H
000FFFE4H
–
Coprocessor absence trap
7
07
–
3E0H
000FFFE0H
–
Coprocessor error trap
8
08
–
3DCH
000FFFDCH
–
INTE instruction
9
09
–
3D8H
000FFFD8H
–
System-reserved
10
0A
–
3D4H
000FFFD4H
–
System-reserved
11
0B
–
3D0H
000FFFD0H
–
Step trace trap
12
0C
–
3CCH
000FFFCCH
–
NMI request (tool)
13
0D
–
3C8H
000FFFC8H
–
Undefined instruction exception
14
0E
–
3C4H
000FFFC4H
–
NMI request
15
0F
15(FH) Fixed
3C0H
000FFFC0H
–
External interrupt 0
16
10
ICR00
3BCH
000FFFBCH
6
External interrupt 1
17
11
ICR01
3B8H
000FFFB8H
7
External interrupt 2
18
12
ICR02
3B4H
000FFFB4H
–
External interrupt 3
19
13
ICR03
3B0H
000FFFB0H
–
External interrupt 4
20
14
ICR04
3ACH
000FFFACH
–
External interrupt 5
21
15
ICR05
3A8H
000FFFA8H
–
External interrupt 6
22
16
ICR06
3A4H
000FFFA4H
–
External interrupt 7
23
17
ICR07
3A0H
000FFFA0H
–
Reload timer 0
24
18
ICR08
39CH
000FFF9CH
8
Reload timer 1
25
19
ICR09
398H
000FFF98H
9
Reload timer 2
26
1A
ICR10
394H
000FFF94H
10
UART0 (Reception complete)
27
1B
ICR11
390H
000FFF90H
0
121
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 5.3-1 Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (2 / 3)
Interrupt No.
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Level
Offset
TBR Default
Address
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
UART0 (Transmission complete)
28
1C
ICR12
38CH
000FFF8CH
3
DTTI
29
1D
ICR13
388H
000FFF88H
–
DMAC0 (Termination, Error)
30
1E
ICR14
384H
000FFF84H
–
DMAC1 (Termination, Error)
31
1F
ICR15
380H
000FFF80H
–
DMAC2/3/4 (Termination, Error)
32
20
ICR16
37CH
000FFF7CH
–
UART1 (Reception complete)
33
21
ICR17
378H
000FFF78H
1
UART1 (Transmission complete)
34
22
ICR18
374H
000FFF74H
4
UART2 (Reception complete)
35
23
ICR19
370H
000FFF70H
2
UART2 (Transmission complete)
36
24
ICR20
36CH
000FFF6CH
5
Multiply-accumulate
37
25
ICR21
368H
000FFF68H
-
PPG0
38
26
ICR22
364H
000FFF64H
–
PPG1
39
27
ICR23
360H
000FFF60H
–
PPG2/3
40
28
ICR24
35CH
000FFF5CH
–
PPG4/5/6/7
41
29
ICR25
358H
000FFF58H
–
PPG8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15
42
2A
ICR26
354H
000FFF54H
–
External interrupt 8/9
43
2B
ICR27
350H
000FFF50H
–
Waveform 0 (underflow)
44
2C
ICR28
34CH
000FFF4CH
–
Waveform 1 (underflow)
45
2D
ICR29
348H
000FFF48H
–
Waveform 2 (underflow)
46
2E
ICR30
344H
000FFF44H
–
Time-base timer overflow
47
2F
ICR31
340H
000FFF40H
–
Free-running timer (Compare clear)
48
30
ICR32
33CH
000FFF3CH
–
Free-running timer (zero detection)
49
31
ICR33
338H
000FFF38H
–
A/D0
50
32
ICR34
334H
000FFF34H
–
A/D1
51
33
ICR35
330H
000FFF30H
–
A/D2
52
34
ICR36
32CH
000FFF2CH
–
PWC0 (Measurement complete)
53
35
ICR37
328H
000FFF28H
–
PWC1 (Measurement complete)
54
36
ICR38
324H
000FFF24H
–
PWC0 (Overflow)
55
37
ICR39
320H
000FFF20H
–
122
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 5.3-1 Interrupt Sources, Interrupt Numbers, and Interrupt Levels (3 / 3)
Interrupt No.
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Level
Offset
TBR Default
Address
RN
Decimal
Hexadecimal
PWC1 (Overflow)
56
38
ICR40
31CH
000FFF1CH
–
ICU 0 (Capture)
57
39
ICR41
318H
000FFF18H
–
ICU 1 (Capture)
58
3A
ICR42
314H
000FFF14H
–
ICU 2/3 (Capture)
59
3B
ICR43
310H
000FFF10H
–
OCU0/1 (Match)
60
3C
ICR44
30CH
000FFF0CH
–
OCU2/3 (Match)
61
3D
ICR45
308H
000FFF08H
–
OCU4/5 (Match)
62
3E
ICR46
304H
000FFF04H
–
Delayed interrupt source bit
63
3F
ICR47
300H
000FFF00H
–
System-reserved (used by REALOS)
64
40
–
2FCH
000FFEFCH
–
System-reserved (used by REALOS)
65
41
–
2F8H
000FFEF8H
–
System-reserved
66
42
–
2F4H
000FFEF4H
–
System-reserved
67
43
–
2F0H
000FFEF0H
–
System-reserved
68
44
–
2ECH
000FFEECH
–
System-reserved
69
45
–
2E8H
000FFEE8H
–
System-reserved
70
46
–
2E4H
000FFEE4H
–
System-reserved
71
47
–
2E0H
000FFEE0H
–
System-reserved
72
48
–
2DCH
000FFEDCH
–
System-reserved
73
49
–
2D8H
000FFED8H
–
System-reserved
74
4A
–
2D4H
000FFED4H
–
System-reserved
75
4B
–
2D0H
000FFED0H
–
System-reserved
76
4C
–
2CCH
000FFECCH
–
System-reserved
77
4D
–
2C8H
000FFEC8H
–
System-reserved
78
4E
–
2C4H
000FFEC4H
–
System-reserved
79
4F
–
2C0H
000FFEC0H
–
80
50
2BCH
000FFEBCH
to
to
to
to
255
FF
000H
000FFC00H
Used by INT instruction
–
–
123
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
■ NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt)
NMIs have the highest priority among the interrupt sources handled by this module.
An NMI is therefore always selected even whenever it is generated at the same time as another interrupt
source.
● When an NMI occurs, the interrupt controller passes the following items of information to the CPU:
Interrupt level
: 15 (01111B)
Interrupt number: 15 (0001111B)
● NMI detection
NMIs are set and detected by the external interrupt/NMI controller module. This module only generates an
interrupt level, interrupt number, and MHALTI in response to an NMI request.
● Suppressing DMA transfer upon NMI request
When an NMI request occurs, the MHALTI bit in the HRCL register is set to "1", suppressing DMA
transfer. To permit DMA transfer, clear the MHALTI bit to "0" at the end of the NMI routine.
■ Hold Request Cancel Request
When a high-priority interrupt needs to be serviced when the CPU has been put on hold (during DMA
transfer), it is necessary to request the hold request issuer to cancel the hold request. Use the HRCL
register to set the interrupt level as the reference level for generating the hold request cancel request.
● Conditions for generating a hold request cancel request
A hold request cancel request is issued to the DMAC when an interrupt source of a higher interrupt level
than that set in the HRCL register occurs.
Interrupt level set in the HRCL register > Interrupt level after priority evaluation → Cancel request
generated
Interrupt level set in the HRCL register ≤ Interrupt level after priority evaluation → No cancel request
Once issued, the cancel request remains in effect until the interrupt source causing that request is cleared,
accordingly leaving DMA transfer prevented from being executed. Therefore, be sure to clear the relevant
interrupt source. When an NMI is used, the MHALTI bit in the HRCL register is "1" and thus the cancel
request is in effect.
● Interrupt levels available
The HRCL register accepts a value from "10000B" to "11111B" like the ICR register.
If the HRCL register is set to "11111B", a cancel request is generated for every level of interrupt. If it is set
to "10000B", a cancel request is generated for NMIs only.
Table 5.3-2 lists the interrupt levels for which a hold request cancel request is generated.
124
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Table 5.3-2 Settings of Interrupt Levels for Which Hold Request Cancel Request Is
Generated
HRCL Register
Interrupt Level for Which Cancel Request Is Generated
17
NMI or interrupt level 16
18
NMI or interrupt level 16/17
31
–
NMI only
–
16
NMI or interrupt level 16 to 30 [initial value]
After reset, DMA transfer is suppressed for any level of interrupt. Since DMA transfer is not executed with
an interrupt generated, set the HRCL register to an appropriate value.
■ Returning from Standby Mode (Stop or Sleep Mode)
This module provides the function to return from stop mode when an interrupt request occurs.
If any interrupt request (with an interrupt level other than 11111B), including an NMI, occurs from a
peripheral resource, this module issues a request to the clock control unit to return from stop mode.
Since the priority evaluation circuit restarts operation after the clock supply recovers after returning from
the stop mode, the CPU continues to execute instructions until a priority evaluation result is obtained.
Even after returning from the sleep state, this module operates in the same way. Note also that the registers
in this module are accessible even in sleep mode.
Notes:
• Even an NMI request causes return from stop mode. This assumes however that an input level
valid in the stop state is given to the NMI pin.
• To prevent an interrupt source from causing return from the stop or sleep state, use the relevant
control register of the corresponding peripheral resource to set the interrupt level to "11111B".
■ Example of Using the Hold Request Cancel Register (HRCL)
To execute a high-priority process during DMA transfer, the CPU must request the DMA controller to
cancel the hold request for releasing itself from the hold status. That is, the HRCL can use an interrupt to
make the DMA controller to cancel a hold request, or to give priority to the CPU.
● Control registers
Hold request cancel level (HRCL) register:
If an interrupt request of a higher level than that set in this register is generated, a hold request cancel
request is issued to the DMA controller. This register is used to set that reference level.
Interrupt control register (ICR):
A higher level than that in the HRCL register is set in the ICR register corresponding to the interrupt
source to be used.
125
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
● Hardware configuration
The flow of each signal is illustrated below.
Figure 5.3-1 Flow of Each Signal
This module
IRQ
Bus access request
MHALTI
I-UNIT
DHREQ: D-bus hold request
DHREQ
DMAC
(ICR)
CPU
Bus
Converter
DHACK: D-bus hold acknowledge
IRQ: Interrupt request
(HRCL)
MHALTI: Hold request cancel request
DHACK
● Sequence
Figure 5.3-2 Interrupt Level: HRCL < ICR (LEVEL)
RUN
Bus hold
CPU
Bus hold (DMA transfer)
Interrupt service
Example of interrupt
routine
2)
1)
Bus access
request
1) Interrupt request clear
DHREQ
|
DHACK
2) RETI
IRQ
LEVEL
MHALTI
If an interrupt request is generated and the interrupt level becomes higher than that set in the HRCL
register, MHALTI becomes active to the DMA controller. Then the DMA controller cancels the access
request, allowing the CPU to return from the hold status for servicing the interrupt.
Given below is an example of handling multiple interrupts.
Figure 5.3-3 Interrupt Level: HRCL < ICR (Interrupt I) < ICR (Interrupt II)
RUN
CPU
Bus access
request
DHREQ
DHACK
IRQ1
IRQ2
LEVEL
MHALTI
126
Bus hold
Interrupt I
Interrupt service II
3)
4)
Interrupt service I
1)
2)
Bus hold (DMA transfer)
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
Example of interrupt routine
1), 3) Interrupt source clear
–
2), 4) RETI
In the above example, an interrupt of a higher priority occurs during execution of interrupt routine I.
DHREQ remains low when an interrupt of a higher level than the interrupt level set in the HRCL register
has been generated.
Note:
Pay due attention to the relationships between the interrupt levels set in the HRCL and ICR
registers.
127
CHAPTER 5 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER
128
CHAPTER 6
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND
NMI CONTROLLER
This chapter describes the external interrupt and NMI
controller, the configuration and functions of registers,
and operation of the external interrupt and NMI
controller.
6.1 Overview of External Interrupt/NMI Controller
6.2 Registers of External Interrupt/NMI Controller
6.3 Operation of External Interrupt/NMI Controller
129
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
6.1
Overview of External Interrupt/NMI Controller
The external interrupt controller is a block that controls external interrupt requests input
to NMI and INT0 to INT9.
For external interrupt input, "H" level, "L" level, "rising edge", or "falling edge" can be
selected as the level of a request to be detected.
■ Register List
Following figure shows the register list of the external interrupt/NMI controller.
External interrupt source register
Bit No. →
7
EIRR0 Address: 00000040H
ER7
EIRR1 Address: 000000B8H
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial value
ER6
–
ER5
–
ER4
–
ER3
–
ER2
–
ER1
ER9
ER0
ER8
00000000B [R/W]
- - - - - - 0 0B [R/W]
Interrupt enable register
Bit No. →
7
ENIR0 Address: 00000041H
EN7
ENIR1 Address: 000000B9H
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EN6
–
EN5
–
EN4
–
EN3
–
EN2
–
EN1
EN9
EN0
EN8
Initial value
00000000B [R/W]
- - - - - - 0 0B [R/W]
12
11
10
9
8
Initial value
LA6
–
LB5
–
LA5
–
LB4
–
LA4
–
00000000B [R/W]
- - - - - - - -B [R/W]
Initial value
00000000B [R/W]
----0000B [R/W]
External interrupt request level setting register
Bit No. → 15
14
13
ELVR0 Address: 00000042H
LB7 LA7 LB6
ELVR1 Address: 000000BAH
–
–
–
Bit No. →
7
ELVR0 Address: 00000043H
LB3
ELVR1 Address: 000000BBH
–
130
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LA3
–
LB2
–
LA2
–
LB1
LB9
LA1
LA9
LB0
LB8
LA0
LA8
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ Block Diagram
Figure 6.1-1 shows a block diagram for external interrupt/NMI controller.
Figure 6.1-1 Block Diagram
10
Interrupt request
11
10
External interrupt enable register
Gate
Source F/F
Edge detection circuit
11
INT0 to 9
NMI
External interrupt source register
10
External interrupt request level setting register
131
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
6.2
Registers of External Interrupt/NMI Controller
This section explains the configuration and functions of registers used by external
interrupt/NMI controller.
■ Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR (ENIR0, ENIR1): ENable Interrupt Request Register)
Bit No. →
7
ENIR0 Address: 00000041H
EN7
ENIR1 Address: 000000B9H
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EN6
–
EN5
–
EN4
–
EN3
–
EN2
–
EN1
EN9
EN0
EN8
Initial value
00000000B [R/W]
- - - - - - 0 0B [R/W]
ENIR register controls mask of the external interrupt request output. Output for an interrupt request is
enabled based on the bit in this register to which "1" has been written (INT0 enable is controlled by EN0),
and the interrupt request is output to the interrupt controller. The pin corresponding to the bit to which "0"
is written holds the interrupt source but does not generate a request to the interrupt controller.
Please make sure to write "0" to bit7 to bit2 of ENIR1 register.
No enable bit exists for NMI.
■ External Interrupt Source Register (EIRR (EIRR0, EIRR1): External Interrupt Request
Register)
Bit No. →
7
EIRR0 Address: 00000040H
ER7
EIRR1 Address: 000000B8H
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ER6
–
ER5
–
ER4
–
ER3
–
ER2
–
ER1
ER9
ER0
ER8
Initial value
00000000B [R/W]
- - - - - - 0 0B [R/W]
EIRR register is a register that shows a corresponding external interrupt request exists when reading, and
that clears a content of the flip-flop showing this request when writing.
If the read value of this EIRR register is "1", there is an external interrupt request at the pin corresponding
to this bit. Write "0" to this register to clear the request flip-flop of the corresponding bit.
Writing "1" to this register is invalid.
"1" is read in a read operation of the read-modify-write.
The flag for NMI cannot be accessed by a user.
132
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register (ELVR (ELVR0,ELVR1): External
LeVel Register)
Bit No. → 15
ELVR0 Address: 00000042H
LB7
ELVR1 Address: 000000BAH
–
Bit No. →
7
ELVR0 Address: 00000043H
LB3
ELVR1 Address: 000000BBH
–
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
LA7
–
LB6
–
LA6
–
LB5
–
LA5
–
LB4
–
LA4
–
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
LA3
–
LB2
–
LA2
–
LB1
LB9
LA1
LA9
LB0
LB8
LA0
LA8
Initial value
00000000B [R/W]
- - - - - - - -B [R/W]
Initial value
00000000B [R/W]
- - - - 0 0 0 0B [R/W]
ELVR is a register to select request detections. In ELVR, two bits each are assigned to INT0 to INT9,
which results in the settings shown in table below. When each bit of the EIRR is cleared while the level is
in the request input level, an appropriate bit is set again as long as the input is at active level.
Set "H" level or "L" level request when returning from the stop state.
Table 6.2-1 Assignment of ELVR
LB9 to LB0, LA9 to LA0
Operation
0 0B
"L" level indicates the existence of a request
0 1B
"H" level indicates the existence of a request
1 0B
A rising edge indicates the existence of a request
1 1B
A falling edge indicates the existence of a request
Detection level of NMI is always a falling edge level. Also, when using NMI to return from the stop state,
detection level is "L" level.
133
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
6.3
Operation of External Interrupt/NMI Controller
If, after a request level and an enable register are defined, a request defined in the ELVR
register is input to the corresponding pin, this module generates an interrupt request
signal to the interrupt controller. For simultaneous interrupt requests from resources,
the interrupt controller determines the interrupt request with the highest priority and
generates an interrupt for it.
■ Operation of an External Interrupt
Figure 6.3-1 shows the external interrupt operation.
Figure 6.3-1 External Interrupt Operation
External Interrupt
CPU
Interrupt controller
Resource request
ELVR
ICR vv
EIRR
ENIR
IL
CMP
ICR xx
CMP
ILM
Source
■ Return from Standby
To use an external interrupt to return from the standby state in the clock stop mode, set "H" level or "L"
level request as the input request.
If you use an edge request, the device does not return from the stop state in clock stop mode.
Please make sure to disable unused channels before entering a standby mode.
■ Operating Procedure for an External Interrupt
Set up a register located inside the external interrupt controller as follows:
1. Set the general-purpose I/O port served dual use as external interrupt input pin as the input port.
2. Disable the target bit in the enable register.
3. Set the target bit in the request level setting register.
4. Clear the target bit in the interrupt source register.
5. Enable the target bit in the enable register.
(Simultaneous writing of 16-bit data is supported for steps 4. and 5.)
Before setting a register in this module, you must disable the enable register. In addition, before enabling
the enable register, you must clear the interrupt source register. This procedure is required to prevent an
interrupt source from occurring by mistake while a register is being set or an interrupt is enabled.
134
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ External Interrupt Request Level
1. If the request level is an edge request, a pulse width of at least three machine cycles (peripheral clock
machine cycles) is required to detect an edge.
2. If the request input level is a level setting, a request input is entered from outside and is then cancelled,
the request to the interrupt controller remains active because a source holding circuit exists internally.
The external interrupt source register must be cleared to cancel a request to the interrupt controller.
Figure 6.3-2 Clearing the External Interrupt Source Register when a Level is Set
Interrupt Input
Level
detection
External interrupt source register
(Source holding circuit)
Enable gate
Interrupt controller
Holds a source unless it is cleared
Figure 6.3-3 Interrupt Source and Interrupt Request to Interrupt Controller when Interrupts are Enabled
"H" level
Interrupt input
Interrupt request
to interrupt controller
Becomes inactive when the external interrupt source register is cleared
135
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ NMI
1. An NMI has the highest level among the user interrupts and cannot be masked.
However, as an exception, when NMI is activated without setting ILM, NMI source is detected but CPU
will not accept the NMI request. At this time, the NMI source will be held until ILM is set to be
accepted by NMI. For this reason, use NMI after resetting and setting ILM value to 16 or higher. Also,
since an internal source flag of NMI cannot be accessed from CPU, keep NMI pin to "H" level after
reset.
2. An NMI is accepted under the following conditions:
Normal state :Falling edge
STOP state :"L" level
3. An NMI can be used to clear stop mode. Inputting the "L" level in the stop state clears the stop state
and causes the oscillation stabilization wait time to start.
The NMI request detector has an NMI flag that is set for an NMI request and is cleared only if an
interrupt for the NMI itself is accepted or reset occurs.
Note that this bit is not readable or writable.
Figure 6.3-4 NMI Request Detector
(NMI flag)
0
NMI request
(Stop clearing)
Q SX
Falling edge
detection
R
1
STOP
Clear (RST, interrupt acknowledge)
136
φ
NMI
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ Precautions when Returning from STOP State Using External Interrupt
The external interrupt signal that is initially input to the INT pin in a STOP state is input asynchronously,
allowing the device to return from the STOP state. Note, however, that there are periods from the release of
the STOP state till the end of the oscillation stabilization wait time, in such periods the input of other
external interrupt signals cannot be identified (period of b + c + d in Figure 6.3-5 ). This is because the
external input signal after the release of STOP mode is synchronized with the internal clock; consequently,
the corresponding interrupt source cannot be retained while the clock is still unstable.
Therefore, input an external interrupt signal after the oscillation stabilization wait time has passed, when
inputting an external interrupt after the release of STOP mode.
Figure 6.3-5 Operational Sequence for Returning from STOP State by External Interrupt
INT1
INT0
Internal
STOP
Regulator
12µS
High
Low
Internal
operation
(RUN)
Implement command (RUN)
X0
Internal
clock
Interrupt flag clear
INTR0
INTE0
"1" (Set to enable before switching to S OP mode)
INTR1
INTE1
"1" enable (Set before switching to STOP mode)
(e)RUN
(a) STOP (b) Regulator stabilization wait time (d) Oscillation stabilization time
(c) Oscillator oscillation time
137
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
■ Return Operation from STOP State
The following operation is performed when using an external interrupt to allow the current circuit to return
from the STOP state.
● Processing procedure before the device enters the STOP state
Setting external interrupts
You must enable the interrupt input pass for the STOP state before the device enters the STOP state.
This can be done by setting the PFR register (Port Function Register). Nevertheless, the interrupt input
pass is already enabled in normal states (those other than STOP state); therefore, you do not have to be
conscious to set the register. In the STOP state, on the other hand, the input pass is controlled by the
PFR register.
Pin name
Setting for returning from STOP state by external interrupt
P63/INT9
Set bit 3 in PCR6 to "0".
P62/INT8
Set bit 2 in PCR6 to "0".
P26/INT7
Set bit 7 in PCR2 to "0".
P27/INT6
Set bit 6 in PCR2 to "0".
P62/INT5/PPG0
Set bit 1 in PCR6 to "0".
P60/INT4/CKI
Set bit 0 in PCR6 to "0".
P57/INT3
Set bit 7 in PFR5 to "0".
P56/INT2
Set bit 6 in PFR5 to "0".
P55/INT1
Set bit 5 in PFR5 to "0".
P54/INT0
Set bit 4 in PFR5 to "0".
Inputting external interrupts
When allowing the device to return from the STOP state, external interrupt signals are in such a state
that they send input signals asynchronously. As soon as this interrupt input is asserted, the internal
STOP signal is caused to fall. At the same time, the external interrupt circuit switches its mode to
synchronize the interrupt input of other levels.
● Regulator stabilization wait time
When the internal STOP signal falls, the device starts switching from the STOP regulator to the RUN
regulator. If internal operation starts before the output of RUN regulator voltage stabilizes, the operation
will become unstable. For this reason, a regulator stabilization wait time of approximately 12µs is
secured as the stabilization wait time for the internal output voltage. The clock is stopped during this
period.
● Oscillation time of oscillator
The clock starts oscillation upon the completion of the regulator stabilization wait time. The oscillation
time of the oscillator varies depending on the oscillator used.
138
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
● Oscillation stabilization wait time
The oscillation stabilization wait time is spent within the device after the oscillation time of the
oscillator. The oscillation stabilization wait time is specified by using the OS1 and OS0 bits in the
standby control register. Upon the completion of the oscillation stabilization wait time, the internal
clock will be supplied and the interrupt instruction operation will start using an external interrupt. In
addition, it will be enabled to accept external interrupt sources other than those for returning from the
STOP state.
139
CHAPTER 6 EXTERNAL INTERRUPT AND NMI CONTROLLER
140
CHAPTER 7
REALOS-RELATED
HARDWARE
REALOS-related hardware is used by the realtime OS.
Therefore, when using REALOS, the hardware cannot be
used with the user program.
7.1 Delayed Interrupt Module
7.2 Register of Delayed Interrupt Module
7.3 Operation of Delayed Interrupt Module
7.4 Bit Search Module
7.5 Register of Bit Search Module
7.6 Operation of Bit Search Module
141
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
7.1
Delayed Interrupt Module
The delayed interrupt module generates an interrupt for switching tasks.
Use this module to allow software to generate and clear an interrupt request for the
CPU.
■ Register List
Address
00000044H
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
■ Block Diagram
Figure 7.1-1 Block Diagram
R-bus
DLYI
Interrupt request
142
0
DLYI
[R/W]
← Bit No.
DICR
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
7.2
Register of Delayed Interrupt Module
This section describes the configuration and functions of a register used by the delayed
interrupt module.
■ DICR (Delayed Interrupt Control Register)
Address
000044H
7
–
6
–
5
–
4
–
3
–
2
–
1
–
0
DLYI
[R/W]
Initial value
-------0B
The delayed interrupt control register (DICR) controls delayed interrupts.
[bit0] DLYI
DLYI
Description
0
A delayed interrupt source is cleared or no request exists. [Initial value]
1
A delayed interrupt source is generated.
This bit controls generation and cancellation of the corresponding interrupt source.
143
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
7.3
Operation of Delayed Interrupt Module
A delayed interrupt generates an interrupt for switching tasks. Use this function to
allow software to generate and clear an interrupt request for the CPU.
■ Interrupt Number
A delayed interrupt is assigned to the interrupt source corresponding to the largest interrupt number.
On MB91260B series, a delayed interrupt is assigned to interrupt number 63 (3FH).
■ DLYI Bit of DICR
Write "1" to this bit to generate a delayed interrupt source. Write "0" to it to clear a delayed interrupt
source.
This bit is the same as the interrupt source flag for a normal interrupt. Therefore, clear this bit and
switch tasks in the interrupt routine.
144
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
7.4
Bit Search Module
The bit search module searches for "0", "1", or any points of change for data written to
the input register and then returns the detected bit locations.
■ Register List
Figure 7.4-1 shows the register list for bit search module.
Figure 7.4-1 Register List
Address
31
0
000003F0H
BSD0
0 detection data register
000003F4H
BSD1
1 detection data register
000003F8H
BSDC
Change point detection data register
000003FCH
BSSR
Detection result register
■ Block Diagram
Figure 7.4-2 Block Diagram
D-bus
Input latch
Address
decoder
Detection
mode
1 detection data coding
Bit search circuit
Detection result
145
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
7.5
Register of Bit Search Module
This section describes the configuration and functions of registers used by the bit
search module.
■ 0 Detection Data Register (BSD0)
Address
000003F0H
31
0
Read/Write → W
Initial value → Undefined XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXB
0 detection is performed for the written value.
The initial value after reset is undefined. The read value is undefined.
Use a 32-bit length data transfer instruction for data transfer (Do not use 8-bit or 16-bit length data transfer
instruction).
■ 1 Detection Data Register (BSD1)
Address
000003F4H
31
0
Read/Write → R/W
Initial value → Undefined XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXB
Use a 32-bit length data transfer instruction for data transfer (Do not use 8-bit or 16-bit length data transfer
instruction).
• Writing
Detect "1" for the written value.
• Reading
Save data of the internal state of the bit search module is read. This register is used to save or restore
the original state when the bit search module is used by, for example, an interrupt handler.
Even though data is written to the 0 detection or change point detection or data register, data can be
saved or restored only by using the 1 detection data register.
The initial value after reset is undefined.
146
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
■ Change Point Detection Data Register (BSDC)
Address
000003F8H
31
0
Read/Write → W
Initial value → Undefined XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXB
Points of change are detected in the written value.
The initial value after reset is undefined.
The read value is undefined.
Use a 32-bit length data transfer instruction for data transfer (Do not use 8-bit or 16-bit length data transfer
instruction).
■ Detection Result Register (BSRR)
Address
000003FCH
31
0
Read/Write → R
Initial value → Undefined XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXB
The 0, 1, or change point detection result is read from this register.
The detection result to be read is determined by the last written data register.
147
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
7.6
Operation of Bit Search Module
This section explains 3 types of the bit search module operation.
• 0 detection
• 1 detection
• Change point detection
■ 0 Detection
The bit search module scans data written to the 0 detection data register from the MSB to LSB and returns
the location where the first "0" is detected.
The detection result can be obtained by reading the detection result register.
The relationship between the detected location and the return value is given in Table 7.6-1.
If a "0" is not found (that is, if the value is FFFFFFFFH), 32 is returned as the detection result.
[Execution example]
Write data
Read value (decimal)
11111111111111111111000000000000B (FFFFF000H)
→
20
11111000010010011110000010101010B (F849E0AAH)
10000000000000101010101010101010B (8002AAAAH)
→
5
→
1
11111111111111111111111111111111B (FFFFFFFFH)
→
32
■ 1 Detection
The bit search module scans data written to the 1 detection data register from the MSB to LSB and returns
the location where the first "1" is detected.
The detection result can be obtained by reading the detection result register.
The relationship between the detected location and the return value is given in Table 7.6-1.
If a "1" is not found (that is, if the value is 00000000H), 32 is returned as the detection result.
[Execution example]
Write data
148
Read value (decimal)
00100000000000000000000000000000B (20000000H)
→
2
00000001001000110100010101100111B (01234567H)
→
7
00000000000000111111111111111111B (0003FFFFH)
→
14
00000000000000000000000000000001B (00000001H)
→
31
00000000000000000000000000000000B (00000000H)
→
32
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
■ Change Point Detection
The bit search module scans data written to the change point detection data register from bit30 to the LSB
for comparison with the MSB value. The first location where a value that is different from that of the MSB
is detected is returned.
The detection result can be obtained by reading the detection result register.
The relationship between the detected location and the return value is given in Table 7.6-1.
If a change point is not detected, 32 is returned.
In change point detection, "0" is never returned as a result.
[Execution example]
Write data
Read value (decimal)
00100000000000000000000000000000B (20000000H)
→
2
00000001001000110100010101100111B (01234567H)
→
7
00000000000000111111111111111111B (0003FFFFH)
→
14
00000000000000000000000000000001B (00000001H)
→
31
00000000000000000000000000000000B (00000000H)
→
32
11111111111111111111000000000000B (FFFFF000H)
→
20
11111000010010011110000010101010B (F849E0AAH)
→
5
10000000000000101010101010101010B (8002AAAAH)
→
1
11111111111111111111111111111111B (FFFFFFFFH)
→
32
Table 7.6-1 Bit Locations and Return Values (decimal)
Detected bit
location
Return
value
Detected bit
location
Return
value
Detected bit
location
Return
value
Detected bit
location
Return
value
31
0
23
8
15
16
7
24
30
1
22
9
14
17
6
25
29
2
21
10
13
18
5
26
28
3
20
11
12
19
4
27
27
4
19
12
11
20
3
28
26
5
18
13
10
21
2
29
25
6
17
14
9
22
1
30
24
7
16
15
8
23
0
31
32 is returned when the
detected bit is not found
149
CHAPTER 7 REALOS-RELATED HARDWARE
■ Save/Restore Processing
If it is necessary to save and restore the internal state of the bit search module, such as when the bit search
module is used in an interrupt handler, use the following procedure:
1.Read the 1 detection data register and save its contents (save).
2.Use the bit search module.
3.Write the data saved in 1 to the 1 detection data register (restore).
With the above operation, the value obtained when the detection result register is read the next time
corresponds to the value written to the bit search module before 1. If the data register written to last is the 0
detection or change point detection register, the value is restored correctly with the above procedure.
150
CHAPTER 8
16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
This chapter describes the 16-bit reload timer, the
configuration and functions of registers, and 16-bit
reload timer operation.
8.1 Overview
8.2 16-bit Reload Timer Block Diagram
8.3 16-bit Reload Timer Registers
8.4 Operation of 16-bit Reload Timer
151
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
8.1
Overview
The 16-bit reload timer consists of a 16-bit down counter, a 16-bit reload register, an
internal counter, a prescaler for clock generation, and a control register.
The clock source can be selected from three internal clocks (machine clock divided by
2, 8, 32, 64 and 128) and external triggers.
The MB91260B series have three built-in channels for this reload timer.
No output to a pin of the reload timer 0.
■ Register List
Control status register (TMCSR:TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)
TMCSR0 Address 00004EH
TMCSR1 Address 000056H
TMCSR2 Address 00005EH
Read/Write →
Initial Value →
Read/Write →
Initial Value →
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
–
–
(X)
–
–
(X)
–
–
(X)
CSL2
R/W
(0)
CSL1
R/W
(0)
CSL0
R/W
(0)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MOD0
R/W
(0)
–
R
(0)
OUTL
R/W
(0)
RELD
R/W
(0)
INTE
R/W
(0)
UF
R/W
(0)
CNTE
R/W
(0)
TRG
R/W
(0)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
(X)
–
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
← Bit No.
MOD2 MOD1
R/W
R/W
(0)
(0)
← Bit No.
16-bit timer register (TMR:TMR0 to TMR2)
TMR0 Address 00004AH
TMR1 Address 000052H
TMR2 Address 00005AH
Read/Write →
Initial Value →
Read/Write →
Initial Value →
← Bit No.
← Bit No.
16-bit reload register (TMRLR:TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
TMRLR0 Address 000048H
TMRLR1 Address 000050H
TMRLR2 Address 000058H
Read/Write →
Initial Value →
Read/Write →
Initial Value →
152
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
W
(X)
–
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
← Bit No.
← Bit No.
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
8.2
16-bit Reload Timer Block Diagram
A block diagram of the reload timer is shown below.
■ Reload Timer Block Diagram
Figure 8.2-1 Block Diagram for Reload Timer
16-bit reload register
(TMRLR0 to TMRLR2)
Reload
RELD
16-bit down counter
(TMR0 to TMR2) UF
OUTL
INTE
OUT
CTL
Count
enable
IRQ
UF
CNTE
R-bus
TRG
CSL2
Clock selector
External timer output
TOT1(P70)
TOT2(P71)
CSL1
CSL0
EXCK
Prescaler
Prescaler
clear
IN CTL
CSL2
CSL1
CSL0
TO1E ,
TO2E
External
trigger
selection
PFR7 bit
External trigger input
TIN0(P51)
TIN1(P52)
TIN2(P53)
153
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
8.3
16-bit Reload Timer Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of reload timer registers.
■ Control Status Register (TMCSR:TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)
Control status register (TMCSR)
Address
TMCSR0: 00004EH
TMCSR1: 000056H
TMCSR2: 00005EH
9
← Bit No.
15
14
13
12
11
10
8
–
–
(X)
–
–
(X)
–
–
(X)
CSL2
R/W
(0)
CSL1
R/W
(0)
CSL0
R/W
(0)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MOD0
R/W
(0)
–
R
(0)
OUTL
R/W
(0)
RELD
R/W
(0)
INTE
R/W
(0)
UF
R/W
(0)
CNTE
R/W
(0)
TRG
R/W
(0)
MOD2 MOD1
R/W
R/W ← Read/Write
(0)
(0)
← Initial value
← Bit No.
← Read/Write
← Initial value
This register controls 16-bit timer operation modes and interrupts.
Rewrite bits other than UF, CNTE, and TRG only when CNTE = 0.
[bit12, bit11, bit10] CSL2, CSL1, CSL0 (Count source select)
These bits are count source select bits. Count sources can be selected from internal clocks and external
triggers. Selectable count sources are as follows.
φ=32 MHz
φ=16 MHz
Internal clock φ/21 (Initial value)
62.5 ns
125 ns
1
Internal clock φ/23
250 ns
0.5 µs
1
0
Internal clock φ/25
1.0 µs
2.0 µs
0
1
1
External trigger
–
–
1
0
0
Setting prohibited
–
–
1
0
1
Internal clock φ/26
2.0 µs
4.0 µs
1
1
0
Internal clock φ/27
4.0 µs
8.0 µs
1
1
1
ch.1 timer output (only ch.2 is settable)
ch.1
ch.1
CSL2
CSL1
CSL0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Count source (φ: Machine clock)
The count effective edges are set using the MOD1 and MOD0 bits when external triggers are specified for
count sources.
The minimum pulse width necessary for external triggers is 2×T (T: Machine clock cycle).
By using ch.1+ch.2 cascade connection, only ch.2 register can be set when CSL2, CSL1, CSL0="111B".
Setting is prohibited in ch.1.
154
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
[bit9, bit8, bit7] MOD2, MOD1, MOD0 (Mode)
These bits select the operation mode. The function is changed when the count source is "internal clock" or
"external trigger".
• When internal clock mode: reload trigger setting
• When external trigger mode: count effective edge setting
Be sure to set MOD2 bit to "0".
[Reload trigger setting at internal clock selection]
When the internal clock is selected as the count source, it loads the content of reload registers and continues
the count operation after the effective edge is inputted by setting MOD2 to MOD0 bits.
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Effective edge
0
0
0
Software trigger (initial value)
0
0
1
External trigger (rising edge)
0
1
0
External trigger (falling edge)
0
1
1
External trigger (both edges)
1
X
X
Setting prohibited
[Effective edge setting at external trigger selection]
When the external clock event is selected as the count source, it counts effective edge of the external trigger
by setting of MOD2 to MOD0 bits.
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Effective edge
X
0
0
–
X
0
1
External trigger (rising edge)
X
1
0
External trigger (falling edge)
X
1
1
External trigger (both edges)
X
X
X
Setting prohibited
When external trigger is selected, the reload is generated by software trigger and underflow.
[bit6] This bit is unused.
The read value is always "0".
[bit5] OUTL
This bit sets external timer output level. The output level is opposite when this bit is”0” and "1".
155
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
[bit4] RELD
This bit is the reload enable bit. If it is set to "1", reload mode is entered. As soon as the counter value
underflows from "0000H" to "FFFFH", the contents of the reload register are loaded into the counter and the
count operation is continued.
If this bit is set to "0", one-shot mode is entered and the count operation is stopped when the counter
underflows from "0000H" to "FFFFH".
TO1E, TO2E
OUTL
RELD
Output waveform
0
X
X
Output prohibited
1
0
0
"H" rectangular wave while counting
1
1
0
"L" rectangular wave while counting
1
0
1
"L" toggle output when counting starts
1
1
1
"H" toggle output when counting starts
TOxE is TO1E and TO2E in the PFR7 (Port Function Register). No output to a pin of the reload timer 0.
[bit3] INTE
This bit is the interrupt request enable bit. If the INTE bit is set to "1", an interrupt request is generated
when the UF bit is set to "1". If it is set to "0", no interrupt request is generated.
[bit2] UF
This bit is the timer interrupt request flag. This bit is set to "1" when the counter value underflows from
"0000H" to "FFFFH". Write "0" to this bit to clear it.
Writing "1" to this bit is meaningless.
When this bit is read by read-modify-write instructions, "1" is always read.
[bit1] CNTE
This bit is the count enable bit of the timer. Write "1" to this bit to enter the start trigger wait state. Write
"0" to this bit to stop the count operation.
[bit0] TRG
This bit is the software trigger bit. Write "1" to this bit to generate a software trigger, load the contents of
the reload register into the counter, and start the count operation.
Writing "0" to this bit is meaningless. The read value is always "0".
The trigger input to this register is valid only if CNTE=1. No operation occurs if CNTE=0.
156
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
■ TMR Register (16-bit Timer Register)
16-bit Timer Register (TMR)
Address
TMR0: 00004AH
TMR1: 000052H
TMR2: 00005AH
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
7
6
–
5
4
3
2
1
0
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
← Bit No.
← Read/Write
← Initial value
← Bit No.
← Read/Write
← Initial value
This register can read the count value of the 16-bit timer. The initial value is undefined. Be sure to read
this register using a 16-bit data transfer instruction.
■ TMRLR Register (16-bit Reload Register)
16-bit Reload Register (TMRLR)
Address
TMRLR0: 000048H
TMRLR1: 000050H
TMRLR2: 000058H
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
7
6
–
5
4
3
2
1
0
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
W
(X)
← Bit No.
← Read/Write
← Initial value
← Bit No.
← Read/Write
← Initial value
This register holds the initial value of a counter. The initial value is undefined. Be sure to read this register
using a 16-bit data transfer instruction.
157
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
8.4
Operation of 16-bit Reload Timer
This section describes the reload timer operation.
■ Internal Clock Operation
If the timer operates with a divide-by clock of the internal clock, one of the clocks generated by dividing
the machine clock by 2, 8, 32, 64, or 128 can be selected as the clock source.
To start the count operation as soon as counting is enabled, write "1" to both CNTE and TRG bits of the
control status register. Trigger input occurring due to the TRG bit is always valid regardless of the
operating mode while the timer is running (CNTE=1).
Figure 8.4-1 shows the startup and operations of the counter.
After the counter start trigger is input, Time T (T: peripheral clock machine cycle) is required for loading
data of the reload register into the counter.
Figure 8.4-1 Startup and Operations of the Counter
Count clock
Counter
Reload data
Data load
CNTE (register)
TRG (register)
T
158
-1
-1
-1
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
■ Underflow Operation
This timer defines an underflow as an event in which the counter value changes from "0000H" to "FFFFH".
Thus, an underflow occurs at the count of [Reload register setting value + 1].
If the RELD bit of the control status register is set to "1" when an underflow occurs, the contents of the
reload register are loaded into the counter and the count operation is continued. If the RELD bit is set to
"0", the counter stops at "FFFFH".
When an underflow occurs, it sets the UF bit of the control status register. If the INTE bit is set to "1" at
this time, it generates an interrupt request.
Figure 8.4-2 shows the operation when an underflow occurs.
Figure 8.4-2 Underflow Operation
Count clock
Counter
0000H
Reload data
-1
-1
-1
Data load
Underflow set
[RELD=1]
Count clock
Counter
0000H
FFFFH
Underflow set
[RELD=0]
159
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
■ Output Terminal Functions
TOT1 and TOT2 output terminals perform as a toggle output inverting by underflows when reload mode,
and as a pulse output indicating the counting process when one-shot mode. Output polarity can be set by
OUTL bit of the register. When OUTL=0, an initial value of the toggle output is "0", and one-shot pulse
output outputs "1" while counting. When setting OUTL=1, output waveform is inverted.
Figure 8.4-3 Output Terminal Function [RELD=1, OUTL=0]
Count starts
Underflow
TOT1,TOT2
General-purpose port
Inverted when
OUTL=1
CNTE
Startup trigger
Figure 8.4-4 Output Pin Function [RELD=0, OUTL=0]
Count starts
Underflow
TOT1, TOT2
General-purpose port
Inverted when
OUTL=1
CNTE
Startup trigger
Startup trigger wait status
160
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
■ Operating States of the Counter
The CNTE bit of the control register and the internal signal WAIT determine the counter status. The states
that can be set include the stop state, when CNTE=0 and WAIT=1 (STOP state); the startup trigger wait
state, when CNTE=1 and WAIT=1 (WAIT status); and the operation state, when CNTE=1 and WAIT=0
(RUN state). Figure 8.4-5 shows the state transitions.
Figure 8.4-5 Status Transitions of Counter
State transition due to hardware
Reset
State transition due to register access
STOP
OP
CNTE=0, WAIT=1
Counter: Holds the value when it
stops
Undefined right after reset
CNTE=1
TRG=0
WAITST
AITST
CNTE=1
TRG=1
RUN
UN
CNTE=1, WAIT=1
Counter: Holds the value when it
stops
Undefined right after reset
until data is loaded
RELD•UF
TRG=1
CNTE=1, WAIT=0
Counter: Running
TRG=1
RELD•UF
LOAD
AD
CNTE=1,WAIT=0
Loads contents of reload register into counter
Load completed
161
CHAPTER 8 16-BIT RELOAD TIMER
■ Notes
• The internal prescaler is enabled if a trigger (soft trigger or external trigger) is applied when bit1 (timer
enable: CNTE) of the control status register is set to "1".
• If the device attempts to set and clear the interrupt request flag at the same time, the flag is set
preferentially and the clear operation becomes ineffective.
• If the device attempts to write to the 16-bit reload timer register and reload the data into the 16-bit
reload timer register at the same time, old data is loaded into the counter. New data is loaded into the
counter at the next reload timing.
• If the device attempts to load and count the 16-bit timer register at the same time, the load (reload)
operation takes precedence.
162
CHAPTER 9
PPG (Programmable Pulse
Generator)
This chapter describes the overview of the PPG
(Programmable Pulse Generator) timer, the configuration
and functions of registers, and the operation of the PPG
timer.
9.1 Overview
9.2 Block Diagram
9.3 Register of PPG
9.4 Operation Explanation
163
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
9.1
Overview
PPG, the 8-bit reload timer module, performs the PPG output by the pulse output
control according to timer operation.
The hardware consists of 16 8-bit down counters, 32 8-bit reload registers, control
register, 16 external pulse outputs, and 16 interrupt outputs.
The MB91260B series has 16 channel for 8-bit PPG and 8 channel for 16-bit PPG.
■ Function of PPG
● 8-bit PPG output independent operation mode
Independent PPG output operation can be performed.
● 16-bit PPG output operation mode
One channel 16-bit PPG output can be operated.
● 8 + 8-bit PPG output operation mode
With setting the ch(n + 1) output as the ch(n) clock input, the 8-bit PPG output in any cycle can be
operated. (n=0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14)
● 16 + 16-bit PPG output operation mode
This mode sets the 16-bit prescaler output, ch(n + 3) + ch(n + 2) as a clock input for the 16-bit PPG,
ch(n + 1) + ch(n). (n=0, 4, 8, 12)
● PPG output operation
Outputs a pulse waveform with any period and duty ratio.
Can also be used in conjunction with an external circuit to form a D/A converter.
● Output invert function
The PPG output value can be inverted.
■ Register List
• PPG start register (TRG)
Address: 000130H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Read/Write →
Initial value →
164
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
PEN15
PEN14
PEN13
PEN12
PEN11
PEN10
PEN09
PEN08
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
←Bit No.
←Bit No.
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
• Output invert register (REVC)
Address: 000134H
←Bit No.
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
REV15
REV14
REV13
REV12
REV11
REV10
REV09
REV08
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Read/Write →
Initial value →
←Bit No.
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
REV07
REV06
REV05
REV04
REV03
REV02
REV01
REV00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Read/Write →
Initial value →
• GATE function control register (GATEC)
Bit7
Address: 000133H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit6
Bit5
-
-
-
-
-
-
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
Bit1
Bit0
STGR
EDGE
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
←Bit No.
• PPG 0 to PPG15 operation mode control register (PPGC0 to PPGC15)
Bit7
Address:
ch0 :000108H
ch1 :000109H
ch2 :00010AH
ch3 :00010BH
ch4 :000114H
ch5 :000115H
ch6 :000116H
ch7 :000117H
ch8 :000120H
ch9 :000121H
ch10 :000122H
ch11 :000123H
ch12 :00012CH
ch13 :00012DH
ch14 :00012EH
ch15 :00012FH
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
*
Bit0
*
PIEn
PUFn
PCS1
PCS0
MD1
MD0
PEN07
PEN06 INTMn
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN01
N00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01 PEPE
N00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
n = 0 to 15
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
(X)
*: MD1 and MD0 exist only in even-numbered channel,
but they do not exist in odd-numbered channel. The
initial value of odd-numbered channel is undefined.
Writing to them is meaningless.
● Reload register: 8-bit PPG mode
• Reload Registers H (PRLH0 to PRLH15)
Address:
ch 0 :000100H
ch 1 :000102H
ch 2 :000104H
ch 3 :000106H
ch 4 :00010CH
ch 5 :00010EH
ch 6 :000110H
ch 7 :000112H
ch 8 :000118H
ch 9 :00011AH
ch10 :00011CH
ch11 :00011EH
ch12 :000124H
ch13 :000126H
ch14 :000128H
ch15 :00012AH
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
N00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01 PE
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
165
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
• Reload Registers L (PRLL0 to PRLL15)
Bit7
Address:
ch 0 :000101H
ch 1 :000103H
ch 2 :000105H
ch 3:000107H
ch 4 :00010DH
ch 5 :00010FH
ch 6 :000111H
ch 7 :000113H
ch 8 :000119H
ch 9 :00011BH
ch10 :00011DH
ch11 :00011FH
ch12 :000125H
ch13 :000127H
ch14 :000129H
ch15 :00012BH
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN01
N00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01 PE
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
● Reload register: 16-bit PPG mode
• Reload Registers H (PRLH0, PRLH2, PRLH4, PRLH6, PRLH8, PRLH10, PRLH12, PRLH14)
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Bit7
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Address:
ch 0 :000100H
ch 2 :000104H
ch 4 :00010CH
ch 6 :000110H
ch 8 :000118H
ch10 :00011CH
ch12 :000124H
ch14 :000128H
166
R/W
(X)
Bit6
R/W
(X)
Bit5
R/W
(X)
Bit4
R/W
(X)
Bit9
Bit8
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
• Reload Registers L (PRLL0, PRLL2, PRLL4, PRLL6, PRLL8, PRLL10, PRLL12, PRLL14)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Bit5
R/W
(X)
Bit4
R/W
(X)
Bit9
Bit8
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Address:
ch 0 :000102H
ch 2 :000106H
ch 4 :00010EH
ch 6 :000112H
ch 8 :00011AH
ch10 :00011EH
ch12 :000126H
ch14 :00012AH
167
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
9.2
Block Diagram
This section explains the PPG block diagram.
■ Block Diagram
Figure 9.2-1 Block Diagram of 8-bit PPG (ch0, ch2, ch4, ch6, ch8, ch10, ch12, ch14)
Borrow of ch(n+1)
Machine clock divided-by-64
Machine clock divided-by-16
Machine clock divided-by-4
Machine clock
To Port
PPG
output latch
Inversion
Clear
PEN(n+1)
Count clock
selection
S
R Q
PCNT (down counter)
Reload
"H"/"L" select
"H"/"L" selector
PRLLn PRLBHn
PRLHn
PIEn
PUFn
Data bus for "L" side
Data bus for "H" side
PPGCn/TRG
n = 0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14
168
Operation mode
(control)
IRQn
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
Figure 9.2-2 Block Diagram of 8-bit PPG (ch1, ch5, ch9, ch13)
Borrow of ch(n+1)
Machine clock divided-by-64
Machine clock divided-by-16
Machine clock divided-by-4
Machine clock
To Port
PPG
output latch
Inversion
Clear
PENn
S
R Q
Count clock
selection
IRQn
PCNT (down counter)
Borrow of
ch(n-1)
Reload
"H"/"L" select
"H"/"L" selector
PRLLn
PRLBHn
PUFn
PIEn
PRLHn
Data bus for "L" side
Data bus for "H" side
PPGCn/TRG
n = 1,5,9,13
Operation mode
(control)
169
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
Figure 9.2-3 Block Diagram of 8-bit PPG (ch3, ch7, ch11, ch15)
To Port
Machine clock divided-by-64
Machine clock divided-by-16
Machine clock divided-by-4
Machine clock
PPG
output latch
Inversion
Clear
PENn
S
R Q
Count clock
selection
IRQn
PCNT (down counter)
Borrow of
ch(n-1)
Reload
"H"/"L" select
"H"/"L" selector
PRLLn
PRLBHn
PUFn
PIEn
PRLHn
Data bus for "L" side
Data bus for "H" side
PPGCn/TRG
n = 3,7,11,15
170
Operation mode
(control)
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
Figure 9.2-4 Block Diagram of Gate Function
From TRG register
PEN00 PEN01
Level detection
Selector
0
1
PEN00 for PPG ch0
Selector
From GATE of
multifunctional
timer
Selector
PEN01 for PPG ch1
STGR
0
1
0
X
1
X
1
X
EDGE
GATEC
MD1 ch0
MD0
MD1 ch1
MD0
171
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
9.3
Register of PPG
This section describes the PPG registers.
■ PPGCn Register (PPGn Operation Mode Control Register)
Figure 9.3-1 PPGCn Register (PPGn Operation Mode Control Register)
n=0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15
PPGC0 to PPGC15 operation mode control register (PPGCn) n = 0 to 15
Address:
ch 0 :000108H
ch 1 :000109H
ch 2 :00010AH
ch 3 :00010BH
ch 4 :000114H
ch 5 :000115H
ch 6 :000116H
ch 7 :000117H
ch 8 :000120H
ch 9 :000121H
ch10 :000122H
ch11 :000123H
ch12 :00012CH
ch13 :00012DH
ch14 :00012EH
ch15 :00012FH
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PIEn
PUFn
INTMn
PCS1
PCS0
MD1
MD0
-
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
(X)
[bit7] PIEn (Ppg Interrupt Enable): PPG interrupt enable bit
This bit controls a PPG interrupt enable as described below.
0
Disables the interrupt.
1
Enables the interrupt.
• If this bit is set to "1", an interrupt request is generated when the PUFn is set to "1".
• If this bit is set to "0", no interrupt request is generated.
• Initialized to "0" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit6] PUFn (Ppg Underflow Flag): PPG counter underflow bit
This bit controls PPG counter underflow bit as described below.
0
PPG counter underflow has not been detected.
1
PPG counter underflow has been detected.
• In the 8-bit PPG 2ch mode and the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, this bit is set to "1" when the count
value of ch0 underflows from "00H" to "FFH".
• In the 16-bit PPG 1ch mode, this bit is set to "1" when the count value of ch1/ch0 underflows from
"0000H" to "FFFFH".
• Writing "0" clears the bit to "0".
172
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
• Writing "1" to this bit is meaningless.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, 1 is always read.
• Initialized to "0" by reset.
• The read /write is possible.
[bit5] INTMn (Interrupt Mode): Interrupt mode bit
This bit can limit the PUFn bit detection at an underflow only from PRLBHn.
0
PUFn is set to 1 at an underflow.
1
PUFn is set to 1 at an underflow only from PRLBHn.
• Initialized to "0" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
• If this bit is set to "1", an interrupt is enabled at one cycle output of PPG waveform.
• Do not rewrite this bit when the interrupt is allowed.
[bit4, bit3] PCS1/PCS0(PPG Count Select): Count clock select bits
These bits are used to select the down counter operating clock as shown below.
PCS1
PCS0
Operating Mode
0
0
Machine clock (62.5 ns machine clock at 16 MHz)
0
1
Machine clock / 4 (250 ns machine clock at 16 MHz)
1
0
Machine clock / 16 (1 µs machine clock at 16 MHz)
1
1
Machine clock / 64 (4 µs machine clock at 16 MHz)
• Initialized to "00B" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit2, bit1] MD1/MD0(ppg count MoDe): Operation mode select bits
These bits are used to select the PPG timer operation mode as shown below.
MD1
MD0
Operating Mode
0
0
8-bit PPG 2ch independent mode
0
1
8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode
1
0
16-bit PPG mode
1
1
16-bit prescaler + 16-bit PPG mode
• Initialized to "00B" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
• These bits exist only in even-numbered channels.
173
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
■ PRLL/PRLH Register (Reload Register)
Reload register H (PRLH0 to PRLH15)
Address:
ch 0 :000100H
ch 1 :000102H
ch 2 :000104H
ch 3 :000106H
ch 4 :00010CH
ch 5 :00010EH
ch 6 :000110H
ch 7 :000112H
ch 8 :000118H
ch 9 :00011AH
ch10 :00011CH
ch11 :00011EH
ch12 :000124H
ch13 :000126H
ch14 :000128H
ch15 :00012AH
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
← Bit No.
Bit8
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
N00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01 PE
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Reload register L (PRLL0 to PRLL15)
Bit7
Address:
ch 0 :000101H
ch 1 :000103H
ch 2 :000105H
ch 3 :000107H
ch 4 :00010DH
ch 5 :00010FH
ch 6 :000111H
ch 7 :000113H
ch 8 :000119H
ch 9 :00011BH
ch10 :00011DH
ch11 :00011FH
ch12 :000125H
ch13 :000127H
ch14 :000129H
ch15 :00012BH
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
← Bit No.
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN01
N00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01 PE
PEN00
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
These registers hold reload values for a down counter PCNT. Each register has own role as shown below.
Register Name
Function
PRLL
Hold reload value at "L" side
PRLH
Hold reload value at "H" side
Each register can read or write.
Note:
When this register used in the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode and the 16-bit prescaler + 16-bit
PPG mode, PPG waveforms might vary from cycle to cycle if the different values are set to the PRLL
and the PRLH on the prescaler side. Therefore, it is recommended to set the same value to the
PRLL and the PRLH on the prescaler side.
174
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
■ TRG Register (PPG Activation Register)
PPG activation register (TRG)
Address: 000130H
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
PEN15
PEN14
PEN13
PEN12
PEN11
PEN10
PEN09
PEN08
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PEN07
PEN06
PEN05
PEN04
PEN03
PEN02
PEN01
PEN00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Read/Write →
Initial value →
← Bit No.
← Bit No.
[bit15 to bit0] PEN15 to PEN0 (Ppg ENable): PPG Operation Enable bits
These bits are used to select the PPG operation start and the operation mode as shown below.
PEN15 to PEN0
Operating State
0
Operation stop ("L" level output maintenance)
1
PPG enabling operations
• Initialized to "0" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
■ REVC Register (Output Invert Register)
Output invert register (REVC)
Address: 000134H
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
REV15
REV14
REV13
REV12
REV11
REV10
REV09
REV08
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
REV07
REV06
REV05
REV04
REV03
REV02
REV01
REV00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Read/Write →
Initial value →
← Bit No.
← Bit No.
[bit15 to bit0] REV15 to REV0: Output inversion bits
The PPG output values including the initial levels are inverted.
REV15 to REV0
Output level
0
Normal
1
Inversion
• Initialized to "0" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
• Since these bits invert the PPG outputs, they also invert the initial levels. The relationship between the
reload register "L" and "H" is reversed as well.
175
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
■ GATEC Register (GATE Function Control Register)
GATE function control register (GATEC)
Address: 000133H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
-
-
STGR
EDGE
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
← Bit No.
[bit1] STGR: Gate function select bit
This bit selects whether to use the start signal from a multifunctional timer or to start by the TRG register.
STGR
Operating mode
0
Start by TRG register
1
Start by a start signal from the multifunctional timer
• Initialized to "0" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit0] EDGE: Start valid edge select bit
This bit is used to select the start valid edge from the multifunctional timer as shown below.
EDGE
Operating mode
0
Rising start → Falling stop *1
1
Falling start → Rising stop *2
• Initialized to "0" by reset.
• The read / write is possible.
*1: Start at "H" period.
*2: Start at "L" period.
176
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
9.4
Operation Explanation
PPG has 16 channels for the 8-bit length PPG unit and can operate four modes in total
by combining: independent mode, 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, 16-bit PPG 1
channel mode, and 16-bit prescaler + 16-bit PPG mode.
■ Overview of Operation
Each of 8-bit length PPG units has two 8-bit-length reload registers for the "L" and "H" sides (PRLL,
PRLH). The value written to this register is reloaded into "L"/"H" sides of 8-bit down counter (PCNT)
alternately, counted down based on the count clock, and inverted a pin output (PPG) at reloading when a
counter borrow occurs. With this operation, the pin output (PPG) becomes a pulse output, which has
"L"/"H" width corresponding to the value of reload register.
The operation starts/restarts when the bit of the register is written.
The relationship between the reload operation and the pulse output is shown below.
Reload Operation
Terminal Output Change
PRLH → PCNT
PPGn [0 → 1]
PRLL → PCNT
PPGn [1 → 0]
n=0 to 15
Also, if the bit7: PIEn of PPGCn register is set to "1", an interrupt request outputs by borrow to the counter
value from "00H" to "FFH" (borrow from "0000H" to "FFFFH" in 16-bit PPG mode).
■ Operating Mode
There are four operation modes: independent mode, 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, 16-bit PPG 1 channel
mode, and 16-bit prescaler + 16-bit PPG mode.
• In the independent mode, a channel can operate as 8-bit PPG independently. The PPG output of ch(n) is
connected to PPG(n) pin. (n = 0 to 15)
• The 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode makes 1 channel operate as an 8-bit prescaler, counts by its
borrow output, and then allows the 8-bit PPG waveform in any cycle to be outputted. For example, the
prescaler output of ch1 is connected to the PPG1 pin; the PPG output of ch0 is connected to the PPG0
pin.
• In the 16-bit PPG 1 channel mode, two channels are combined, and the combined channel operates as
16-bit PPG. For example, if ch0 and ch1 are combined, 16-bit PPG outputs are connected to both PPG0
pin and PPG1 pin.
177
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
■ PPG Output Operation
PPG activates this block and starts counting when the bits of each channel on the TRG register (PPG
activation register) are set to "1". After operation starts, the count operation is stopped when each channel
bit of TRG register is set to "0". After having stopped, the pulse output holds "L" level.
Do not set the PPG channel as the operating state, with the prescaler channel as the stopped state, in the 8bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode and the 16-bit prescaler + 16-bit PPG mode.
In the 16-bit PPG mode, control the start and stop for PENn of each channel on TRG register
simultaneously (n = 0 to 15).
PPG output operation is explained below.
In PPG operation, the pulse wave with any frequency/duty ratio (the ratio between "H" level period and "L"
level period in pulse wave) is outputted continuously. If the pulse wave output is started, PPG will not stop
it before operation stop is set.
Figure 9.4-1 shows the output waveform of PPG operation.
Figure 9.4-1 Output Waveform of PPG Output Operation
PENn
Start operation
by PENn
(from “L” side)
Output pin
PPG
T × (L+1)
T × (H+1)
Start
L: PRLL value
H: PRLH value
T: Machine clock
or
Input from timebase counter
(by clock select of PPGC)
n = 0 to 15
■ Relation between Reload Value and Pulse Width
The pulse width to be outputted is the value that multiplies the cycle of the count clock by the value in the
reload register plus 1. Note that the pulse width will be one cycle of the count clock when the reload
register value is set to "00H" at operating the 8-bit PPG and when the reload register value is set to "0000H"
at operating the 16-bit PPG. Furthermore, the pulse width will be 256 cycles of the count clock when the
reload register value is set to "FFH" at operating the 8-bit PPG and will be 65536 cycles of the count clock
when the reload register value is set to "FFFFH" at operating the 16-bit PPG.
The equations for calculating the pulse width are shown below:
Pl = T × (L + 1)
Ph = T × (H + 1)
178
{
L: PRLL value
H: PRLH value
T: input clock cycle
Ph: high pulse width
Pl: low pulse width
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
■ Count Clock Selection
The count clock to be used for this block operation uses the input for the peripheral clock and timebase
counter and can be selected from one of the following four types of count clock inputs.
The count clock operates as shown below.
PPGC0 to PPGC15 Registers
Count Clock Operation
PCS1
PCS0
0
0
One count per peripheral clock
0
1
One count per 4 cycles of peripheral clock
1
0
One count per 16 cycles of peripheral clock
1
1
One count per 64 cycles of peripheral clock
Note that the first count cycle may become out of synchronization if the PPG side is started, in the 8-bit
prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode and the 16-bit prescaler + 16-bit PPG mode, and when the prescaler side is in
the operating state and the PPG side is in the stop state.
■ Control of Pulse Pin Output
The pulse output generated by operating this module can be outputted from external pins (PPG0 to PPG15).
In the 16-bit PPG mode, the same output can be obtained from allowing either external pin output because
PPG (m) and PPG (m + 1) output the same waveform. (m = 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14)
In the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode and the 16-bit prescaler + 16-bit PPG mode, the 8-bit prescaler
toggle waveform is outputted on the prescaler side, and the 8-bit PPG waveform is outputted on the PPG
side. Figure 9.4-2 shows an example of the output waveform in this mode.
Figure 9.4-2 Output Waveform of 8 + 8 PPG Output Operation
Ph1
Pl1
PPG1
PPG0
Ph0
Pl1 = T × (L1 + 1)
Ph1 = T × (L1 + 1)
Pl0 = T × (L1 + 1) × (L0 + 1)
Ph0 = T × (L1 + 1) × (H0 + 1)
Note: It is recommended to set
the same value to the PRLL
for ch1 and PRLH for ch1.
Pl0
L1 : PRLL value for ch1 and
PRLH value for ch1
L0 : PRLL value for ch0
H0 : PRLH value for ch0
T: Input clock cycle
Ph0: High pulse width for PPG0
Pl0: Low pulse width for PPG0
Ph1: High pulse width for PPG1
Pl1: Low pulse width for PPG1
179
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
■ Interruption
The interrupt on this module becomes active when a reload value is counted out and a borrow occurs.
However, when INTMn bit is set to "1", the interrupt becomes active only at underflow (borrow) from
PRLBHn. That is, the interrupt occurs when "H" width pulse ends.
In the 8-bit PPG mode and the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, each counter borrow performs own
interrupt request. In the 16-bit PPG mode and the 16-bit prescaler + 16 bit PPG mode, 16-bit counter
borrow sets PUF(m) and PUF (m + 1) simultaneously. For this reason, it is recommended that either PIE
(m) or PIE (m + 1) is enabled in order to unify the interrupt causes. Also, it is recommended to
simultaneously set PUF (m) and PUF (m + 1) for clearing the interrupt causes. (m = 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14)
■ GATE Function
By using the multifunctional timer signal, PPG can be: started-> stopped.
• In the 8-bit PPG mode and the 8-bit prescaler + 8-bit PPG mode, this function can activate the PPG ch0.
• In the 16-bit PPG mode and the 16-bit prescaler + 16-bit PPG mode, this function can activate the PPG
ch0, ch1.
Switching of each mode activation is based on the MD register setting of each PPG.
• PPG ch0: PPG ch0 start (8-bit PPG) at MD1, MD0 = 0, X
• PPG ch0: PPG ch0, ch1 start (16-bit PPG) at MD1, MD0 = 1, X
EDGE bit and the multifunctional timer signal can control the period when PPG activation is valid.
The following shows the PPG count operation by the EDGE bit and multifunctional timer.
Figure 9.4-3 PPG Count Operation by EDGE Bit and Multifunctional Timer
EDGE=0 (Rising start → Falling stop)
Multifunctional
timer signal
PPG count
Start
Stop
Start
Stop
Start
EDGE=1 (Falling start → Rising stop)
Multifunctional
timer signal
PPG count
Start
■ Initial Value of Each Hardware
Each hardware of this block is initialized by a reset as shown below.
<Register>
PPGC(n)→ 0000000XB
TRG
→ 0000000000000000B
REVC → 0000000000000000B
GATEC → XXXXXX00B
180
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
<Pulse output>
PPG(n) → "L"
<Interrupt request>
IRQ(n) → "L"
(n = 0 to 15)
Any register other than those above is not initialized.
■ PPG Combinations
Combinations of each PPG operation mode are listed below.
ch0: PPGC
ch2: PPGC
MD1
MD0
MD1
MD0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ch0
ch1
ch2
ch3
0
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
0
1
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
0
1
0
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
8-bit PPG
8-bit prescaler
0
1
0
1
8-bit PPG
8-bit prescaler
0
1
1
0
8-bit PPG
8-bit prescaler
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
16-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
1
0
0
1
16-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
8-bit prescaler
1
0
1
0
16-bit PPG
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
8-bit PPG
8-bit prescaler
16-bit PPG
Setting disabled
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
8-bit PPG
8-bit prescaler
16-bit PPG
Setting disabled
16-bit PPG
Setting disabled
16-bit PPG
16-bit prescaler
The operations for ch.(4, 5, 6, 7), ch.(8, 9, 10, 11), and ch.(12, 13, 14, 15) can be combined in the same way as for ch.(0, 1, 2,
3).
Replace as shown below.
{
ch0=ch4/ch8/ch12
ch1=ch5/ch9/ch13
ch2=ch6/ch10/ch14
ch3=ch7/ch11/ch15
181
CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)
182
CHAPTER 10
PWC (Pulse Width Count:
Pulse Width Measurement)
This chapter explains the overview of the pulse width
counter (PWC), the register configuration and functions
and the counter operation.
10.1 Overview
10.2 Block Diagram
10.3 Register of PWC
10.4 Operation Explanation
183
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
10.1
Overview
This section explains the pulse width measurement function for input signal.
There are two sets of a channel in total, which consists of one 16-bit up counter, one
input pulse divider and divide-by rate control register, one measurement input pin, and
one 16-bit control register. They implement the following functions.
■ Pulse Width Measurement Function
Measure the time between arbitrary events of external pulse inputs.
Internal clock to be used as the criterion can be selected from one of the following 3 types.
(4/16/32 division of machine clock)
Measurement mode
"H" pulse width (↑ to ↓)/"L" pulse width (↓ to ↑)
Rising cycle (↑ to ↑)/Falling cycle (↓ to ↓)
Measurement between edges (↑ or ↓ to ↓ or ↑)
Enable to measure the cycle after an input pulse divided by 2n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8) with the 8-bit input
divider.
Enable to generate an interrupt request when the measurement is completed.
Enable to select either the one-time-only measurement or the continuous measurement.
■ Register List
Address
Bit15 to Bit8
Bit7 to Bit0
0000E9H
PDIVR0
0000E0H 0000E1H
PWCSR0
0000E2H 0000E3H
PWCR0
0000EBH
PDIVR1
0000E4H 0000E5H
PWCSR1
PWCR1
0000E6H 0000E7H
184
Ratio of dividing frequency control register 0
Control/status register 0
Data buffer register 0
Ratio of dividing frequency control register 1
Control/status register 1
Data buffer register 1
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
10.2
Block Diagram
This section shows the PWC block diagram.
■ PWC Block Diagram
Figure 10.2-1 PWC Block Diagram
PWCR0/PWCR1 read
Error detection
16
/
/
16
ERR
PWCR0/PWCR1
Internal clock
(machine clock /4)
/ 16
Write enable
Reload
Data transfer
/ 16
Clock
R-bus
16-bit up counter
23
Overflow
Control bit output
divider
Clear
Count enable
Control circuit
Flag set, etc
22 Clock
Start edge
selection
Measurement
start edge
End edge
selection
CKS1/
CKS0
Divider clear
Division
ON/OFF
Input
waveform
comparator
Edge
detection
Measurement
end edge
PIS1/PSI0
Measurement end interrupt request
ERR
CKS1/CKS0
PWI0
PWI1
8-bit
divider
Overflow interrupt request
15
/
PWCSR0/PWCSR1
Divide ratio selection
2
/
PDIVR0/PDIVR1
185
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
10.3
Register of PWC
This section describes the PWC registers.
■ PWCSR Register (PWC Control/Status Register)
PWCSR0/PWCSR1 (Upper)
ch0:0000E0 H
ch1:0000E4 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
STRT
STOP
EDIR
EDIE
OVIR
OVIE
ERR
-
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R
(0)
(0)
PWCSR0/PWCSR1 (Lower)
ch0:0000E1 H
ch1:0000E5 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CKS1
CKS0
PIS1
PIS0
SC
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
[bit15] STRT: Counter start bit
[bit14] STOP: Counter stop bit
The bits start/restart/stop the 16-bit up counter, and indicate the counter operation status at reading. The
following shows the bit functions.
1. Function at writing (operation control)
STRT
STOP
Operation Control Functions
0
0
The influence is not in the function / the operation.
0
1
Start/restart a counter (counter enable) *
1
0
Stop a counter operation forcibly (disable count) *
1
1
The influence is not in the function / the operation.
*:The clear bit instruction is usable.
2. Function at reading (operating status indication)
STRT
STOP
Display of Operation Status
0
0
Count stopped (not started or measurement completed) [Initial value]
1
1
Count operating (measuring)
• Initialized to "00B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible. However, there are different meanings in writing and in reading as shown
above.
186
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
• If a read modify write instruction is issued, "11B" is read regardless of the operation.
• A bit-processing instruction (such as a bit clear) corresponding to each bit can be used for writing to the
STRT and STOP bit to start/stop the counter. However, the bit-processing instructions cannot be used
for reading an operating status. (Note that the status must be in operation if it is read.)
[bit13] EDIR: Measurement end interrupt request flag
The flag indicates that the measurement is completed in the pulse width count mode. A measurement end
interrupt request is generated if this bit is set when the measurement end interrupt request is enabled (bit12:
EDIE=1).
Set factor
Clear factor
Set when a pulse width count is completed
(the measurement result is stored in PWCR0 or PWCR1).
Cleared when PWCR0 or PWCR1 (measurement result) is read.
• Initialized to "0" at resetting.
• This bit is read-only. Writing does not change the bit value.
[bit12] EDIE: Measurement end interrupt request enable bit
This bit controls the measurement end interrupt request in the pulse width count mode as described below.
0
Disable the measurement end interrupt request output (an interrupt not generated when EDIR
is set) [Initial value]
1
Enable measurement end interrupt request output (interrupt is generated if EDIR is set)
• Initialized to "0" at resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit11] OVIR: Counter overflow Interrupt request flag
This flag indicates that the 16-bit up counter has overflowed from "FFFFH" to "0000H" in all modes. A
counter overflow interrupt request is generated if this bit is set when the counter overflow interrupt request
is enabled (bit10: OVIE = 1).
Set factor
Clear factor
Set when a counter overflow occurs ("FFFFH" to "0000H").
Cleared by writing 0.
• Initialized to "0" at resetting.
• The read / write is possible. However, only "0" can be written on it. Writing "1" does not change the bit
value.
• The read value by a read-modify-write instruction is always "1", regardless of the bit value.
187
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
[bit10] OVIE: Counter overflow interrupt request enable bit
This bit controls a counter overflow interrupt request as described below.
0
Disable the overflow interrupt request output (an interrupt not generated when OVIR is set)
[Initial value]
1
Enable overflow interrupt request output (interrupt is generated when OVIR is set)
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit9] ERR: Error flag
The flag indicates that the next measuring is completed before reading the measurement result in PWCR0
or PWCR1 in the continuous measurement mode of the pulse width count mode. At this point, the PWCR0
or PWCR1is updated to a new measurement result, the previous measurement result will be lost. The
measurement is continued regardless of this bit value.
Set factor
Set when the measurement result has not been read is lost because of the next result.
Clear factor
Cleared when PWCR0 or PWCR1 (measurement result) is read.
• Initialized to "0" at resetting.
• This bit is read-only. Writing does not change the bit value.
[bit8] (Reserved)
Reserved bit.
Read value is "0".
Be sure to write "0".
[bit7, bit6] CKS1, CKS0: Clock selection bits
Select an internal counter as listed in the table below.
CKS1
CKS0
Count Clock Selection
0
0
Clock generated by dividing the machine clock by 4 [Initial value]
0
1
Clock generated by dividing the machine clock by 16
1
0
Clock generated by dividing the machine clock by 32
1
1
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "00B" at resetting.
• The read / write is possible. Do not set "11B".
• These bits must not be updated after starting. These bits must be written before starting or after stopped.
188
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
[bit5, bit4] PIS1, PIS0: Pulse width measurement input pin select bit
These bits select the pulse width measurement input pin.
PIS1
PIS0
Input Clock Selection
0
0
(The pin PWC0 is selected) [Initial value]
0
1
2 input compare-select (rising-edge comparison)
1
0
2 input compare-select (falling-edge comparison)
1
1
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "00B" at resetting.
• Read and write are enabled. However, do not set "11B".
• This bit is effective only to PWC ch0. (PWI0/PWI1 is used as an input.) For details, see "■ Details for
pulse width measuring operation" in section 10.4 Operation Explanation.
• These bits must not be updated after starting. These bits must be written before starting or after stopped.
[bit3] SC: Measurement mode (single/continuous) select bit
Select a measurement mode as shown below.
SC
Measurement Mode Selection
At Pulse Width Measuring Mode
0
Single measurement mode [Initial value]
Stop after one measurement
1
Continuous measurement mode
Continuous measurement: buffer register enabled
• Initialized to "0" at resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
• This bit must not be updated after starting. This bit must be written before starting or after stopped.
189
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
[bit2, bit1, bit0] MOD2, MOD1, MOD0: Operation mode/measurement edge select bit
Select an operation mode and an edge for width measurement as listed in the table below.
MOD2
MOD1
MOD0
Operation Mode/Measurement Edge Selection
0
0
0
Pulse width measurement mode between all edges (↑ or ↓ to ↓ or ↑)
[initial value]
0
0
1
Division cycle measurement mode (input divider enabled)
0
1
0
Rising edge-to-edge cycle measurement mode (↑ to ↑)
0
1
1
"H" pulse width measurement mode (↑ to ↓)
1
0
0
"L" pulse width measurement mode (↓ to ↑)
1
0
1
Falling edge-to-edge cycle measurement mode (↓ to ↓)
1
1
0
1
1
1
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "000B" at resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
• These bits must not be updated after starting. These bits must be written before starting or after stopped.
■ PWCR0, PWCR1 Register (PWC Data Buffer Register)
PWCR0/PWCR1 (Upper)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Ch0:0000E3H
Read → R
Ch1:0000E7H Initial value → (0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
Ch0:0000E2H
Ch1:0000E6H
Read → R
Initial value → (0)
PWCR0/PWCR1 (Lower)
● Pulse width measurement mode
In the continuous measurement mode (PWCSR0 or PWCSR1 bit3: SC = 1), this register becomes a buffer
register which holds the previous measurement result. In this case, only read operation is possible, but write
operation does not affect the register value.
In the single measurement mode (PWCSR0 or PWCSR1 bit3: SC = 0), this register becomes an interface to
access the up counter directly. Also in this case, only read operation is possible, but write operation does
not affect the register value. Read operation is always possible, and can get the count value while counting
is in progress. The measurement result is saved after the measurement ends.
Be sure to use a halfword or word transfer instruction to access this register.
• Initialized to "0000H" at resetting.
• Only read operation is possible.
190
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
■ PDIVR (Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register)
PDIVR0/1
Ch0:0000E9H
Ch1:0000EBH
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
-
DIV2
DIV1
DIV0
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
This register is used in the division cycle measurement mode (PWCSR bit2, bit1, bit0: MOD2, MOD1,
MOD0=001B), and invalid in other modes.
In the division cycle measurement mode, divide the input pulse in the count pin by the divide-by rate set in
this register and measure one cycle width after divided. Select the divide-by rate as shown below.
DIV2
DIV1
DIV0
Divide Ratio Selection
0
0
0
21=2 dividing frequency [Initial value]
0
0
1
22=4 dividing frequency
0
1
0
23=8 dividing frequency
0
1
1
24=16 dividing frequency
1
0
0
25=32 dividing frequency
1
0
1
26=64 dividing frequency
1
1
0
27=128 dividing frequency
1
1
1
28=256 dividing frequency
• Initialized to "000B" at resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
• These bits must not be updated after starting. These bits must be written before starting or after stopped.
191
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
10.4
Operation Explanation
PWC has the measurement input pin, 8-bit input division, and so on. PWC has also the
pulse width count function. Three types of count clocks can be selected. The following
describes the basic functions/operations of the pulse width count.
● Pulse width measurement function
Enable to measure the time/cycle between any events of input pulse by the counter.
After starting, counting will not be performed until the defined measurement start edge is inputted. Start
incremental counting after the counter which detects a start edge is cleared to "0000H". Stop the counting
when a stop edge is detected. The value counted in this period is stored in the register as the pulse width.
Generate an interrupt requests when the measurement ends and an overflow occurs.
Operates as follows depending on the measurement mode after the measurement end.
•In single measurement mode: Stop operation.
•In continuous measurement mode: After transferred a counter value to the buffer register, stop the
counting until the measurement start edge is inputted again.
Figure 10.4-1 Pulse Width Measurement Operation
(Single Measurement Mode / "H" Width Measurement)
(Solid line is count value)
PWC input
measured pulse
Count value
FFFFH
0000H
Count clear
Start
measurement Count start
Count stop
Time
EDIR flag set (measurement end)
Figure 10.4-2 Pulse Width Measurement Operation
(Continuous Measurement Mode / "H" Width Measurement)
(Solid line is count value)
PWC input
measured pulse
Count value
Overflow
FFFFH
Transfer data to PWCR
0000H
Count clear
Start
measurement Count start
Transfer data to PWCR
Count clear
Count stop
Count start
Count stop
Time
EDIR flag set (measurement end)
192
OVIR flag set
EDIR flag set
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
■ Count Clock Selection
The count clock of counter can select three types of internal clock sources by setting of PWCSR register
(bit7, bit6: CKS1, CKS0).
Selectable count clocks are as shown below.
PWCSR
Selecting Internal Count Clock
CKS1, CKS0
00B
Machine clock 4-divided [initial value]
01B
Machine clock 16-divided
10B
Machine clock 32-divided
The clock generated by dividing the machine clock by 4 is selected for the initial value after a reset.
Be sure to select the count clock before the counter starts.
■ Selects Operation Mode
The PWCSR setting is used to select each operation/measurement mode.
• Operation mode setting:
PWCSR bit2 to bit0: MOD2, MOD1, MOD0
(for example, selecting a pulse width count mode, or determining a
measurement edge)
• Measurement mode setting:PWCSR bit3: SC
(selecting a single/continuous measurement)
The selection of operation modes by the combination of the mode selecting bits is listed below.
Operating Mode
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
↑ or ↓ to ↑ or ↓
Measurement between all edges Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
Measurement at cycle of
dividing frequency
(1-frequency division to
256-frequency division)
Pulse width
measurement
↑ to ↑ Rising-to-rising cycle
measurement
SC MOD2 MOD1 MOD0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
0
0
1
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
0
0
1
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
0
1
0
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
0
1
0
↑ to ↓
"H" pulse width measurement
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
0
1
1
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
0
1
1
↓ to ↑
"L" pulse width measurement
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
1
0
0
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
1
0
0
Single measurement: Buffer invalidity
0
1
0
1
Continuous measurement: Buffer effective
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
↓ to ↓ Falling-to-falling cycle
measurement
Setting disabled
All edge-to-edge measurement-single measurement mode is selected for the initial value after a reset.
Be sure to select the activation mode before the counter starts.
193
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
■ Starting and Stopping of Pulse Width Count
The PWCSR (bit15, bit14: STRT, STOP bits) is used to start/restart/forcibly stop operations.
STRT bit starts/restarts a pulse width count, and STOP bit forcibly stops it. They can work when "0" is
written to their bit. But they cannot work unless the value written to both bits is exclusive. Be sure to write
the following combination when an instruction other than bit manipulation instructions (other than byte) is
written.
Function
STRT
STOP
Starting / restarting of the pulse width count
0
1
Forcibly stopping of the pulse width count
1
0
When a bit manipulation instruction (bit clear instruction) is used, these combinations are written by the
hardware automatically without having to take them into consideration.
● Operation after startup
The following describes the operation after starting a pulse width count mode.
Pulse width count mode:
The count will not be performed until the measurement start edge is inputted.
After the measurement start edge is detected, 16-bit up counter is cleared to
"0000H", and the counting is started.
● Reactivation
A restart is to start a pulse width count (write "0" to the STRT bit) during operation after the count has been
started. By restarting, the following operation occurs.
There is no influence in the operation, at measurement start edge wait state. If the measurement is in
progress, stops the counting, and then waits for the measurement start edge again. At this time, if a restart
occurs simultaneously with detecting a measurement end edge, the measurement end flag (EDIR) is set,
and the measurement result is transferred to PWCR in continuous measurement mode,
● Stop
In single measurement mode, the counter overflow or the measurement end stops the count operation
automatically without having to take this into consideration. In other modes, or to stop operation before
stopping automatically, the operation must be stopped forcibly.
At two input selection of comparison
When the selected PWI1 edge is not inputted before the forced stop, the first measurement result after
the restart becomes erroneous. Perform the forced stop after the PWI1 edge is inputted.
194
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
● Checking the operation status
The above STRT bit and STOP bit work as an operating status indication bit during reading. The value
displayed means the following description.
STRT
STOP
Operating State
0
0
Counter stopped (except in waiting for a measurement start edge)
It is not active or shows that the measurement ended.
1
1
Counter operating, or waiting for a measurement start edge
The same value is read from either the STRT bit or the STOP bit. If a read modify write instruction (such
as bit-processing instruction) is issued, "11B" is always read from these bits. Do not read by using such
instruction.
■ Counter Clear
The 16-bit up counter is cleared to "0000H" in the following cases.
• At a reset
• Start the count when a measurement start edge is detected in the pulse width count mode.
■ Details for Pulse Width Measuring Operation
● Single measurement and continuous measurement
The pulse width count has the mode to perform the measurement once only and the mode to perform the
measurement continuously. PWCSR SC bit is used to select each mode (see "■ Selects the operation
mode"). The differences between these modes are as described below.
• Single measurement mode: When the first measurement end edge is inputted, the operation stops
counter count, sets the measurement end flag (EDIR) in PWCSR, and performs no
further measurement. However, if a restart occurs simultaneously, the operation
waits for a measurement start.
• Continuous count mode: When the count end edge is inputted, the operation stops the counter count,
sets the count end flag (EDIR) in PWCSR, and stops the count until the count start
edge is inputted again. When the measurement start edge is inputted again, the
operation clears the counter to "0000H", and then starts the measurement. When
the measurement ends, the measurement result of the counter is transferred to
PWCR.
Be sure to select/change the measurement mode while the counter is stopped.
● Measured data
The differences between the single measurement mode and the continuous measurement mode are in
handling of a measurement result and a count value, and the PWCR function. The following describes the
differences of the measurement results in both modes.
• Single measurement mode: A count value in measuring can be obtained when PWCR is read during
operation. A measurement result can be obtained when PWCR is read after
the measurement ends.
• Continuous measurement mode:A measurement result in counter is transferred to PWCR when the
measurement ends.
When PWCR is read, a previous measurement result can be obtained
and held while the measurement is in progress. A count value in
measuring cannot be read.
195
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
If the next measurement is completed before reading the measurement result in continuous measurement
mode, the previous measurement result is cleared by the new measurement result. In this case, the error flag
in PWCSR (ERR) is set. An error flag (ERR) is cleared automatically when PWCR is read.
● Input pin selection
There are 2 channels for PWC. Pins used for signal inputs for a pulse width count have 2 channels: PWI0
and PWI1. Therefore, the pin can be used independently for each channel. For input pin PWI0 and PWI1,
the time between rising and falling of each input waveform can be measured by combining PIS1 and PIS0
in PWCSR0. Note that PWI0 in the PWCR register is used. At this time, "H" width of PWC internal count
waveform is measured. Settings of MOD2, MOD1, MOD0 are ignored.
Figure 10.4-3 Input Waveform and Internal Count Waveform
PWI0 input waveform
PWI1 input waveform
PWC internal count
waveform at PIS1,PIS0=01
PWC internal count
waveform at PIS1,PIS0=10
For the time between rising and falling, "H" width of
this internal count waveform is measured.
• If you compare two inputs, start counting at PWI0, stop counting at PWI1 even for rising/falling
detection.
• If you change the detection mode for rising/falling, be sure to perform after the measurement ends.
196
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
● Measurement mode and count operation
The measurement mode can be selected from five types depending on the place where the input pulse is
measured. The cycle measurement mode is also prepared to arbitrarily divide the input pulse for highprecision measurement of higher frequency pulse width. They are described below.
Measurement Mode MOD2 MOD1 MOD0
Measurement Details (W: Pulse Width to Be Measured)
W
Pulse width
measurement between
all edges
↑ Count start
0
0
↓
Stop
The width between the edges continuously input is measured.
Count (measurement) beginning: When edge is detected
Count (measurement) end: When edge is detected
0
0
1
↑ Count start
(Example of
divide-by-4)
W
0
1
W
W
↓ Count stop
↓ Start
↓
Stop
Only the divide ratio of frequency selected by divide ratio frequency
setting register PDIVR0 or PDIVR1 divides the input pulse. And, the
cycle is measured.
Count (measurement) start: At rising edge detection (directly after start)
Count (measurement) end: when one cycle ends after it is divided
↑ Count start
Rising edge-to-edge
cycle measurement
↑ Stop
↑ Start
0
W
Measurement at cycle
of dividing frequency
W
W
↓ Count stop
↓ Start
W
W
↑ Count stop
↑ Start
0
↑ Stop
↑ Start
↑
Stop
Measure a cycle between rising edges.
Count (measurement) start: At rising edge detection
Count (measurement) end: At rising edge detection
W
"H" pulse width
measurement
↑ Count start
0
1
W
↓ Count stop
1
↑
Start
↑
Stop
The width at H period is measured.
Count (measurement) start: At rising edge detection
Count (measurement) end: At falling edge detection
W
W
↓ Count start
"L" pulse width
measurement
1
0
0
W
1
0
1
↓
Start
↑
Stop
The width at L period is measured.
Count (measurement) start: At falling edge detection
Count (measurement) end: At rising edge detection
↓ Count start
Rising edge-to-edge
cycle measurement
↑ Count stop
W
W
↓ Count stop
↓ Start
↓ Stop
↓ Start
↓
Stop
Measure a cycle between falling edges.
Count (measurement) start: At falling edge detection
Count (measurement) end: At falling edge detection
197
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
In any mode, after a measurement is started, the counter does not perform a count operation until a
measurement start edge is inputted. When the measurement start edge is inputted, the counter is cleared to
"0000H", and then continues the up count per count clock until a measurement end edge is inputted.
When the measurement end edge is inputted, the following operation occurs.
1. Measurement ending flag (EDIR) in PWCSR is set.
2. Stop the counter count operation. (Except in case that a restart occurs simultaneously.)
3. In continuous measurement mode: A counter value (count result) is transferred to PWCR, stops the
counting until the next measurement start edge is inputted.
4. In single measurement mode:
End the measurement. (Except in case that a restart occurs
simultaneously.)
When all edge-to-edge pulse width count or a cycle measurement in continuous mode is performed, the end
edge is used as the next measurement start edge.
● Minimum input pulse width
The following restrictions apply to the pulse that can be inputted to the pulse width count input pin (PWI1,
PWI0).
Minimum input width: More than machine cycle × 4
(more than 0.25 µs if the machine clock is 16 MHz)
If the pulse whose width is smaller than the above pulse width is inputted, the operation will be
unpredictable.
● Calculation method of pulse width/cycle
After the measurement ends, the pulse width/cycle to be counted can be calculated from the data of the
measurement result obtained in PWCR.
TW : Pulse width to be measured/cycle (µs)
n : Measurement result data in PWCR
TW = n × t / DIV [µs]
t
: Count clock cycle (µs)
DIV : Division ratio selected by the division ratio register PDIVR
(Substitute "1" in a mode other than the division cycle
measurement mode.
198
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
● Pulse width/cycle measurement range
The measurable range of the pulse width/cycle depends on the combination of a count clock and a divideby rate of the input divider.
The following table lists an example of the measurement range when machine clock (referred to as φ) = 16
MHz.
Divide Ratio
DIV2, DIV1, DIV0
At CKS1,
CKS0=00B (φ/4)
At CKS1,
CKS0=01B (φ/16)
At CKS1,
CKS0=10B (φ/32)
No frequency division
-
0.25 µs to 16.4 ms
[250 ns]
0.25 µs to 65.5 ms
[1.0 µs]
0.25 µs to 131 ms
[2.0 µs]
2-frequency division
000B
0.25 µs to 8.19 ms
[125 ns]
0.25 µs to 32.8 ms
[0.5 µs]
0.25 µs to 65.5 ms
[1.0 µs]
4-frequency division
001B
0.25 µs to 4.10 ms
[62.5 ns]
0.25 µs to 16.4 ms
[250 ns]
0.25 µs to 32.8 ms
[0.5 µs]
8-frequency division
010B
0.25 µs to 2.05 ms
[31.25 ns]
0.25 µs to 8.19 ms
[125 ns]
0.25 µs to 16.4 ms
[250 ns]
16-frequency division
011B
0.25 µs to 1.02 ms
[15.6 ns]
0.25 µs to 4.10 ms
[62.5 ns]
0.25 µs to 8.19 ms
[125 ns]
64-frequency division
100B
0.25 µs to 256 µs
[3.91 ns]
0.25 µs to 1.024 ms
[15.6 ns]
0.25 µs to 2.05 ms
[31.25 ns]
256-frequency division
101B
0.25 µs to 64.0 µs
[0.98 ns]
0.25 µs to 256 µs
[3.91 ns]
0.25 µs to 512 µs
[7.81 ns]
-
Others
Setting disabled
• At machine clock φ = 16 MHz
• The value in [] indicates the resolution per bit.
● Interrupt request generation
In the pulse width count mode, the following two interrupt requests can be generated.
• Interrupt request when a counter overflow occurs.
When an incremental count causes an overflow during measuring, an overflow flag is set, and an
interrupt request is generated if an overflow interrupt request is enabled.
• Interrupt request by the measurement end
When the measurement end edge is detected, the measurement end flag (EDIR) in the PWCSR is set. If
the measurement termination interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request occurs.
A measurement end flag (EDIR) is cleared automatically when a measurement result PWCR is read.
199
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
● Operation flowchart for pulse width count
Select count clock
Various Select operation / measurement mode
setting Clear interrupt flag
Enable interrupt
Select measurement input pin
Restart
Continuous measurement mode
Single measurement mode
Detect measurement start edge
Detect measurement start edge
Clear counter
Clear counter
Start count
Start count
Up count
Up count
Generation of overflow
→ OVIR flag set
Generation of overflow
→ OVIR flag set
Detect measurement end edge
→ EDIR flag set
200
Start by STRT bit
Detect measurement end edge
→ EDIR flag set
Stop count
Stop count
Transfer the count value to PWCR
Stop operation
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
■ Note
● Note on register rewriting
The following bits of the PWCSR register must not be rewritten during an operation. Be sure to rewrite
them before operation is started or after operation is stopped.
[bit7, bit6] CKS1, CKS0: Clock select bit
[bit5, bit4] PIS1, PIS0: Pulse width count input pin select bit
[bit3] SC: Measurement mode (single/continuous) select bit
[bit2, bit1, bit0] MOD2, MOD1, MOD0: Operation mode/measurement edge select bit
The PDIVR register must not be rewritten during an operation. Be sure to rewrite it before operation is
started or after operation is stopped.
● STRT bit and STOP bit of the PWCSR register
Note that both bits have different meanings in writing and in reading (See "10.3 Register of PWC"). Also,
the read value by a read-modify-write instruction is always "11B", regardless of the bit value. For this
reason, note that the bit-processing instructions cannot be used for reading an operation status (the status
must be in operation if it is read).
A bit-processing instruction (such as a bit clear instruction) corresponding to each bit can be used for
writing to the STRT and STOP bits to start/stop the counter.
● Counter clear
In the pulse width count mode, because a measurement start edge clears a counter, the data which exists in
counter before starting becomes invalided.
● Minimum input pulse width
The following restrictions apply to the pulse that can be inputted to the pulse width count input pin.
• Minimum input width: Machine cycle x 4 (≥ 250 ns when machine cycle is 62.5 ns)
• Maximum input frequency: Clock generated by dividing the machine clock by 4 (≤ 4 MHz when
machine cycle is 16 MHz)
If the pulse which has smaller width/higher frequency than the above is inputted, the operation will be
unpredictable. If there may be such noise on the input signal, remove the noise through a filter outside the
chip, and then input the pulse.
● Measurement mode at cycle of dividing frequency
Note that the pulse width obtained from the measured result calculation is the average value because the
input pulses are divided in the division cycle measurement mode among the pulse width measurement
modes.
● Clock select bit
Setting "11B" to the (bit7, bit6): CKS1, CKS0: clock select bit of the PWCSR register is prohibited.
● Reserved bit
The (bit8) of PWCSR register is a reserved bit. When writing to this bit, be sure to set to "0".
201
CHAPTER 10 PWC (Pulse Width Count: Pulse Width Measurement)
● Reactivation under operation
If a count operation is restarted after it was started, the followings may occur depending on the timing.
• In the pulse width single count mode, if starting a measurement end edge is simultaneously
The operation is restarted and waits for a measurement start edge, but a measurement end flag (EDIR) is
set.
• In the pulse width continuous measurement mode, if starting a measurement end edge is simultaneously
The operation is restarted and waits for a measurement start edge, but the measurement end flag (EDIR)
is set. The measurement result at that point is transferred to the PWCR.
When restarting an operation in progress, interrupt control or others must be performed with care to the
operation of flags, as mentioned above.
202
CHAPTER 11
MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
This chapter explains the overview of the multifunction
timer, the configuration and functions of registers, and
operation of the multifunction timer.
11.1 Overview
11.2 Block Diagram
11.3 Pins of Multifunctional Timer
11.4 Multifunctional Timer Register
11.5 Multifunctional Timer Interrupt
11.6 Operation of Multifunctional Timer
11.7 Notes on Using Multifunctional Timer
11.8 Program Example of Multifunctional Timer
203
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.1
Overview
Multifunctional timer consists of one 16-bit free-run timer, six 16-bit output compares,
four 16-bit input captures, 8 channels of 8/16-bit PPG timer, one waveform generator,
and three A/D activation compares. If this waveform generator is used, 12 different
waveforms can be outputted from the 16-bit free-run timer, and an input pulse width and
an external clock cycle can be measured.
■ Configuration of Multifunctional Timer
● 16-bit free-run timer (×1)
• The 16-bit free-run timer consists of 16-bit up/down counters, control registers, 16-bit compare clear
registers (with buffer registers), and prescalers.
• Nine kinds of count operation clocks (φ, φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, φ/16, φ/32, φ/64, φ/128, φ/256) can be selected
(φ: Machine clock).
• A compare clear interrupt is generated when a compare clear register compares and matches 16-bit freerun timer. A zero detection interrupt is generated while the 16-bit free-run timer detects a count value
"0".
• A compare clear register has selectable buffer registers. (Data written to this buffer register is transferred
to a compare clear register.) When the 16-bit free-run timer is stopped and data is written to the buffer,
the transfer is performed immediately. When the timer value "0" is detected during the 16-bit free-run
timer operation, data is transferred from the buffer.
• When a compare match with a reset, a software clear, or a compare clear register occurs in the up count
mode, the count value is reset to "0000H".
• This counter output value can be used as a multifunctional timer output compare and an input capture
clock count.
• When a zero detection or a compare match occurs, A/D can be activated.
● 16-bit output compare (×6)
• The 16-bit output compare consists of six 16-bit compare register (with selectable buffer registers),
compare output latches, and compare control registers. When the 16-bit free-run timer value matches the
compare register, an interrupt is generated and an output level is reversed.
• Six compare registers can be operated independently. An output pin and an interrupt flag are assigned to
each compare register.
• Two compare registers can be paired to control an output pin. The output pin can be reversed with using
two compare registers together.
• The initial value of the output pin can be set.
• An interrupt can be generated when the output compare register matches the 16-bit free-run timer.
● 16 bit input capture (×4)
• The input capture consists of four independent external input pins, and capture registers and capture
control registers associated to these pins. When an edge of an input signal is detected on an external pin,
the value of the 16-bit free-run timer can be stored to the capture register. Also, an interrupt can be
generated at the same time.
204
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
• The trigger edge for the external input signal can be selected from the three types: rising edge, falling
edge, and both edges. Also, there are registers that indicate whether the trigger edge is a rising edge or a
falling edge.
• Four input captures can be used independently.
• An interrupt can be generated when a valid edge of an external input signal is detected.
● 8/16-bit PPG timer (×8)
• The PPG timer 0 is used to provide the PPG signal for the waveform generator. For more information on
PPG timer 0, see "CHAPTER 9 PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator)".
● Waveform generator
• The waveform generator consists of three 16-bit dead timers, three timer control registers, and one 16bit waveform control register.
• The waveform generator can generate real-time output, 16-bit PPG waveform output, non-overlap 3phase waveform output (for inverter control), and DC chopper waveform output.
• The non-overlap waveform output can be generated on the basis of the dead time of the 16-bit dead
timer (dead time timer function).
• The non-overlap waveform output can be generated when the real-time output is activated in 2 channel
mode (dead time timer function).
• When a real-time output compare match is detected, GATE signal is generated to started or stopped the
PPG timer operation (GATE function).
• When a real-time output compare match is detected, the 16-bit dead timer becomes active. With
generating the GATE signal for controlling the PPG operation, the PPG timer 0 can be start or stop
easily (GATE function).
• DTTI pins can be used to control stopping forcibly.
• DTTI registers can be used to control stopping forcibly.
● AD activate compare (×3)
• When the 16-bit free-run timer value matches the compare register, A/D can be activated.
• Compare 0 can activate the unit 0 of the A/D converter.
• Compare 1 can activate the unit 1 of the A/D converter.
• Compare 2 can activate the unit 2 of the A/D converter.
205
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.2
Block Diagram
This section describes the block diagram of the multifunctional timer.
■ Block Diagram of Multifunctional Timer
Figure 11.2-1 Block Diagram of Multifunctional Timer
Real-time I/O
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
→ Output compare 0
→ Output compare 1
→ Output compare 2
→ Output compare 3
→ Output compare 4
→ Output compare 5
Internal data bus
RTO0(U)
RTO1 → Pin
RTO1(X)
RTO2 → Pin
RTO2(V)
RTO3 → Pin
RTO3(Y)
RTO4 → Pin
RTO4(W)
16-bit output compare
Waveform
generator
RTO5 → Pin
RTO5(Z)
RT0 to RT5
Transfer data from buffer
Counter value
RT0 to RT5
DTTI ← Pin
DTTI
Interrupt → 16-bit dead
timer 0,1,2
Interrupt → Zero detection
Interrupt → Compare clear
Interrupt → DTTI falling edge
detection
PPG0 ← PPG0
A/D trigger
16-bit free-run timer
GATE → GATE
EXCK
Counter value Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
Interrupt
16-bit input capture IC0
Counter value
A/D activation
compare
206
RTO0 → Pin
Pin
CKI
Input capture 0
Input capture 1
Input capture 2
Input capture 3
Pin IC0
IC1
Pin IC1
IC2
Pin
IC2
IC3
Pin
IC3
Unit 0 of A/D converter activation
Unit 1 of A/D converter activation
Unit 2 of A/D converter activation
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.2-2 Block Diagram of 16-bit Free-run Timer
STOP
MODE
SCLR
STOP UP/UP-DOWN
Stop
CLK2
CLK1
CLK0
Prescaler
CLR
Zero detection
circuit
Up/up down
16-bit free-run timer
Zero detection
(To output compare)
CK
To input capture and
output compare
Transfer
16-bit compare clear
register
Compare circuit
Compare clear match
(To output compare)
Internal data bus
16-bit compare clear
buffer register
I0
O
I1
Selector
Selector
I0
O
I1
Interrupt
I0
O
I1
Selector
Mask circuit
MSI2
MSI1
MSI0
ICLR
ICRE
IRQZF
Interrupt
IRQZE
I0
O
I1
Selector
A/D1 activation
(To A/D activation compare)
I0
O
I1
Selector
SEL2
SEL1
AD2E
A/D2 activation
(To A/D activation compare)
AD1E
207
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.2-3 Block Diagram of 16-bit Output Compare
Count value from free-run timer
BUF0
BTS0
Compare buffer register
Zero detection
from free-run timer
Compare clear match
from free-run timer
I0
O
I1
Selector
Transfer
Compare register 0,2,4
BUF1
BTS1
Internal data bus
Compare circuit
I0
O
I1
Selector
Compare buffer register
Transfer
Compare register 1,3,5
CMOD
Compare circuit
IOP1
IOP0
IOE1
T
Q
RT0,RT2,RT4
(Waveform generator)
T
Q
RT1,RT3,RT5
(Waveform generator)
IOE0
Interrupt
Interrupt
208
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.2-4 Block Diagram of 16-bit Input Capture
Count value from free-run timer
Capture register 0
IC0
detection
Edge detectio
ICP0
ICE0
EG01
EG00
Internal data bus
Interrupt 0
Capture register 1
IC1
detection
Edge detectio
ICP1
ICE1
EG11
EG10
Interrupt 1
Capture register 2
IC2
Edge detectio
detection
ICP2
ICE2
EG21
EG20
IEI2
Interrupt 2
IC3
detection
Edge detectio
Capture register 3
ICP3
ICE3
EG31
EG30
IEI3
Interrupt 3
Note: Input capture 0 and 1 do not have the detection edge register.
209
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.2-5 Block Diagram of Waveform Generator
DTTI
SIGCR2
SIGCR
DTTI
SIGCR1
SIGCR
DCK2
DCK1
DCK0
NRSL
DTIF
DTIE
PICSH01
PICSH0
PGEN1
PGEN0
DTCR0
DTCR
GATE0/GATE1
TMD6
GTEN5
Waveform
contro
control
RT0
TO0
TO1
Compare circuit
circui
Selector
Selecto
Dead time
generato
generator
16-bit dead timer register 0
PGEN3
X
TMD3
GTEN3
GTEN2
Waveform
control
contro
TO2
TO3
16-bit
timer 1
Compare circuit
circui
Selector
Selecto
PGEN5
V
Dead time
generato
generator
16-bit dead timer register 1
PICSH01
PICSH0
Selector
Selecto
RT3
RTO3(Y)
Y
GATE4/GATE5
TMD1
TMD0
GTEN1
GTEN0
Waveform
contro
control
RT4
TO4
TO5
circui
Compare circuit
16-bit dead timer register 2
Selector
Selecto
RT5
210
RTO2(V)
PGEN4
DTCR2
DTCR
16-bit
timer 2
RTO1(X)
GATE2/GATE3
TMD4
RT2
TMD2
RTO0(U)
PGEN2
DTCR1
DTCR
TMD5
U
Output control
contro
Internal data bus
PICSH01
PICSH0
Selector
Selecto
RT1
16-bit
timer 0
GATE
(To PPG0)
GTEN4
Output control
contro
TMD7
Selector
Selecto
Dead time
generator
generato
W
Z
Output control
contro
TMD8
NWS0
Noise cancel
cance
DTTI control circuit
circui
Divider
Divide
PPG0
NWS1
RTO4(W)
RTO5(Z)
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.2-6 Block Diagram of A/D Activate Compare
Count value from free-run timer
Compare registe
Compar
register 0
Match
Internal data bus
Compare circui
circuit
A/D0 activation
Compare enable
Compare registe
register 1
Compar
A/D1 activation
(From free-run timer)
A/D1 activation
Match
circuit
Compare circui
Compare enable
Compare registe
Compar
register 2
A/D2 activation
(From free-run timer)
A/D2 activation
Match
circui
Compare circuit
Compare enable
CE2
CE1
CE0
211
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.3
Pins of Multifunctional Timer
This section describes the pins of the multifunctional timer.
■ Pins of Multifunctional Timer
Table 11.3-1 Pins of Multifunctional Timer
Pin Name
Pin Function
I/O type
Pull-up
Option
Stand-by
Control
Pin Setting
Port7 I/O, DTTI
Yes
Set a pin as input port (DDR7:
bit2 = 0).
PG0/INT4/ Port G I/O, external interrupt
CKI
input, external clock
None
Set a pin as input port (DDRG:
bit0 = 0).
P72/DTTI
P36/IC0
Set a pin as input port (DDR3:
bit6 = 0).
Port3 I/O, input capture 0
Selectable
P37/IC1
Port3 I/O, input capture 1
Set a pin as input port (DDR3:
bit7 = 0).
P60/IC2
Port6 I/O, input capture 2
Set a pin as input port 6 (DDR6:
bit0 = 0).
P61/IC3
Port6 I/O, input capture 3
Set a pin as input port (DDR6:
bit1 = 0).
P30/RTO0
(U)
Port3 I/O, RTO0
P31/RTO1
(X)
Port3 I/O, RTO1
P32/RTO2
(V)
Port3 I/O, RTO2
Set RTO0 output.
(OCSH1: OTE0=1, DDR3:
bit0=1)
CMOS
output,
CMOS
hysteresis
input
Yes
None
Set RTO1 output.
(OCSH1: OTE1=1, DDR3:
bit1=1)
Set RTO2 output.
(OCSH3: OTE0=1, DDR3:
bit2=1)
P33/RTO3
(Y)
Port3 I/O, RTO3
Set RTO3 output.
(OCSH3: OTE1=1, DDR3:
bit3=1)
P34/RTO4
(W)
Port3 I/O, RTO4
Set RTO4 output.
(OCSH5: OTE0=1, DDR3:
bit4=1)
P35/RTO5
(Z)
Port3 I/O, RTO5
Set RTO5 output.
(OCSH5: OTE1=1, DDR3:
bit5=1)
DDRx: Port direction register
OCSHx: Compare control register
212
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4
Multifunctional Timer Register
This section describes the multifunctional timer registers.
■ 16-bit Free-run Timer Register
Compare clear buffer register, Compare clear register (Upper)
CPCLRBH/CPCLRH
Address: 0000A4 H
CPCLRBH Write →
CPCLRH Read →
Initial value →
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
CL15
CL14
CL13
CL12
CL11
CL10
CL09
CL08
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
Compare clear buffer register, Compare clear register (Lower)
CPCLRBL/CPCLRL
CPCLRBL Write →
CPCLRL Read →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CL07
CL06
CL05
CL04
CL03
CL02
CL01
CL00
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
W
R
(1)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Timer data register (Upper)
TCDTH
Address: 0000A6 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
T10
T09
T08
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Timer data register (Lower)
TCDTL
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
T07
T06
T05
T04
T03
T02
T01
T00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Timer state control register (Upper)
TCCSH
Address: 0000A8 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
ECKE
IRQZF
IRQZE
MSI2
MSI1
MSI0
ICLR
ICRE
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Timer state control register (Lower)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
BFE
STOP
MODE
SCLR
CLK3
CLK2
CLK1
CLK0
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(0)
R/W
(1)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
A/D trigger control register
ADTRGC
Address: 0000AB H
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
TCCSL
Address: 0000A9 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
SEL2
SEL1
AD2E
AD1E
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
213
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Output Compare Register
Output compare buffer register, Output compare register (Upper)
OCCPBH0 to OCCPBH5/
OCCPH0 to OCCPH5
Bit15
Address :
OP15
000090H
000092H OCCPBH Write → W
000094H OCCPH Read →
R
000096H Initial value →
(0)
000098H
00009AH
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
OP14
OP13
OP12
OP11
OP10
OP09
OP08
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
Output compare buffer register, Output compare register (Lower)
OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5/
OCCPL0 to OCCPL5
OCCPBL Write →
OCCPL Read →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
OP07
OP06
OP05
OP04
OP03
OP02
OP01
OP00
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
W
R
(0)
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
-
BTS1
BTS0
CMOD
OTE1
OTE0
OTD1
OTD0
(X)
R/W
(1)
R/W
(1)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Compare control register 1,3,5 (Upper)
OCSH1,OCSH3,OCSH5
Address :
00009CH
00009EH Read/Write →
0000A0H Initial value →
Compare control register 0,2,4 (Lower)
Bit7
Bit6
OCSL0,OCSL2,OCSL4
Address :
IOP1
IOP0
00009DH
00009FH Read/Write
R/W
R/W
0000A1H Initial value →
(0)
(0)
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
IOE1
IOE0
BUF1
BUF0
CST1
CST0
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(1)
R/W
(1)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Compare mode control register
OCMOD
Bit15
Address:
0000A2H
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
MOD15
MOD14
MOD13
MOD12
MOD11
MOD10
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Read/Write →
Initial value →
214
Bit15
(X)
Bit14
(X)
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Input Capture Registers
Input capture data register (Upper)
IPCPH0 to IPCPH3
Bit15
Address :
CP15
0000ACH
0000AEH Read →
R
0000B0H Initial value →
(X)
0000B2H
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
CP14
CP13
CP12
CP11
CP10
CP09
CP08
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CP07
CP06
CP05
CP04
CP03
CP02
CP01
CP00
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Input capture data register (Lower)
IPCPL0 to IPCPL3
Read →
Initial value →
Input capture state control register (ch2,3) (Upper)
ICSH23
Address: 0000B6 H
Read →
Initial value →
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
-
-
-
-
-
-
IEI3
IEI2
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R
(0)
R
(0)
Input capture state control register (ch2,3) (Lower)
ICSL23
Address: 0000B7 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
ICP3
R/W
(0)
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
ICP2
ICE3
ICE2
EG31
EG30
EG21
EG20
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit9
Bit8
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
PPG output control / Input capture state control register (ch0,1) (Upper)
PICSH01
Address: 0000B4 H
Write →
Initial value →
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
PGEN5
PGEN4
PGEN3
PGEN2
PGEN1
PGEN0
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
-
-
W
(0)
(X)
(X)
Input capture state control register (ch0,1) (Lower)
PICSL01
Address: 0000B5 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
ICP1
ICP0
ICE1
ICE0
EG11
EG10
EG01
EG00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
215
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Waveform Generator Registers
16-bit dead timer register (Upper)
TMRRH0,TMRRH1,
TMRRH2
Bit15
Address:
TR15
0000BCH
0000BEH Read/Write →
R/W
0000C0H Initial value →
(X)
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
TR14
TR13
TR12
TR11
TR10
TR09
TR08
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TR07
TR06
TR05
TR04
TR03
TR02
TR01
TR00
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
DMOD0
GTEN1
GTEN0
TMIF0
TMIE0
TMD2
TMD1
TMD0
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
16-bit dead timer register (Lower)
Bit7
TMRRL0,TMRRL1,
TMRRL2
Read/Write →
Initial value →
16-bit dead timer control register 0
DTCR0
Address: 0000C4 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
GTEN2
TMIF1
TMIE1
TMD5
TMD4
TMD3
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
16-bit dead timer control register 1
DTCR1
Address : 0000C5 H
Bit7
DMOD1 GTEN3
Read/Write →
Initial value →
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
16-bit dead timer control register 2
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
DMOD2
GTEN5
GTEN4
TMIF2
TMIE2
TMD8
TMD7
TMD6
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Waveform control register 1
Bit7
SIGCR1
Address: 0000C9 H
DTIE
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
DTIF
NRSL
DCK2
DCK1
DCK0
NWS1
NWS0
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTTI
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R/W
(1)
DTCR2
Address: 0000C6 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Waveform control register 2
SIGCR2
Address: 0000CB H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
216
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ A/D Activation Compare Registers
Compare register 0,1,2 (Upper)
ADCOMP0/ADCOMP1/
ADCOMP2
Bit15
Address :
CMP15
ch0:0000CCH
ch1:0000CEH Read/Write → R/W
ch2:0000D0H Initial value → (0)
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
CMP14
CMP13
CMP12
CMP11
CMP10
CMP09
CMP08
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CMP07
CMP06
CMP05
CMP04
CMP03
CMP02
CMP01
CMP00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
-
CE2
CE1
CE0
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Compare register 0,1,2 (Lower)
ADCOMP0/ADCOMP1/
ADCOMP2
Read/Write → R/W
Initial value → (0)
Control register
ADCOMPC
Address: 0000D3 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
217
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.1
Compare Clear Buffer Register (CPCLRBH, CPCLRBL) /
Compare Clear Register (CPCLRH, CPCLRL)
The compare clear buffer register (CPCLRBH, CPCLRBL) is a 16-bit buffer register
which exists in the compare clear register (CPCLRH, CPCLRL).
Both the CPCLRBH, CPCLRBL register and the CPCLRH, CPCLRL register exist in the
same address.
■ Compare-clear Buffer Register (CPCLRBH, CPCLRBL)
Compare clear buffer register (Upper)
CPCLRBH
Address: 0000A4 H
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
CL15
CL14
CL13
CL12
CL11
CL10
CL09
CL08
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
Write →
Initial value → (1)
Compare clear buffer register (Lower)
CPCLRBL
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CL07
CL06
CL05
CL04
CL03
CL02
CL01
CL00
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
(1)
W
Write →
Initial value → (1)
The compare clear buffer register is a buffer register which exists in the same address of the compare clear
register (CPCLRH, CPCLRL). When the buffer function is disabled (the lower of the timer state control
register (TCCSL), BFE: bit7 = 0), or the free-run timer is stopped, the value of the compare clear buffer
register is transferred to the compare clear register immediately. If the buffer function is enabled, the value
is transferred to the compare clear register when the count value 0 of the 16-bit free-run timer is detected.
To access this register, use a halfword or word access instruction.
218
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Compare Clear Register (CPCLRH, CPCLRL)
Compare clear register (Upper)
CPCLRH
Address: 0000A4 H
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
CL15
CL14
CL13
CL12
CL11
CL10
CL09
CL08
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CL07
CL06
CL05
CL04
CL03
CL02
CL01
CL00
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
(1)
R
Read →
Initial value → (1)
Compare clear register (Lower)
CPCLRL
Address: 0000A5 H
R
Read →
Initial value → (1)
The compare clear register is used to compare with the count value of the 16-bit free-run timer. In the up
count mode, the 16-bit free-run timer is reset to "0000H" when this register matches with the count value of
the 16-bit free-run timer. In up/down count mode, the 16-bit free-run timer changes its mode from the up
counting to the down counting when this register matches the count value of the 16-bit free-run timer; or
changes from the down counting to up counting when a zero detection occurs.
To access this register, use a halfword or word access instruction.
219
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.2
Timer Data Register (TCDTH, TCDTL)
The timer data register (TCDTH, TCDTL) is used to read the count value of the 16-bit
free-run timer.
■ Timer Data Register (TCDTH, TCDTL)
Timer data register (Upper)
TCDTH
Address: 0000A6 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
T15
T14
T13
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
T12
T11
T10
T09
T08
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Timer data register (Lower)
TCDTL
Address: 0000A7 H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
T07
T06
T05
T04
T03
T02
T01
T00
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
The timer data register is used to read the count value of the 16-bit free-run timer. The count value is
cleared to "0000H" immediately when a reset occurs. Writing the value to this register can be set the timer
value. However, write a value while the timer is stopped (the lower of the timer state control register
(TCCSL), STOP: bit6 = 1). To access the timer data register, use a halfword or word access instruction.
16-bit free-run timer is initialized immediately when the following factors occur.
• Reset
• Clear bit of the timer state control register (TCCSL) (SCLR: bit4) = 1
• Match of the compare clear register and the timer count value in the up count mode (the lower of the
timer state control register (TCCSL), MODE: bit5 = 0)
220
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.3
Timer State Control Register (TCCSH, TCCSL)
The timer state control register (TCCSH, TCCSL) is a 16-bit register which is used to
control the operation of the 16-bit free-run timer.
■ Timer State Control Register, Upper Byte (TCCSH)
Timer state control register (Upper)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
ECKE
IRQZF
IRQZE
MSI2
MSI1
MSI0
ICLR
ICRE
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ICRE
TCCSH
Address: 0000A8 H
Initial value: 00000000 B
Compare clear interrupt request enable bit
0
Disable interrupt request
1
Enable interrupt request
Compare clear interrupt flag bit
ICLR
Read
Write
0
No compare clear match
Clear this bit
1
Compare clear matches
No effect this bit
MSI2
MSI1
MSI0
0
0
0
Generate interrupt at 1st match occurred
0
0
1
Generate interrupt at 2nd match occurred
0
1
0
Generate interrupt at 3rd match occurred
0
1
1
Generate interrupt at 4th match occurred
1
0
0
Generate interrupt at 5th match occurred
1
0
1
Generate interrupt at 6th match occurred
1
1
0
Generate interrupt at 7th match occurred
1
1
1
Generate interrupt at 8th match occurred
IRQZE
Interrupt mask selection bit
Zero detection interrupt request enable bit
0
Disable interrupt request
1
Enable interrupt request
IRQZF
Zero detection interrupt flag bit
Read
Write
0
Zero is not detected
Clear this bit
1
Zero is detected
No effect on this bit
ECKE
Clock select bit
0
Internal clock
1
External clock
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
221
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-1 Timer State Control Register, Upper Byte (TCCSH) (1 / 2)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used to select the internal clock or the external clock as a count clock of the 16bit free-run timer.
bit15
ECKE:
Clock select bit
• Setting this bit to "0" selects the internal clock. To select a count clock frequency, you also
need to select a clock frequency select bit of the TCCSL register (CLK 3 to CLK 0: bit3 to
bit0).
• Setting this bit to "1" selects the external clock. The external clock is inputted from CKI
pins. Therefore, write "0" to the bit7 of the port direction register (DDR1) to enable the
external clock input.
Note:
The count clock is changed immediately when this bit is set. Therefore, this bit must be
changed when the output compare and the input capture are stopped.
• When the count value of the 16-bit free-run timer is "0000H", this bit is set to "1".
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
IRQZF:
bit14 Zero detection
interrupt flag bit
IRQZE:
Zero detection
bit13
interrupt request
enable bit
Note:
In the up count mode (the lower of the timer state control register (TCCSL), MODE: bit5 =
0), this bit is set to "1" when the interrupt defined in the interrupt mask select bit (the upper
of the timer state control register (TCCSH), MSI 2 to MSI 0: bit12 to bit10 is the value other
than "000B") occurs. When no interrupt occurs, this bit is not set to "1".
In the up count mode (MODE: bit5 = 1), this bit is set every time the zero detection occurs
regardless of the value for the MSI 2 to MSI 0: bit12 to bit10.
When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ)
The software clear (TCCSL: bit4 SCLR = 1) cannot be set this bit.
When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ) division
The software clear (TCCSL: bit4 SCLR = 1) can set this bit.
When this bit and the interrupt flag bit (IRQZF: bit14) are set to "1", an interrupt request to the
CPU can be generated.
• In the up count mode (MODE = 0), these bits are used to set the number of masking of the
compare clear interrupt. In up/down count mode (MODE = 1), they are used to set the
number of masking for the zero detection interrupt.
bit12 MSI2 to MSI0:
bit11 Interrupt mask
bit10 selection bit
222
• Setting these bits to "0" do not mask the interrupt cause.
Note:
When the interrupt cause has been masked twice, and then the third interrupt is processed,
these bits must be set to "010B".
The read value is masked count value.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-1 Timer State Control Register, Upper Byte (TCCSH) (2 / 2)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is set to "1" when the value of the compare clear matches the value of the 16-bit
free-run timer.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
bit9
ICLR:
Compare clear
interrupt flag bit
bit8
ICRE: compare
clear interrupt
request enable bit
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
Note:
In the up count mode (the lower of the timer state control register (TCCSL), MODE: bit5 =
0), this bit is set to "1" when the interrupt defined in the interrupt mask select bit (the upper
of the timer state control register (TCCSH), MSI 2 to MSI 0: bit12 to bit10 is the value other
than "000B") occurs. When no interrupt occurs, this bit is not set to "1".
In the up/down count mode (MODE = 1), this bit is set every time a compare clear occurs
regardless of the value for the MSI 2 to MSI 0.
An interrupt request to the CPU can be generated when this bit and the compare clear interrupt
flag bit (ICLR: bit9) are set to "1".
223
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Timer State Control Register, Lower Byte (TCCSL)
Timer state control register (Lower)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
BFE
STOP
MODE
SCLR
CLK3
CLK2
CLK1
CLK0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TCCSL
Address: 0000A9 H
Initial value: 01000000 B
Clock frequency select bit
CLK3 CLK2
CLK1
CLK0
Count
clock
φ =32MHz
0
0
0
0
φ
0
0
0
1
φ /2
62.5 ns
0
0
1
0
φ /4
125 ns
0
0
1
1
φ /8
0
1
0
0
φ /16
0
1
0
1
φ /32
0
1
1
0
φ /64
0
1
1
1
φ /128
0
0
0
φ /256
1
Disable other setting
φ =16MHz
φ =8MHz
31.25 ns 62.5 ns
125 ns
125 ns
0.25 ms
-
-
-
-
φ =4MHz
φ =1MHz
-
φ: Machine cycle
SCLR
0
1
Timer clear bit
Read
Always read "0"
0
Up count mode
1
Up/down count mode
STOP
Timer enable bit
0
Enable count (start count)
1
Disable count (stop count)
BFE
224
Initialized counter to "0000H"
Timer count mode bit
MODE
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
Write
No effect on this bit
Compare clear buffer enabled bit
0
Disable compare clear buffer
1
Enable compare clear buffer
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-2 Timer State Control Register, Lower Byte (TCCSL)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used to enable a compare clear buffer.
bit7
• When this bit is set to "0":
The compare clear buffer is disabled. Thus, the compare clear register (CPCLRH, CPCLRL)
can be written directly.
BFE:
Compare clear
buffer enabled bit • When this bit is set to "1":
The compare clear buffer is enabled. The data written and stored into the compare clear
buffer is transferred to the compare clear register when the count value "0" of the 16-bit
free-run timer is detected.
• This bit is used to start/stop the 16-bit free-run timer counting.
• When this bit is set to "0": the 16-bit free-run timer counting is started.
bit6
STOP:
Timer enable bit
• When this bit is set to "1": the 16-bit free-run timer counting is stopped.
Note:
When the 16-bit free-run timer stops, the operation of the output compare also stops.
• This bit is used to select a count mode of the 16-bit free-run timer.
• When this bit is set to "0":
The up count mode is selected. The timer continues to perform incremental counting until the
count value matches a compare clear register and is reset "0000H". Then, the timer restarts
to perform incremental counting.
bit5
MODE:
Timer count
mode bit
• When this bit is set to "1":
The up/down count mode is selected. The timer continues to perform incremental counting
until the count value matches a compare clear register. Then, the mode changes to the down
count. After that, the mode changes to the up count again when the count value reaches to
"0000H".
• This bit can be written even if the timer is operating or stopped. When timer is operating, the
value written to this bit is saved in a buffer. Then, the buffer value changes the count mode
when the timer value becomes "0000H".
• This bit is used to initialize the 16-bit free-run timer to "0000H".
• When this bit is set to "0": there is no meaning.
• When this bit is set to "1": the 16-bit free-run timer is initialized to "0000H".
• The read value is always "0".
bit4
SCLR:
Timer clear bit
Notes:
• When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ)
Writing "1" to this bit does not set the zero detection interrupt flag. The zero detection
interrupt does not occur.
• When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ) division
Writing "1" to this bit sets the zero detection interrupt flag. If the interrupt is enabled, the
zero detection interrupt occurs.
bit3
CLK3 to CLK0:
bit2
Clock frequency
bit1
select bit
bit0
• These bits are used to select a count clock frequency of the 16-bit free-run timer.
• The count clock is changed immediately when these bits are set. Therefore, these bits must
be changed when the output compare and the input capture are stopped.
225
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.4
A/D Trigger Control Register (ADTRGC)
This register controls the A/D trigger signal output when a free-run timer compare
match or a zero detection occurs.
■ A/D Trigger Control Register (ADTRGC)
AD trigger control register
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
SEL2
SEL1
AD2E
AD1E
-
-
-
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
AD1E
A/D1 trigger output enable bit
0
Disable
1
Enable
AD2E
A/D2 trigger output enable bit
0
Disable
1
Enable
SEL1
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
- : Unused bit
ADTRGC
Address: 0000AB H
Initial value: XXXX0000 B
A/D1 trigger source select bit
0
At zero detection
1
At compare match
SEL2
A/D2 trigger source select bit
0
At zero detection
1
At compare match
Table 11.4-3 A/D Trigger Control Register (ADTRGC)
Bit Name
bit7
bit6
Unused bit
bit5
bit4
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to these bits have no effect on operation.
bit3
SEL2:
This bit is the select bit if A/D2 trigger is outputted when a zero detection of the freeA/D2 trigger source select bit run timer or a compare match occurs.
bit2
SEL1:
This bit is the select bit if A/D1 trigger is outputted when a zero detection of the freeA/D1 trigger source select bit run timer or a compare match occurs.
bit1
AD2E:
A/D2 trigger enable bit
• When this bit is set to "0", the A/D2 trigger signal is not outputted.
bit0
AD1E:
A/D1 trigger enable bit
• When this bit is set to "0", the A/D1 trigger signal is not outputted.
226
• When this bit is set to "1", the A/D2 trigger signal can be outputted.
• When this bit is set to "1", the A/D1 trigger signal can be outputted.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.5
Output Compare Buffer Register (OCCPBH0 to OCCPBH5,
OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5) / Output Compare Register (OCCPH0 to
OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to OCCPL5)
The output compare buffer register (OCCPBH, OCCPBL) is a 16-bit buffer register for
the output compare register (OCCPH, OCCPL).
Both the OCCPBH, OCCPBL register and the OCCPH, OCCPL register exist in the same
address.
■ Output Compare Buffer Register
(OCCPBH: OCCPBH0 to OCCPBH5, OCCPBL: OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5)
Output compare buffer register (Upper)
OCCPBH0 to OCCPBH5
Address :
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
OP15
OP14
000090H
000092H
W
W
Write →
000094H
Initial value → (0)
(0)
000096H
000098H
00009AH
Output compare buffer register (Lower)
OP13
OP12
OP11
OP10
OP09
OP08
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5
Bit15
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
OP07
OP06
OP05
OP04
OP03
OP02
OP01
OP00
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
(0)
W
Write →
Initial value → (0)
The output compare buffer register is a buffer register for the output compare register (OCCPH, OCCPL).
When the buffer function is disabled (the lower of the compare control register (OCSL0, OCSL2, OCSL4),
BUF1, BUF0: bit3, bit2 = "11B"), or the free-run timer is stopped, the value of the output compare buffer
register is transferred to the output compare register immediately. When the buffer function is enabled (the
lower of the compare control register (OCSL0, OCSL2, OCSL4), BUF1, BUF0: bit3, bit2 = "00B"), the
value is transferred according to the transfer select bit (BTS1, BTS0: bit14, bit13) of the upper of the
compare control register (OCSH1, OCSH3, OCSH5) when a compare clear match or a zero detection
occurs.
To access this register, use a halfword or word access instruction.
227
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Output Compare Register
(OCCPH: OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL: OCCPL0 to OCCPL5)
Output compare register (Upper)
OCCPH0 to OCCPH5
Address:
000090H
000092H
000094H
000096H
000098H
00009AH
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
OP15
OP14
OP13
OP12
OP11
OP10
OP09
OP08
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
OP07
OP06
OP05
OP04
OP03
OP02
OP01
OP00
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
(0)
R
Read →
Initial value → (0)
Output compare register (Lower)
OCCPL0 to OCCPL5
R
Read
Initial value → (0)
The output compare register is a 16-bit register used to compare with the count value of the 16-bit free-run
timer. Set the value of the output compare buffer register (OCCPBH, OCCPBL) before the timer operation
is enabled.
When the value of the output compare register matches the count value of the 16-bit free-run timer, a
compare signal is generated and the output compare interrupt flag bit (the lower of the compare control
register (OCSL0, OCSL2 OCSL4), IOP1, IOP0: bit7, bit6) is set. When the output level is set (the upper of
the compare control register (OCSH1, OCSH3, OCSH5), OTD1, OTD0: bit9, bit8), an output level waveform
generator (RTO0 to RTO5) corresponding to the output compare register (OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0
to OCCPL5) can be reversed.
To access this register, use a halfword or word access instruction.
228
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.6
Compare Control Register
(OCSH0 to OCSH5, OCSL0 to OCSL5)
The compare control register is used to control the output level, output enable, output
level reverse mode, compare operation enable, compare match interrupt enable, and
compare match interrupt flag of RT0 to RT5.
■ Compare Control Register, Upper Byte (OCSH1, OCSH3, OCSH5)
Compare control register (Upper)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
-
BTS1
BTS0
CMOD
OTE1
OTE0
OTD1
OTD0
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Output level bit
OTD0
0
Read
Write
Count output value of RT0,RT2,
or RT4
1
1
Write
Count output value of RT1,RT3,
or RT5
RT1,RT3, or RT5 output ”0”
RT1,RT3, or RT5 output ”1”
Output enable bit
0
General-purpose I/O port
1
Waveform generator output pin (RTO0,RTO2,RTO4)
OTE1
Output enable bit
0
General-purpose I/O port
1
Waveform generator output pin (RTO1,RTO3,RTO5)
Output level reserve mode bit
CMOD
MOD1x=0
MOD1x=1
RT0,RT2,RT4: This level is reversed immediately at
the match with compare register 0,2,4 occurs
RT1,RT3,RT5: This level is reversed immediately at
the match with compare register 1,3,5 occurs
RT0,RT2,RT4: This level is reversed immediately at
the match with compare register 0,2,4 occurs
1
RT0,RT2, or RT4 output ”1”
Read
OTE0
0
RT0,RT2, or RT4 output ”0”
Output level bit
OTD1
0
OCSH1,OCSH3,OCSH5
Address: 00009CH
00009EH
0000A0H
Initial value: X1100000 B
RT1,RT3,RT5: This level is reversed immediately at
the match with compare register (0 or 1),(2 or
3),(4 or 5) occurs
Set "1" at match in up count mode.
Reset "0" at match in down count mode.
Reset "0" at match in up count mode.
Set "1" at match in down count mode.
X= 0 to 5
BTS0
0
1
BTS1
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
-: Unused
Buffer transition selection bit
Transfer starts when zero detection occurs (ch 0, ch 2, ch 4)
Transfer starts when compare clear match occurs (ch 0, ch 2, ch 4)
Buffer transition selection bit
0
Transfer starts when zero detection occurs (ch 1, ch 3, ch 5)
1
Transfer starts when compare clear match occurs (ch 1, ch 3, ch 5)
229
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-4 Compare Control Register, Upper Byte (OCSH1, OCSH3, OCSH5) (1 / 2)
Bit Name
bit15 Unused bit
BTS1:
bit14 Buffer transition
selection bit
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to this bit has no effect on operation.
• This bit is used to select the time when the data is transferred from the output compare buffer
registers (OCCPBH0, OCCPBH2, OCCPBH4, OCCPBL0, OCCPBL2, OCCPBL4) to the output
compare registers (OCCPH1, OCCPH3, OCCPH5, OCCPL1, OCCPL3, OCCPL5).
• Setting this bit to "0" starts the data transfer when the count value 0 of the 16-bit free-run
timer is detected.
• Setting this bit to "1" starts the data transfer when a compare clear match of the 16-bit freerun timer occurs.
BTS0:
bit13 Buffer transition
selection bit
• This bit is used to select the time when the data is transferred from the output compare buffer
registers (OCCPBH0, OCCPBH2, OCCPBH4, OCCPBL0, OCCPBL2, OCCPBL4) to the output
compare registers (OCCPH1, OCCPH3, OCCPH5, OCCPL1, OCCPL3, OCCPL5).
• Setting this bit to "0" starts the data transfer when the count value 0 of the 16-bit free-run
timer is detected.
• Setting this bit to "1" starts the data transfer when a compare clear match of the 16-bit freerun timer occurs.
• This bit is used to switch the pin output level reverse mode immediately when the match
occurs while the pin output is enabled (OTE1 = 1 or OTE0 = 1).
• When this bit is set to "0":
The compare mode control register (OCMOD): MOD1x = 0
- RT0, RT2, RT4: The level is reversed immediately when the compare registers 0, 2, 4
match the 16-bit free-run timer.
- RT1, RT3, RT5: The level is reversed immediately when the compare registers 1, 3, 5
match the 16-bit free-run timer.
The compare mode control register (OCMOD): MOD1x = 1
- Set to "1" when the match occurs in the up count mode.
CMOD:
bit12 Output level
reverse mode bit
- Reset to "0" when the match occurs in the down count mode.
• When this bit is set to "1":
The compare mode control register (OCMOD): MOD1x = 0
- RT0, RT2, RT4: The level is reversed immediately when the compare registers 0, 2, 4
match the 16-bit free-run timer.
- RT1, RT3, RT5: The level is reversed immediately when the compare registers (0 or 1)
(2 or 3) (4 or 5) match the 16-bit free-run timer.
When the value of the compare register 0, 2, 4 and 1, 3, 5 is the same, the operation is the
same operation as only one compare register is used.
The compare mode control register (OCMOD): MOD1x = 1
- Reset to "0" when the match occurs in the up count mode.
- Set to "1" when the match occurs in the down count mode.
230
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-4 Compare Control Register, Upper Byte (OCSH1, OCSH3, OCSH5) (2 / 2)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used to enable the waveform generator output (RTO1, RTO3, RTO5) to ports.
• The initial value of this bit is "0".
OTE1:
Note:
bit11
Output enable bit
When the waveform generator is disabled (the lower of the 16-bit dead timer control register
(DTCR0, DTCR1, DTCR2), TMD2 to TMD0,TMD5 to TMD3, TMD8 to TMD6: bit2 to bit0 =
000B), RTO1, RTO3, RTO5 outputs the same value as the output compare.
• This bit is used to enable the waveform generator output (RTO0, RTO2, RTO4) to ports.
• The initial value of this bit is "0".
OTE0:
Note:
bit10
Output enable bit
When the waveform generator is disabled (the lower of the 16-bit dead timer control register
(DTCR0, DTCR1, DTCR2), TMD2 to TMD0,TMD5 to TMD3, TMD8 to TMD6: bit2 to bit0 =
000B), RTO0, RTO2, RTO4 outputs the same value as the output compare.
• This bit is used to change a pin output level of the output compare 1, 3, 5 (RT1, RT3, RT5).
bit9
OTD1:
Output level bit
• The initial value of the compare pin output is "0".
• Before data is written, be sure to stop the compare operation. The read value of this bit
indicates the output compare value of RT1, RT3, RT5.
• This bit is used to change a pin output level of the output compare 0, 2, 4 (RT0, RT2, RT4).
bit8
OTD0:
Output level bit
• The initial value of the compare pin output is "0".
• Before data is written, be sure to stop the compare operation. The read value of this bit
indicates the output compare value of RT0, RT2, RT4.
231
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Compare Control Register, Lower Byte (OCSL0, OCSL2, OCSL4)
Compare control register (Lower)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
IOP1
IOP0
IOE1
IOE0
BUF1
BUF0
CST1
CST0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
CST0
Compare operation enable bit
0
Disable compare operation of compare register 0,2,4
1
Enable compare operation of compare register 0,2,4
CST1
Compare operation enable bit
0
Disable compare operation of compare register 1,3,5
1
Enable compare operation of compare register 1,3,5
BUF0
Compare buffer invalid bit
0
Valid compare buffer of compare register 0,2,4
1
Invalid compare buffer of compare register 0,2,4
BUF1
Valid compare buffer of compare register 1,3,5
1
Invalid compare buffer of compare register 1,3,5
Compare match interrupt enable bit
0
Disable compare match interrupt of compare register 0,2,4
1
Enable compare match interrupt of compare register 0,2,4
IOE1
Compare match interrupt enable bit
0
Disable compare match interrupt of compare register 1,3,5
1
Enable compare match interrupt of compare register 1,3,5
IOP0
Compare match interrupt flag bit
Read
Write
0
Compare match interrupt of compare
register 0,2,4 does not occur.
Clear this bit
1
Compare match interrupt of compare
register 0,2,4 occurs.
No effect on this bit
IOP1
232
Compare buffer invalid bit
0
IOE0
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
OCSL0,OCSL2,OCSL4
Address: 00009D H
00009FH
0000A1H
Initial value: 00001100 B
Compare match interrupt flag bit
Read
Write
0
Compare match interrupt of compare
register 1,3,5 does not occur.
Clear this bit
1
Compare match interrupt of compare
register 1,3,5 occur.
No effect on this bit
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-5 Compare Control Register, Lower Byte (OCSL0, OCSL2, OCSL4)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is an interrupt flag which indicates that the compare register 1, 3, 5 matches the
value of the 16-bit free-run timer.
IOP1:
bit7 Compare match
interrupt flag bit
• This bit is set to "1" when the value of the compare register matches the value of the 16-bit
free-run timer.
• When this bit is set while the compare match interrupt enable bit (IOE1: bit5) is enabled, the
output compare interrupt occurs.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
• This bit is an interrupt flag which indicates that the compare register 0, 2, 4 matches the
value of the 16-bit free-run timer.
IOP0:
bit6 Compare match
interrupt flag bit
• This bit is set to "1" when the value of the compare register matches the value of the 16-bit
free-run timer.
• When this bit is set while the compare match interrupt enable bit (IOE0: bit4) is enabled, the
output compare interrupt occurs.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
• This bit is used to enable the output compare interrupt of the compare register 1, 3, 5.
IOE1:
bit5 Compare match
• When the compare match interrupt flag bit (IOP1: bit7) is set while "1" is written to this bit,
interrupt enable bit
the output compare interrupt occurs.
• This bit is used to enable the output compare interrupt of the compare register 0, 2, 4.
IOE0:
bit4 Compare match
• When the compare match interrupt flag bit (IOP0: bit7) is set while "1" is written to this bit,
interrupt enable bit
the output compare interrupt occurs.
BUF1:
bit3 Compare buffer
disable bit
• This bit is used to disable the buffer function of the output compare register 1, 3, 5.
BUF0:
bit2 Compare buffer
disable bit
• This bit is used to disable the buffer function of the output compare register 0, 2, 4.
• Setting this bit to "0" enables the buffer function.
• Setting this bit to "0" enables the buffer function.
• This bit is used to enable the compare operation between the 16-bit free-run timer and
compare register 1, 3, 5.
CST1:
• Before the compare operation is enabled, be sure to write the value to the compare register 1,
bit1 Compare operation
3, 5 and the timer data register (TCDTH, TCDTL).
enable bit
Note:
The output compare is synchronized with the 16-bit free-run timer clock. Therefore, when the
16-bit free-run timer is stopped, the compare operation is also stopped.
• This bit is used to enable the compare operation between the 16-bit free-run timer and
compare register 0, 2, 4.
CST0:
• Before the compare operation is enabled, be sure to write the value to the compare register 0,
bit0 Compare operation
2, 4 and the timer data register (TCDTH, TCDTL).
enable bit
Note:
The output compare is synchronized with the 16-bit free-run timer clock. Therefore, when the
16-bit free-run timer is stopped, the zero detection and the compare operation are also stopped.
233
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.7
Compare Mode Control Register (OCMOD)
The compare mode control register controls to reverse or set/reset the output level
when the compare match occurs.
■ Compare Mode Control Register (OCMOD)
Compare mode control register
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
-
-
MOD15
MOD14
MOD13
MOD12
-
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
MOD10
OCMOD
Address: 0000A2 H
MOD11 MOD10
R/W
R/W
Initial value: XX000000 B
Ch 0 compare match output setting bit
Reverse previous output value
1
Set to "1" or reset to "0" by CMOD
0
Ch 1 compare match output setting bit
Reverse previous output value
1
Set to "1" or reset to "0" by CMOD
MOD12
Ch 2 compare match output setting bit
0
Reverse previous output value
1
Set to "1" or reset to "0" by CMOD
MOD13
Ch 3 compare match output setting bit
0
Reverse previous output value
1
Set to "1" or reset to "0" by CMOD
MOD14
Ch 4 compare match output setting bit
0
Reverse previous output value
1
Set to "1" or reset to "0" by CMOD
MOD15
234
Bit8
0
MOD11
R/W: Read/Write
: Initial value
-: Unused
Bit9
Ch 5 compare match output setting bit
0
Reverse previous output value
1
Set to "1" or reset to "0" by CMOD
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-6 Compare Mode Control Register (OCMOD)
Bit Name
bit15,
bit14
Unused bit
bit13
MOD15:
ch5 compare match output
setting bit
bit12
MOD14:
ch4 compare match output
setting bit
bit11
MOD13:
ch3 compare match output
setting bit
bit10
MOD12:
ch2 compare match output
setting bit
bit9
MOD11:
ch1 compare match output
setting bit
bit8
MOD10:
ch0 compare match output
setting bit
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to these bits have no effect on the operation.
• This bit specifies the operation when the compare match of the output compare
output occurs.
• The initial value is "0"
• When the bit is set to "0", reverse the output value temporarily when the match
occurs.
• When the bit is set to "1", set the output value to "1" or reset the output value
to "0" when the match occurs. CMOD bit of the compare control register
(OCSH) sets the set/reset switch.
• Before data is written, be sure to stop the compare operation.
• CMOD is set for ch0 and ch1, ch2 and ch3, ch4 and ch5.
- Reset/Set is not available to ch0 and ch1 separately.
- Reset/Set is not available to ch2 and ch3 separately.
- Reset/Set is not available to ch4 and ch5 separately.
235
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.8
Input Capture Data Registers
(IPCPH0 to IPCPH3, IPCPL0 to IPCPL3)
The input capture data register is used to store the count value of the free-run timer on
detection of a valid edge for the input waveform.
■ Input Capture Data Register (IPCPH: IPCPH0 to IPCPH3, IPCPL: IPCPL0 to IPCPL3)
Input capture data register (Upper)
Bit15
IPCPH0 to IPCPH3
Address :
CP15
0000ACH
R
Read →
0000AEH
Initial value → (X)
0000B0H
0000B2H
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
CP14
CP13
CP12
CP11
CP10
CP09
CP08
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CP07
CP06
CP05
CP04
CP03
CP02
CP01
CP00
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
Input capture data register (Lower)
IPCPL0 to IPCPL3
R
Read →
Initial value → (X)
This register is used to store the value of the free-run timer on detection of a valid edge for the
corresponding external pin input waveform. (To access this register, use a halfword or word access
instruction. Data cannot be written to this register.)
236
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.9
Input Capture State Control/PPG Output Control Register
(ICSH23, ICSL23, PICSH01, PICSL01)
The input capture state control/PPG output control register (ICSH23, ICSL23, PICSH01,
PICSL01) is used to control the edge selection, the interrupt request enable, the
interrupt request flag, and the PPG output. This register is also used to indicate a valid
edge which was detected on the input capture 2, 3.
■ Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2, ch.3), Upper Byte (ICSH23)
Input capture state control register (Upper)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
-
-
-
-
-
-
IEI3
IEI2
-
-
-
-
-
-
R
R
IEI2
R : Read only
: Initial value
-: Unused
Valid edge indication bit (input capture 2)
0
Falling edge is detected.
1
Rising edge is detected.
IEI3
ICSH23
Address: 0000B6 H
Initial value: XXXXXX00 B
Valid edge indication bit (input capture 3)
0
Falling edge is detected.
1
Rising edge is detected.
237
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-7 Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2, ch.3), Upper Byte (ICSH23)
Bit Name
bit15
bit14
bit13
Unused bit
bit12
bit11
bit10
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to these bits have no effect on operation.
• This bit is a valid edge indication bit of the capture register 3, and indicates that the rising or
falling edge was detected.
bit9
IEI3:
Valid edge
indication bit
(input capture3)
• When the falling edge is detected, "0" is written to this bit.
• When the rising edge is detected, "1" is written to this bit.
• This bit is a read-only bit.
Note:
When the lower of the input capture state control register (ICSL23), EG31, EG30: bit3,bit 2 =
00B, the read value has no meaning.
• This bit is a valid edge indication bit of the capture register 2, and indicates that the rising or
falling edge was detected.
bit8
238
IEI2:
Valid edge
indication bit
(Input capture 2)
• When the falling edge is detected, "0" is written to this bit.
• When the rising edge is detected, "1" is written to this bit.
• This bit is a read-only bit.
Note:
When the lower of the input capture state control register (ICSL23), EG21, EG20: bit1, bit0 =
00B, the read value has no meaning.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2, ch.3), Lower Byte (ICSL23)
Input capture state control register (Lower)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
ICP3
IP2
ICE3
ICE2
EG31
EG30
EG21
EG20
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
EG21 EG20
ICSL23
Address: 0000B7 H
Initial value: 00000000 B
Edge selection bit (input capture 2)
0
0
Edge is not detected (stop)
0
1
Rising edge is detected.
1
0
Falling edge is detected.
1
1
Both edges are detected.
EG31 EG30
Edge selection bit (input capture 3)
0
0
Edge is not detected (stop)
0
1
Rising edge is detected.
1
0
Falling edge is detected.
1
1
Both edges are detected.
ICE2
Interrupt request enable bit (input capture 2)
0
Disable interrupt request
1
Enable interrupt request
ICE3
Interrupt request enable bit (input capture 3)
0
Disable interrupt request
1
Enable interrupt request
ICP2
Interrupt request flag bit (input capture 2)
Read
Write
0
Valid edge is not detected
This bit is cleared.
1
Valid edge is detected
No effect on this bit
ICP3
Interrupt request flag bit (input capture 3)
Read
Write
0
Valid edge is not detected
This bit is cleared.
1
Valid edge is detected
No effect on this bit
R/W: Read/Write
: Initial value
239
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-8 Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2, ch.3), Lower Byte (ICSL23)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used as an interrupt request flag of the input capture 3.
• This bit is set to "1" immediately when a valid edge of an external input pin is detected.
bit7
ICP3:
Interrupt request
flag bit
(Input capture 3)
• When a valid edge is detected while the interrupt enable bit (ICE3: bit5) is set, the interrupt
can be generated immediately.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
• This bit is used as an interrupt request flag of the input capture 2.
• This bit is set to "1" immediately when a valid edge of an external input pin is detected.
bit6
ICP2:
Interrupt request
flag bit
(Input capture 2)
• When a valid edge is detected while the interrupt enable bit (ICE2: bit4) is set, the interrupt
can be generated immediately.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
• This bit is used to enable an input capture interrupt request of the input capture 3.
bit5
ICE3:
Interrupt request
enable bit
(Input capture 3)
• This bit is used to enable an input capture interrupt request of the input capture 2.
bit4
ICE2:
Interrupt request
enable bit
(Input capture 2)
bit3
bit2
EG31, EG30:
Edge selection bit
(Input capture 3
• These bits are used to specify the valid edge polarity of the external input for the input
capture 3.
bit1
bit0
EG21, EG20:
Edge selection bit
(Input capture 2)
240
• When the interrupt flag bit (ICP3: bit7) is set while this bit is set to "1", the input capture 3
interrupt is generated.
• When the interrupt flag bit (ICP2: bit6) is set while this bit is set to "1", the input capture 2
interrupt is generated.
• These bits are used also to enable an operation of the input capture 3.
• These bits are used to specify the valid edge polarity of the external input for the input
capture 2.
• These bits are used also to enable an operation of the input capture 2.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ PPG Output Control Register, Upper Byte (PICSH01)
PPG output control register (Upper)
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
PGEN5
PGEN4
PGEN3
PGEN2
PGEN1
PGEN0
-
-
W
W
W
W
W
W
-
-
PPG output enable bit
PGEN0
0
Disable PPG0 output to RT00.
1
Enable PPG0 output to RT00 .
PPG output enable bit
PGEN1
0
Disable PPG0 output to RT01.
1
Enable PPG0 output to RT01.
PPG output enable bit
PGEN2
0
Disable PPG0 output to RT02.
1
Enable PPG0 output to RT02.
PPG output enable bit
PGEN3
0
Disable PPG0 output to RT03.
1
Enable PPG0 output to RT03.
PPG output enable bit
PGEN4
0
Disable PPG0 output to RT04.
1
Enable PPG0 output to RT04.
PPG output enable bit
PGEN5
W: Write only
: Initial value
PICSH01
Address: 0000B4 H
Initial value: 000000-- B
0
Disable PPG0 output to RT05.
1
Enable PPG0 output to RT05.
Note: This register is write-only-register. Reading this register is disabled.
Table 11.4-9 PPG Output Control, Upper Byte (PICSH01)
Bit Name
bit15
bit14
bit13
bit12
bit11
bit10
PGEN5 to PGEN0:
PPG output enable bit
Function
• These bits are used to select the PPG0 output to RTO0 to RTO5.
• Only write can be performed. Reading these bits are disabled.
241
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ PPG Control Register, Lower Byte (PICSL01)
Output control register (Lower)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
ICP1
ICP0
ICE1
ICE0
EG11
EG10
EG01
EG00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
EG01 EG00
0
Edge is not detected (stop)
0
1
Rising edge is detected.
1
0
Falling edge is detected.
1
1
Both edge are detected.
Edge selection bit (input capture 1)
0
0
Edge is not detected (stop)
0
1
Rising edge is detected.
1
0
Falling edge is detected.
1
1
Both edge are detected.
ICE0
Interrupt request enable bit (input capture 0)
0
Disable interrupt request
1
Enable interrupt request
ICE1
Interrupt request enable bit (input capture 1)
0
Disable interrupt request
1
Enable interrupt request
ICP0
Interrupt request flag bit (input capture 0)
Read
Write
0
Valid edge is not detected.
This bit is cleared.
1
Valid edge is detected.
No effect on this bit.
ICP1
242
Edge selection bit (input capture 0)
0
EG11 EG10
R/W: Read/Write
: Initial value
PICSL01
Address: 0000B5 H
Initial value: 00000000 B
Interrupt request flag bit (input capture 1)
Read
Write
0
Valid edge is not detected.
This bit is cleared.
1
Valid edge is detected.
No effect on this bit.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-10 PPG Output Control Register, Lower Byte (PICSL01)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used as an interrupt request flag of the input capture 1.
• This bit is set to "1" immediately when a valid edge of an external input pin is detected.
bit7
ICP1:
Interrupt request
flag bit
(Input capture 1)
• When a valid edge is detected while the interrupt enable bit (ICE1: bit5) is set, the
interrupt is generated immediately.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
• This bit is used as an interrupt request flag of the input capture 0.
• This bit is set to "1" immediately when a valid edge of an external input pin is detected.
bit6
ICP0:
Interrupt request
flag bit
(Input capture 0)
• When a valid edge is detected while the interrupt enable bit (ICE0: bit4) is set, the
interrupt is generated immediately.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
• This bit is used to enable an input capture interrupt request of the input capture 1.
bit5
ICE1:
Interrupt request
enable bit
(Input capture 1)
• This bit is used to enable an input capture interrupt request of the input capture 0.
bit4
ICE0:
Interrupt request
enable bit
(Input capture 0)
bit3
bit2
EG11, EG10:
Edge selection bit
(Input capture 1)
• These bits are used to specify the valid edge polarity of the external input for the input
capture 1.
bit1
bit0
EG01, EG00:
Edge selection bit
(Input capture 0)
• These bits are used to specify the valid edge polarity of the external input for the input
capture 0.
• When the interrupt flag bit (ICP1: bit7) is set while this bit is set to "1", the input capture 1
interrupt is generated.
• When the interrupt flag bit (ICP0: bit6) is set while this bit is set to "1", the input capture 0
interrupt is generated.
• These bits are used also to enable an operation of the input capture 1.
• These bits are used also to enable an operation of the input capture 0.
243
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.10
16-bit Dead Timer Register
(TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2)
The 16-bit dead timer register stores the compare value of the 16-bit dead timer.
■ 16-bit Dead Timer Register (TMRRH: TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL: TMRRL0 to TMRRL2)
16-bit dead timer register (Upper)
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2
Bit15
Address:
TR15
0000BCH
0000BEH Read/Write →
R/W
0000C0H Initial value →
(X)
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
TR14
TR13
TR12
TR11
TR10
TR09
TR08
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TR07
TR06
TR05
TR04
TR03
TR02
TR01
TR00
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
R/W
(X)
16-bit dead timer register (Lower)
TMRRL0 to TMRRL2
Bit7
Read/Write →
Initial value →
These registers are used to store the compare value of the 16-bit dead timer.
These register values are reloaded when the 16-bit dead timer starts the operation.
If the values are rewritten to these registers during the timer operation, these new values are enabled in the
next timer start/operation.
To access these registers, use a halfword or word access instruction.
In the dead time timer mode, these registers are used to set the non-overlap time.
Non-overlap time = (Setting value) × Selected clock
In the timer mode, these registers are used to set the GATE time of the PPG0 timer operation.
GATE time = (Setting value) × Selected clock
Note:
In the dead time timer mode and the time timer mode, "0000H" cannot be set to these registers.
244
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.11
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR0 to DTCR2)
The 16-bit dead timer control register (DTCR0 to DTCR2) is used to control the
operation mode of the waveform generator, the interrupt request enable, the interrupt
request flag, the GATE signal enable, and the output level polarity.
■ 16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR0)
16-bit dead timer control register
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
DMOD0
GTEN1
GTEN0
TMIF0
TMIE0
TMD2
TMD1
TMD0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TMD2 TMD1 TMD0
DTCR0
Address: 0000C4H
Initial value: 00000000B
Operation mode bit
0
0
0
Waveform generator stops.
0
0
1
PPG0 timer outputs pulse while RT signal is at "H".
0
1
0
Rising edge of each RT signal becomes trigger,
and 16-bit dead timer stars. The PPG timer outputs
pulse until the 16-bit dead timer stops. (timer mode)
1
0
0
1
1
1
Non-overlap signal is generated by the RT
signal. (dead time timer mode)
Non-overlap signal is generated by PPG0
timers. (dead time timer mode)
Other
TMIE0
0
1
TMIF0
0
1
GTEN0
Disable
Interrupt request enable bit, software trigger bit
Interrupt is not generated even though underflow is generated
in 16-bit dead timer.
Interrupt is generated when underflow is generated in 16-bit
dead timer.
Interrupt request flag bit
Read
Write
Underflow of counter is not
detected.
Underflow of counter is
detected.
This bit is cleared.
No effect on this bit.
GATE signal control bit 0
0
The GATE signal is not controlled by RT0. (asynchronous mode)
1
The GATE signal is controlled by RT0. (synchronous mode)
GTEN1
GATE signal control bit 1
0
The GATE signal is not controlled by RT1. (asynchronous mode)
1
The GATE signal is controlled by RT1. (synchronous mode)
DMOD0
Output polarity control bit
0
Normal polarity output
1
Reverse polarity output
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
245
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-11 16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR0)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used to set the U/V/W output in the dead time timer mode.
DMOD0:
bit15 Output polarity
control bit
• Setting this bit reverses the U/V/W output polarity.
Note:
When the dead time timer mode is not selected, (TMD2: bit10 = 0), this bit has no meaning.
GTEN1:
bit14 GATE signal
control bit 1
This bit is used to control the GATE signal output of the PPG0 timer with RT1.
GTEN0:
bit13 GATE signal
control bit 0
This bit is used to control the GATE signal output of the PPG0 timer with RT0.
• This bit is used as an interrupt request flag of the 16-bit dead timer.
• This bit is set to "1" when the underflow of the16-bit dead timer occurs.
• Writing "0" to this bit clears this bit. Writing "1" to this bit has no effect on this bit.
TMIF0:
bit12 Interrupt request
flag bit
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
Note:
This bit works only when the register values (TMD2 to TMD0: bit10 to bit8) are 000B or
001B, and becomes always "0" when they are other values.
When a software clear (writing "0") and a hardware set (the underflow of the 16-bit dead timer
0 occurs) occur at the same time, the software clear takes precedence over the hardware set,
and this bit is cleared.
• This bit is used as a software trigger bit and an interrupt enable bit of the 16-bit dead timer.
TMIE0:
Interrupt request
bit11 enable bit,
software trigger
bit
• TMD2 to TMD0: bit10 to bit8 = 000B or 001B:
This bit is used as a software trigger of the 16-bit dead timer. When this bit changes from
"0" to "1", it becomes a trigger of the 16-bit dead timer, reloads the value, and starts the
down count.
• When this bit is "1" and the interrupt request flag bit (TMIF0: bit12) is "1", an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU.
Note:
If the 16-bit dead timer is set as the trigger again, be sure to write "0" to this bit first and then
write "1".
• These bits are used to select the operation mode of the waveform generator.
• TMD2 to TMD0: bit10 to bit8 = 000B:
The RT0 and RT1 signals of the output compare are respectively outputted from the RTO0
and RTO1. The 16-bit dead timer is also used as a reload timer.
• TMD2 to TMD0:
When bit10 to bit8 = 001B, the RT0 and RT1 signals of the output compare are outputted
bit10 TMD2 to TMD0:
respectively from the RTO0 and RTO1 when the PPG0 output is disabled (the upper of the
bit9 Operating mode
PPG output control/input capture state control register (PICSH01), PGEN0: bit10 = 0,
bit8 bit
PGEN1: bit11 = 0). The 16-bit dead timer is also used as a reload timer.
Note:
To operate the waveform generator in the dead time timer mode, be sure to select the 2 channel
mode (the upper of the compare control register (OCSH1), CMOD: bit12 = 1) for RT1.
TMD2 to TMD0: bit10 to bit8 = "111B": The RTO0 and RTO1 outputs are independent of the
register settings (the upper of the PPG output control/input capture state control register
(PICSH01), PGEN0: bit10 = 0, PGEN1: bit11 = 0).
246
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR1)
16-bit dead timer control register
Bit7
Bit6
DMOD1 GTEN3
R/W
R/W
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
GTEN2
TMIF1
TMIE1
TMD5
TMD4
TMD3
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
DTCR1
Address: 0000C5H
Initial value: 00000000B
Operation mode bit
TMD5 TMD4 TMD3
0
0
0
Waveform generator stops.
0
0
1
PPG0 timer outputs pulse while RT signal is at "H".
0
1
0
Rising edge of each RT signal becomes trigger,
and 16-bit dead timer stars. The PPG timer outputs
pulse until the 16-bit dead timer stops. (timer mode)
1
0
0
1
1
1
Non-overlap signal is generated by the RT
signal. (dead time timer mode)
Non-overlap signal is generated by PPG0
timers. (dead time timer mode)
Other
Disable
TMIE1
Interrupt request enable bit, software trigger bit
0
Interrupt is not generated even though underflow is generated
in 16-bit dead timer.
1
Interrupt is generated when underflow is generated in 16-bit
dead timer.
TMIF1
Interrupt request flag bit
Read
Write
0
Underflow of counter is not
detected.
This bit is cleared.
1
Underflow of counter is
detected.
No effect on this bit.
GTEN2
GATE signal control bit 2
0
The GATE signal is not controlled by RT2. (asynchronous mode)
1
The GATE signal is controlled by RT2. (synchronous mode)
GTEN3
GATE signal control bit 3
0
The GATE signal is not controlled by RT3. (asynchronous mode)
1
The GATE signal is controlled by RT3. (synchronous mode)
DMOD1
Output polarity control bit
0
Normal polarity output
1
Reverse polarity output
R/W: Read/Write
: Initial value
247
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-12 16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR1)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used to set the U/V/W output in the dead time timer mode.
bit7
DMOD1:
Output polarity
control bit
• Setting this bit reverses the U/V/W output polarity.
Note:
When the dead time timer mode is not selected, (TMD5: bit2 = 0), this bit has no meaning.
bit6
GTEN3:
GATE signal
control bit 3
This bit is used to control the GATE signal output of the PPG0 timer with RT3.
bit5
GTEN2:
GATE signal
control bit 2
This bit is used to control the GATE signal output of the PPG0 timer with RT2.
• This bit is used as an interrupt request flag of the 16-bit dead timer.
• This bit is set to "1" when the underflow of the16-bit dead timer occurs.
• Writing "0" to this bit clears this bit. Writing "1" to this bit has no effect on this bit.
bit4
TMIF1:
Interrupt request
flag bit
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
Note:
This bit works only when the register values (TMD5 to TMD3: bit2 to bit0) are 000B or 001B,
and becomes always "0" when they are other values.
When a software clear (writing "0") and a hardware set (the underflow of the 16-bit dead timer
occurs) occur at the same time, the software clear takes precedence over the hardware set, and
this bit is cleared.
• This bit is used as a software trigger bit and an interrupt enable bit of the 16-bit dead timer.
bit3
TMIE1:
Interrupt request
enable bit,
software trigger
bit
• TMD5 to TMD3: bit2 to bit0 = 000B or 001B: This bit is used as a software trigger of the
16-bit dead timer. When this bit changes from "0" to "1", it becomes a trigger of the 16-bit
dead timer, reloads the value, and starts the down count.
• When this bit is "1" and the interrupt request flag bit (TMIF1: bit4) is "1", an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU.
Note:
If the 16-bit dead timer is set as the trigger again, be sure to write "0" to this bit first and then
write "1".
• These bits are used to select the operation mode of the waveform generator.
• TMD5 to TMD3: bit2 to bit0 = 000B:
The RT2 and RT3 signals of the output compare are respectively outputted from the RTO2
and RTO3. The 16-bit dead timer is also used as a reload timer.
bit2
bit1
bit0
• TMD5 to TMD3:
When bit2 to bit0 = 001B, the RT2 and RT3 signals of the output compare are outputted
TMD5 to TMD3:
respectively from the RTO2 and RTO3 when the PPG0 output is disabled (the upper of the
Operating mode
PPG output control/input capture state control register (PICSH01), PGEN2: bit12 = 0,
bit
PGEN3: bit13 = 0). The 16-bit dead timer is also used as a reload timer.
Note:
To operate the waveform generator in the dead time timer mode, be sure to select the 2 channel
mode (the upper of the compare control register (OCSH3), CMOD: bit12 = 1) for RT3.
TMD5 to TMD3: bit2 to bit0 = 111B: The RTO2 and RTO3 outputs are independent of the
register settings (the upper of the PPG output control/input capture state control register
(PICSH01), PGEN2: bit12 = 0, PGEN3: bit13 = 0).
248
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR2)
16-bit dead timer control register
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
DMOD2
GTEN5
GTEN4
TMIF2
TMIE2
TMD8
TMD7
TMD6
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
TMD8 TMD7 TMD6
DTCR2
Address: 0000C6 H
Initial value: 00000000 B
Operation mode bit
0
0
0
Waveform generator stops.
0
0
1
PPG0 timer outputs pulse while RT signal is at "H".
0
1
0
Rising edge of each RT signal becomes trigger,
and 16-bit dead timer stars. The PPG timer outputs
pulse until the 16-bit dead timer stops. (timer mode)
1
0
0
1
1
1
Non-overlap signal is generated by the RT
signal. (dead time timer mode)
Non-overlap signal is generated by PPG0
timers. (dead time timer mode)
Other
TMIE2
0
1
TMIF2
0
1
GTEN4
Disable
Interrupt request enable bit, software trigger bit
Interrupt is not generated even though underflow is generated
in 16-bit dead timer.
Interrupt is generated when underflow is generated in 16-bit
dead timer.
Interrupt request flag bit
Read
Write
Underflow of counter is not
detected.
Underflow of counter is
detected.
This bit is cleared.
No effect on this bit.
GATE signal control bit 4
0
The GATE signal is not controlled by RT4. (asynchronous mode)
1
The GATE signal is controlled by RT4. (synchronous mode)
GTEN5
GATE signal control bit 5
0
The GATE signal is not controlled by RT5. (asynchronous mode)
1
The GATE signal is controlled by RT5. (synchronous mode)
DMOD2
Output polarity control bit
0
Normal polarity output
1
Reverse polarity output
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
249
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-13 16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR2)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used to set the U/V/W output in the dead time timer mode.
bit15
DMOD2:
Output polarity
control bit
• Setting this bit reverses the U/V/W output polarity.
Note:
When the dead time timer mode is not selected, (TMD8: bit10 = 0), this bit has no meaning.
bit14
GTEN5:
GATE signal
control bit 5
This bit is used to control the GATE signal output of the PPG0 timer with RT5.
bit13
GTEN4:
GATE signal
control bit 4
This bit is used to control the GATE signal output of the PPG0 timer with RT4.
• This bit is used as an interrupt request flag of the 16-bit dead timer.
• This bit is set to "1" when the underflow of the16-bit dead timer occurs.
• Writing "0" to this bit clears this bit. Writing "1" to this bit has no effect on this bit.
bit12
TMIF2:
Interrupt request
flag bit
• When this bit is read to a read modify write instruction, "1" is always read.
Note:
This bit works only when the register values (TMD8 to TMD6: bit10 to bit8) are 000B or
001B, and becomes always "0" when they are other values.
When a software clear (writing "0") and a hardware set (the underflow of the 16-bit dead
timer 2 occurs) occur at the same time, the software clear takes precedence over the hardware
set, and this bit is cleared.
• This bit is used as a software trigger bit and an interrupt enable bit of the 16-bit dead timer.
bit11
TMIE2:
Interrupt request
enable bit,
software trigger
bit
• TMD8 to TMD6: bit10 to bit8 = 000B or 001B: This bit is used as a software trigger of the
16-bit dead timer. When this bit changes from "0" to "1", it becomes a trigger of the 16-bit
dead timer, reloads the value, and starts the down count.
• When this bit is "1" and the interrupt request flag bit (TMIF2: bit12) is "1", an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU.
Note:
If the 16-bit dead timer is set as the trigger again, be sure to write "0" to this bit first and then
write "1".
• These bits are used to select the operation mode of the waveform generator.
• TMD8 to TMD6: bit10 to bit8 = 000B:
The RT4 and RT5 signals of the output compare are respectively outputted from the RTO4
and RTO5. The 16-bit dead timer is also used as a reload timer.
bit10
bit9
bit8
• TMD8 to TMD6:
When the bit10 to bit8 = 001B, the RT4 and RT5 signals of the output compare are
outputted
respectively from the RTO4 and RTO5 when the PPG0 output is disabled (the
TMD8 to TMD6:
upper
of
the
PPG output control/input capture state control register (PICSH01), PGEN4:
Operating mode
bit14
=
0,
PGEN5:
bit15 = 0). The 16-bit dead timer is also used as a reload timer.
bit
Note:
To operate the waveform generator in the dead time timer mode, be sure to select the 2
channel mode (the upper of the compare control register (OCSH5), CMOD: bit12 = 1) for
RT5.
TMD8 to TMD6: bit10 to bit8 = 111B: The RTO4 and RTO5 outputs are independent of the
register settings (the upper of the PPG output control/input capture state control register
(PICSH01), PGEN4: bit14 = 0, PGEN5: bit15 = 0).
250
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.12
Waveform Control Register (SIGCR1, SIGCR2)
The waveform control register is used to control the operating clock frequency, enable
the noise cancel feature, enable DTTI input, and control DTTI interrupts.
■ Waveform Control Register 1 (SIGCR1)
Waveform control register 1
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
DTIE
DTIF
NRSL
DCK2
DCK1
DCK0
NWS1
NWS0
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
NWS1 NWS0
DTTI noise width selection bit
0
0
Cancel noise of 4cycles
0
1
Cancel noise of 8cycles
1
0
Cancel noise of 16cycles
1
1
Cancel noise of 32cycles
DCK2 DCK1
DCK0
Operation clock selection bit
0
0
0
φ (62.5ns, φ=16MHz)
0
0
1
φ/2 (125ns, φ=16MHz)
0
1
0
φ/4 (250ns, φ=16MHz)
0
1
1
φ/8 (500ns, φ=16MHz)
1
0
0
φ/16 (1ms, φ=16MHz)
1
0
1
φ/32 (2ms, φ=16MHz)
1
1
0
φ/64 (4ms, φ=16MHz)
1
1
1
φ : Machine cycle
NRSL
Disable
Noise cancel function valid bit
0
Noise cancel circuit of DTTI input is invalid.
1
Noise cancel circuit of DTTI input is valid.
DTIF
DTTI interrupt flag bit
Read
Write
0
No interrupt request
This bit is cleared.
1
Interrupt request
No effect on this bit.
DTIE
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
SIGCR1
Address: 0000C9 H
Initial value: 00000000 B
DTTI input valid bit
0
Invalid DTTI input
1
Valid DTTI input
251
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Table 11.4-14 Waveform Control Register 1 (SIGCR1)
Bit Name
bit7
DTIE:
DTTI input
enable bit
Function
This bit is used to enable the output level control DTTI signal of RTO0 to RTO5 pins.
• This bit is the DTTI interrupt flag.
• When DTTI input is enabled (DTIE: bit7 = 1) and DTTI "L" level is detected, this bit is set,
and an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
• When this bit is set to "0": Clears the bit.
bit6
DTIF:
DTTI interrupt
flag bit
• Setting this bit to "1" has no effect on this bit.
• "1" is always read during read-modify-write.
Note:
When the noise cancel feature is enabled (NRSL: bit5 = 1), and noise pulse width is passed,
this bit is set to "1".
If a software clear (write "0") and hardware set (DTTI Low level detected) occur simultaneously,
the software clear is given precedence over the hardware set, and this bit is cleared.
• This bit is used to enable the noise cancel feature.
• If a "L" level is maintained until a counter overflow occurs, the noise cancel circuit receives
a DTTI input signal. The counter is a n-bit counter operated by "L" level input. n is set by
NWS1, NWS0 bit:1, 0; Based on the settings of bit1 and bit0, the value of n is 2, 3, 4, or 5.
bit5
NRSL:
Noise cancel
function enable
bit
bit4
bit3
bit2
DCK2 to DCK0:
Operation clock
selection bits
bit1
bit0
NWS1, NWS0:
DTTI noise width These bits are used to select the DTTI pin noise pulse width to cancel.
selection bits
252
Note:
Approximately 2n machine cycles are required to cancel the noise pulse width.
When a noise cancel circuit is selected, input is disabled when in a mode that stops the internal
clock (e.g. stop mode).
These bits are used to select the operating clock of the 16-bit dead timer.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Waveform Control Register 2 (SIGCR2)
Waveform control register 2
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTTI
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
R/W
DTTI
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
- : Unused bit
SIGCR2
Address: 0000CB H
Initial value: XXXXXXX1 B
Software DTTI set bit
1
Clear DTTI
0
Set DTTI
Table 11.4-15 Waveform Control Register2 (SIGCR2)
Bit Name
bit7 to bit1 Unused bit
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to these bits have no effect on operation.
• Write "0" to set DTTI.
bit0
DTTI:
Software DTTI
setting bit
• Write "1" to clear bit.
Note:
As this is OR with external input DTTI, however, DTTI depends on the external
input level.
253
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.4.13
A/D Activation Compare Register
(ADCOMP0, ADCOMP1, ADCOMP2, ADCOMPC)
Compare registers 0, 1, and 2 activate A/D converters 0, 1, and 2 when their values
match that of the free-run timer. The compare register is used to write compare values.
The control register enables or disables the activation request to the A/D converter
when a compare match occurs.
■ Compare Register 0, 1, 2 (ADCOMP0, ADCOMP1, ADCOMP2)
Compare register 0,1,2 (Upper)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
CMP15
CMP14
CMP13
R/W
R/W
R/W
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CMP12
CMP11
CMP10
CMP09
CMP08
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
ADCOMP0/ADCOMP1/
ADCOMP2
Address:
ch0:0000CCH
ch1:0000CEH
ch2:0000D0H
Initial value: 00000000 B
Compare register 1,2 (Lower)
Bit7
Bit6
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
CMP07
CMP06
CMP05
Bit5
CMP04
CMP03
CMP02
CMP01
CMP00
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Initial value: 00000000 B
R/W: Read/Write
The compare register is used to write data for comparison with the 16-bit free-run timer count value. It is
possible to activate A/D when the free-run timer and compare values match.
The value written to the compare register is used for a comparison immediately.
Write to the compare register in word or half-word units.
254
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Control Register (ADCOMPC)
Control register
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
-
-
-
-
-
CE2
CE1
CE0
-
-
-
-
-
R/W
R/W
R/W
CE0
A/D0 compare activation enable bit
0
Disable compare
1
Enable compare
CE1
A/D1 compare activation enable bit
0
Disable compare
1
Enable compare
CE2
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
- : Unused bit
ADCOMPC
Address: 0000D3 H
Initial value: XXXXX000 B
A/D2 compare activation enable bit
0
Disable compare
1
Enable compare
Table 11.4-16 Control Register (ADCOMPC)
Bit Name
bit7 to bit3 Unused bit
bit2
bit1
bit0
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to these bits have no effect on operation.
CE2:
A/D2 compare
activation enable bit
• Write "1" to this bit to output a activation request for A/D unit 2 when there is a
compare match.
CEI:
A/D1 compare
activation enable bit
• Write "1" to this bit to output a activation request for A/D unit 1 when there is a
compare match.
CE0:
A/D0 compare
activation enable bit
• Write "1" to this bit to output a activation request for A/D unit 0 when there is a
compare match.
• Write "0" to this bit to disable compare operation.
• Write "0" to this bit to disable compare operation.
• Write "0" to this bit to disable compare operation.
255
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.5
Multifunctional Timer Interrupt
The multifunctional timer can generate 16-bit free-run timer interrupts, 16-bit output
compare interrupts, 16-bit input capture interrupts, and waveform generator interrupts.
■ 16-bit Free-run Timer Interrupt
See Table 11.5-1 for 16-bit free-run timer interrupt control bits and interrupt causes.
Table 11.5-1 16-bit Free-run Timer Interrupt Control Bits and Interrupt Causes
16-bit Free-run Timer
Compare Clear
Zero Detection
Interrupt request flag bit
ICLR of upper timer status register (TCCSH):
bit9
IRQZF of upper timer status register
(TCCSH): bit14
Interrupt request enable bit
ICRE of upper timer status register (TCCSH):
bit8
IRQZE of upper timer status register
(TCCSH): bit13
Interrupt cause
The 16-bit free-run timer value and compareclear register (CPCLRH, CPCLRL) match.
16-bit free-run timer value is set to "0".
When the 16-bit free-run timer value and compare-clear register (CPCLRH/CPCLRL) match, the timer
status register (TCCSH) ICLR: bit9 is set to "1". When interrupt requests are enabled in this state (TCCSH
register ICRE: bit8 = 1), interrupt requests are outputted to the interrupt controller.
When the timer value is "0000H", the timer status control register (TCCSH) IRQZF: bit14 is set to "1".
When interrupt requests are enabled in this state (TCCSH register IRQZE: bit13 = 1), interrupt requests are
outputted to the interrupt controller.
256
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Output Compare Interrupt
See Table 11.5-2 for 16-bit output compare interrupt control bits and interrupt causes.
Table 11.5-2 16-bit Output Compare 0 to 5 Interrupt Control Bits and Interrupt Causes
16-bit Output Compare 0, 1 16-bit Output Compare 2, 3 16-bit Output Compare 4, 5
Interrupt request flag bit
IOP1, IOP0 (bit7, bit6) of
lower compare control
register (OCSL0)
IOP1, IOP0 (bit7, bit6) of
lower compare control
register (OCSL2)
IOP1, IOP0 (bit7, bit6) of
lower compare control
register (OCSL4)
Interrupt request enable bit
IOE1, IOE0 (bit5, bit4) of
lower compare control
register (OCSL0)
IOE1, IOE0 (bit5, bit4) of
lower compare control
register (OCSL2)
IOE1, IOE0 (bit5, bit4) of
lower compare control
register (OCSL4)
Interrupt cause
The 16-bit free-run timer
value and output compare
register (OCCPH0,
OCCPH1, OCCPL0,
OCCPL1) match.
The 16-bit free-run timer
value and output compare
register (OCCPH2,
OCCPH3, OCCPL2,
OCCPL3) match.
The 16-bit free-run timer
value and output compare
register (OCCPH4,
OCCPH5, OCCPL4,
OCCPL5) match.
When the 16-bit free-run timer value and output compare register (OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to
OCCPL5) match, the compare control register low-order (OCSL0, OCSL2, and OCSL4) IOP 1 and 0: bit7
and bit6 are set to "1". When interrupt requests are enabled in this state (OCSL0, OCSL2, and OCSL4
register IOE1 and IOE0: bit5, bit4 = 11B), interrupt requests are outputted to the interrupt controller.
257
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Input Capture Interrupt
See Table 11.5-3 for 16-bit input capture interrupt control bits and interrupt causes.
Table 11.5-3 16-bit Input Capture 0 to 3 Interrupt Control Bits and Interrupt Causes
16 Bit Input Capture0, 1
16 Bit Input Capture2, 3
Interrupt request flag bit
Input capture status control register, lower
(PICSL01): ICP1, ICP0 (bit7, bit6)
Input capture status control register, lower
(ICSL23): ICP3, ICP2 (bit7, bit6)
Interrupt request enable bit
Input capture status control register, lower
(PICSL01): ICE1, ICE0 (bit5, bit4)
Input capture status control register, lower
(ICSL23): ICE3, ICE2 (bit5, bit4)
Interrupt cause
Valid edges are detected by IC0, IC1 pins.
Valid edges are detected by IC2, IC3 pins.
With 16-bit input capture, when a valid edge is detected by IC0, IC1, IC2, IC3 pins, the input capture-status
control registers (PICSL01 and ICSL23) ICP3, ICP2, ICP1, and ICP0: bit7 and bit6 are both set to 11B.
When interrupt requests are enabled in this state (PICSL01 and ICSL23 registers ICE3, ICE2, ICE1, ICE0:
bit5 and bit4 are both 11B), interrupt requests are outputted to the interrupt controller.
258
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Waveform Generator Interrupts
See Table 11.5-4 for waveform generator interrupt control bits and interrupt causes.
Table 11.5-4 Waveform Generator Interrupt Control Bits and Interrupt Causes
Waveform Generator
16-bit Dead Timer 0, 1, 2
Interrupt request flag bit
TMIF0 to TMIF2 (upper order is bit12, lower
order is bit4) of the 16-bit dead timer control
register higher order and lower order (DTCR0,
DTCR1, DTCR2)
Interrupt request enable bit
TMIE0 to TMIE2 (upper order is bit11, lower
order is bit3) of the 16-bit dead timer control
register higher order and lower order (DTCR0,
DTCR1, DTCR2)
Interrupt cause
16-bit dead timer 0, 1, and 2 underflow
DTTI0
DTIF (bit6) of waveform control
register 1 (SIGCR1)
−
"L" level detected in DTTI.
In the waveform generator, when a 16-bit dead timer underflow occurs, and TMD8 to TMD0 of the DTCR
0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register (higher-order bits are 10 to 8, and lower-order bits are 2 to 0) are "000B" or
"001B", TMIF0 to TMIF2 (higher-order bit is 12, and lower-order bit is 4) of the 16-bit dead timer control
register (DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2) are set to "1". When interrupt requests are enabled in this state
(DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register TMIE0 to TMIE2 (upper-order bit is 11, lower-order bit is 3) = 1),
interrupt requests are outputted to the interrupt controller.
259
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6
Operation of Multifunctional Timer
The operation of the multifunctional timer is described below.
■ Operation of Multifunctional Timer
● 16-bit free-run timer
When the 16-bit free-run timer enables count operation, the counter begins counting up from the value set
in the timer data register (TCDTH, TCDTL). The count value is used as the standard time of the 16-bit
output compare and 16-bit input capture.
● 16-bit output compare
16-bit output compare is used to compare the value set in the output compare register with the 16-bit freerun timer value. If a match is detected, the interrupt flag is set, and the output level is reversed.
● 16-bit input capture
16-bit input capture is used to detect specified valid edges.
When a valid edge is detected, the interrupt flag is set, and the value of the 16-bit free-run timer is retrieved
and stored in the input capture data register.
● Waveform generator
The waveform generator generates a variety of waveforms (including dead times) using the real-time
output (RTO 0 to RTO5), the 16-bit PPG timer 0, and the 16-bit dead timer.
● A/D activation compare
When the 16-bit free-run timer reaches the specified value, A/D is activated.
260
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.1
Operation of 16-bit Free-run Timer
After 16-bit free-run timer reset is completed, the counter begins counting up from the
value set in the timer data register (TCDTH/TCDTL). The count value is used as the
standard time of the 16-bit output compare and 16-bit input capture.
■ Timer Clear
The count value of the 16-bit free-run timer is cleared when one of the following:
• When a match with the compare-clear register is detected via up count mode (TCCSL register MODE:
bit5 = 0)
• When "1" is written to the TCCSL register's SCLR: bit4 during operation
• When "0000H" is written to the TCDTH/TCDTL register while stopped
• Resetting
After a reset, the counter is immediately cleared. When there is a match with the compare-clear register, the
counter is cleared in synchronization with the count timing.
Figure 11.6-1 Clear Timing of 16-bit Free-run Timer
φ
Compare clear
register value
N
Compare match
Count value
N
0000H
■ Timer Mode
The following modes can be selected for the 16-bit free-run timer.
• Up count mode (TCCSL register MODE: bit5 = 0)
• Up/down count mode (TCCSL register MODE: bit5 = 1)
When in up count mode, the counter starts counting from a value previously set in the timer data register
(TCDTH/TCDTL), and counts up until the count value matches the value of the compare-clear register
(CPCLRH/CPCLRL). The counter is then cleared to "0000H", and starts counting up again.
When in up/down count mode, the counter starts counting from a value previously set in the timer data
register (TCDTH/TCDTL), and counts up until the count value matches the value of the compare-clear
register (CPCLRH/CPCLRL). The counter then starts counting from up to down, until it reaches the value
"0000H", after which it again starts counting up.
It is possible to write a value to the mode bit (TCCSL register's MODE: bit5) at any time, whether the timer
is operating or stopped. Values written to this bit while the timer is operating go into the buffer, and the
count mode changes when the timer value reaches "0000H".
261
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.6-2 Change Timer Mode during Timer Operation
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Timer
Start timer operation
Change to up-count mode
Change to up/down count mode
Reset
Compare clear
buffer register
BFFFH
TCCSL: MODE
■ Compare Clear Buffer
The compare-clear register (CPCLRH/CPCLRL) has a buffer feature that can be enabled or disabled. If the
buffer feature is enabled (TCCSL register's BFE: bit7 = 1), data written to the compare-clear buffer register
(CPCLRBH/CPCLRBL) is sent to the CPCLRH/CPCLRL register when a value of 0 is detected in the 16bit free-run timer. When the buffer feature is disabled (TCCSL bits' BFE: bit7 = 0), the CPCLRBH/
CPCLRBL register becomes permeable, and data can be written directly to the CPCLRH/CPCLRL register.
Figure 11.6-3 Operation in Up Count Mode when Compare Clear Buffer Is Disabled
(TCCSL Register’s BFE: Bit7 = 0)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Reset
Timer
Start timer operation
Compare clear match
Zero detection
Compare clear
buffer register
BFFFH
7FFFH
FFFFH
Compare clear
register
BFFFH
7FFFH
FFFFH
Figure 11.6-4 Operation in Up Count Mode when Compare Clear Buffer Is Enabled
(TCCSL Register’s BFE: Bit7 = 1)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Reset
Compare clear
buffer register
Compare clear
register
262
Timer
Start timer operation
Compare clear match
Zero detection
BFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
7FFFH
FFFFH
FFFFH
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.6-5 Operation in Up/Down Count Mode when Compare Clear Buffer Is Enabled
(TCCSL Register’s BFE: Bit7 = 1)
Count value
Compare clear match
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Timer
Zero detection
Start timer operation
Reset
Compare clear
buffer register
Compare clear
register
7FFFH
BFFFH
BFFFH
FFFFH
7FFFH
FFFFH
263
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Timer Interrupt
The 16-bit free-run timer can generate the following two interrupts.
• Compare clear interrupt
• Zero detection interrupt
Compare-clear interrupts are generated when the timer value matches the value of the compare-clear
register (CPCLRH, CPCLRL).
Zero-detection interrupts are generated when the timer value reaches "0000H".
Notes:
• When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ)
Even if a software clear (TCCSL: bit4 SCLR = 1) is performed, the zero-detection interrupt flag is
not set, and a zero-detection interrupt is not generated.
• When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ) division
When a software clear (TCCSL: bit4 SCLR = 1) is performed, and the zero-detection interrupt flag
is set and interrupts are enabled, then a zero-detection interrupt is generated.
Figure 11.6-6 Interrupt Generated in Up Count Mode
(TCCSL Register MODE: Bit5 = 0)
N-1
Count value
N
0
1
Compare clear interrupt
Zero-detection interrupt
Figure 11.6-7 Interrupt Generated in Up/Down Count Mode
(TCCSL Register MODE: Bit5 = 1)
Count value
N-1
N
N-1
0
Compare clear interrupt
Zero-detection interrupt
■ Interrupt Mask Function
It is possible to mask interrupt requests by setting the TCCSH register MSI 2 to MSI0: bit12 to bit10. MSI2
to MSI0 bits are a 3-bit reload down counter that reload when the count value reaches 000B. The counter
value can be reloaded by writing directly to MSI2 to MSI0 bits. The mask count is the value set in MSI2 to
MSI0 bits. When MSI2 to MSI0 bits are 000B, interrupt causes are not masked.
The interrupt cause depends on the count mode (TCCSL register MODE: bit5). In up count mode, it is only
possible to mask compare-clear interrupts, and zero-detection interrupts are generated each time "0" is
detected. In up/down count mode, it is only possible to mask zero-detection interrupts, and compare-clear
interrupts are generated each time a compare clear is detected.
264
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Notes:
• When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ)
Even if a software clear (TCCSL: bit4 SCLR = 1) is performed, the zero-detection interrupt flag is
not set, and a zero-detection interrupt is not generated.
• When the timer count clock is the machine cycle (φ) division
When a software clear (TCCSL: bit4 SCLR = 1) is performed, and the zero-detection interrupt flag
is set and interrupts are enabled, then a zero-detection interrupt is generated.
Figure 11.6-8 Compare Clear Interrupt Masked in Up Count Mode
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Start timer operation 1st
3rd
2nd
4th
Reset
Zero-detection
interrupt
Software clear
TCCSH : MSI2 to MSI0=000B
Compare clear TCCSH : MSI2 to MSI0=001B
interrupt
TCCSH : MSI2 to MSI0=010B
Note: Both zero detection interrupt and compare clear interrupt are cleared by the software.
Figure 11.6-9 Zero Detection Interrupt Masked in Up/Down Count Mode
Count value
FFFFH
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Start timer operation 1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
Reset
Compare clear
interrupt
Software clear
TCCSH : MSI2 to MSI0=000B
Zero-detection TCCSH : MSI2 to MSI0=001B
interrupt
TCCSH : MSI2 to MSI0=010B
Note: Both zero detection interrupt and compare clear interrupt are cleared by the software.
265
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Selected External Count Clock
The 16-bit free-run timer is incremented based on the input clock (internal clock or external clock). When
an external clock is selected, then after external clock mode is selected (TCCSH register's ECKE: bit15=1),
the 16-bit free-run timer starts counting up on a rising edge if the initial value of external input is "1".
Subsequently, it counts up on both edges. If the initial value of external input is "0", it starts counting up on
a falling edge. Subsequently, it counts up on both edges.
Figure 11.6-10 Count Timing of 16-bit Free-run Timer
External clock input
TCCSH: ECKE bit
Count clock
Count value
N
N+1
N+2
■ A/D Activation Via Free-run Timer
It is possible to activate A/D1 and A/D2 upon a compare match or 0 detection of the 16-bit free-run timer.
The activation trigger can be selected by means of the A/D trigger cause selection bit (SEL1 and SEL2:
bit2 and bit3) of the A/D trigger control register (ADTRGC).
It is possible to halt A/D activation signals, even upon compare match or 0 detection, via the A/D trigger
output enable/disable bits (AD1E and AD2E: bit0 and bit1) of the A/D trigger control register (ADTRGC).
Note:
When A/D activation signal output is disabled, if A/D activation signal output is enabled, then when
an activation trigger compare match or 0-detection is outputted, the A/D activation signal will be
outputted at the same time that the authorization is made.
266
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.2
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
Output compare is used to compare the value set in the compare clear register with the
16-bit free-run timer value. If a match is detected, the interrupt flag is set, and the output
level is reversed.
Match signals are ignored by the free-run timer when compare register value matches
with the count peak value of the free-run timer.
■ Operation of 16-bit Output Compare (Inverted Mode, MOD1x=0)
● Compare operation can be performed on each channel (compare control register higher-order
(OCSH1, OCSH3, and OCSH5) CMOD: bit12 = 0).
Figure 11.6-11 Example of Output Waveform if Compare Registers 0 and 1 are Used Separately when the
Initial Value of Output Is "0" (Free-run Timer Is Up Count Mode)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Compare register 0
BFFFH
Compare register 1
7FFFH
RT0
RT1
Compare 0 interrupt
Compare 1 interrupt
267
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.6-12 Example of Output Waveform if Compare Registers 0 and 1 are Used Separately when the
Initial Value of Output Is "0" (Free-run Timer Is Up/Down Count Mode)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Compare register 0
BFFFH
Compare register 1
7FFFH
RT0
RT1
Compare 0 interrupt
Compare 1 interrupt
● The output level can use a single compare register (compare control register higher-order
(OCSH 1, OCSH3, and OCSH5) CMOD: bit12 = 1).
Figure 11.6-13 Example of Output Waveform if Compare Registers 0 and 1 are Used in Pairs when the
Initial Value of Output Is "0" (Free-run Timer Is Up Count Mode)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Compare register 0
BFFFH
Compare register 1
7FFFH
RT0
RT1
Compare 0 interrupt
Compare 1 interrupt
268
Correspond to compare 0
Correspond to compare 0 and 1
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Figure 11.6-14 Example of Output Waveform if Compare Registers 0 and 1 are Used Together when the
Initial Value of Output Is "0" (Free-run Timer Is Up/Down Count Mode)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
Compare register 0
BFFFH
Compare register 1
7FFFH
RT0
Correspond to compare 0
RT1
Correspond to compare 0 and 1
Compare 0 interrupt
Compare 1 interrupt
● Output level when compare buffer is disabled
Figure 11.6-15 Example of Output Waveform when Compare Buffer Is Disabled
(Free-run Timer is Up Count Mode)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
Time
0000H
Start timer operation
Compare clear match
Reset
Compare clear
match
Compare clear
buffer register 0
BFFFH
3FFFH
BFFFH
Compare clear
register 0
BFFFH
3FFFH
BFFFH
RT0
Interrupt
269
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
● Output level when compare buffer is selected, and a compare clear match occurs:
Figure 11.6-16 Example of Output Waveform when Compare Buffer Is Enabled
(Free-run Timer is Up/Down Count Mode)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Start timer operation
Compare clear match
Zero-detection
Reset
Compare buffer
register 0
Compare clear
register 0
RT0
Interrupt
270
BFFFH
3FFFH
BFFFH
BFFFH
3FFFH
BFFFH
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Operation of 16-bit Output Compare (Set/Reset Mode, MOD15 to MOD10=1)
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
Time
0000H
Reset
Compare register 0
BFFFH
Compare register 2
7FFFH
RT0
RT2
Compare 0 interrupt
Compare 2 interrupt
ch0: Up count: set, Down count: reset
ch2: Up count: reset, Down count: set
Note: ch0 keep "1" if ch0 match occur. ch2 is always "0".
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
Time
0000H
Reset
Compare register 0
BFFFH
Compare register 2
7FFFH
RT0
RT2
Compare 0 interrupt
Compare 2 interrupt
ch0: Up count: set, Down count: reset
rese
se
ch2: Up count: reset, Down count: set
271
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Output Compare Timing
When the free-run timer matches the compare register value, output compare generates a compare match
signal and reverses output, then generates an interrupt. When a compare match occurs, output is reversed in
synchronization with the count timing of the counter.
Figure 11.6-17 Compare Register Interrupt Timing
N+1
N
Count value
N
Compare register
Compare match
Interrupt
Figure 11.6-18 Compare Timing of Pin Output
Count value
Compare register
Compare match
Pin output
272
N
N
N+1
N
N+1
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ 16-bit Output Compare and Free-run Timer Operation
• Free-run timer is in up count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
Compare register
BFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
0000H
BFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
0000H
BFFFH
CFFFH
0000H
0000H
CFFFH
0000H
RT
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer of output compare when the free-run timer has a compare-clear match.
• Free-run timer is in up count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
Compare register
BFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
0000H
BFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
0000H
BFFFH
CFFFH
0000H
0000H
CFFFH
0000H
RT
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer of output compare when the free-run timer has a zero detection.
273
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
• Free-run timer is in up/down count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Compare register
BFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
FFFFH
0000H
0000H
FFFFH
RT initial value [0]
RT initial value [1]
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer for output compare when the free-run timer has a compare-clear match:
Output compare output upon match, when output is reversed
• Free-run timer is in up/down count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
BFFFH
Compare register
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
0000H
BFFFH
FFFFH
0000H
RT initial value [0]
RT initial value [1]
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer for output compare when the free-run timer has a zero detection:
Output compare output upon match, when output is reversed
274
0000H
FFFFH
0000H
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
• Free-run timer is in up/down count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
BFFFH
Compare register
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
CFFFH
FFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
0000H
FFFFH
RT initial value [0]
RT initial value [1]
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer for output compare when the free-run timer has a compare-clear match:
Output compare output when up-count match is set to "1", down-count match is reset to "0"
• Free-run timer is in up/down count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
Compare register
BFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
0000H
BFFFH
FFFFH
0000H
FFFFH
0000H
0000H
RT initial value [0]
RT initial value [1]
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer for output compare when the free-run timer has a zero detection:
Output compare output when up-count match is set to "1", down-count match is reset to "0"
275
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
• Free-run timer is in up/down count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
BFFFH
Compare register
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
CFFFH
FFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
0000H
FFFFH
RT initial value [0]
RT initial value [1]
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer for output compare when the free-run timer has a compare-clear match:
Output compare output when up-count match is reset to "0", and down-count match is set to "1":
• Free-run timer is in up/down count mode:
Free-run timer
count value
CFFFH
BFFFH
0000H
Time
Compare buffer
register
BFFFH
Compare register
BFFFH
CFFFH
BFFFH
CFFFH
0000H
BFFFH
FFFFH
0000H
RT initial value [0]
RT initial value [1]
Data-transfer timing of the compare buffer for output compare when the free-run timer has a zero detection
Output compare output when up-count match is reset to "0", and down-count match is set to "1":
276
0000H
FFFFH
0000H
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.3
Operation of 16-bit Input Capture
Input capture is used detect specified valid edges. When a valid edge is detected, the
interrupt flag is set, and the value of the 16-bit free-run timer is loaded into the capture
register.
■ Operation of 16-bit Input Capture
Figure 11.6-19 Example of Input Capture Timing
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Reset
IC0
IC1
Example of IC
Capture
register0
Capture
register1
Example of
capture register
Undefined
3FFFH
7FFFH
Undefined
Undefined
BFFFH
3FFFH
Capture 0
interrupt
Capture 1
interrupt
Example of
capture interrupt
Generate interrupt by valid edge again
Clear interrupt by software
Capture 0 : Rising edge
Capture 1 : Falling edge
Capture example: both edge
277
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Input Timing of 16-bit Input Capture
Figure 11.6-20 Example of 16-bit Input Capture Timing for Input Signal
Count value
Input capture input
N
N+1
Valid edge
Capture signal
Capture register
Interrupt
278
N+1
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.4
Waveform Generator Operation
The waveform generator can generate a variety of waveforms (including dead times)
using real-time output (RTO0 to RTO5), the 16-bit PPG timer 0, and 16-bit dead timers 0,
1, and 2.
■ Output Status of RTO0 to RTO5 and GATE
Table 11.6-1 RTO0 to RTO5/GATE Output Status and Bit Settings
TMD2 TMD1 TMD0
GTEN5 PGEN5
to
to
GTEN0 PGEN0
RTO0 to RTO5
0
0
0
X
X
Real-time output RTx (16-bit output compare output)
0
0
1
X
0
Real-time output RTx (16-bit output compare output)
0
0
1
0
1
RTx outputs a PPG0 pulse for duration "H". *1
0
0
1
1
1
RTx outputs the PPG0 pulse activated by the GATE signal for
duration "H".
X
0
1
0
X
0
X
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
X
X
0
1
1
1
1
Others
X
X
X
The RT0, RT1 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 0, and
the 16-bit dead timer 0 outputs "H" until it underflows.
The RT2, RT3 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 1, and
the 16-bit dead timer 1 outputs "H" until it underflows.
The RT4, RT5 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 2, and
the 16-bit dead timer 2 outputs "H" until it underflows.
The RT0, RT1 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 0, and the
16-bit dead timer 0 outputs the PPG 0 pulse until it underflows. *1
The RT2, RT3 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 1, and the
16-bit dead timer 1 outputs the PPG 0 pulse until it underflows. *1
The RT4, RT5 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 2, and the
16-bit dead timer 2 outputs the PPG 0 pulse until it underflows. *1
The RT0, RT1 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 0, and
the 16-bit dead timer 0 outputs the PPG 0 pulse started by the
GATE signal until it underflows.
The RT2, RT3 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 1, and
the 16-bit dead timer 1 outputs the PPG 0 pulse started by the
GATE signal until it underflows.
The RT4, RT5 rising edge activates the 16-bit dead timer 2, and
the 16-bit dead timer 2 outputs the PPG 0 pulse started by the
GATE signal until it underflows.
A non-overlapping signal is generated by means of RT1. *2
A non-overlapping signal is generated by means of RT3. *2
A non-overlapping signal is generated by means of RT5. *2
A non-overlapping signal is generated by means of PPG 0.
A non-overlapping signal is generated by means of the PPG 0
activated by the GATE signal.
Always "0"
GATE
Always "0"
(RTx &
GTENx) *3
Always "0"
(RT0/RT1/
RT2/RT3/
RT4/RT5)
Output "H"
during the
timer
operation *4
Always "0"
Output "H"
during the
timer
operation *4
Always "0"
Always "0"
(RT0/RT1/
RT2/RT3/
RT4/RT5)
Always "0"
279
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
*1: It is necessary to activate PPG 0 beforehand.
*2: In order to generate a non-overlapping signal, first select 2-channel mode (compare control register
higher-order (OCSH1, OCSH3, and OCSH5) CMOD: bit12 = 1) for RT1, RT3, and RT5.
*3: The GATE signal is generated from the RTx whose GTENx bit is set to "1".
*4: The GATE signal is generated while the timer activated by the RTx whose GTENx bit is set to "1" is
operating. If more than one GATEx bit is set to "1", the GATE signal is the OR of the signals for each
of the operating timers.
Note:
RTO0 and RTO1 are controlled by the 16-bit dead timer control register's higher order (DTCR0)
TMD2 to TMD0: bit10 to bit8; RTO2 and RTO3 are controlled by lower-order register's (DTCR1)
TMD5 to TMD3: bit2 to bit0; and RTO4 and RTO5 are controlled by the higher-order register's
(DTCR2) TMD8 to TMD6: bit10 to bit8.
280
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ PPG0 Output Control
PPG0 output to RTO0 to RTO5 pins can be enabled by means of the PPG output control/input capturestatus control register higher-order (PICSH01) PGEN 5 to PGEN 0: bit15 to bit10.
■ PPG0 Output Via Gate Trigger
The waveform generator can generate a GATE signal via real-time output RTO0 to RTO5, and the 16-bit
dead timer 0, 1, and 2 can operate the PPG0 count as a trigger. Two real-time outputs (RTO0/RTO2/RTO4
and RTO1/RTO3/RTO5) are controlled by one 16-bit dead timer 0, 1, and 2, generating six separate gate
signals. The GATE signal is generated from the logical sum of these gate signals, and becomes trigger the
PPG0 count. Also, if PGEN0 to PGEN5 signals are used, it is possible to output 6 different waveforms to
RTO0 to RTO5 pins using PPG0 alone.
● GATE signal generation at following state;
- when PGENx, GTENx is active (PGENx, GTENx=1) and TMD8 to TMD0 of 16-bit dead timer
control register (DTCR0, DTCR1, DTCR2) = 000B
- when GTENx is active and the TMD8 to TMD0 = 111B
Figure 11.6-21 GATE Signal Generated when RTx Is "H"
16-bit free-run timer
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Compare
register 0
BFFFH
Compare
register 1
7FFFH
RT0
RT1
GATE0
GATE1
GATE
281
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
● GATE signal generated when GTENx is active (DTCR 0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register's TMD8 to
TMD0 = 010B), until the 16-bit dead timer 0, 1, and 2 underflow from the RTx rising edge.
Figure 11.6-22 GATE Signal between RTx Rising Edge and 16-bit Dead Timer Underflow
16-bit free-run timer
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
Time
0000H
Compare
register 0
BFFFH
Compare
register 1
7FFFH
RT0
RT1
GATE0
GATE1
Time of 16-bit dead timer 0
Time of 16-bit dead timer 0
GATE
Note:
Each 16-bit dead timer is used for two RT. In other words, 16-bit dead timer 0 is used for RT0 and
RT1; 16-bit dead timer 1 is used for RT 2 and RT 3; and 16-bit dead timer 3 is used for RT 4 and RT
5. Consequently, you must not try to use a RT to activate a timer that is already operating. If such an
attempt is made, the GATE signal output will be extended, which could result in a malfunction.
282
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.4.1
Operation of Timer Mode
When an RTO0 to RTO5 pin’s rising edge is detected, the value is reloaded into the 16bit dead timer, and the 16-bit dead timer starts counting down. PPG timer 0 continues to
output to RTO0 to RTO5 pins until the 16-bit dead timer generates an underflow.
■ Operation of Timer Mode
● The PPG0 output pulse is generated from the RT rising edge until the 16-bit dead timer underflows
(DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register's TMD8 to TMD0 (higher-order bits are 10 to 8; lower-order bits
are 2 to 0) = 010B).
Figure 11.6-23 Waveform Generated when TMD2 to TMD0
(Upper-order Bits are 10 to 8; Lower-Order Bits are 2 to 0) are "010B"
<Register setting>
TCDTH, TCDTL
:
TCCSH, TCCSL
:
CPCLRH, CPCLRL
:
OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to OCCPL5 :
OCSH0 to OCSH5, OCSL0 to OCSL5
:
DTCR0 to DTCR2
:
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 :
SIGCR1
:
Note: Be sure to set according to "X" operation.
PCSR : XXXXH
XXXXH
XXXXXXXX X0X0XXXXB
PDUT : XXXXH
XXXXH (Setting of cycle)
PCNT : XXXXH
XXXXH (Compare value)
PICS01 : XXH (PPG0 output selection)
-XX0XXXX XXXXXX11B
011XX010B
XXXXH (Setting of non-overlap timing)
XXXXXX00B (Setting of DTTI input and 16-bit dead timer count clock)
16-bit free-run timer
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
PPG0
Compare
register 0
BFFFH
Compare
register 1
7FFFH
RT0
RT1
GATE
RTO0
RTO1
Time of 16-bit dead timer 0
Time of 16-bit dead timer 0
283
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
Note:
Each 16-bit dead timer is used for two RT. In other words, 16-bit dead timer 0 is used for RT 0 and
RT 1; 16-bit dead timer 1 is used for RT2 and RT3; and 16-bit dead timer 2 is used for RT4 and RT5.
Consequently, you must not try to use a RT to activate a PPG0 that is already operating. If such an
attempt is made, the GATE signal output will be extended, which could result in a malfunction.
284
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.4.2
Operation During Dead Time Timer Mode
The dead-time generator inputs real-time output (RT1, RT3, and RT5) or PPG0 timer
pulse output and outputs a non-overlapping signal (reverse signal) to the external pins
(RTO0 to RTO5).
■ Operation During Dead Time Timer Mode
● This non-overlapping signal is generated via normal-polarity RT1, RT3, and RT5 (16-bit dead timer
control register (DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2) TMD8 to TMD0 (higher-order bits are 10 to 8; lowerorder bits are 2 to 0) = 100B).
When the DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register DMOD2 to DMOD0 selects the non-overlapping signal
with a value of 0 (normal polarity), a delay equivalent to the non-overlap time set in the 16-bit dead timer
register (TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2) is applied. This delay is applied to the rising edge
or falling edge of the RT1, RT3, and RT5 pins. If the RT1, RT3, and RT5 pulse width is less than the
specified non-overlap time, the 16-bit dead timer starts counting down again from the next RT edge
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 register value.
Figure 11.6-24 Non-overlap Signal Generated by RT1, RT3, and RT5 of Normal Polarity
<Register setting>
TCDTH, TCDTL
: XXXXH
OCCPH, OCCPL0 to 5 : XXXXH (Compare value)
TCCSH, TCCSL
: X--XXXXX X0X0XXXXB
OCSH, OCSL0 to 5
: -XX1XXXX XXXXXX11B
CPCLRH, CPCLRL
: XXXXH (Setting of cycle)
DTCR0 to DTCR2
: 0XXXX100B
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 : XXXXH (Setting of non-overlap timing)
SIGCR1
: XXXXXXXXB (Setting of DTTI input and 16-bit dead timer count clock)
Note: Be sure to set according to "X" operation.
16-bit dead timer 0
Count value
TMRR0 set
value
Time
RT1
RTO0(U)
RTO1(X)
2 machine cycle
2 machine cycle
Pin name
Output signal
RTO0 (U)
Delayed signal is applied at rising edge of RT1.
RTO2 (V)
Delayed signal is applied at rising edge of RT3.
RTO4 (W)
Delayed signal is applied at rising edge of RT5.
RTO1 (X)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at falling edge of RT1.
RTO3 (Y)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at falling edge of RT3.
RTO5 (Z)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at falling edge of RT5.
285
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
● This non-overlapping signal is generated via reverse-polarity RT1, RT3, and RT5 (16-bit dead timer
control register (DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2) TMD8 to TMD0 (higher-order bits are 10 to 8; lowerorder bits are 2 to 0) = 100B).
When the DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register's DMOD2 to DMOD0 (higher-order bit is 15; lower-order
bit is 7) selects the non-overlapping signal with a value of 1 (reverse polarity), a delay equivalent to the
non-overlap time set in the 16-bit dead timer register (TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2) is
applied. This delay is applied to the rising edge or falling edge of the RT1, RT3, and RT5. If the RT1, RT3,
and RT5 pulse width is less than the specified non-overlap time, the 16-bit dead timer starts counting down
again from the next RT edge TMRRH0 to TMRRH2 and TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 value.
Figure 11.6-25 Non-overlap Signal Generated by RT1, RT3, and RT5 of Inverted Polarity
<Register setting>
OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to OCCPL5 : XXXXH (Compare value)
TCDTH, TCDTL
: XXXXH
TCCSH, TCCSL
: XXXXXXXX X0X0XXXXB
OCSH0 to OCSH5, OCSL0 to OCSL5
: -XX1XXXX XXXXXX11B
CPCLRH, CPCLRL
: XXXXH (Setting of cycle)
DTCR0 to DTCR2
: 1XXXX100B
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 : XXXXH (Setting of non-overlap timing)
SIGCR1
: XXXXXXXXB (Setting of DTTI input and 16-bit dead timer count clock)
Note: Be sure to set according to "X" operation.
16-bit dead timer 0
Count value
TMRR0 set
value
Time
RT1
RTO0(U)
RTO1(X)
2 machine cycle
2 machine cycle
Pin name
286
Output signal
RTO0 (U)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at rising edge of RT1.
RTO2 (V)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at rising edge of RT3.
RTO4 (W)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at rising edge of RT5.
RTO1 (X)
Delayed signal is applied at falling edge of RT1.
RTO3 (Y)
Delayed signal is applied at falling edge of RT3.
RTO5 (Z)
Delayed signal is applied at falling edge of RT5.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
● This non-overlapping signal is generated via normal-polarity PPG (16-bit dead timer control register
(DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2) TMD 8 to TMD0 (higher-order bits are 10 to 8; lower-order bits are 2 to
0) = 111B).
When the DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register's DMOD2 to DMOD0 (higher-order bit is 15; lower-order
bit is 7) selects the non-overlapping signal with a value of 0 (normal polarity), a delay equivalent to the
non-overlap time set in the 16-bit dead timer register (TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2) is
applied. This delay is applied to the PPG0 timer pulse signal or reverse signal's rising edge. If the PPG0
timer pulse width is less than the specified non-overlap time, the 16-bit dead timer starts counting down
again from the TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 value of the edge following that PPG0
pulse.
Figure 11.6-26 Non-overlap Signal Generated by PPG0 Timer of Normal Polarity
<Register setting>
TCDTH, TCDTL
: XXXXH
PCSR : XXXXH
TCCSH, TCCSL
: XXXXXXXX X0X0XXXXB
PDUT : XXXXH
CPCLRH, CPCLRL
: XXXXH (Setting of cycle)
PCNT : XXXXH
OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to OCCPL5 : XXXXH (Compare value)
OCSH0 to OCSH5, OCSL0 to OCSL5
: -XX1XXXX XXXXXX11B
DTCR0 to DTCR2
: 0XXXX111B
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 : XXXXH (Setting of non-overlap timing)
SIGCR1 : XXXXXXXXB (Setting of DTTI input and 16-bit dead timer count clock)
Note: Be sure to set according to "X" operation.
16-bit dead timer 0
Count value
TMRR0 set
value
Time
PPG0
RTO0(U)
RTO1(X)
2 machine cycle
2 machine cycle
Pin name
Output signal
RTO0 (U)
Delayed signal is applied at rising edge of PPG0.
RTO2 (V)
Delayed signal is applied at rising edge of PPG0.
RTO4 (W)
Delayed signal is applied at rising edge of PPG0.
RTO1 (X)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at falling edge of PPG0.
RTO3 (Y)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at falling edge of PPG0.
RTO5 (Z)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at falling edge of PPG0.
287
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
● This non-overlapping signal is generated via reverse-polarity PPG (16-bit dead timer control register
(DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2) TMD8 to TMD0 (higher-order bits are 10 to 8; lower-order bits are 2 to
0) = 111B).
When the DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register's DMOD2 to DMOD0 (higher-order bit is 15; lower-order
bit is 7) selects the non-overlapping signal with a value of 1 (reverse polarity), a delay equivalent to the
non-overlap time set in the 16-bit dead timer register (TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2) is
applied. This delay is applied to the PPG0 timer pulse signal or reverse signal's rising edge. If the PPG0
timer pulse width is less than the specified non-overlap time, the 16-bit dead timer starts counting down
again from the TMRRH0 to TMRRH2 and TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 value of the edge following that PPG0
pulse.
Figure 11.6-27 Non-overlap Signal Generated by PPG0 Timer of Inverted Polarity
<Register setting>
TCDTH, TCDTL
: XXXXH
PCSR : XXXXH
TCCSH, TCCSL
: XXXXXXXX X0X0XXXXB
PDUT : XXXXH
CPCLRH, CPCLRL
: XXXXH (Setting of cycle) PCNT : XXXXH
OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to OCCPL5
: XXXXH (Compare value)
OCSH0 to OCSH05, OCSL0 to OCSL5
: -XX1XXXX XXXXXX11B
DTCR0 to DTCR2
: 1XXXX111B
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2
: XXXXH (Setting of non-overlap timing)
SIGCR1
: XXXXXXXXB (Setting of DTTI input and 16-bit dead timer count clock)
Note: Be sure to set according to "X" operation.
16-bit dead timer 0
Count value
TMRR0 set
value
Time
PPG0
RTO0(U)
RTO1(X)
2 machine cycle
2 machine cycle
Pin name
288
Output signal
RTO0 (U)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at rising edge of PPG0.
RTO2 (V)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at rising edge of PPG0.
RTO4 (W)
Delayed inverted signal is applied at rising edge of PPG0.
RTO1 (X)
Delayed signal is applied at falling edge of PPG0.
RTO3 (Y)
Delayed signal is applied at falling edge of PPG0.
RTO5 (Z)
Delayed signal is applied at falling edge of PPG0.
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.4.3
DTTI Pin Control Operation
You can control RTO0 to RTO5 output by means of the DTTI pins by setting "1" in the
waveform control register 1 (SIGCR1) DTIE: bit7. When a DTTI pin "L" level is detected,
RTO0 to RTO5 output is locked at non-operating level, until the interrupt flag (SIGCR
register DTIF: bit6) is cleared. When RTO0 to RTO5 is at non-operating level, these pins
can be set via software using the port data registers (PDR), which share them.
Additionally, if they are used as input ports using the data direction register (DDR), Hi-Z
is outputted.
■ DTTI Pin Input Operation
Even when "L" is detected in DTTI pin input, although the timer continues to operate while the waveform
generator is operational, waveforms are not outputted to the external RTO0 to RTO5 pins.
Figure 11.6-28 Operation when DTTI Input Is Enabled
<Register setting>
TCDTH, TCDTL
:
TCCSH, TCCSL
:
OCSH0 to OCSH5, OCSL0 to OCSL5
:
PDRx
:
TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2 :
SIGCR1
:
Note: Be sure to set according to "X" operation.
XXXXH
CPCLRH, CPCLRL
: XXXXH (Setting of cycle)
XXXXXXXX X0X0XXXXB OCCPH0 to OCCPH5, OCCPL0 to OCCPL5 : XXXXH (Compare value)
DTCR0 to DTCR2
: 0XXXX100B
-XX1XXXX XXXXXX11B
XXXXXX00B (Setting of non-operating level)
XXXXH (Setting of non-overlap timing)
1XXXXXXXB (Setting of DTTI input and 16-bit dead timer count clock)
16-bit free-run timer
Count value
FFFFH
BFFFH
7FFFH
3FFFH
0000H
Time
Compare
register 0
BFFFH
Compare
register 1
3FFFH
RT1
RTO0
RTO1
DTTI0
DTIF
Output non-operating
Software reset
289
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ DTTI Operation of Waveform Control Register 2 (SIGCR2)
The output of waveform control register 2 DTTI: bit0 becomes to DTTI input using the DTTI pin input and
OR. Consequently, when "0" is set in this register, control is permanently in DTTI input status, and the
input from the DTTI pins has no meaning.
When this register is cleared by writing 1, the DTTI pin input value is used.
■ DTTI Pin Noise Cancel Feature
The DTTI pin input noise cancel feature is enabled when "1" is set in the waveform control register 1
(SIGCR1) NRSL: bit5. When the noise cancel feature is enabled, there is a delay of 4, 8, 16, or 32 machine
cycles (selected via the SIGCR register NWS1 and NWS0: bit1 and bit0), for the amount of time necessary
to lock the output pins (RTO0 to RTO5) to non-operating level. Since the noise cancel circuit uses
resources, in modes where oscillation is stopped (e.g. stopped mode), input is disabled, even when DTTI
input is enabled.
■ DTTI Interrupts
When DTTI "L" level is detected, after the noise cancel time has elapsed, the DTTI interrupt flag (SIGCR1
register DTIF: bit6) is set to "1", and an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
Figure 11.6-29 DTTI Interrupt Timing
DTTI
SIGCR1 register
DTIF bit
Noise cancel time that is controlled
by NWS1 and NWS0 bits of SIGCR1
register
"0" is written to DTIF bit of
SIGCR1 register via software
Notes:
• If the SIGCR1 register NWS1 and NWS0 bit’s values change within the noise cancel time, a larger
(NWS1 and NWS0) noise cancel value is enabled.
• The SIGCR1 register DTIF: bit6 can only be cleared via software.
290
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.6.5
A/D Activation Compare Operation
When the 16-bit free-run timer reaches the specified value, A/D can be activated.
■ A/D Startup
Three A/D converter units can be activated.
• A/D activation compare 0 → Start A/D unit 0.
• A/D activation compare 1 → Start A/D unit 1.
• A/D activation compare 2 → Start A/D unit 2.
■ A/D Startup Enable
If the compare register value is set, and "1" is set in the control register (ADCOMPC) CE0, CE1, and CE2:
bit0, bit1, and bit2, when the free-run timer and compare register value match, an A/D activation signal is
generated.
When "0" is set in CE0, CE1, and CE2, even if the free-run timer and compare register value match, an A/D
activation signal is not generated.
If the compare register is written to when activation is enabled, the written value is compared for a match.
291
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.7
Notes on Using Multifunctional Timer
Heed the following cautions when using the multifunctional timer.
■ Notes on Using 16-bit Free-Run Timer
● Cautions for setting via the program
• When a reset is executed, although the timer value becomes "0000H", the zero-detection interrupt flag is
not set.
• Since the timer-mode bit (TCCSL register MODE: bit5) has a buffer, and so timer modes changed after
zero detection are enabled.
• A software clear (TCCSL register SCLR: bit4 = 1) initializes the timer. At this time, if the timer-count
clock is the machine cycle (φ), zero-detection interrupts are not generated. If the timer-count clock is a
division of the machine cycle (φ), zero-detection interrupts are generated.
• When the compare value and count value match, if the count starts, the compare-clear flag is not set.
● Note on interruption
• If "1" is set in the timer status control register higher-order (TCCSH) IRQZF: bit14, then interrupt
requests are enabled (TCCSH register IRQZE: bit13 = 1), control cannot return from interrupt
processing. IRQZF: Always clear bit14.
• If "1" is set in the timer status control register higher-order (TCCSH) ICLR: bit9, then interrupt requests
are enabled (TCCSH register ICRE: bit8 = 1), control cannot return from interrupt processing.
ICLR: Always clear bit9.
■ Notes on Using 16-bit Output Compare
● Note on interruption
If "11B" is set in the compare control register lower-order (OCSL0, OCSL2, and OCSL4) IOP1, IOP0: bit7
and bit6, then interrupt requests are enabled (OCSL register IOE1, IOE0: bit6 and bit5 = 11B), control
cannot return from interrupt processing. Always clear the IOP0, IOP1 bits.
■ Cautions for Use of 16-bit Input Capture
● Note on interruption
• If "1" is set in the input capture-status control register's lower-order (PICSL01 and ICSL23) ICP3, ICP2,
ICP1, and ICP0 (bit7 and bit6 of both), then interrupt requests are enabled (PCICSL01 and ICSL23
registers' ICE3, ICE2, ICE1, and ICE0 (bit5 and bit4 of both) = 11B), control cannot return from
interrupt processing. Be sure to clear ICP3, ICP2, ICP1, and 0 (both bit7 and bit6).
• If the level of the input capture pin (IC) changes between the time that ICP bit3, bit2, bit1, and bit0 are
set, and the interrupt routine is processed, then the ICP3 and ICP2 valid edge specification bits (ICSH
23 register's IEI3, IEI2: bit9 and bit8) will indicate the last edge detected.
Note:
There are no ICP1, ICP0 valid edge specification bits.
292
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
■ Notes on Using Waveform Generator
● Cautions for setting via the program
• Before changing the 16-bit dead timer control register's (DTCR0, DTCR1, DTCR2) TMD8, TMD5, and
TMD2 (higher-order bit is 10; lower-order bit is 2), TMD7, TMD4, and TMD1 (higher-order bit is 9;
lower-order bit is 1), or TMD6, TMD3, and TMD0 (higher-order bit is 8; lower-order bit is 0) during
waveform generator operation (DTCR0, DTCR1, DTCR2 register's TMD2 to TMD0, TMD5 to TMD3,
TMD8 to TMD6 is "001B", "010B", or "111B"), be sure that the trigger source and 16-bit dead timer are
not counting. If this operation is not performed, the output previously scheduled by the trigger causes an
unexpected waveform to be outputted from the RTO pins. However, normal RTO output will resume
after the timer underflows, or another trigger is generated by a new trigger source.
• The trigger source is "H" level of RT when the DTCR0, DTCR1, and DTCR2 register's TMD8 to
TMD0 (higher-order bits are 10 to 8; lower-order bits are 2 to 0) is "001B"; RT rising edge when TMD8
to TMD0 bits are "010B"; RT rising or falling edge when TMD8 to TMD0 are "100B"; and PPG0 rising
edge or falling edge when TMD8 to TMD0 bits are "111B".
For example, if TMD8 to TMD0 bits change from "100B" to "111B", the following steps can be
executed.
1. Set the 16-bit dead timer register (TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2) to an extremely
small value like "0001H".
2. RTO1, RTO3, and RTO5 output is awaited until "L" or "H" is set, and timer 0, 1, and 2 underflow.
3. Change the mode bits (TMD8 to TMD0) and corresponding settings.
4. A corrected output waveform appears at the RTO pins after 1 machine cycle.
• If a value is written to the 16-bit dead timer register (TMRRH0 to TMRRH2, TMRRL0 to TMRRL2)
during timer count, this new value is enabled during the next timer trigger. When accessing the timer
registers, be sure to use half-word or word transfer commands.
• Only change the waveform control register 1 (SIGCR1) DCK2 to DCK0: bit4 to bit2 when the timers
are not counting.
• Only change the waveform control register 1 (SIGCR1) NWS1 and NWS0: bit1 and bit0 when the noise
cancel feature is disabled.
● Note on interruption
• If 1 is set in the 16-bit dead timer control register's (DTCR0, DTCR1, DTCR2) TMIF2 to TMIF0
(higher-order bit is 12; lower-order bit is 4), and then interrupt requests are enabled (DTCR0, DTCR1,
DTCR2 register's TMIE2 to TMIE0 (higher-order bit is 11; lower-order bit is 3) = 1), control cannot
return from interrupt processing. Always clear the TMIF bit.
• Control cannot return from interrupt processing after setting "1" in the waveform control register 1
(SIGCR1) DTIF: bit7. Always clear the DTIF bit.
293
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
11.8
Program Example of Multifunctional Timer
Below is a sample multifunctional timer program.
■ Program Example of 16-bit Free-run Timer
● Processing contents
• When the 16-bit free-run timer is 4 ms, generate a compare-clear interrupt.
• This timer is used to re-generate a compare-clear timer during up count mode.
• 16 MHz is for the machine clock, and 62.5 ns is for the count clock.
● Coding example
ICR32
.EQU
000460H
; 16-bit free-run timer compare-clear interrupt control register
TCCSH .EQU
0000A8H
; Timer control status register
CPCLRBH.EQU
0000A4H
; Compare-clear buffer register
; --------------- Main Program ---------------------------------------------ORG
C0000H
START:
;
:
; Assumes that the stack pointer (SP) has already been
;
:
; initialized.
ANDCCR #0EFH
; Disables the interrupt.
LDI
#ICR32,r0
LDI
#00H,r1
STB
r1,@r0
; Interrupt levels 16 (strength)
LDI
#CPCLRBH,r0
; Set a value in the compare-clear buffer register to
LDI
#0FA00H,r1
; generate a compare-clear interrupt at 4 ms when the
STH
r1,@r0
; 16-bit free-run timer is in up count mode.
LDI
#TCCSH,r3
; Up count down mode,
LDI
#0110H,r1
; 62.5 ns count clock setting,
STH
r1,@r3
; Compare-clear interrupt enable,
; Clear the interrupt flag bit for compare clearing.
; Disable interrupt masking,
; Clear timer and enable operation.
STILM
#14H
; ILM in PS is set to level 20
ORCCR #10H
; Interruption permission
LOOP
LDI
#00H,r0
; Infinite loop
LDI
#01H,r1
BRA
LOOP
;
; --------------- Interrupt Program ---------------------------------------------WARI
LDI
#0100H,r1
ANDH
r1,@r3
; Clear interrupt request flag.
;
:
;
User processing
;
:
294
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
RETI
: Returns from interrupt.
; --------------- Vector Settings---------------------------------------------------VECT
.ORG
FFFF8H
.DATA.W WARI
; Set interrupt routine.
.ORG
FFFF8H
.DATA.W 0x07000000 ; Set single-chip mode.
.DATA.W START
; Set reset vectors.
.END
■ Program Example of 16-bit Output Compare
● Processing contents
• When the 16-bit free-run timer count value matches the output compare value, an output compare match
is generated.
• Use when the 16-bit free-run timer is in up/down count mode.
• 16 MHz is for the machine clock, and 62.5 ms is for the 16-bit free-run timer 0 count clock.
● Coding example
ICR44
EQU
00046CH
; Output compare 0/1 interrupt register
TCCSH EQU
0000A8H
; Timer control status register
CPCLRBHEQU
0000A4H
; Compare-clear buffer register
OCCPBH0EQU
000090H
; Output compare buffer register 0
OCCPBH1EQU
000092H
; Output compare buffer register 1
OCSH1 EQU
00009CH
; Compare control register
; --------------- Main Program ---------------------------------------------START:
;
:
; Assumes that the stack pointer (SP) has already been
initialized.
ANDCCR #0EFH
; Disables the interrupt.
LDI
#ICR44,r0
LDI
#00H,r1
STB
r1,@r0
; Interrupt levels 16 (strength)
LDI
#CPCLRBH,r0
; Set to 16-bit free-run timer's compare-clear
LDI
#0FFFFH,r1
; buffer register
STH
r1,@r0
LDI
LDI
STH
LDI
LDI
STH
LDI
LDI
STH
#OCCPBH0,r0
#0BFFFH,r1
r1,@r0
#OCCPBH1,r0
#07FFFH,r1
r1,@r0
#OCSH1,r3
#6C33H,r2
r2,@r3
; Set the output compare register 0.
; Enable output compare output.
; Enable compare match interrupts 0/1.
; Clear the interrupt flag bit.
LDI
#TCCSH,r0
; Up count down mode,
; Set the output compare register 1.
295
CHAPTER 11 MULTIFUNCTIONAL TIMER
LDI
STH
STILM
ORCCR
LOOP
#0010H,r1
r1,@r0
#14H
#10H
; Clear timer and enable operation.
; ILM in PS is set to level 20
; Interruption permission
LDI
#00H,r0
; Infinite loop
LDI
#01H,r1
BRA
LOOP
;
; --------------- Interrupt Program ---------------------------------------------WARI:
ANDH
r2,@r3
; Clear interrupt register flag.
;
:
;
User processing
;
:
RETI
: Returns from interrupt.
; --------------- Vector Settings ---------------------------------------------------VECT
.ORG
FFFF8H
.DATA.W
WARI
; Set interrupt routine.
.ORG
FFFF8H
.DATA.W
0x07000000 ; Set single-chip mode.
.DATA.W
START
; Set reset vectors.
.END
296
CHAPTER 12
U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for
UART Baud Rate Generation)
This chapter describes the U-TIMER, the configuration
and functions of registers, and U-TIMER operation.
12.1 Overview
12.2 Description of Registers
12.3 Description of Operation
297
CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for UART Baud Rate Generation)
12.1
Overview
The U-TIMER is a 16-bit timer used to generate the baud rate for the UART. Use a
combination of a chip operating frequency and a reload value of the U-TIMER to specify
a baud rate. Also, since it generates an interrupt by count underflow, it can be used as
an interval timer.
The MB91260B series have three built-in channels for this timer. When used as an
interval timer, two pairs of U-TIMERs can be cascaded to count a maximum interval of
232 × φ.
Only a combination of ch.0 and ch.1, and a combination of ch.0 and ch.2 can be
connected in cascade mode.
■ Register List
15
8 7
0
UTIM0 to UTIM2
(R)
UTIMR0 to UTIMR2
(W)
21UTIMC0 to UTIMC2
(R/W)
■ Block Diagram
Figure 12.1-1 Block Diagram for U-TIMER
15
0
UTIMR0 to UTIMR2 (reload register)
load
15
0
UTIM0 to UTIMR2 (timer)
clock
φ
(Peripheral clock)
underflow
control
MUX Channel
0 only
F/F
underflow U-TIMER 1
298
to UART
CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for UART Baud Rate Generation)
12.2
Description of Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of registers used by the
U-TIMER.
■ U-TIMER (UTIM: UTIM0 to UTIM2)
UTIM
ch0 address: 00000064H
ch1 address: 0000006CH
ch2 address: 00000074H
15
14
2
1
0
b15
b14
b2
b1
b0
R
0
← Access
← Initial value
UTIM is a register that indicates the timer value. Use a 16-bit transfer instruction to access this register.
■ Reload Register (UTIMR: UTIMR0 to UTIMR2)
UTIMR
ch0 address: 00000064H
ch1 address: 0000006CH
ch2 address: 00000074H
15
14
2
1
0
b15
b14
b2
b1
b0
W
0
← Access
← Initial value
UTIMR is a register that stores the value to be reloaded into UTIM if UTIM underflows.
Be sure to use a 16-bit transfer instruction to access this register.
■ U-TIMer Control Register (UTIMC: UTIMC0 to UTIMC2)
UTIMC
ch0 address: 00000067H
ch1 address: 0000006FH
ch2 address: 00000077H
7
6
5
4
3
UCC1
–
–
UTIE UNDR CLKS UTST UTCR
R/W
0
–
–
–
–
R/W
0
R/W
0
2
R/W
0
1
R/W
0
0
R/W
1
← Access
← Initial value
UTIMC controls the operation of the U-TIMER.
Be sure to use a byte transfer instruction to access this register.
[bit7] UCC1 (U-timer Count Control 1)
This bit controls the U-TIMER counting method.
UCC1
Operation
0
Normal operation, α = 2n+2 [Initial value]
1
+1 mode α = 2n+3
n: UTIMR set value
α: Cycle of the output clock for UART
299
CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for UART Baud Rate Generation)
The U-TIMER can set a normal 2(n+1) cycle clock, as well as an odd-numbered division for the UART.
Set UCC1 to "1" to generate a cycle of 2n+3.
Examples:
• UTIMR=5, UCC1=0
Generation cycle=2n+2=12 cycles
• UTIMR=25, UCC1=1
Generation cycle=2n+3=53 cycles
• UTIMR=60, UCC1=0
Generation cycle=2n+2=122 cycles
Set UCC1 to "0" to use the U-TIMER as the interval timer.
[bit6, bit5] (reserved)
[bit4] UTIE (U-Timer Interrupt Enable)
This bit is the interrupt enable bit for a U-TIMER underflow.
0: Interrupt disabled [Initial value]
1: Interrupt enabled
[bit3] UNDR (UNDeR flow flag)
This bit is a flag indicating that an underflow has occurred. If UTIE is "1", an underflow is generated when
UNDR is set. The UNDR bit is cleared at reset or when "0" is written to it.
When reading by a read-modify-write instruction, "1" is always read. Writing "1" to the UNDR has no
effect.
[bit2] CLKS (CLocK Select)
This bit is the cascade specification bit for Channels 0 and 1 of the U-TIMER.
0: Uses a peripheral clock as the clock source (φ) [Initial value]
1: Uses an underflow signal of ch.0 as the U-TIMER source clock timing (f.f. shown in the block
diagram)
CLKS is valid only for Channels 1 and 2. This bit must always be set to "0" for ch.0.
Note:
φ (Peripheral clock=CLKP) has a different cycle depending on the gear setting.
[bit1] UTST (U-Timer STart)
This bit is the U-TIMER operation enable bit.
0: Stop. Writing "0" during operation stops running of the U-TIMER. [Initial value]
1: Write. Writing "1" during operation keeps the operation of U-TIMER.
[bit0] UTCR (U-Timer CleaR)
Writing "0" to UTCR clears the U-TIMER to "0000H" (also clears the f.f. to "0").
The read value is always "1".
300
CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for UART Baud Rate Generation)
Note:
In the stop state, data is automatically reloaded when asserting (starting) the start bit UTST.
1.
In the stop state, when asserting both the clear bit UTCR and the start bit UTST at the same
time, the counter is cleared to "0" and an underflow is generated in the count-down immediately
after the counter is cleared.
2.
During operation, the counter is cleared to "0" by asserting the clear bit UTCR. As a result, a
short, whisker-like pulse may be output in the output waveform, and can cause the U-TIMER,
located in higher side of UART and cascade mode, to malfunction. While the output clock is
being used, do not clear it using the clear bit.
3.
In cascade mode, setting the lower side UTIMR (reload register) to "0" or "1" causes the count
to be performed incorrectly.
4.
In the timer stop state, when asserting both bit1 (U-TIMER start bit: UTST) and bit0 (U-TIMER
clear bit: UTCR) of the U-TIMER control register at the same time, bit3 (underflow flag: UNDR)
of this register is set when the counter is loaded after it has been cleared. At this timing, the
internal baud rate clock is set to "H" level.
5.
If the device attempts to set and clear an interrupt request flag at the same time, the flag is set
by priority and the clear operation becomes ineffective.
6.
If you select not to use ch0 in cascade mode or use this module only as the timer function,
always write "0" to bit2 (Reference clock selection bit: CLKS) of the U-TIMER control register.
Additionally, change the setting of the "CLKS" bit when this module is in the stop state.
7.
If the device attempts to write to and reload the data into the U-TIMER reload register at the
same time, old data is loaded into the counter. New data is loaded into the counter in the next
reload timing.
8.
If the device attempts to timer clear and timer count/reload at the same time, the timer clear
operation takes precedence.
9.
Set UTIMR reload value to "3" or higher when using CLK synchronous mode.
301
CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer for UART Baud Rate Generation)
12.3
Description of Operation
This section explains calculation of U-TIMER baud rate and cascade mode.
■ Calculation of Baud Rate
The UART uses the underflow flip-flop (f.f. in the block diagram) of the corresponding U-TIMER
(U-TIMER0 -> UART0, U-TIMER1 -> UART1, U-TIMER2 -> UART2) as the clock source for baud
rates.
• Asynchronous (start-stop) mode
The UART uses the U-TIMER output divided by 16.
UCC1=0
bps =
UCC1=1
bps =
φ
n
---
φ
--- Peripheral machine clock frequency
(varies depending on the gear)
φ
n
---
(2n+2)
φ
(2n+2) × 16
UTIMR (reload value)
φ
(2n+3) × 16
Maximum bps 33 MHz 515625 bps
• CLK synchronous mode
UCC1=0
bps =
UCC1=1
UTIMR (reload value)
(set n=3 or higher number)
--- Peripheral machine clock frequency
(varies depending on the gear)
φ
bps =
(2n+3)
Maximum bps 33 MHz 4125000 bps
■ Cascade Mode
Channels 0 and 1 of the U-TIMER can be used in cascade mode.
Example: When UTIMR ch0 is set to "0003H" and UTIMR ch1 is set to "0100H"
φ
UTIM ch0
00H 03H 02H 01H 00H 03H 02H 01H 00H 03H 02H 01H 00H 03H 02H 01H 00H 03H 02H 01H
f.f. ch0
UTIM ch1
f.f. ch1
302
0002H
0001H
0000H
0100H
CHAPTER 13
UART
This chapter describes the overview of the UART, the
configuration and functions of registers, and UART
operation.
13.1 Overview
13.2 Detail Description of Registers
13.3 Operation of UART
13.4 Example of Using the UART
13.5 Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload Values
303
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.1
Overview
The UART is a serial I/O port used to perform asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
communication or CLK synchronous communication. The MB91260B series has three
UART channels.
■ Features of UART
• Full-duplex double buffer
• Either asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) or CLK synchronous communication can be selected.
• Multiprocessor mode is supported.
• Fully programmable baud rate.
• An arbitrary baud rate can be set using a built-in timer (See "CHAPTER 12 U-TIMER (16-bit Timer
for UART Baud Rate Generation)").
• An external clock can be used to set a baud rate.
• Error detection functions (parity, framing, overrun)
• The transfer signal is an NRZ code.
• DMA transfer cab be started by an interruption.
304
CHAPTER 13 UART
■ Register List
15
8 7
0
SCR
SMR
(R/W)
SSR
SIDR(R)/SODR(W)
(R/W)
8 bit
8 bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PE
ORE
FRE
BDS
RIE
TIE
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MD1
MD0
–
–
CS0
–
SCKE
–
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PEN
P
SBL
CL
A/D
REC
RXE
TXE
RDRF TDRE
Serial input register
Serial output register
(SIDR /SODR)
Serial status register
(SSR)
Serial mode register
(SMR)
Serial control register
(SCR)
305
CHAPTER 13 UART
■ Block Diagram
Control signal
Receive interrupt
(to CPU)
SCK (clock)
Send clock
From U-TIMER
External clock
SCK
Clock
selection
circuit
Send interrupt
(to CPU)
Receive clock
Receive control
circuit
SIN (receive data)
Send control
circuit
Start bit detection
circuit
Send start circuit
Receive bit
counter
Send bit counter
Receive parity
counter
Send parity
counter
SOT (send data)
Receive status
decision circuit
Receive shifter
Receiving
ends
SIDR
Send shifter
Sending
starts
SODR
DMA receive error
occurrence signal
(to DMAC)
R-bus
MD1
MD0
SMR
register
CS0
SCKE
SCR
register
PEN
P
SBL
CL
A/D
REC
RXE
TXE
SSR
register
PE
ORE
FRE
RDRF
TDRE
BDS
RIE
TIE
Control signal
306
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.2
Detail Description of Registers
This section describes the configuration and functions of registers used by the UART.
■ SMR (Serial Mode Register)
SMR
Address
ch0 000063H
ch1 00006BH
ch2 000073H
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
MD1
R/W
MD0
R/W
–
–
CS0
W
–
SCKE
R/W
–
Initial value
00--0-0-B
The SMR specifies the UART operating mode. Set the operating mode while operation is stopped. Do not
write to this register during operation.
[bit7, bit6] MD1, MD0 (MoDe select):
These bits select a UART operating mode.
Table 13.2-1 Settings for UART Operating Modes
Mode
MD1
MD0
Operating mode
0
0
0
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization): normal mode [Initial value]
1
0
1
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization): multiprocessor mode
2
1
0
CLK synchronous mode
–
1
1
Setting disabled
Note:
Mode 1, which is CLK asynchronous mode (multiprocessor), is used with more than one slave CPU
connecting to one host CPU. This resource cannot identify the data format of received data,
therefore, only the master in multiprocessor mode is supported.
Additionally, since the parity check function cannot be used, set PEN of the SCR register to "0".
[bit5, bit4] (reserved)
Always write "1" to these bits.
[bit3] CS0 (Clock Select)
This bit selects the UART operating clock.
0: Built-in timer (U-TIMER) [Initial value]
1: External clock
[bit2] (reserved)
Always write "0" to this bit.
307
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit1] SCKE (SCLK Enable):
This bit specifies whether the SCK pin is used as a clock input pin or a clock output pin when
communication is performed in CLK synchronous mode (Mode 2).
Set this bit to "0" in CLK asynchronous mode or external clock mode.
0: Serves as clock input pin. [Initial value]
1: Serves as clock output pin.
Note:
When using the SCK pin as a clock input pin, set the CS0 bit to "1" to select external clock mode.
[bit0] (Reserved):
Unused bit.
■ SCR (Serial Control Register)
SCR
Address
ch0 000062H
ch1 00006AH
ch2 000072H
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
PEN
R/W
P
R/W
SBL
R/W
CL
R/W
A/D
R/W
REC
W
RXE
R/W
TXE
R/W
Initial value
00000100B
The SCR controls the transfer protocol that is used for serial communication.
[bit7] PEN (Parity Enable):
This bit specifies whether to add parity in serial communication when data communication is performed.
0: No parity [Initial value]
1: Parity
Note:
Parity can be added only in normal mode (Mode 0) of asynchronous (start-stop synchronization)
communication mode. No parity can be added in multiprocessor mode (Mode 1) or CLK
synchronous communication mode (Mode 2).
[bit6] P (Parity):
This bit specifies that even or odd parity is used to perform data communication.
0: Even parity [Initial value]
1: Odd parity
[bit5] SBL (Stop Bit Length):
This bit specifies the length of stop bit, which marks the end of a frame in asynchronous (start-stop
synchronization) communication.
0: 1 stop bit [Initial value]
1: 2 stop bits
308
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit4] CL (Character Length):
This bit specifies the data length of one frame that is sent or received.
0: 7-bit data [Initial value]
1: 8-bit data
Note:
7-bit data can be handled only in normal mode (Mode 0) of asynchronous (start-stop
synchronization) communication mode. Use 8-bit data in multiprocessor mode (Mode 1) or CLK
synchronous communication mode (Mode 2).
[bit3] A/D (Address/Data):
This bit specifies the data format of a frame that is sent or received in multiprocessor mode (Mode 1) of
asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) communication mode.
0: Data frame [Initial value]
1: Address frame
[bit2] REC (Receiver Error Clear):
Write "0" to this bit to clear the error flags (PE, ORE, and FRE) in the SSR register.
Writing "1" to this bit has no effect. "1" is always read from this bit.
[bit1] RXE (Receiver Enable):
This bit controls the UART receive operation.
0: Disables receive operation. [Initial value]
1: Enables receive operation.
Note:
If a receive operation is disabled while it is in progress (while data is being input to the receive shift
register), reception of the frame is completed and the receive operation is stopped when the
received data is stored in the receive data buffer register (SIDR).
[bit0] TXE (Transmitter Enable):
This bit controls the UART send operation.
0: Disables send operation. [Initial value]
1: Enables send operation.
Note:
If a send operation is disabled while it is in progress (while data is being output from the transmission
register), sending is stopped when no more send data is stored in the send data buffer register
(SODR).
309
CHAPTER 13 UART
■ SIDR: SIDR0 to SIDR2 (Serial Input Data Register)
SODR: SODR0 to SODR2 (Serial Output Data Register)
SIDR
Address
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
Initial value
ch0 000061H
ch1 000069H
ch2 000071H
D7
R
D6
R
D5
R
D4
R
D3
R
D2
R
D1
R
D0
R
Undefined
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
Initial value
D7
W
D6
W
D5
W
D4
W
D3
W
D2
W
D1
W
D0
W
Undefined
SODR
Address
ch0 000061H
ch1 000069H
ch2 000071H
These registers are data buffer registers for sending and receiving.
If the data length is seven bits, bit7 (D7) of SIDR and SODR contains invalid data. Accessing SIDR and
SODR when BDS=1 switches the high-order and low-order data on the bus. As a result, it appears that bit0
(D0) is ignored.
Write to the SODR register only while the TDRE bit of the SSR register is "1".
Note:
Writing to the register with this address means writing to the SODR register. Reading from the
register with this address means reading from the SIDR register.
■ SSR: SSR0 to SSR2 (Serial Status Register)
SSR
Address
ch0 000060H
ch1 000068H
ch2 000070H
bit7
bit6
bit5
PE
R
ORE
R
FRE
R
bit4
bit3
RDRF TDRE
R
R
bit2
bit1
bit0
BDS
R/W
RIE
R/W
TIE
R/W
Initial value
00001000B
The SSR is configured from flags that indicate the operating status of the UART.
[bit7] PE (Parity Error):
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, is set when a parity error occurs during reception.
To clear the flag when it has been set, write "0" to the REC bit (bit10) of the SCR register.
If the PE bit is set, the SIDR data becomes invalid.
0: No parity error has occurred. [Initial value]
1: A parity error has occurred.
[bit6] ORE (Over Run Error):
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, is set when an overrun error occurs during reception.
To clear the flag when it has been set, write "0" to the REC bit of the SCR register.
If the ORE bit is set, the SIDR data becomes invalid.
0: No overrun error has occurred. [Initial value]
1: An overrun error has occurred.
310
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit5] FRE (FRaming Error):
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, is set when a framing error occurs during reception.
To clear the flag when it has been set, write "0" to the REC bit of the SCR register.
If the FRE bit is set, the SIDR data becomes invalid.
0: No framing error has occurred. [Initial value]
1: A framing error has occurred.
Notes:
• Switch the internal and external baud rate clocks using bit3 of the serial mode register only while
the UART is stopped, since the switching takes effect immediately after writing.
• Bit3 of the serial mode register is write-only.
[bit4] RDRF (Receiver Data Register Full):
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, indicates that the SIDR register has receive data.
This bit is set when receive data is loaded into the SIDR register. It is automatically cleared when the data
is read from the SIDR register.
0: No receive data exists. [Initial value]
1: Receive data exists.
[bit3] TDRE (Transmitter Data Register Empty):
This bit, which is an interrupt request flag, indicates whether send data can be written to SODR register.
This bit is cleared when send data is written to the SODR register. It is set again when the written data is
loaded into the send shifter and begins to be transferred, indicating that the next send data can be written.
0: Disables writing of send data.
1: Enables writing of send data. [Initial value]
[bit2] BDS (Bit Direction Select)
This bit selects the transfer direction.
0: Sends starting from the least significant bit (LSB). [Initial value]
1: Sends starting from the most significant bit (MSB).
Note:
Because the high-order and low-order data are switched when the serial data register is written or
read, the data will become invalid if the bit is rewritten after data is written to the SODR register.
If the SODR register and BDS are rewritten at the same time using halfwords (16 bits), data will be
written to the SODR register based on the BDS value before rewriting.
311
CHAPTER 13 UART
[bit1] RIE (Receiver Interrupt Enable):
This bit controls a receive interrupt.
0: Disables receive interrupt. [Initial value]
1: Enables receive interrupt.
Note:
Receive interrupt sources include errors due to PE, ORE, and FRE as well as normal receive due to
RDRF.
[bit0] TIE (Transmitter Interrupt Enable):
This bit controls a send interrupt.
0: Disables send interrupt. [Initial value]
1: Enables send interrupt.
Note:
Send interrupt sources include send requests due to TDRE.
312
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.3
Operation of UART
The UART has two operating modes: asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode
and clock synchronous mode.
Asynchronous mode consists of normal and multiprocessor mode.
This section describes the operation of these operating modes.
■ Operating Modes
The UART has the operating modes shown in Table 13.3-1 and can switch the mode by setting a value in
the SMR and SCR registers.
Table 13.3-1 UART Operating Modes
Mode
Parity
Data length
Yes/No
7
Yes/No
8
1
No
8+1
2
No
8
0
Operating mode
Stop bit length
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization): normal
mode
1 bit or 2 bits
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization):
multiprocessor mode
CLK synchronous mode
No
The stop bit length in asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode can be specified only for a send
operation. The stop bit length is always one bit for a receive operation. Since operation is possible only in
the above modes, do not make any other setting.
■ Selecting a Clock for the UART
● Internal Timer
If you select the U-TIMER by setting CS0 to "0", the baud rate is determined according to the reload value
set for the U-TIMER. At this time, you can calculate the baud rate as follows:
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) φ/ (16 × β)
CLK synchronous
φ/β
φ: Peripheral machine clock frequency
β: Cycle defined for the U-TIMER (2n+2 or 2n+3, n is the reload value [n≥3])
In asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) mode, data can be transferred in the range from -1% to +1%
of the specified baud rate.
● External Clock
If you select an external clock by setting CS0 to "1", the baud rate is as follows (the frequency of the
external clock is assumed to be φ):
Asynchronous (start-stop synchronization) :φ/16
CLK synchronous
:φ
However, the maximum value for φ is 3.125 MHz.
313
CHAPTER 13 UART
■ Asynchronous (Start-stop Synchronization) Mode
● Transfer Data Format
UART handles only data in the NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format. Figure 13.3-1 shows the data format.
Figure 13.3-1 Transfer Data Format (Modes 0 and 1)
SIN, SOT
0
1
0
Start LSB
1
1
0
0
1
0 1 1
MSB Stop
A/D Stop
(Mode 0)
(Mode 1)
Transferred data is 01001101B.
As shown in Figure 13.3-1, the transfer data always starts with the start bit ("L" level data), continues to the
data bit length specified in LSB First, and ends with a stop bit ("H" level data). If an external clock is
selected, be sure to input a clock at all times.
The data length can be set to 7 or 8 bits in normal mode (Mode 0), but must be set to 8 bits in
multiprocessor mode (Mode 1). In multiprocessor mode, parity cannot be added. Instead, the A/D bit is
always added.
● Receive Operation
If the RXE bit (bit1) of the SCR register is set to "1", a receive operation is always in progress.
If a start bit appears on the receive line, one-frame data is received according to the data format specified in
the SCR register. After reception of one frame is completed, if an error occurs, the error flag is set and then
the RDRF flag (bit4 of the SSR register) is set. If, at this time, the RIE bit (bit1) of the same SSR register
is set to "1", a receive interrupt is generated to the CPU. Check the flags of the SSR register and if normal
reception has occurred, read the SIDR register, or if an error has occurred, perform the necessary
processing.
The RDRF flag is cleared when the SIDR register is read.
● Send Operation
If the TDRE flag (bit3) of the SSR register is set to "1", send data is written to the SODR register. If, at
this time, the TXE bit (bit0) of the SCR register is set to "1", transmission occurs.
The TDRE flag is set again when the data set in the SODR register is loaded into the send shift register and
the transfer starts, indicating that the next send data can be set. If, at this time, the TIE bit (bit0) of the same
SSR register is set to "1", a send interrupt is generated to the CPU to request to set send data in the SODR
register.
The TDRE flag is cleared if data is set in the SODR register.
314
CHAPTER 13 UART
■ CLK Synchronous Mode
● Transfer Data Format
The UART handles only data in the NRZ (Non Return to Zero) format.
relationship between send and receive clocks and data.
Figure 13.3-2 shows the
Figure 13.3-2 Transfer Data Format (Mode 2)
Writing to SODR
Mark
SCK
RXE,TXE
SIN,SOT
1
0
LSB
1
1
0
0
1
0
MSB
(Mode 2)
Transferred data is 01001101B
When the internal clock (U-TIMER) has been selected, a data receive synchronous clock is automatically
generated as soon as data is received. While an external clock has been selected, after checking the
existence of data in the send data buffer SODR register of the send side UART (TDRE flag is "0"), an
accurate supply of the clock for one byte is necessary. Before sending starts and after it ends, be sure to set
the mark level.
The data length is 8 bits only, and no parity can be added. Only overrun errors are detected because there is
no start or stop bit.
● Initialization
The following shows the setting values of the control registers required to use CLK synchronous mode.
(1) SMR register
MD1, MD0 : "10B"
CS
: Specifies the clock input
SCKE
: Set to "1" for an internal timer and to "0" for an external clock
(2) SCR register
PEN
: "0"
P, SBL, A/D : These bits are meaningless
CL
: "1"
REC
: "0" (to initialize the register)
RXE, TXE
: At least one of the bits must be set to "1"
(3) SSR register
RIE
: Set to 1 to enable interrupts and to "0" to disables interrupts
TIE
: "0"
315
CHAPTER 13 UART
● Start of Communication
Write to the SODR register to start communication. If only reception is performed, dummy send data must
be written to the SODR register.
● End of Communication
Check for the end of communication by making sure that the RDRF flag of the SSR register has changed to
"1". Use the ORE bit of the SSR register to check that communication has been performed correctly.
■ Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting Flags
The UART has five flags and two interrupt sources.
The five flags are PE, ORE, FRE, RDRF, and TDRE. PE means parity error, ORE means overrun error,
and FRE means framing error. These flags are set when an error occurs during reception and are cleared
when "0" is written to REC of the SCR register. RDRF is set when receive data is loaded into the SIDR
register and is cleared when data is read from the SIDR register. However, Mode 1 does not provide a
parity detection function and Mode 2 does not provide a parity detection function and a framing error
detection function. TDRE is set when the SODR register is empty and writing to it is enabled, and is
cleared when data is written to the SODR register.
There are two interrupt sources, one for receiving and the other for sending. During receiving, an interrupt
is requested by PE, ORE, FRE, or RDRF. During sending, an interrupt is requested by TDRE. The
following shows the timing for setting the interrupt flags in each of these modes.
● Receive Operation in Mode 0
The PE, ORE, FRE, and RDRF flags are set when the last stop bit is detected after a receive transfer is
completed, and an interrupt request is generated to the CPU. The SIDR data is invalid while PE, ORE, and
FRE are active.
Figure 13.3-3 Timing for Setting ORE, FRE, and RDRF (Mode 0)
Data
PE, ORE, FRE
RDRF
Receive interrupt
316
D6
D7
Stop
CHAPTER 13 UART
● Receive Operation in Mode 1
The ORE, FRE, and RDRF flags are set when the last stop bit is detected after a receive transfer is
completed, and an interrupt request is generated to the CPU. The data indicating an address or data in the
9th bit becomes invalid because the receivable data length is 8 bits. The SIDR data is invalid while ORE
and FRE are active.
Figure 13.3-4 Timing for Setting ORE, FRE, and RDRF (Mode 1)
Data
D7
Address/data
Stop
ORE, FRE
RD
Receive interrupt
● Receive Operation in Mode 2
The ORE and RDRF flags are set when the last data (D7) is detected after the receive transfer is completed,
and an interrupt request is generated to the CPU. The SIDR data is invalid while ORE is active.
Figure 13.3-5 Timing of Setting ORE and RDRF (Mode 2)
Data
D5
D6
D7
ORE
RDRF
Receive interrupt
317
CHAPTER 13 UART
● Send operation in Modes 0, 1, and 2
TDRE is cleared when data is written to the SODR register. This bit is set when data is transferred to the
internal shift register and the next data is ready to be written, and an interrupt request is generated to the
CPU. If "0" is written to TXE of the SCR register (as well as RXE in Mode 2) during a send operation,
TDRE of the SSR register is set to "1", disabling the UART send operation after the transmission shifter
stops. The device sends data written to the SODR register before transmission stops after "0" is written to
the TXE of the SCR register (as well as RXE in Mode 2) during the send operation.
Figure 13.3-6 Timing for Setting TDRE (Modes 0 and 1)
Writing to
SODR
TDRE
Interrupt request to CPU
SOT interrupt
SOT output
ST: Start bit
SP: Stop bit
ST D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 SP SP ST D0 D1 D2 D3
A/D
D0 to D7: Data bits
A/D: Address/Data multiplexer
Figure 13.3-7 Timing for Setting TDRE (Mode 2)
Writing to
SODR
TDRE
Interrupt request to CPU
SOT
interrupt
SOT output
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
■ Precautions on Usage
Writing to the SODR register starts communication. Even for receive only, dummy send data must be
written to the SODR register.
Set the operating mode while operation is stopped. Data sent and received while the operating mode is
being set is not ensured.
318
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.4
Example of Using the UART
This section provides an example of using the UART. Mode 1 is used if more than one
slave CPU is connected to one host CPU.
■ Example of Using the UART
Figure 13.4-1 shows an example of constructing a system using mode 1.
This resource supports only a communications interface of the host side.
Figure 13.4-1 Example of Constructing a System Using Mode 1
SOT
SIN
Host CPU
SOT SIN
SOT SIN
Slave CPU#0
Slave CPU#1
Communication starts when the host CPU transfers address data. Address data is data used when A/D of
the SCR register is set to "1". This data is used to select a destination slave CPU, enabling communication
with the host CPU. Normal data is data used when A/D of the SCR register is set to "0". Figure 13.4-2
shows the flowchart.
In this mode, set the PEN bit of the SCR register to "0" since the parity check function cannot be used.
319
CHAPTER 13 UART
Figure 13.4-2 Communication Flowchart in Mode 1
(Host CPU)
START
Set transfer mode to "1".
Set data used to select a
slave CPU in D0 to D7,
set "1" in A/D, and
transfer one byte.
Set "0" in A/D.
Enable receive operation.
Communicate with
a slave CPU.
Communication
completed?
NO
YES
Communicate
with another slave
CPU.
NO
YES
Disable receive operation.
END
320
CHAPTER 13 UART
13.5
Example of Setting Baud Rates and U-TIMER Reload
Values
This section provides an example of setting baud rates and U-TIMER reload values.
A frequency in the tables represents a peripheral machine clock frequency. UCC1 is a value to be set in the
UCC1 bit of the UTIMC register of the U-TIMER.
"–" in the tables indicates the setting value cannot be used due to the error exceeding ±1%.
Table 13.5-1 Setting Values in Asynchronous (Start-Stop Synchronization) Mode
Baud Rate
ms
33 MHz
20 MHz
16.5 MHz
10 MHz
1200
833.33
858 (UCC1=0)
520 (UCC1=0)
428 (UCC1=1)
259 (UCC1=1)
2400
416.67
428 (UCC1=1)
259 (UCC1=1)
214 (UCC1=0)
129 (UCC1=0)
4800
208.33
214 (UCC1=0)
129 (UCC1=0)
106 (UCC1=0)
64 (UCC1=0)
9600
104.17
106 (UCC1=1)
64 (UCC1=0)
52 (UCC1=1)
31 (UCC1=1)
19200
52.08
52 (UCC1=1)
31 (UCC1=1)
26 (UCC1=0)
—
38400
26.04
26 (UCC1=0)
—
12 (UCC1=1)
—
57600
17.36
17 (UCC1=0)
—
8 (UCC1=0)
—
10400
96.15
98 (UCC1=0)
59 (UCC1=0)
48 (UCC1=1)
29 (UCC1=0)
31250
32.00
32 (UCC1=0)
19 (UCC1=0)
15 (UCC1=1)
9 (UCC1=0)
62500
16.00
15 (UCC1=1)
9 (UCC1=0)
—
4 (UCC1=0)
Table 13.5-2 Setting Values in CLK Synchronous Mode
Baud Rate
ms
33 MHz
20 MHz
16.5 MHz
10 MHz
250K
4.00
65 (UCC1=0)
39 (UCC1=0)
32 (UCC1=0)
19 (UCC1=0)
500K
2.00
32 (UCC1=0)
19 (UCC1=0)
15 (UCC1=1)
9 (UCC1=0)
1M
1.00
15 (UCC1=1)
9 (UCC1=0)
7 (UCC1=0) *
4 (UCC1=0)
*: Having error exceeding ±1%
321
CHAPTER 13 UART
322
CHAPTER 14
8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
This chapter describes the overview of the 8/10-bit A/D
converter, the configuration and functions of registers,
and the operation of the 8/10-bit A/D converter.
14.1 Overview
14.2 Configuration
14.3 Pin
14.4 Registers
14.5 Interrupt
14.6 Operation Explanation
14.7 A/D Conversion Data Protection Function
14.8 Precautions on Using
323
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.1
Overview
The 8/10-bit A/D converter has a feature to convert analog input voltage to a 10 or 8-bit
digital value, using the RC successive comparison/conversion method. The input signal
can be selected from 8 channels of analog input pin, and three types of conversions can
be activated: software, internal clock, and external pin trigger.
■ Function of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
There is an A/D conversion feature to convert analog voltage (input voltage) input to the analog input pins
into digital values. This feature has the following benefits.
• The conversion time is a minimum of 1.2 µs (including the sampling time using the 33 MHz machine
clock).
• The conversion method used is the RC successive comparison conversion method with sample hold
circuit.
• A resolution of 10- or 8-bit can be selected.
• The analog input pin can be selected from the 8 channels using the program.
• After A/D conversion is completed, an interrupt request can be generated.
• No data are lost in the interrupt enable status since the conversion data protection function works even
in the continuous conversion.
• One of the following conversion activation causes can be selected: software, 16-bit reload timer 1 or
multifunctional timer (rising edge), or external pin triggers (falling edge).
There are three conversion modes.
Table 14.1-1 Conversion Modes of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Conversion Mode
Single Conversion Operation
Scanning Conversion Operation
Single conversion
mode
The specified channel (one
channel only) is converted for one
time and terminated.
Continuous plural channels (maximum 8
channels can be specified) are converted for
one time and terminated.
Continuous
conversion mode
Repeatedly convert specified
channel (1 channel only).
Repeatedly convert multiple channels (up
to 8 can be specified) in succession.
Pause-conversion
mode
The specified channel (one
channel only) is converted for one
time and suspended until the next
start.
Continuous plural channels (maximum 8
channels can be specified) are converted.
However, one channel is converted and
suspended until the next start.
• This model has three units: Unit 0, which has 8 analog-input channels; and units 1 and 2, which have
two analog-input channels.
• The unit-0 activation trigger is the OR of the reload timer 1 and multifunctional timer. Operate reload
timer 1 when activation via the multifunctional timer is enabled to activate A/D unit 0 via both
activation triggers.
324
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.2
Configuration
The 8/10-bit A/D converter is made up of the following 11 blocks.
• A/D control status registers (ADCS)
• A/D channel control register (ADCH)
• A/D mode setting register (ADMD)
• A/D data register (ADCD)
• Clock selector (input clock selector for activation of A/D conversion)
• Decoder
• Analog channel selector
• Sample hold circuit
• D/A converter
• Comparator
• Control circuit
■ Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Figure 14.2-1 Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
AVCC
*1
AVRH1
AVRH2 AVRL
MPX
D/A converter
AN10,AN8,AN0
AN11,AN9,AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
Sequential compare
register
Input
circuit
Comparator
AN5
AN6
R-bus
AN7
Decoder
Sample & hold circuit
A/D data register
A/D channel control register
A/D mode setting register
Multifunctional timer *2
16-bit reload timer 1
External pin trigger
A/D control status register
Operation clock
Prescaler
325
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
*1:
Unit 0: 8ch of AN0 to AN7
Unit 1: 2ch of AN8 and AN9
Unit 2: 2ch of AN10 and AN11
*2:
Unit 0: 16-bit reload timer 1 or multifunctional timer
(Activated via either the reload timer 1 or multifunctional timer.)
Unit 1: multifunctional timer
Unit 2: multifunctional timer
● A/D control status registers (ADCS)
Features are available to suspend and confirm conversion, enable/disable interrupt requests, confirm the
status of interrupt requests, and select the A/D conversion resolution.
● A/D channel control register (ADCH)
There is a feature to select the A/D channel.
● A/D mode setting register (ADMD)
There is a feature to select a conversion mode and to set the A/D conversion compare time and sampling time.
● A/D data register (ADCD)
This register stores A/D conversion results.
● Clock selector
This is an A/D conversion activation clock selector. 16-bit reload timer channel 1 output, multifunctional
timer, and external pin trigger can be selected as the activation clock.
• Unit 0 is 16-bit reload timer channel 1 output.
• Units 1 and 2 can be activated via multifunctional timer.
● Decoder
The A/D channel control register (ADCH) ANE0 to ANE2 and ANS0 to ANS2 bit settings are a circuit to
select the analog input pin to use.
● Analog channel selector
This circuit selects the pin to be used from the 8 analog input pins.
• Unit 0 has 8 analog inputs.
• Unit 1 and 2 have 2 analog inputs.
● Sample hold circuit
This circuit holds the input voltage selected by the analog channel selector. The input voltage can be
converted without affected by the input voltage fluctuation in the A/D conversion (in the comparison) by
holding the sample of input voltage immediately after starting the A/D conversion.
326
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
● D/A converter
The reference voltage is generated to compare the held sample of input voltage.
● Comparator
This compares the input voltage for which sample hold is performed, with the output voltage of the D/A
converter to determine which is the greater of the two.
● Control circuit
The signal from the comparator (higher or lower) determines the A/D conversion value. When the A/D
conversion is terminated, the conversion result is stored in the A/D data register (ADCD) and the interrupt
request is generated.
327
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.3
Pin
Pins of 8/10-bit A/D converter and block diagram of pin are shown.
■ Pins of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
The A/D converter pin serves dual use as a general-purpose port. Table 14.3-1 shows pin functions, I/O
type, and settings when using the 8/10-bit A/D converter.
Table 14.3-1 Pins of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Function
Pin Name Pin Function
Channel 0
PC0/AN0
Channel 1
PC1/AN1
Channel 2
PC2/AN2
Channel 3
PC3/AN3
Channel 4
PC4/AN4
Channel 5
PC5/AN5
Channel 6
PC6/AN6
Channel 7
PC7/AN7
Channel 8
PD0/AN8
Channel 9
PD1/AN9
328
Pull-up
Setting
Stand-by
Control
I/O Port Setting for Using Pin
Input setting of port C
(DDRC: bit0 to bit7=0)
Set to analog input
(AICR0: bit0 to bit7=1)
Port C I/O/
analog input
CMOS output/
CMOS input
or
analog input
None
Yes
Port D I/O/
analog input
Input setting of port D
(DDRD: bit0, bit1=0)
Set to analog input (AICR1: bit0,
bit1=1)
Port E I/O/
analog input
Input setting of port E
(DDRE: bit0, bit1=0)
Set to analog input
(AICR2: bit0, bit1=1)
Channel 10 PE0/AN10
Channel 11 PE1/AN11
I/O Type
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
■ Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter Pin
Figure 14.3-1 Block Diagram of AN0 to AN11 Pins
AICR0,1,2
PDR (port data register)
Analog input
Internal bus data
PDR read
Output latch
PDR write
Pin
DDR (port direction register)
Direction latch
DDR write
DDR read
Standby control
Notes:
• Set the DDR register bits corresponding to the pins to be used as input ports to "0" and apply pullup resistance to the external pins. Also, set the bits corresponding to the AICR register to "0".
• Set the AICR register bit corresponding to the pin to be used as the analog input pin to "1". When
this is done, the value "0" will be read from the PDR register.
329
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.4
Registers
Register list of 8/10-bit A/D converter is shown.
■ Register List of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Figure 14.4-1 Register List of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
Bit
330
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
00007E H
AICR0
000086 H
AICR1
00008E H
AICR2
000078 H
ADCH0
00007C H
ADCS0
00007A H
ADCD01
ADCD00
000080 H
ADCH1
ADMD1
000084 H
ADCS1
000082 H
ACD11
ADCD10
000088 H
ADCH2
ADMD2
00008C H
ADCS2
00008A H
ADCD21
ADMD0
ADCD20
2
1
0
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.4.1
A/D Channel Control Register (ADCH)
The A/D channel control register has a feature to select the A/D conversion channel.
■ A/D Channel Control Register (ADCH: ADCH0 to ADCH2)
Address:
Ch0 000078H
Ch1 000080H
Ch2 000088H
Read/write →
Initial value →
bit15
bit14
bit13
bit12
bit11
bit10
bit9
bit8
-
-
ANS2
ANS1
ANS0
ANE2
ANE1
ANE0
(X)
(X)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
ANE2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
ANE1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
ANE0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
ANS2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
ANS1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
ANS0 A/D conversion start channel selection bits
0
ch.0
1
ch.1
0
ch.2
1
ch.3
0
ch.4
1
ch.5
0
ch.6
1
ch.7
A/D conversion end channel selection bits
ch.0
ch.1
ch.2
ch.3
ch.4
ch.5
ch.6
ch.7
Notes:
• A/D unit 0 is ch.0 to ch.7 = AN0 to AN7
• A/D unit 1 is ch.0 and ch.1 = AN8 and AN9 (ch.2 to ch.7 are vacancy.)
• A/D unit 2 is ch.0 and ch.1 = AN10 and AN11 (ch.2 to ch.7 are vacancy.)
• Write 0 to ANE1, ANE2, ANS2, and ANS1 of A/D units 1 and 2.
• Be sure to set A/D units 1 and 2 so that ANS0 is less than or equal to ANE0.
331
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
Table 14.4-1 Functions of Each Bits in A/D Channel Control Register (ADCH)
Bit Name
bit15
bit14
Unused bits
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to these bits have no effect to operation.
• These bits set the start channel of the A/D conversion and indicate the channel numbers
under A/D conversion during conversion operation.
bit13
to
bit11
ANS2 to ANS0:
• When A/D conversion is activated, A/D conversion starts from the channels written to
A/D conversion start
these bits.
channel selection bits • Channel numbers under the conversion can be read during the A/D conversion. The
channel number converted immediately before can be read during the suspension in the
pause conversion mode.
• These bits set the end channel of the A/D conversion.
• A/D conversion is performed up to the specified channel.
bit10
to
bit8
332
• When the same channels with ANS2 to ANS0 are set, only those channels are
converted. If continuous conversion mode or stop conversion mode is set, when the
conversion up to the channels specified in these bits is completed, conversion returns to
the start channel set in ANS2 to ANS0. If the setting of the start channel is greater than
the end channel, conversion is performed from the start channel to AN7, then from AN0
to the end channel, after which the first conversion operation is completed.
ANE2 to ANE0:
Note:
A/D conversion end
channel selection bits
After setting the start channel to the A/D conversion start channel selection bit (ANS2 to
ANS0), please set neither the A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1, MD0) nor the
A/D conversion end channel selection bit (ANE2 to ANE0) by the read-modify-write
type instruction.
The last conversion channel is read from the ANS2 to ANS0 bits until the A/D
conversion operating starts. Therefore, when the MD1, MD0 bits and ANE2 to ANE0
bits are set by the read-modify-write type instruction after setting the start channel to the
ANS2 to ANS0 bits, the value of ANE2 to ANE0 bits may be re-written.
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.4.2
A/D Mode Setting Register (ADMD)
The A/D mode setting register has a feature to select a conversion mode and to set the
A/D conversion compare time and sampling time.
■ A/D Mode Setting Register (ADMD: ADMD0 to ADMD2)
Address:
ch0 000079H
ch1 000081H
ch2 000089H
Read/Write →
Initial value →
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
MD1
MD0
STS1
STS0
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
CT1
CT0
ST1
ST0
R/W
(1)
R/W
(1)
R/W
(1)
R/W
(1)
ST1 ST0
Sampling time setting bits
9 machine cycles (450 ns @ 20 MHz) *
0
0
15 machine cycles (450 ns @ 33 MHz) *
0
1
1
0
17 machine cycles (510 ns @ 33 MHz) *
1
1
28 machine cycles (840 ns @ 33 MHz) *
*: Set the machine cycle to at least 450ns.
CT1 CT0
Compare time setting bits
0
0 12 machine cycles (750 ns @ 16 MHz) *
0
1 18 machine cycles (720 ns @ 25 MHz) *
1
0 24 machine cycles (720 ns @ 33 MHz) *
1
1 48 machine cycles (1440 ns @ 33 MHz) *
*: Set the machine cycle to at least 720ns.
STS1 STS0
A/D start factor selection bits
0
0
Software start
External pin trigger (falling edge) or
0
1
Software start
Multifunction timer * start (rising edge) or
1
0
Software start
1
1
External pin trigger (falling edge) or
Multifunction timer * start (rising edge) or
Software start
*: In the case of unit 0, the timer is 16-bit reload timer 1
or multifunction timer.
R/W: Readable/Writable
: Initial value
MD1
0
0
1
1
MD0
0
1
0
1
A/D conversion mode selection bits
Single conversion mode 1 (restarting is enabled during operation)
Single conversion mode 2 (restarting is disabled during operation)
Continuous conversion mode (restarting is disabled during operation)
Stop conversion mode (restarting is disabled during operation)
333
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
Table 14.4-2 Functions of Each Bit in A/D Mode Setting Register (ADMD) (1 / 2)
Bit Name
Function
• These bits are used to select the conversion mode during the A/D conversion operation.
• Two bit values of MD1 and MD0 allow the selection of either the single conversion mode
1, the single conversion mode 2, the continuous conversion mode, or the stop conversion
mode.
• The meaning of each mode is as follows.
Single conversion mode 1:
bit7
bit6
MD1, MD0:
A/D conversion
mode selection
bits
The continuous A/D conversion from the setting channels of
ANS2 to ANS0 to the setting channels of ANE2 to ANE0 is
performed only once. It is possible to reactivate while
operating.
Single conversion mode 2: The continuous A/D conversion from the setting channels of
ANS2 to ANS0 to the setting channels of ANE2 to ANE0 is
performed only once. It is not possible to reactivate while
operating.
Continuous conversion mode: Sequentially perform A/D conversion from the channel set in
ANS2 to ANS0 to the channel set in ANE2 to ANE0, and
repeat until forcibly stopped by means of the BUSY bit. It is
not possible to reactivate while operating.
Stop conversion mode:
Perform A/D conversion from the channel set in ANS2 to
ANS0 to the channel set in ANE2 to ANE0 one channel at a
time, pausing between each, and repeat until forcibly stopped
by means of the BUSY bit. It is not possible to reactivate
while operating. The suspended conversion is restarted by the
start factor occurrence selected by the STS1 and 0 bits.
Notes:
• Single, continuous, and stop conversion modes that cannot be re-started can be used to
activate all timers, external triggers, and software.
• Only rewrite these bits before conversion begins, with the A/D operation stopped.
• When A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1,MD0) is set to "00B", restart can be
operating during A/D conversion. Only software start (STS1,STS0="00B") can be set in
this mode. Please restart according to the following procedure.
1. Clear the INT bit to 0.
2. Write STRT bit to 1 and INT bit to 0 at the same time.
When A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1,MD0) is set to "01B", restart can not be
operating during the A/D conversion.
When restarting and termination of the A/D conversion occur at the same time, the A/D
conversion is terminated without restarting. And, value of 300H is stored in data register
(ADCR1/ADCR0). Therefore, please use restart so that neither the A/D conversion
restarting nor the terminating may occur at the same time.
• The start factor of A/D conversion is selected.
bit5
bit4
334
STS1, STS0:
A/D start factor
selection bits
• When the start factor is in the common use, the first start factor generation starts the
operation.
Note:
The activation trigger changes as soon as the bits are rewritten, so if you wish to rewrite
them while A/D conversion is ongoing, switch to a state where your target activation
trigger does not exist.
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
Table 14.4-2 Functions of Each Bit in A/D Mode Setting Register (ADMD) (2 / 2)
Bit Name
Function
These bits are used to select the comparison time at the A/D conversion. After analog input
is loaded (after the sampling time has elapsed), then after the time specified in these bits has
passed, the conversion results are checked, and stored in the A/D control status register
(ADCD).
bit3
bit2
CT1, CT0:
Compare time
setting bits
Notes:
• When CT1 and CT0 = 00B, 10B, or 11B, the compare time must be set to at least 720 ns.
When CT1 and CT0 = 01B, the compare time must be set to at least 900 ns. If the time
is not set to these values or greater, it may not be possible to obtain correct analog
conversion value.
• Only rewrite these bits before conversion begins, with the A/D operation stopped.
These bits are used to select the sampling time at the A/D conversion.
When A/D is activated, analog input is retrieved for the time set in these bits.
bit1
bit0
ST1, ST0:
Sampling time
setting bits
Notes:
• If the sampling time is not set to 450 ns or more, it may not be possible to obtain correct
analog conversion values.
• Only rewrite these bits before conversion begins, with the A/D operation stopped.
335
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.4.3
A/D Control Status Register (ADCS)
The A/D control status register has features to suspend and confirm conversion, enable/
disable interrupt requests, confirm the status of interrupt requests, and select the A/D
conversion resolution.
■ A/D Control Status Register (ADCS: ADCS0 to ADCS2)
00007CH
000084H
00008CH
Read/Write →
Initial value →
Bit15
BUSY
R/W
(0)
Bit14
Bit13
INT
R/W
(0)
Bit12
INTE
R/W
(0)
Bit11
PAUS
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
START
0
1
S10
0
1
BUSY
R/W: Readable/Writable
W: Write only
: Initial value
336
0
1
Bit8
-
START
-
(X)
W
(0)
(0)
A/D conversion start bit
(Only enable at software starting)
A/D conversion function is not starting.
A/D conversion function is starting.
Halt flag bit
Generate no halting of A/D conversion operation
Halt on A/D conversion operation
INTE
0
1
0
1
Bit9
A/D conversion resolution selection bit
10-bit resolution (D9 to D0)
8-bit resolution (D7 to D0)
PAUS
0
1
INT
S10
Bit10
Interrupt request enable bit
Interrupt request output is disabled.
Interrupt request output is enabled.
Interrupt request flag bit
At read
At write
No A/D conversion ends Bit clear
A/D conversion ends
No change, no impact to others.
A/D converting bit
At read
At write
Now stop A/D conversion
Now A/D converting
A/D conversion forcibly stops
No change, no impact to others.
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
Table 14.4-3 Function of Each Bit in A/D Control Status Register (ADCS) (1 / 2)
Bit Name
Function
• Operational display bit of A/D converter
• When reading, if this bit is "0", it indicates that A/D conversion is stopped. If it is "1",
it indicates that A/D conversion is ongoing.
bit15
BUSY:
A/D converting bit
• When writing, writing "0" to this bit forcibly stops A/D conversion. When "1" is
written, the conversion is not changed and no others are affected.
• "1" is always read during read-modify-write.
Note:
Do not perform a forced stop and software activation (BUSY = 0, START = 1) at the
same time.
• This bit is set to "1" if data is set in the A/D data register through A/D conversion.
INT:
bit14
Interrupt request
flag bit
• If this bit and the interrupt request enable bit (ADCS: INTE) are "1", an interrupt
request is generated.
• When writing, a "0" clears this bit, and with "1" no change is made, and there are no
other effects.
• "1" is always read during read-modify-write.
Note:
Clear this bit by writing "0" to it when A/D is stopped.
bit13
bit12
INTE:
Interrupt request
enable bit
PAUS:
Halt flag bit
• This bit is used to enable and disable the interrupt output to CPU.
• If this bit and the interrupt request flag bit (ADCS: INT) are "1", an interrupt request
is generated.
• It is set to "1" when A/D conversion is suspended.
This A/D converter has only one A/D data register. For this reason, when in continuous
conversion mode, if the old conversion results are not completely read via the CPU,
they will be overwritten by the next conversion results and lost. Consequently, when
using continuous conversion mode, as a rule you should perform settings so that
conversion results are sent to memory each time conversion is completed. However,
such case can be assumed that the conversion data transfer is not completed before the
next conversion in the multiple interrupts, etc. The function of this bit was created in
consideration of this case. After conversion is completed, set this bit to "1" while
sending the contents of the data register. During this time, A/D conversion will halt
and will not store the next conversion data.
• "1" is always read during read-modify-write.
• This bit is used to select the A/D conversion resolution.
bit11
S10:
Analog to digital
conversion
resolution selection
bit
• Write "0" to this bit to select 10-bit resolution. Write "1" to this bit to select 8-bit
resolution.
Notes:
• The data bit used are different depending on the resolution.
• Only rewrite this bit before conversion begins, with the A/D operation stopped.
bit10
Unused bit
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to this bit has no effect to operation.
337
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
Table 14.4-3 Function of Each Bit in A/D Control Status Register (ADCS) (2 / 2)
Bit Name
Function
• This bit is used to start the A/D conversion operation by the software.
• Write "1" to this bit to activate A/D conversion.
bit9
START:
A/D conversion
start bit
• In stop conversion mode, this bit will not function to re-start conversion.
Note:
Do not perform a forced stop and software activation (BUSY = 0, START = 1) at the
same time.
bit8
338
Reserved bit
Be sure to write "0".
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.4.4
A/D Data Register (ADCD)
The A/D data register stores A/D conversion results.
■ A/D Data Register (ADCD: ADCD00, ADCD01, ADCD10, ADCD11, ADCD20, ADCD21)
00007AH
000082H
00008AH
bit15
bit14
bit13
bit12
bit11
bit10
bit9
bit8
-
-
-
-
-
-
D9
D8
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
Read/Write → Initial value → (X)
bit7
bit6
bit5
bit4
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
D9 to D0
bit3
bit2
bit1
bit0
D2
D1
D0
R
(X)
R
(X)
R
(X)
A/D data bits
Conversion data
R: Read only
Table 14.4-4 Function of Each Bit in A/D Data Register (ADCD)
Bit Name
bit15
to
bit10
Function
• The read value is indeterminate.
Unused bits
• Writing to these bits have no effect to operation.
• This register stores the results of A/D conversion, and is rewritten each time
conversion is completed.
• The final conversion value is stored usually.
bit9
to
bit0
D9 to D0:
Data bits
• The initial value of this register is indeterminate.
Notes:
• The conversion data protection function is provided.
• Do not write data to this bit while A/D conversion is ongoing.
• When 8-bit resolution is selected from D9 and D8, "0" is read.
339
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.4.5
Analog Input Control Register (AICR)
The analog input control register controls analog input.
■ Analog Input Control Register (AICR: AICR0 to AICR2)
AICR0
00007EH
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
AN7E
AN6E
AN5E
AN4E
AN3E
AN2E
AN1E
AN0E
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Read/Write → R/W
Initial value → (0)
AN7E to AN0E
Analog input enable bits
0
Analog input disable
1
Analog input enable
AICR1
000086H
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
-
-
-
-
-
-
AN9E
AN8E
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Read/Write → Initial value → (X)
AN9E, AN8E
0
1
AICR2
00008EH
Analog input enable bits
Analog input disable
Analog input enable
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
-
-
-
-
-
-
AN11E
AN10E
(X)
R/W
(0)
R/W
(0)
Read/Write → Initial value → (X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
(X)
AN11E, AN10E
R/W : Readable/Writable
: Initial value
0
1
Analog input enable bits
Analog input disable
Analog input enable
Table 14.4-5 Functions of Each Bit in Analog Input Control Register (AICR)
Bit Name
Function
• When this bit is "0", analog input is disabled.
(AICR0)
bit15 to bit8
(AICR1, AICR2)
bit9, bit8
AN7E to AN0E,
AN9E, AN8E,
AN11E, AN10E:
Analog input enable bits
(AICR1, AICR2)
Unused bits
bit15 to bit10
340
• When this bit is "1", analog input is enabled.
• Set the AICR register bit corresponding to the pin to be used as the
analog input pin to "1". When this is done, the value "0" will be read
from the PDR register.
• The read value is indeterminate.
• Writing to these bits have no effect to operation.
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.5
Interrupt
The 8/10-bit A/D converter can generate interrupt requests during A/D conversion by
setting data in the A/D data register.
■ Interrupt of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
See Table 14.5-1 for the interrupt control bits and interrupt cause of the 8/10-bit A/D converter.
Table 14.5-1 Interrupt Control Bits and Interrupt Cause of 8/10-bit A/D Converter
8/10-bit A/D converter
Interrupt request flag bit
ADCS: INT
Interrupt request enable bit
ADCS: INTE
Interrupt cause
Writing of A/D conversion result to A/D data register
When A/D conversion activates, and A/D conversion results are set in the A/D data register (ADCD), the
INT bit of the A/D control status register (ADCS) is set to "1". At this time, if interrupt requests are enabled
(ADCS: INTE = 1), an interrupt request is outputted to the interrupt controller.
341
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.6
Operation Explanation
Three mode types, the single conversion, continuous conversion, and stop conversion
modes are available for the 8/10-bit A/D converter. The operation explanation in each
mode is done.
■ Operation of Single Conversion Mode
In single conversion mode, it sequentially converts the analog input on the channels which have been set by
the ANS (ANS0 to ANS2) bit and ANE (ANE0 to ANE2) bit, and when it reaches to the end channel set in
ANE (ANE0 to ANE2) bit, it stops the A/D conversion. If the start channel and end channel is the same
(ANS=ANE), only one channel specified in the ANS (ANS0 to ANS2) bit will be converted. The settings
in Figure 14.6-1 are required in order to operate in single-conversion mode.
Figure 14.6-1 Setting for Single Conversion Mode
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
ADCH/
ADMD
-
-
ADCS BUSY INT
bit7
ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0 MD1
INTE PAUS
S10
-
START
bit6
bit5 bit4
bit3
MD0 STS1 STS0 CT1
bit2
CT0
Reserved
0
ADCD
-
-
-
-
-
-
Store the converting data
AICR
0: Set "0".
Reference:
The example of conversion order in single conversion mode is shown in following.
When ANS=000B, ANE=011B: AN0 → AN1 → AN2 → AN3 → end
When ANS=110B, ANE=010B: AN6 → AN7 → AN0 → AN1 → AN2 → end
When ANS=011B, ANE=011B: AN3 → end
342
bit1 bit0
ST1
ST0
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
Notes:
• A/D unit 1 uses the 2 channels AN8 and AN9, and A/D unit 2 uses the 2 channels AN10 and
AN11.
• Always write "0" to ANE1, ANE2, ANS2, and ANS1 of A/D units 1 and 2.
• Be sure to set A/D units 1 and 2 so that ANS0 is less than or equal to ANE0.
• When A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1,MD0) is set to "00B", restart can be operating
during A/D conversion. Only software start (STS1,STS0="00B") can be set in this mode. Please
restart according to the following procedure.
1. Clear the INT bit to "0".
2. Write STRT bit to "1" and INT bit to "0" at the same time.
When A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1,MD0) is set to "01B", restart can not be operating
during the A/D conversion.
When restarting and termination of the A/D conversion occur at the same time, the A/D conversion is
terminated without restarting. And, value of "300H" is stored in data register (ADCR1/ADCR0).
Therefore, please use restart so that neither the A/D conversion restarting nor the terminating
may occur at the same time.
■ Operation of Continuous Conversion Mode
In the continuous conversion mode, the analog inputs set by the ANS and ANE bits are sequentially
converted, the analog input set by the ANS bit is resumed at the end of conversion of the end channel set by
the ANE bit, and the A/D conversion operation is continued. If the start channel and end channel are
identical (ANS=ANE), conversion loops on the channel specified by ANS only. The settings shown in
Figure 14.6-2 are required in order to operate in continuous conversion mode.
Figure 14.6-2 Setting at Continuous Conversion Mode
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
ADCH/
ADMD
-
-
bit7
bit3
bit2
bit1 bit0
ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0 MD1 MD0 STS1 STS0 CT1
CT0
ST1
1
ADCS BUSY INT
INTE PAUS
S10
-
bit6
bit5 bit4
ST0
0
START Reserved
0
ADCD
AICR
-
-
-
-
-
-
Store the converting data
0: Set "0".
1: Set "1".
343
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
References:
The example of conversion order in continuous conversion mode is shown in following.
• When ANS=000B and ANE=011B, conversion iterates over AN0, AN1, AN2, AN3, and AN0, in
that order.
• When ANS=110B and ANE=010B, conversion iterates over AN6, AN7, AN0, AN1, AN2 and AN6,
in that order.
• When ANS=011B and ANE=011B, conversion iterates over AN3 and AN3, in that order.
Notes:
• A/D unit 1 uses the 2 channels AN8 and AN9, and A/D unit 2 uses the 2 channels AN10 and
AN11.
• Always write "0" to ANE1, ANE2, ANS2, and ANS1 of A/D units 1 and 2.
• Be sure to set A/D units 1 and 2 so that ANS0 is less than or equal to ANE0.
344
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
■ Operation of Pause-conversion Mode
In the stop conversion mode, the analog input set by the ANS and ANE bits is converted by being
suspended for every channel, the analog input set by the ANS bit is resumed at the end of conversion of the
end channel set by the ANE bit, and the operation of A/D conversion and suspension is continued. If the
start channel and end channel are identical (ANS=ANE), conversion loops on the channel specified by the
ANS bits only. When the conversion is restarted during the suspension, the start factor specified by the
STS1 and 0 bits is generated. The settings in Figure 14.6-3 are required in order to operate in stop
conversion mode.
Figure 14.6-3 Setting at Pause-conversion Mode
bit15 bit14 bit13 bit12 bit11 bit10 bit9 bit8
ADCH/
ADMD
-
-
bit7
bit3
bit2
bit1 bit0
ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 ANE2 ANE1 ANE0 MD1 MD0 STS1 STS0 CT1
CT0
ST1
1
ADCS BUSY INT
INTE PAUS
S10
-
START
bit6
bit5 bit4
ST0
1
Reserved
0
ADCD
-
-
-
-
-
-
AICR
Store the converting data
0: Set "0".
1: Set "1".
References:
The example of conversion order in stop conversion mode is shown in following.
• When ANS=000B and ANE=011B:
AN0 → Pause → AN1 → Pause → AN2 → Pause → AN0 → Repeat
• When ANS=110B and ANE=001B:
AN6 → Pause → AN7 → Pause → AN0 → Pause → AN1 → Pause → AN6 → Repeat
• When ANS=011B, ANE=011B:
AN3 → Pause → AN3 → Pause → Repeat
Notes:
• A/D unit 1 uses the 2 channels AN8 and AN9, and A/D unit 2 uses the 2 channels AN10 and
AN11.
• Always write 0 to ANE1, ANE2, ANS2, and ANS1 of A/D units 1 and 2.
• Be sure to set A/D units 1 and 2 so that ANS0 is less than or equal to ANE0.
345
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.7
A/D Conversion Data Protection Function
When the A/D conversion is executed in the interrupt enable status, the conversion data
protection function works.
■ A/D Conversion Data Protection Function
The A/D converter only has one data register for storing conversion data. For this reason, when performing
A/D conversion, after conversion is completed, the data stored in the data register is rewritten. Therefore,
when the converted data transfer to the memory is delayed, a part of previous data may be lost. To get
around this, when interrupts are enabled (INTE = 1), the data-protection feature works as described below.
When conversion data is stored in the A/D data register (ADCD), the INT bit of the A/D control status
register (ADCS) is set to "1". While the INT bit is "1", conversion data will not be stored to ADCD after
the next conversion ends. The PAUS bit is set, and A/D conversion becomes suspended. While suspended,
the value immediately prior is retained. In order to cancel the suspend, clear the INT bit. After the
suspended status is cleared, the conversion data that had been maintained is stored in ADCD, and the next
operation is performed.
Notes:
• The converted data protection function operates only in the interrupt enabled (ADCS: INTE=1)
status.
• When the conversion is restarted during the suspension, the waiting data are destroyed.
346
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
14.8
Precautions on Using
This section describes precautions on using 8/10-bit A/D converter.
■ Precautions on Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter
● Analog input pin
The A/D input pin does double duty as a port I/O pin. The port-direction register (DDR) and analog input
enable register (AICR) are switched and used. For the pins used as analog input, set the bits corresponding
to DDR to 0 and port to input, then set AICR register analog input mode (AICR x = 1). Lock the input gate
on the port side. When the intermediate level signal is inputted in the port input mode (AICRx = 0), the
input leak current flows through the gate.
● Cautions for use of internal timers
To activate the A/D converter by an internal timer, set the STS1 and STS0 bits of the A/D control status
register (ADMD). When doing so, set the internal timer input value to the inactive side (for internal timer,
this is "L"). If you set it to the active side, the timer may start to operate as soon as you write to the ADMD
register.
● Turning-on sequence of power supply to A/D converter and analog inputs
Make sure to apply to the A/D converter power source (AVCC, AVRH 0 to AVRH 2) and apply analog
input (AN0 to AN11) after or at the same time as applying digital power source (VCC). When cutting off
the power, cut off the digital power source (VCC) after or at the same time as cutting off the A/D converter
power source and analog input.
● Power voltage of A/D converter
In order to prevent latch-ups, make sure that the A/D converter power source (AVCC) does not exceed the
voltage of the digital power source (VCC).
● A/D unit 1 and 2 settings
A/D unit 1 uses the 2 channels AN8 and AN9, and A/D unit 2 uses the 2 channels AN10 and AN11. For
this reason, when using A/D units 1 and 2, always write "0" to ANE1, ANE2, ANS2, and ANS1 of the
A/D channel control register (ADCH). Also be sure to set ANS0 to less than or equal to ANE0.
● Restart of A/D converter
When A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1,MD0) is set to "00B", restart can be operating during A/D
conversion. Only software start (STS1,STS0="00B") can be set in this mode. Please restart according to the
following procedure.
1. Clear the INT bit to 0.
2. Write STRT bit to 1 and INT bit to 0 at the same time.
When A/D conversion mode selection bit (MD1,MD0) is set to "01B", restart can not be operating during
the A/D conversion.
347
CHAPTER 14 8/10-BIT A/D CONVERTER
When restarting and termination of the A/D conversion occur at the same time, the A/D conversion is terminated
without restarting. And, value of "300H" is stored in data register (ADCR1/ADCR0). Therefore, please use restart
so that neither the A/D conversion restarting nor the terminating may occur at the same time.
348
CHAPTER 15
MULTIPLICATION AND
ADDITION CALCULATOR
This chapter explains the overview of the multiply and
accumulate circuit, the configuration and functions of
registers, and the macro (the definition and each
instruction) of the multiply and accumulate circuit.
15.1 Overview
15.2 Register Description
15.3 Operation Explanation
15.4 Instruction Detail Explanation
349
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
15.1
Overview
This section shows the features, the register list, the block diagram of multiplication
and addition calculator.
■ Features
• High-speed multiplication and addition calculation (1 system clock cycle)
• Data format
: 16-bit fixed-point decimal (16 × 16 + 40-bit)
• Instruction area
: 256 × 16-bit
• Data area
: 64 × 16-bit × 2 sets
• Rounding processing available
• Saturation processing available
• Additional item number
: 64 items (Max)
• Instruction
: MAC instruction, STR instruction, JMP instruction
• Delay processing
: Possible to transfer in 64 × 16-bit freely
• Fixed-point decimal format : Selectable from Q8 to Q15
350
• Program execution control
: Selectable from eight commands
• Variable monitor
: Monitor calculation results of up to 8 × 16 bits without stopping program
operation.
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
■ Register List
15
Address: 39EH
8
7
0
Reserved area
Access disabled
Address: 3A0H
DSP-PC (Program counter)
DSP-CSR (Control/Status)
Read/Write
Address: 3A2H
DSP-LY (Delayed register) Upper
DSP-LY (Delayed register) Lower
Read/Write
Address: 3A4H
DSP-OT0 (Output queue 0) Upper
DSP-OT0 (Output queue 0) Lower
Read
Address: 3A6H
DSP-OT1 (Output queue 1) Upper
DSP-OT1 (Output queue 1) Lower
Read
Address: 3A8H
DSP-OT2 (Output queue 2) Upper
DSP-OT2 (Output queue 2) Lower
Read
Address: 3AAH
DSP-OT3 (Output queue 3) Upper
DSP-OT3 (Output queue 3) Lower
Read
Address: 3ACH
Reserved area
Reserved area
Access disabled
Address: 3AEH
Reserved area
Reserved area
Access disabled
Address: 3B0H
DSP-OT4 (Output queue 4) Upper
DSP-OT4 (Output queue 4) Lower
Read
Address: 3B2H
DSP-OT5 (Output queue 5) Upper
DSP-OT5 (Output queue 5) Lower
Read
Address: 3B4H
DSP-OT6 (Output queue 6) Upper
DSP-OT6 (Output queue 6) Lower
Read
Address: 3B6H
DSP-OT7 (Output queue 7) Upper
DSP-OT7 (Output queue 7) Lower
Read
Multiplication and
addition macro
Address:
C000H
:
00H
X-RAM (coefficient RAM) ... 64 × 16 bit
C07EH
Multiplication and
addition macro
C080H
00H
Y-RAM (coefficient RAM) ... 64 × 16 bit
C0FEH
Notes:
Read/Write
:
Multiplication and
addition macro
C100H
C2FEH
Address
3FH
Address:
:
Read/Write
:
3FH
Address:
:
Address
00H
I-RAM (coefficient RAM) ... 256 × 16 bit
Address
Read/Write
:
FFH
·Be sure to write to the above register/RAM area from the CPU using the halfword (or word) transfer
instruction to even-numbered address.
·Byte write and read to RAM area by the transfer command of CPU can be used.
However, when RAM area is used as a multiplication and addition calculator,
please use the write and read by the halfword (or half) transfer command to the
even address number.
351
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
■ Block Diagram
Figure 15.1-1 Block Diagram of Multiplication and Addition Calculator
DSP-CSR
Operation
control block
Instruction control block
DSP-PC
Instruction decode block
I-RAM
IF
(256 × 16 bit)
DEC1
DEC
Operation block
40
X-RAM
(64 × 16 bit)
ADD
16
MUL
40
ACC 40
RND
CLP
16
32
16
Y-RAM
(64 × 16 bit)
Delayed register
DSP-LY
LY-DLY
MPX
DSP-OT0 to DSP-OT7
Variable monitor
352
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
Table 15.1-1 Block Diagram Outline Explanation
Block
Register
Function
Operation control register of multiplication and addition calculation macro
The following operations are controlled from the CPU and servo block.
Operation control
DSP-CSR
• Calculation start/end instructions
• Interrupt control
• Program flow control (used for conditional branching commands of
multiplication and addition macro)
DSP-PC
Program counter
Program execution begins from the first address specified by the CPU.
I-RAM
Instruction RAM of 256 × 16-bit
The CPU can perform R/W while the multiplication and addition macro
calculation is halted.
Load the command code from the CPU before starting calculations.
IF
Instruction fetch register
DEC1*
DEC*
Instruction decoder
X-RAM
Data RAM of 64 × 16-bit
The CPU can perform R/W while the multiplication and addition macro
calculation is halted.
Load the coefficient from the CPU before starting calculations.
Y-RAM
Data RAM of 64 × 16-bit
The CPU can perform R/W while the multiplication and addition macro
calculation is halted.
Load the variable from the CPU before starting calculations.
MUL*
16 x 16 → 32-bit multiplier
ADD*
32 + 40 → 40-bit adder
ACC*
40-bit accumulator
CLP*
RND*
SLQ*
When sending from 40 to 16 bits, if there is out-of-range 16-bit data, saturated
to the maximum value.
When sending from 40 to 16 bits, the lower-order bits are rounded.
When sending from 40 to 16 bits, select the bits to send.
Delayed register
DSP-LY
LY-DLY*
Delayed register
During multiplication and addition, you can save the variable value, and write
it back to Y-RAM.
Variable monitor
output
DSP-OT0
to
DSP-OT7
Variable monitor output register
Stores the same value as addresses 0 to 7 of Y-RAM.
During calculation (when Y-RAM access is disabled), you can monitor
addresses 0 to 7 of Y-RAM.
Instruction control
Arithmetic unit
*: Access from CPU disabled.
353
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
■ Instruction Definitions
The multiplication and addition macro has three main types of command: MAC/STR/JMP. This
specification uses commands other than these three in notation. The command hierarchy is as follows.
MAC instruction
Multiplication and addition instruction (CLAC bit = 0)
Multiplication instruction (CLAC bit = 1)
STR instruction
HLT instruction (HLT bit = 1)
INT instruction (SIRQ bit = 1)
JMP instruction
Unconditional branch instruction (COND bit = 0)
Conditional branch instruction (COND bit = 1)
HLT instruction (HLT bit = 1)
INT instruction (SIRQ bit = 1)
354
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
15.2
Register Description
This section explains the register configuration and function of using the multiplication
and addition calculator.
■ DSP-CSR (Control/Status Registers)
The control/status register is an 8-bit register. It consists of flags to change the multiplication and addition
macro state, control interrupts to the CPU, and indicate the status of the multiplication and addition macro.
This register is also used to set the conditions for conditional branching commands in the multiplication
and addition macro.
The 8-bit register always allows external R/W.
● Control function
• Multiplication and addition macro state (calculation start/end) transition (GoDSP and HltDSP)
• Interrupt mask for CPU (IeDSP)
• Sets conditions for conditional branching command of multiplication and addition macro (USR2, USR1,
and USR0).
• Multiplication and addition macro state (calculation start/end) transition (GoDSP and HltDSP)
• Interrupt mask for CPU (IeDSP)
• Sets conditions for conditional branching command of multiplication and addition macro (USR2, USR1,
and USR0).
● Status function
• Multiplication and addition macro current state acquisition flag (RunDSP)
• Interrupt request flag (IrqDSP)
• Saturation flag (SatDSP)
DSP-CSR
Address: 3A1H
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
USR1
USR1
USR0
USR0
IrqDSP
IrqDSP
IeDSP
IeDSP
HltDSP
SatDSP
USR2
USR2
GoDSP
RunDSP
(R)
0
(R/W)
0
(R/W)
0
(R/W)
0
(R/W)
0
(R/W)
0
(W)
0
(R/W)
0
Write
Read
Read/Write
Initial value
[bit7] SatDSP (Saturation flag): Read only
• This status flag stores whether saturation was performed during calculation.
• This bit is set if saturation is indicated in the STR command (CLP = 1), and saturation was actually
performed. If this bit is set during calculation, the setting is maintained until the next calculation starts.
• This bit is cleared when calculation begins.
Set factor: Set if the STR command performed saturation processing during calculation.
Clear factor: Cleared by start of calculation [initial value].
• At reset: Be initialized to "0". (No saturation)
• This bit is read-only. Writing does not change the bit value.
355
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
[bit6, bit5, bit4] USR2, USR1, USR0 (Set a jump condition.): Read/Write
• This bit is referred by the multiplication and addition macro conditional branching command (when
COND bit =1). A jump is performed if the value of this bit matches the conditional branching command
UBP flag (condition attained). In other words, it is possible to switch between 8 different calculation
routines from the CPU by combining this conditional branching command with the calculation
commands.
• At reset: Be initialized to "000B".
• The read / write is possible.
[bit3] IrqDSP (interrupt request flag): Read/Write
• This flag indicates that the multiplication and addition macro has generated a software interrupt request.
When interrupt requests are enabled (IeDSP = 1), setting this bit creates an interrupt request for the
CPU.
• Multiplication and addition macro interrupt requests are generated by the software, by setting the STR
or JMP command SIRQ bit to "1".
Set factor: Set via the generation of a multiplication and addition macro software interrupt (STR/JMP
command).
Clear factor : Clear by writing "0" [initial value]
• At reset: Be initialized to "0". (no interrupt request)
• The read / write is possible. Note, however, that only "0" can be written. Writing "1" will not change the
bit value.
• For read-modify-write commands, the value of "1" is always read, regardless of the value of the bit.
[bit2] leDSP (interrupt request enable bit): Read/Write
Interrupt requests to the CPU (IrqDSP = 1) are controlled as follows.
0: Interrupt request output disabled (setting IrqDSP will not generate an interrupt) [initial value]
1: Interrupt request output enabled (setting IrqDSP will generate an interrupt)
• At reset: Be initialized to "0". (interrupt request output is disabled.)
• The read / write is possible.
[bit1] HltDSP (calculation stop): Write only
• This bit forcibly stops calculation.
• When "1" is written to this bit, if calculation is being performed (RunDSP = 1), calculation will halt
after the currently executing command terminates (if it is a two-cycle command, after two cycles), and
the RunDSP flag is cleared.
• If calculation is stopping, this has not effect.
• If a stop is forced via this bit, DSP-PC points to the command address following the stopped command.
It is thus possible to continue with command execution.
- Forcibly stop by writing "1".
- Writing "0" is invalid. "0" is always read.
• At reset: Be initialized to "0".
356
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
[bit0] GoDSP (calculation start): Write only
RunDSP (Calculation running flag): Read only
• Calculation start is indicated by writing "1" to GoDSP bit. When calculation is stopped (RunDSP = 0),
calculation is activated, and the RunDSP flag is set. If calculation is already ongoing (RunDSP = 1), this
action has no effect.
• The RunDSP flag indicates that calculation is being executed. This is set by the start of calculation, and
cleared by writing "1" to the HltDSP bit or executing the multiplication and addition macro's HLT
command.
• When a calculation is being executed (RunDSP = 1), DSP-PC, DSP-LY, X-RAM, Y-RAM, and I-RAM
cannot be accessed from the CPU. Only DSP-CSR and DSP-OT 0 to 7 can be monitored.
• To start calculation, you must store the start address of the calculation routine in DSP-PC before or at
the same time as activation.
(1) Write-time function (GoDSP: start calculation)
0: No function/No effect on operation
1: When calculation is halted → start calculation
If calculation is ongoing→ has no effect
(2) Read-time function (RunDSP: calculation running flag)
0: Calculation is stopped [initial value]
Clear factor→ Writing "1" to HltDSP, and executing an HLT command.
1: Calculation is executing.
Set factor → start calculation
• At reset: Be initialized to "0". (Calculation is stopping.)
• The read / write is possible. Note, however, that as described above, the significance differs depending
on whether reading or writing is being performed.
• For read-modify-write commands, the value of "0" is always read, regardless of the value of the bit.
■ DSP-PC (Program Counter)
The program counter is 8 bits long. It indicates the memory address (I-RAM) where the command code to
be executed by the multiplication and addition macro is stored. Although the program counter is
automatically updated when a command is executed, it can be rewritten via a multiplication and addition
macro JMP. Additionally, access (R/W) from the CPU is only possible when calculation is stopped. You
must store the start address of the calculation routine in DSP-PC before or at the same time as calculations
starts.
After executing the HLT command, or writing "1" to the DSP-CSR HltDSP, DSP-PC points to the address
of the command after the stopped command. Program execution can be continued by again setting GoDSP.
Bit 15
Bit 14
Bit 13
Bit 12
Bit 11
Bit 10
Bit 9
Bit 8
DSP-PC
Address: 0003A0H
Write
Read
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
Read/Write
Initial value
• At reset: Indeterminate.
• Although read/write is enabled, access is only possible when multiplication and addition macro
calculation is halted (DSP-CSR: RunDSP = 0).
• When a calculation is running (DSP-CSR: RunDSP =1), access from the CPU is not possible because it
is separated from the bus.
357
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
■ DSP-LY (Delayed Register)
DSP-LY is a 16-bit register. It is used when the MAC command delay write bit (LDLY) of the
multiplication and addition macro is set to "1". Access is not possible during calculation (DSP-CSR:
RunDSP = 1).
• When the MAC command LDLY bit is set to "1", the following two operations are performed.
1. The contents of the DSP-LY register are sent to the LY-DLY register.
2. The Y-RAM read data selected by means of the MAC command is stored in the DSP-LY register.
• When the MAC command's STLY bit is "1", after the MAC command executes, the value of the LYDLY register is written to the Y-RAM address selected by the MAC command. At this time, the
execution time is two cycles.
Bit:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Write
Read
DSP-LY
Address: 0003A2H
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
(R/W)
X
Read/Write
Initial value
• At reset: Indeterminate.
• Although read/write is enabled, access is only possible when DSP-LY calculation is halted (DSP-CSR:
RunDSP = 0). When a calculation is running (DSP-CSR: RunDSP =1), access from the CPU is not
possible because it is separated from the bus.
■ DSP-OT0 to DSP-OT7 (Variable Monitor Register)
There are eight 16-bit registers for use as variable monitor registers. With the exception of the initial status
when the power is turned on, the same value as addresses 0 to 7 of Y-RAM is held. Only read is always
available from the CPU. Even if calculation is ongoing, the contents of addresses 0 to 7 in Y-RAM can be
monitored.
Bit:
DSP-OT0
DSP-OT1
DSP-OT2
DSP-OT3
DSP-OT4
DSP-OT5
DSP-OT6
DSP-OT7
15
0003A4H
0003A6H
0003A8H
0003AAH
0003B0H
0003B2H
0003B4H
0003B6H
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read only
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
(R)
X
Read/Write
Initial value
• At reset: Indeterminate.
• Only read can always be performed. Read is also possible if multiplication and addition macro program
execution is ongoing.
358
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
15.3
Operation Explanation
This section explains the operating mode and the instruction operation the
multiplication and addition macro.
■ Operating Mode
The action of the multiplication and addition macro is controlled by manipulating the DSP-CSR register.
The multiplication and addition macro can be one of the two states described below. When stopped, the
multiplication and addition macro starts program execution when "1" is written to GoDSP, or a GODSPSV
signal is inputted from the Servo Block. The registers and memory that can be accessed from CPU depend
on whether calculation is being executed or stopped.
Stopped
HltDSP = 1 or HLT
RunDSP = 0
Running
RunDSP = 1
GoDSP = 1
Each of these states is described below.
• Stopped: The multiplication and addition macro is stopped. The command RAM (I-RAM), data RAM
(X-RAM and Y-RAM), and all registers of the multiplication and addition macro can be
accessed from the CPU. Transit to this state by writing "1" to HltDSP or executing the
HLT command. The system is also initialized to this state when it is reset.
• Running: The multiplication and addition macro is running.
When "1" is written to the GoDSP bit while in stopped status, control transitions to this
state, and program execution starts from the current DSP-PC (program counter). Transit
to the stopped state, and halt program execution, by writing "1" to the HltDSP bit or
executing the HLT command. Only the DSP-CSR and the DSP-OT 0 to 7 register are
accessible from the CPU. (Access to other registers and RAM is disabled *)
*: Although access is disabled, R/W operations have the following effect:
Write: No effect (Nothing is written.)
Read: Indeterminate
■ Instruction Operation
When "1" is written to the GoDSP bit of the DSP-CSR register, the multiplication and addition macro begins
command execution from the current DSP-PC (program counter). (Operation is in parallel with CPU
operation)
Before execution, set the I-RAM and DSP-PC values. (DSP-CSR and DSP-PC can be set simultaneously.)
When multiplication and addition macro command execution starts, the following operation control is
performed.
• When the multiplication and addition macro executes an HLT command*, transits to stopped state after
the command is executed. At this time, DSP-PC stops pointing to the address following the HLT
command.
• When a JMP command or STR command is being executed, interrupt requests can be sent to the CPU.
(interrupt masking available)
• Use a conditional branching command referring to bits USR0 to USR2 of the DSP-CSR, to switch
program flow.
*: An HLT command is a JMP or STR command with the HLT bit set to "1".
359
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
■ Calculating Function
The multiplication and addition macro has two 16-bit data RAMs (X-RAM and Y-RAM). When a
multiplication and addition (or multiplication) command is executed, data is read from each RAM area, and
signed multiplication and addition (or multiplication) calculation is performed and stored in 40-bit
accumulator. The data format is as follows.
15
×)
+)
39
31
S ......
S
0
S
X-RAM
S
Y-RAM
0
Multiplication reset (32 bits)
S
Acc before multiplication and addition instruction
S
ACC (Accumulator)
Notes:
• In the case of multiplication commands, the multiplication results are stored in the accumulator,
extended to a signed 40-bit value. (The accumulator contents are zero-cleared immediately
beforehand)
• "S" indicates the signed bit.
Results are not guaranteed if a large number of multiplication and addition commands is performed, and an
accumulator overflow occurs.
Do not perform more than 512 multiplication and addition commands in a row.
■ Delayed Write Feature
When executing a multiplication and addition (or multiply) command, the following transfer operation can
be performed at the same time. Performing this transfer and the calculation in tandem makes it easy to
perform delayed data processing with a digital filter.
• The value read from Y-RAM is stored in the DSP-LY register.
• Performs a delayed write of the value in the DSP-LY register prior to executing the instruction to the YRAM read address, via the LY-DLY register.
■ Transfer of Operation Results
Although operation results held in the accumulator are transferred to X or Y-RAM as 16-bit values, the
following scaling is performed.
• Output bit select
The following bit ranges from the 40-bit accumulator can be selected.
bit27 to bit12 (Q12 format)
bit28 to bit13 (Q13 format)
bit29 to bit14 (Q14 format)
bit30 to bit15 (Q15 format)
bit23 to bit8 (Q8 format)
360
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
bit24 to bit9 (Q9 format)
bit25 to bit10 (Q10 format)
bit26 to bit11 (Q11 format)
• Rounding processing
The LSB is set by rounding up the bit below the LSB of the selected output bits (round up if "1", ignore
if "0").
• Saturation processing
This compares the sign bit (MSB) of the rounded 16-bit data with the upper bits of the accumulator. If a
bit with a different value is present, the data value is saturated (set to maximum or minimum). The result
of saturation depends on the sign bit (MSB) of the accumulator as follows.
If the sign of the accumulator is "0" -> Saturate to maximum positive value "7FFFH".
If the sign of the accumulator is "1" -> Saturate to maximum negative value "8000H".
The following shows an example.
39 . . . . . . . . . . 28 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11 . . . . . . . . . . 0
7FFH
FFFFH
FFFH
FFFFH
(Select bit 27 to bit 12): Select scaling
1
+)
Accumulator
(Accumulator bit 11): Rounding process
0000H
0
Bit 15
Comparison
Saturation
processing
7FFFH
(Saturate to maximum positive value): Saturation processing
Transfer data
■ Variable Monitor Output
The multiplication and addition macro includes registers (DSP-OT0 to DSP-OT7) that always contain the
values of addresses 0 to 7 in Y-RAM. Whenever data is written to Y-RAM addresses 0 to 7 (write from
CPU, write by STR instruction, or delayed write), the same data is written to the DSP-OT0 to DSP-OT7
registers.
Although CPU access to Y-RAM is prohibited during calculation, by using the STR instruction to store any
results required by the CPU in Y-RAM addresses 0 to 7, the CPU can read calculation results at any time.
361
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
Notes:
When using the DMA transfer in the multiplication and addition macro,
• Configure the CPU clock equivalent to or faster than the peripheral clocks.
• If the CPU clock is slower than the peripheral clocks, the DMA transfer does not work properly.
362
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
15.4
Instruction Detail Explanation
This section explains the instruction detail for using on the multiplication and addition
calculator.
■ MAC Instruction
Operation: ACC
← ACC + X data × Y data
LY-DLY
← DSP-LY
DSP-LY
← Y data (LDLY = 1)
Y-RAM
← LY-DLY (STLY = 1)
Explanation: Add the result of multiplying X data from X-RAM and Y data from Y-RAM to the
accumulator. Also transfer the contents of the DSP-LY register to the LY-DLY register at the
same time.
Word count : 1 word (16-bit width)
Cycle count : 1 system clock cycle (2 cycles if STLY = 1)
Operation code:
15
14
13
12
11 . . . . . . . . . 6
5...........0
1
CLAC
STLY
LDLY
X-Addr
Y-Addr
[bit14] CLAC (Clear ACC)
• Setting this bit causes the instruction to act as a multiplication instruction.
0: ACC← ACC + X data × Y data [multiplication and addition instruction]
1: ACC ← 0 + X data × Y data [multiplication instruction]
[bit13] STLY (Store LY)
• The following processing is performed when this bit is "1". If "0", the operation only is performed.
• After performing the operation, save the contents of the LY-DLY register at the Y-Addr address in YRAM.
• The execution time only increases to two cycles when this bit is set.
[bit12] LDLY (Load LY)
• The following processing is performed when this bit is "1". If "0", the operation only is performed.
• During the operation, the contents of the Y-Addr address in Y-RAM are stored in the DSP-LY register.
[bit11 to bit6] X-Addr (X-RAM Address)
Address bits for specifying the location of the X data in X-RAM.
363
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
[bit5 to bit0] Y-Addr (Y-RAM Address)
• Address bits for specifying the location of the Y data in Y-RAM.
Figure 15.4-1
X-Addr
Y-Addr
X-RAM
Y-RAM
if (STLY==1) then Store
if (LDLY==1) then Load
X data
Y data
Multiply-Add Calculator
DSP-Y
LY-DLY
CPU bus
■ STR Instruction (Transition Instruction)
Operation:
Data RAM ← Accumulator
Explanation: Convert the 40-bit accumulator value to a 16-bit value in accordance with the RND, CLP, and
SLQ flags. Store the result in the data RAM specified by the SLY flag and X/Y-Addr.
Word count:
1 word (16-bit width)
Cycle count:
1 system clock cycle
Operation code:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9.......7
6
5...........0
0
1
HLT
SIRQ
RND
CLP
SLQ
SLY
X- and Y-Addr
[bit13] HLT (HLT instruction indicating flag)
Setting this bit causes the multiplication and addition macro to halt program execution after instruction
execution completes.
Clears the RunDSP flag in the DSP-CSR register.
[bit12] SIRQ (INT instruction indicating flag)
Setting this bit causes an interrupt request to be sent to the CPU after instruction execution completes, then
sets the IrqDSP flag in the DSP-CSR register.
364
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
[bit11] RND (Rounding)
This bit specifies whether to perform rounding for 16-bit data specified by the SLQ bits.
Rounding rounds the 16-bit data based on the bit immediately below the LSB (round up if lower bit is "1",
ignore if "0").
[bit10] CLP (Clipping)
This bit specifies whether to perform saturation processing on the 16-bit data value specified by the SLQ
bits if the calculation result in the accumulator represents an overflow in the 16-bit value.
In practice, saturation processing is performed if the MSB of the accumulator (bit39) is different to the
MSB of the 16-bit value (determined by the SLQ bits). If rounding is enabled, the comparison is performed
using the result after rounding.
The value transferred to data RAM is the maximum positive value ("7FFFH") if the value of the
accumulator was positive before rounding, or the maximum negative value ("8000H") if negative.
Rounding and saturation processing does not change the sign of the accumulator.
[bit9 to bit7] SLQ
Specifies which bits of the accumulator to transfer to data RAM.
SLQ Bit
Overflow Judging Bit
Transfer 16-bit
Data
Rounding
Bit
Fixed-point
Decimal Format
000
bit39 to bit27
bit27 to bit12
bit11
Q12
001
bit39 to bit28
bit28 to bit13
bit12
Q13
010
bit39 to bit29
bit29 to bit14
bit13
Q14
011
bit39 to bit30
bit30 to bit15
bit14
Q15
100
bit39 to bit23
bit23 to bit8
bit7
Q8
101
bit39 to bit24
bit24 to bit9
bit8
Q9
110
bit39 to bit25
bit25 to bit10
bit9
Q10
111
bit39 to bit26
bit26 to bit11
bit10
Q11
[bit6] SLY
Specifies the transfer destination.
0: X-RAM
1: Y-RAM
[bit5 to bit0] X/Y Addr (RAM Address)
Specifying direct addressing for data RAM
365
CHAPTER 15 MULTIPLICATION AND ADDITION CALCULATOR
■ JMP Instruction (Branching Command)
[when condition is satisfied]
DSP-PC ← J-Addr8
[when condition is not satisfied] DSP-PC ← DSP-PC + 1
Operation:
Explanation: Branch if condition is satisfied, do not perform any operation if condition is not satisfied.
Word count:
1 word (16-bit width)
Cycle count:
1 system clock cycle
Operation code:
15
14
13
12
11
10 . . . . . . 8
7...........0
0
0
HLT
SIRQ
COND
UBP
J-Addr8
[bit13] HLT (HLT instruction specifying flag)
Setting this bit causes the multiplication and addition macro to halt program execution after instruction
execution completes.
Clears the RunDSP flag in the DSP-CSR register.
[bit12] SIRQ (INT instruction specifying flag)
Setting this bit generates an interrupt request to the CPU after instruction execution completes.
Sets the IrqDSP flag in the DSP-CSR register.
[bit11] COND (CONDition)
0: Unconditional branch
1: Conditional branch
[bit10 to bit8] UBP2 to UBP0 (condition specification)
Sets the condition to use for the conditional branch. The condition is established if these bits match the
value of the USR2 to USR0 bits in the DSP-CSR register.
These bits must be set to "000B" if an unconditional branch is specified.
[bit7 to bit0] J-Addr8 (Jump Address)
Address specification for branch destination
366
CHAPTER 16
DMAC
(DMA Controller)
This chapter explains the overview of the DMA controller
(DMAC), the configuration and functions of registers,
and DMAC operation.
16.1 Overview
16.2 Register Details Explanation
16.3 Operation Explanation
16.4 Setting Up Transfer Request
16.5 Transfer Sequence
16.6 Overview of DMA Transfer
16.7 Operation Flow
16.8 Data Path
367
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.1
Overview
This module is used to implement DMA (Direct Memory Access) transfer in FR family
devices.
This module can be used to increase system performance by using DMA transfer to
perform various types of data transfer at high speed without going via the CPU.
■ Hardware Configuration
The module consists of the following main components.
• Independent DMA channel × 5 channels
• 5 channels independent access control circuit
• 20-bit address registers (Reload specifying permitted: ch0 to ch3)
• 24-bit address registers (Reload specifying permitted: ch4)
• 16-bit transfer count registers (Reload specifying permitted: one per channel)
• 4-bit block count registers (one per channel)
• Two-cycle transfer
■ Main Function
The main data transfer functions supported by this module are as follows.
Independent data transfer can be performed for multiple channels (5 channels)
(1) Priority order (ch.0>ch.1>ch.2>ch.3>ch.4)
(2) Alternating transfer is supported between ch0 and ch1.
(3) DMAC startup factor
•Request from internal peripheral (uses interrupt requests, including the external interrupts)
•Software request (register write)
(4) Transfer mode
•Burst transfer/step transfer/block transfer
•Addressing mode with a 20-bit (24-bit) address setting (increment, decrement, fixed)
(Increment/decrement width of address can be ±1, 2, or 4)
•Data types: byte, half-word, or word
•Selectable single or reload
368
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Register Description
(bit)
ch0 control/status register A
DMACA0 00000200H
ch0 control/status register B
DMACB0 00000204H
ch1 control/status register A
DMACA1 00000208H
ch1 control/status register B
DMACB1 0000020CH
ch2 control/status register A
DMACA2 00000210H
ch2 control/status register B
DMACB2 00000214H
ch3 control/status register A
DMACA3 00000218H
ch3 control/status register B
DMACB3 0000021CH
ch4 control/status register A
DMACA4 00000220H
ch4 control/status register B
DMACB4 00000224H
Total control register
DMACR 00000240H
ch0 transferring source address register
DMASA0 00001000H
ch0 transferring destination address register
DMADA0 00001004H
ch1 transferring source address register
DMASA1 00001008H
ch1 transferring destination address register
DMADA1 0000100CH
ch2 transferring source address register
DMASA2 00001010H
ch2 transferring destination address register
DMADA2 00001014H
ch3 transferring source address register
DMASA3 00001018H
ch3 transferring destination address register
DMADA3 0000101CH
ch4 transferring source address register
DMASA4 00001020H
ch4 transferring destination address register
DMADA4 00001024H
31 24 23 16 15 08 07 00
(bit)
31
(bit)
31
2 0 19
24 23
00
00
369
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Block Diagram
Figure 16.1-1 Block Diagram of DMAC 5ch
Counter
DMA start factor
selection circuit
&
Control the request
receiving
Buffer
Selector
Write back
Request DMA transfer
to bus controller
DTC 2-step register
CR
Input peripheral start request/stop
DTCR
Counter
DSS[3:0]
Buffer
Read
Write
Priority circuit
To interrupt controller
Control read/write
Clear peripheral interrupt
BLK register
Selector
Counter Buffer
DMASA 2-step register
SADM,SASZ[7:0] SADR
DMADA 2-step register
DADM,DASZ[7:0] DADR
Selector
Write back
Counter Buffer
Address
Address counter
DMA control
Access
Write back
370
Bus control block
Bus control block
Status transition
circuit
X-bus
TYPE.MOD,WS
To bus
controller
IRQ[4:0]
ERIR,EDIR
Selector
MCLREQ
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.2
Register Details Explanation
This section explains the register configuration and function for using DMAC.
■ Notes on Setting Register
Some bits in the DMAC may only be set when the DMA is halted. If set during operation (during transfer),
correct operation cannot be guaranteed.
An asterisk "*" indicates bits that will affect operation if set during DMAC transfer. Only modify this bit
when the DMAC transfer is halted (set to the disabled or paused state). Values set while DMA transfer is
disabled (DMACR: DMAE=0 or DMACA: DENB=0) become active when DMA is re-enabled.
Values set while DMA transfer is paused (DMACR: DMAH(3:0)≠ 0000B or DMACA: PAUS=1) become
active when DMA is restarted.
■ DMAC-ch.0, ch.1, ch.2, ch.3, ch.4 Control/Status Registers A
[DMACA0 to DMACA4]
These registers control the operation of each DMAC channel. A separate register is provided for each
channel.
The function of each bit is as follows.
bit
31
30
29
28
27
15
14
13
25
24
23
22
IS[4:0]
DENB PAUS STRG
bit
26
12
11
10
21
20
19
9
8
7
6
18
17
16
BLK[3:0]
5
4
3
2
1
0
DTC[15:0]
(Initial value: 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000B)
[bit31] DENB (Dma ENaBle): DMA Operation Enable Bit
Enables or disables DMA transfer for each transfer channel.
Once a channel is enabled, DMA transfer starts when a transfer request is received.
All transfer requests for disabled channels are ignored.
This bit goes to "0" when the specified number of transfers has completed for an enabled channel and the
transfer halts.
Although writing "0" to this bit forcibly halts DMA, always use the PUAS bits (DMACA: bit30) to pause
DMA before forcibly halting (writing "0"). If DMA transfer is forcibly halted without pausing, the DMA
transfer halts but the validity of the transferred data is not guaranteed. Use the DSS(2:0) bits (DMACB:
bit18 to bit16) to check whether transfer has finished.
DENB
Function
0
Corresponding channel DMA is disabled to operate [initial value].
1
Corresponding channel DMA is enabled to operate.
• After a reset or when a halt request is received: Initialized to "0".
• The read / write is possible.
371
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
• Writing "1" to this bit is ignored and DMA remains halted if operation has been disabled for all channels
by the DMAE bit (bit15 of the overall DMAC control register DMACR). Also, if operation is disabled
by the aforementioned bit while still enabled by this bit, this bit is cleared to "0" and transfer is aborted
(forcibly halted).
[bit30] PAUS (PAUSe): Pause indication
Pauses DMA transfer for the corresponding channel. No DMA transfer is performed from the time this bit
is set until it is cleared again. (The DSS bits go to "1xxB" when DMA is halted.)
If this bit is set before DMA is enabled, DMA remains paused.
New transfer requests are accepted while this bit is set but the transfers do not start until the bit is cleared.
(See "■ Transfer Request Acceptance and Transfer".)
PAUS
Function
0
Corresponding channel DMA is enabled to operate (initial value).
1
Corresponding channel DMA is suspended.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit29] STRG (Software TRiGger): Transfer request
Generates a DMA transfer request for the corresponding channel. Writing "1" to this bit generates a transfer
request as soon as the register write completes and starts the transfer on the corresponding channel.
However, if the corresponding channel is not enabled, writing to this bit is ignored.
Note:
If a transfer request is set via this bit at the same time as start is enabled by the DMAE bit, the
transfer request is valid and transfer starts. If this bit is written to at the same time as writing "1" to
the PAUS bit, the transfer request is valid, but DMA transfer does not start until the PAUS bit is
cleared to "0".
STRG
Function
0
Not provided
1
DMA activating request
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• Reading always returns "0".
• Only writing "1" is meaningful. Writing "0" has no effect on the operation.
372
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit28 to bit24] IS4 to IS0 (Input Select)*: Transfer factor selection
The transfer request triggers are selected as follows. However, the software transfer request triggered by the
STRG bit remains available regardless of this setting.
IS
Function
00000B
Software transfer request only
00001B
↓
01111B
Setting disabled
↓
Setting disabled
10000B
UART0 (reception completed)
10001B
UART1 (reception completed)
10010B
UART2 (reception completed)
10011B
UART0 (transfer completed)
10100B
UART1 (transfer completed)
10101B
UART2 (transfer completed)
10110B
External interrupt 0
10111B
External interrupt 1
11000B
Reload timer 0
11001B
Reload timer 1
11010B
Reload timer 2
11011B
Multiplication and addition macro
11100B
PPG0
11101B
PPG1
11110B
PPG2
11111B
PPG4
Transfer Halt Request
Not provided
Provided
Not provided
• Initialized to "00000B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
Notes:
• When an interrupt from a peripheral function is set as a DMA activation (IS = 1XXXXB), disable
the interrupt for the selected function in the ICR register.
• Note also that, if the software transfer request is used to start DMA transfer while triggering DMA
transfer from a peripheral function interrupt is enabled, an factor clear is sent to the peripheral
function when the transfer completes. As this may clear an existing transfer request, do not use
the software transfer request function to start DMA while triggering DMA transfer from a peripheral
function interrupt is enabled.
373
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit23 to bit20] (Reserved): Unused bit
Reading value is fixed to "0000B". Writing has no effect.
[bit19 to bit16] BLK3 to BLK0 (BLocK size): Block size setting
Specifies the size for block transfer on the corresponding channel. The value set in these bits specifies the
number of words to transfer for each transfer operation (or, more exactly, the number of times transfer of
the specified word size is repeated). Always set "01H" (size 1) when not performing block transfer.
BLK
XXXX
Function
Specifying of block size for corresponding channel
• Initialized to "0000B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
• If all-zeros are specified, the block size is set to 16 words.
• Reading always returns the block size (reload value).
[bit15 to bit00] DTC15 to DTC0 (Dma Terminal Count register) *: Transfer count register
This register stores the number of transfers performed. Each register consists of 16 bits.
Each register has its own reload register. On channels that allow the transfer count register to be reloaded,
the initial value is automatically returned to the register when the transfer completes.
DTC
XXXX
Function
Specifying the number of transfers for corresponding channel
When DMA transfer starts, the data in this register is stored to the counter buffer in the dedicated DMA
transfer counter and the value decremented by one after each transfer. When DMA transfer completes, the
value of the counter buffer is written back to this register and the DMA operation ends. Accordingly, you
cannot use this register to read the specified number of transfers during a DMA operation.
• Initialized to "00000000_00000000B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible. Always use halfword or word access to access the DTC register.
• Reading the register returns the counter value. You cannot read the reload value.
374
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ DMAC-ch.0, ch.1, ch.2, ch.3, ch.4 Control/Status Registers B
[DMACB0 to DMACB4]
These registers control the operation of each DMAC channel. A separate register is provided for each
channel.
The function of each bit is as follows.
bit
31
30
TYPE [1:0]
bit
15
14
29
28
27
26
MOD [1:0]
WS [1:0]
13
11
12
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
SADM DADM DTCR SADR DADR ERIE EDIE
10
9
8
7
6
5
SASZ[7:0]
4
3
17
16
DSS[2:0]
2
1
0
DASZ[7:0]
(Initial value: 00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000B)
[bit31, bit30] TYPE (TYPE) *: Transfer type setting
Sets the type of operation for the corresponding channel as follows.
Two-cycle transfer mode:
This transfer mode sets the transfer source address (DMASA) and transfer
destination address (DMADA), then performs the specified number of read and
write operations.
TYPE
Function
00B
Two-cycle transfer (initial value)
01B
Setting disabled
10B
Setting disabled
11B
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "00B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
• Always set this bit to "00B".
[bit29, bit28] MOD (MODe)* : Transfer mode setting
Sets the operation mode for the corresponding channel as follows.
MOD
Function
00B
Block/step transfer mode (initial value)
01B
Burst transfer mode
10B
Setting disabled
11B
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "00B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
375
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit27, bit26] WS (Word Size): Transfer data size selection
Sets the transfer data size for the corresponding channel as follows. DMA performs the specified number of
transfers using the data size specified in this register.
WS
Function
00B
Transfer by BYTE unit (initial value)
01B
Transfer by HALF-WORD unit
10B
Transfer by WORD width unit
11B
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "00B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit25] SADM (Source-ADdr. count-Mode select) *: Transfer source address count mode
setting
Specifies what to do to the transfer source address for the corresponding channel after each transfer.
Address incrementing and decrementing is performed after each transfer in accordance with the "count size
for the transfer source address" (SASZ). When the transfer completes, the next access address is written to
the corresponding address register (DMASA).
Accordingly, the transfer source address register is not updated until the DMA transfer completes.
To use a fixed address, set this bit to "0" or "1", and set the address count sizes (SASZ and DASZ) to "0".
SADM
Function
0
Transfer source addresses are increased (initial value).
1
Transfer source addresses are decreased.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit24] DADM (Destination-ADdr. Count-Mode select) *:
Transfer destination address
count mode setting
Specifies what to do to the transfer destination address for the corresponding channel after each transfer.
Address incrementing and decrementing is performed after each transfer in accordance with the "count size
for the transfer destination address" (DASZ). When the transfer completes, the next access address is
written to the corresponding address register (DMADA).
Accordingly, the transfer destination address register is not updated until the DMA transfer completes.
To use a fixed address, set this bit to "0" or "1", and set the address count sizes (SASZ and DASZ) to "0".
DADM
Function
0
Transfer destination address is increased (initial value).
1
Transfer destination address is decreased.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
376
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit23] DTCR (DTC-reg. Reload)*: Reload setting for the transfer count register
Controls the reload function for the transfer count register in the corresponding channel.
If this bit enables reloading, the value of the count register is reset to its initial value after transfer
completes. DMA halts and waits for the next transfer request (invoked by the STRG bit or by the trigger
request set by the IS bits). (The DENB bit is not cleared when this bit is "1".)
Transfer is forcibly halted when DENB=0 or DMAE=0 is set.
Disabling reloading of the count counter results in a single transfer. That is, DMA halts when the transfer is
completed even if reloading is specified in the address register. In this case, the DENB bit is cleared.
DTCR
Function
0
Transfer count register reload is disabled (initial value).
1
Transfer count register reload is enabled.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit22] SADR (Source-ADdr.-reg. Reload) *: Reload setting for transfer source address
register
Controls the reload function for the transfer source address register in the corresponding channel.
When reloading is enabled by this bit, the transfer source address register is returned to its initial value
when transfer completes.
Disabling reloading of the count counter results in a single transfer. That is, DMA halts when the transfer is
complete even if reloading is specified in the address register. In this case, the address register retains its
initial value that is reloaded when DMA halts.
When this bit disables reloading, the value of the address register when transfer completes is the next
access address after the final address (that is, if incrementing is enabled, it is the incremented address).
SADR
Function
0
Transfer source address register is disabled to reload (initial value).
1
Transfer source address register is enabled to reload.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
377
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit21] DADR (Dest.-ADdr.-reg. Reload)*: Reload setting for transfer destination address
register
Controls the reload function for the transfer destination address register in the corresponding channel.
When reloading is enabled by this bit, the transfer destination address register is returned to its initial value
when transfer completes.
Other details and functions are the same as described for bit22:SADR.
DADR
Function
0
Transfer destination address register is disabled to reload (initial value).
1
Transfer destination address register is enabled to reload.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit20] ERIE (ERror Interrupt Enable)* : Error interrupt output enabled
This bit controls whether to generate an interrupt when transfer ends if an error occurred. The nature of the
error is indicated by bits DSS2 to DSS0. Note that this interrupt is not generated by all DMA termination
cause. It is generated for specific cause only (see the explanation for bits DSS2 to DSS0).
ERIE
Function
0
Error interrupt request output is disabled (initial value).
1
Error interrupt request output is enabled.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit19] EDIE (EnD Interrupt Enable) *: Enable end interrupt output
Controls whether to output an interrupt when transfer ends normally.
EDIE
Function
0
End interrupt request output is disabled (initial value).
1
End interrupt request output is enabled.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
378
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit18 to bit16] DSS2 to DSS0 (Dma Stop Status)*: Transfer halt cause indication
This 3-bit code (termination code) indicates the reason why DMA transfer stopped or halted on the
corresponding channel. The termination code meanings are as follows.
DSS2
Function
Interrupt generation
0
Initial value
None
1
DMA is suspended (DMAH, PAUS bit, interrupt, etc.).
None
DSS1, DSS0
Function
Interrupt generation
00
Initial value
None
01
-
None
10
Transfer halt request
Error
11
Normal completion
End
The transfer stop request is only be set when a request from a peripheral circuit is used.
Note:
The "Interrupt generation" column indicates the type of interrupt request that could be generated.
• Initialized to "000B" when resetting.
• Writing "000B" clears the bits.
• Although both reading and writing are permitted, only "000B" is meaningful when writing.
[bit15 to bit8] SASZ7 to SASZ0 (Source Addr count SiZe) *: Count size specification for the
transfer source address
Specifies how much to increment or decrement the transfer source address (DMASA) for the corresponding
channel after each transfer. The value specified by these bits determines by how much the address is
incremented or decremented for each transfer. Whether to increment or decrement the address is specified
by the transfer source address count mode (SADM).
SASZ
Function
00H
Address fixed
01H
Transfer by byte unit
02H
Transfer by half-word unit
04H
Transfer by word unit
Other than above
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "00000000B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
• If setting other than a fixed address, ensure that the setting matches the transfer data size (WS).
379
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit7 to bit0] DASZ7 to DASZ0 (Des Addr count SiZe) *:
Count size specification for the
transfer destination address
Specifies how much to increment or decrement the transfer destination address (DMADA) for the
corresponding channel after each transfer. The value specified by these bits determines by how much the
address is incremented or decremented for each transfer. Whether to increment or decrement the address is
specified by the transfer destination address count mode (DADM).
DASZ
Function
00H
Address fixed
01H
Transfer by byte unit
02H
Transfer by half-word unit
04H
Transfer by word unit
Other than above
Setting disabled
• Initialized to "00000000B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
• If setting other than a fixed address, ensure that the setting matches the transfer data size (WS).
380
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ DMAC-ch.0, ch.1, ch.2, ch.3, ch.4 Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address
Setting Registers
[DMASA0 to DMASA4/DMADA0 to DMADA4]
These registers control the operation of each DMAC channel. A separate register is provided for each
channel.
The function of each bit is as follows.
• ch.0 to ch.3
bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
DMASA0 to DMASA3 [19:16]
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
21
20
19
18
17
16
DMASA0 to DMASA3 [15:0]
(Initial value: 00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000B)
bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
DMADA0 to DMADA3 [19:16]
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
21
20
19
18
17
16
DMADA0 to DMADA3 [15:0]
(Initial value: 00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000B)
• ch.4
bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
DMASA4[23:16]
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
21
20
19
18
17
16
1
0
DMASA4[15:0]
(Initial value: 00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000B)
bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
DMADA4[23:16]
bit
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
DMADA4[15:0]
(Initial value: 00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000B)
These registers store the source and destination addresses for DMA transfer. The registers for ch.0 to ch.3
are 20-bit and the registers for ch4 are 24-bit.
[bit31 to bit0] DMASA (DMA Source Addr) *: Transfer source address setting
Sets the transfer source address.
[bit31 to bit0] DMADA (DMA Destination Addr) *: Transfer destination address setting
Sets the transfer destination address.
When DMA transfer starts, the contents of these registers are copied to the count buffer for the dedicated
DMA address counter and the address count is updated after each transfer in accordance with the settings.
When DMA transfer completes, the value of the counter buffer is written back to these registers and the
DMA operation ends. Accordingly, you cannot read the value of the address counter during DMA operation.
381
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
Each register has its own reload register. When used on channels for which reloading the transfer source
and destination address registers is enabled, the registers are automatically restored to their initial values
when transfer completes. However, this has no effect on other address registers.
• Initialized to "00000000_00000000_00000000_00000000B" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible. Always use 32-bit access to read or write to these registers.
• During transfer, reading returns the address before transfer started. After transfer completes, reading
returns the next access address. You cannot read the reload value. Accordingly, you cannot read the
transfer address in real-time.
• Set "0" to the non-existent upper bits.
Note:
Do not set the address of DMAC registers in these registers. Performing DMA transfer to registers in
the DMAC is not permitted.
382
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ DMAC-ch.0, ch.1, ch.2, ch.3, ch.4 Overall DMAC Control Register
[DMACR]
This register controls the overall operation of all five DMAC channels. Always use byte access to read or
write to this register.
The function of each bit is as follows.
bit
bit
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
DMAE
-
-
PM01
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
-
-
-
-
-
DMAH[3:0]
-
-
1
-
0
-
(Initial value: 0XX00000XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXB)
[bit31] DMAE (DMA Enable): DMA enabling operations
Controls operation for all DMA channels.
When DMA operation is disabled by this bit, transfer is disabled for all channels regardless of operation
state or any start/stop settings set for individual channels. Any requests on channels for which transfer is in
progress are cancelled and transfer halts at the block boundary. When disabled, any operation to start
transfer on any channel is ignored.
When DMA operation is enabled by this bit, starting and stopping each channel is available. Using this bit
to enable DMA operation does not actually start transfer for any channel.
Although writing "0" to this bit forcibly halts DMA, always use the DMAH(3:0) bits (DMACR: bit27 to
bit24) to pause DMA before forcibly halting (writing "0"). If DMA transfer is forcibly halted without
pausing, the DMA transfer halts, but the validity of the transferred data is not guaranteed. Use the DSS(2:0)
bits (DMACB: bit18 to bit16) to check whether transfer has finished.
DMAE
Function
0
Disables operation for all DMA channels (initial value).
1
Enables operation for all DMA channels.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit28] PM01 (Priority Mode ch0, 1 robin): Alternate channel priority
This setting causes the priorities for ch0 and ch1 to be alternated after each transfer.
PM01
Function
0
Priority level fixed (ch0 > ch1) (initial value)
1
Priority level alternated (ch1 > ch0)
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
383
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
[bit27 to bit24] DMAH (DMA Halt): DMA suspended
Pauses DMA for all DMA channels. Setting these bits pauses DMA transfer on all channels until the bits
are cleared again.
If these bits are set before enabling DMA, all channels remain paused.
Any transfer requests that occur for channels with DMA transfer enabled (DENB=1) while these bits are
set are valid, but transfer does not start until the bits are cleared.
DMAH
0000B
Other than 0000B
Function
Enables operation for all DMA channels (initial value).
Suspends operation for all DMA channels.
• Initialized to "0" when resetting.
• The read / write is possible.
[bit30, bit29, bit23 to bit0] (Reserved): Unused bit.
The read value is undefined.
384
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.3
Operation Explanation
DMAC is a multifunctional DMA controller for controling the high-speed data transfer
without using CPU instruction.
■ Overview of Operation
This block is a multi-function DMA controller able to transfer data at high speed without using CPU
instructions.
● Main operation
• The operation of each function can be set independently for each channel.
• Once enabled, a channel does not actually start transfer until the specified transfer request is detected.
• On detecting a transfer request, the DMAC outputs a DMA transfer request to the bus controller and
starts transfer on receiving bus access rights from the bus controller.
• The transfer sequence is determined by the mode which can be set independently for each channel.
● Transfer mode
Each DMA channel operates transfer in accordance with the transfer mode set by the MOD1 and MOD0
bits in its DMACB register.
Block/step transfer
Only transfers one block of data for each transfer request. Once the transfer completes, DMA removes
its transfer request from the bus controller until the next transfer request is received.
Size of transfer block: Block size specified in DMACA:BLK3 to BLK0
Burst transfer
On receiving a transfer request, transfer continues for the specified number of transfers.
Specified number of transfers: Block size × transfer count
(DMACA:BLK3 to BLK0 × DMACA:DTC15 to DTC0)
● Transfer type
Two-cycle transfer (Normal transfer)
The DMA controller treats a read and write operation as a single unit.
The DMAC reads the value from the address set in the transfer source register and then writes it to the
address in the transfer destination register.
● Transfer address
The following types of addressing are supported. This can be specified independently for each channel
transfer source and destination.
Address setting for two-cycle transfer
Accesses the addresses read from the registers in which the address values have previously been set
(DMASA and DMADA).
385
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
On receiving a transfer request, DMA stores the addresses from these registers in temporary buffers
before starting the transfer.
After each transfer (access), the address counter is used to generate the next access address (based on
whether incrementing, decrementing, or constant-address is specified) and this new value is restored in
the temporary buffer. The contents of the temporary buffers are written back to the registers (DMASA
and DMADA) after transfer of each block completes.
Accordingly, the values in the address registers (DMASA and DMADA) are only updated after each
block transfer and cannot be used to determine the current transfer address in real-time.
● Number of transfers and ending transfer
Number of transfers
The transfer count register is decremented (-1) after transfer of each block completes. When the transfer
count register reaches "0" indicating that the specified number of transfers have been performed, the
DMAC indicates the termination code and halts or restarts DMA.
Like the address registers, the transfer count register is only updated after each block is transferred.
If reloading the transfer count register is disabled, transfer ends. If enabled, the register is reloaded with
its initial value and the DMAC waits for transfer to restart. (DMACB:DTCR)
The end of transfer
Transfer can be ended by the following cause. When transfer ends, cause is indicated as termination
code. (DMACB:DSS2 to DSS0)
•Specified number of transfers completed (DMACA:BLK3 to BLK0 × DMACA:DTC15 to DTC0) =>
Normal end
•Transfer halt request received from peripheral circuit => Error
•Reset occurred => Reset
A transfer halt cause code (DSS) is set for each end cause and a transfer complete interrupt or transfer
error interrupt can be generated.
386
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.4
Setting Up Transfer Request
The following two types of transfer requests can be used to start DMA transfer. The
software request can be used at any time regardless of other request settings.
■ Internal Peripheral Request
The transfer request is generated by an interrupt from an internal peripheral circuit.
Which peripheral interrupt requests generates a transfer request can be set independently for each channel
(DMACA: IS4 to IS0 =1xxxxB).
Note:
As interrupt request used to generate transfer requests are also passed to the CPU as interrupt
requests, always disable these interrupts in the interrupt controller. (ICR register)
■ Software Request
Writing to the trigger bit in the register generates the transfer request. (DMACA:STRG)
This is independent of the above transfer requests and is always available.
If a software request is set at the same time as transfer is enabled, the DMA transfer request to the bus
controller is outputted immediately and transfer starts.
Note:
If a software request is issued to a channel that is also set the internal peripheral request, a factor
clear signal is sent to the peripheral when the transfer completes. As this may clear an existing
transfer request, do not use the software transfer request function in this case.
387
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.5
Transfer Sequence
The transfer type and transfer mode which determine the operation sequence and
similar after DMA transfer started can be set independently for each channel (setting of
DMACB:TYPE [1:0], MOD [1:0]).
■ Transfer Sequence Selection
The following sequences can be selected by register settings.
• Burst two-cycle transfer
• Block/step transfer two-cycle transfer
■ Burst Two-cycle Transfer
The specified number of transfers is performed each time transfer is invoked. In the case of two-cycle
transfer, the transfer source and destination addresses can be specified as 20-bit addresses for ch0 to ch3,
and as 24-bit addresses for ch4.
Either a transfer request from a peripheral function or a software can be used to invoke transfer.
[Burst transfer characteristics]
• Each time a transfer request is received, transfer continues until the transfer count register reaches "0".
• The number of transfers is the block size multiplied × the number of blocks to be transferred.
(DMACA:BLK3 to BLK0 × DMACA:DTC15 to DTC0)
• If another transfer request is received during a transfer, the request is ignored.
• When the reload function is enabled for the transfer count register, a subsequent transfer request is
accepted only after transfer completes.
• If a transfer request for a channel with a higher priority is received during a transfer, the DMAC changes
channel at the next block boundary and the transfer does not restart until the request on the higher
priority channel is cleared.
Figure 16.5-1 Burst Transferring Example at Peripheral Transfer Request, Block Number = 1,
Transferring Number = 4
Peripheral transfer request
Bus operation
Transferring number
Transfer end (internal)
388
CPU
SA
DA
4
SA
DA
3
SA
DA
2
SA
DA
1
CPU
0
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Step/block Transfer Two-cycle Transfer
For step or block transfer (only transfer the specified number of blocks for each transfer request), the
transfer source and destination addresses can be specified as 20-bit addresses for ch0 to ch3, and as 24-bit
addresses for ch4.
● Step transfer
The step transfer sequence is used if the block size is set to "1".
● Step transfer characteristics
• Each time a transfer request is received, one transfer is performed, and then the transfer request is
cleared and transfer halts. (The DMA transfer request is removed from the bus controller.)
• If another transfer request is received during a transfer, the request is ignored.
• If a transfer request for a channel with a higher priority is received during a transfer, the DMAC changes
channel and starts the next transfer after the previous transfer completes. For step transfer, priority is
only meaningful for the case when transfer requests are generated simultaneously.
● Block transfer
The block transfer sequence is used if the block size is set to a value other than "1".
● Block transfer characteristics
Except for the fact that each transfer consists of multiple transfer cycles (specified by the number of
blocks), the operation is the same as for step transfer.
Figure 16.5-2 Block Transferring Example at Peripheral Transfer Request, Block Number = 2,
Transferring Number = 2
Peripheral transfer request
Bus operation
Block number
Transferring number
CPU
DA
SA
SA
2
DA
1
2
CPU
0
SA
DA
DA
SA
2
1
1
Transfer end (internal)
389
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.6
Overview of DMA Transfer
This section explains the overview of the DMA transfer.
■ Block Size
• The value set in the block size setting register specifies the volume of data for each transfer operation
(× data width).
• The size of the data transferred in each transfer cycle is fixed the value specified by data width, and each
transfer consists of the number of transfer cycles specified by the block size.
• During a transfer, if a transfer request for a channel with a higher priority is received or if a transfer
pause request is issued, block transfer does not halt unless set to the boundary of a transfer unit.
Although this prevents undesirable splitting or pausing within a data block, it causes the response to be
slower if the block size is large.
• In the case of a reset, transfer halts immediately and therefore the validity of the transferred data cannot
be guaranteed.
■ Reload Operation
The following three reload functions can be configured for each channel in this module.
● Transfer count register reload function
When the specified number of transfers completes, the transfer count register is reset with its initial value
and the DMAC waits for the next trigger.
Use this setting to perform any of the transfer sequences repeatedly.
If reloading is not enabled, the count register remains at zero after the specified number of transfers
complete and no further transfers are performed.
● Reload function for transfer source address register
The transfer source address register is reset with its initial value after the specified number of transfers
complete.
Use this setting if repeatedly performing a transfer from a fixed region in the transfer source address range.
If reloading is not enabled, the value of the next transfer address remains set in the transfer source address
register after the specified number of transfers complete. Use this setting if the address range is not fixed.
● Reload function for transfer destination address register
The transfer destination address register is reset with its initial value after the specified number of transfers
complete.
Use this setting if repeatedly performing a transfer to a fixed region in the transfer destination address
range.
Only enabling the reload functions for transfer source and destination registers does not restart after the
specified number of transfers complete. It only causes the address registers to be reset.
390
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
Notes:
Special example of operation modes and reload operation
• If you want to halt transfer after it completes and to restart after another input is detected, do not
use the reload function.
• When using burst, block, or step transfer modes, transfer halts after the reload is performed at the
end of the transfer operation, and no further transfer is performed until a new transfer request
input is detected.
■ Addressing Mode
Specify the transfer destination and transfer source addresses independently for each transfer channel.
The following procedure can be used to set the registers. Set up the registers in accordance with the transfer
sequence.
● Address registers
In two-cycle transfer mode, set the transfer source address in the transfer source address setting register
(DMASA) and set the transfer destination address in the transfer destination address setting register
(DMADA).
Features of address register
These registers are 20-bit for ch0 to ch3 and 24-bit for ch4.
Function of address register
•
The registers are read at each time when an access is performed and outputted on the address bus.
•
At the same time, the address counter is used to calculate the address for the next access and the
result of this calculation is set in the address register.
•
The address calculation is selected by increment or decrement independently for each channel,
transfer destination and source. The increment or decrement width of address depends on the value
of address count size specification register. (DMACB:SASZ, DASZ)
•
When the reload function is not enabled for an address register, the result of the final address
calculation remains in the register after the transfer ends.
•
If the reload function is enabled, the initial value of the address is reloaded.
Notes:
• Transfer continues even if an overflow or underflow occurs for the full 20-bit or 24-bit address
calculation. When setting up each channel, take care to ensure that overflow or underflow does
not occur.
• Do not set the addresses of registers in the DMAC in the address registers.
391
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Data Type
The data length (data width) transferred in each transfer cycle can be selected from the following options.
•
byte
•
halfword
•
word
As word boundaries still apply during DMA transfer, setting a transfer source or destination address setting
that conflicts with the data length causes the lower bits to be ignored.
• word:
Four bytes starting from an actual access addresses with the lower 2-bit = 00B.
• halfword: Two bytes starting from an actual access addresses with the least significant bit = 0.
• byte:
The specified address is used as the actual access address.
If the lower bits of the transfer source and destination addresses do conflict, the specified address is
outputted on the internal address bus without modification, but the actual bus access occurs at the address
corrected in accordance with the above rules.
■ Control of Number of Transfers
The number of transfers can be set to any 16-bit value (1 to 65536 transfers). Set the number of transfers in
the transfer count register (DMACA:DTC).
The register value is copied to a temporary buffer when transfer starts and is decremented by the transfer
count counter. When the count value reaches zero indicating that the specified number of transfers has
completed, the channel either halts transfer or waits for the next trigger (if reload is enabled).
Features of the transfer count register
• Each register consists of 16 bits.
• Each register has its own reload register.
• Setting the register to "0" results in transfer being performed 65536 times.
Reload operation
• Only used for registers with a reload function and for which the reload function is enabled.
• The initial value of the count register is saved in the reload register when transfer starts.
• Once the operation of the transfer count counter causes the count to reach "0", a signal indicating
transfer completion is outputted, and then the initial value is read from the reload register and written to
the count register.
■ CPU Control
When a DMA transfer request is received, DMA issues a transfer request to the bus controller.
The bus controller assigns usage rights for the internal bus to DMA at the next appropriate timing in bus
operation, and then DMA transfer starts.
● DMA transfer and interrupts
• During DMA transfer, interrupts are generally not received until the transfer ends.
• If a DMA transfer request occurs during interrupt processing, the transfer request is received and
interrupt processing halts until the transfer completes.
• Exceptions to this are the NMI request and interrupt requests with a level higher than the hold override
level set in the interrupt controller. In these cases, the DMAC temporarily removes its transfer request
from the bus controller at the next transfer boundary (one of block) and pauses the transfer until the
interrupt request is cleared. The transfer request is held internally during this time. Once the interrupt
request is cleared, the DMAC issues another transfer request to the bus controller to obtain bus usage
rights and restarts DMA transfer.
392
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
● Overriding DMA
• On the FR family, if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs during DMA transfer, DMA transfer halts
and control branches to the interrupt routine. This mechanism remains active while the interrupt request
is present. The DMA halt is not operated as soon as the interrupt is cleared, and so the DMA transfer
restarts from inside the interrupt handler routine. Accordingly, in handler routines for interrupts with a
level that causes DMA transfer to be halted, use the DMA halt function if you wish to prevent DMA
from restarting as soon as the interrupt is cleared. The DMA halt function is invoked by writing a nonzero value to the DMAH3 to DMAH0 bits in the DMA overall control register. The override is cleared
by setting the bits back to zero.
• This function is primarily used in interrupt handler routines. Increment the DMA halt register by one in
the interrupt handler routine before clearing the interrupt. This prevents any subsequent DMA transfer.
When interrupt processing is completed, decrement the DMAH3 to DMAH0 bits by one before exiting
the routine. If multiple interrupts have occurred, DMA transfer continues to be suppressed since the
DMAH3 to DMAH0 bits are not "0" yet. If a single interrupt has occurred, the DMAH3 to DMAH0 bits
become "0". DMA requests are then enabled immediately.
Notes:
• Since the register has only four bits, this function cannot be used for multiple interrupts exceeding
15 levels.
• Be sure to assign the priority of the DMA tasks at a level that is at least 15 levels higher than
other interrupt levels.
■ Operation Start
Starting of DMA transfer is controlled independently for each channel, but before transfer starts, the
operation of all channels needs to be enabled.
● Operation enable of all channels
Before activating each DMAC channel, operation for all channels needs to be enabled in advance with the
DMA operation enable bit (DMAE of DMACR). All start settings and transfer requests that occurred
before operation is enabled are invalid.
● Transfer starting
The transfer operation can be started by the operation enable bit of the control register for each channel. If a
transfer request to an activated channel is accepted, the DMA transfer operation is started in the specified
mode.
● Starting from a temporary stop
If a temporary stop occurs before starting with channel-by-channel or all-channel control, the temporary
stopped state is maintained even though the transfer operation is started. If transfer requests occur in the
meantime, they are accepted and retained. When temporary stopping is released, transfer is started.
393
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Transfer Request Acceptance and Transfer
• Sampling for transfer requests set for each channel starts after starting.
• If peripheral interrupt start is selected, DMAC continues the transfer until all transfer requests are
cleared. When they are cleared, DMAC stops the transfer after one transfer unit (peripheral interrupt
starting).
Since peripheral interrupts are handled as level detection, use interrupt clear by DMA to handle the
interrupts.
• Transfer requests are always accepted while other channel requests are being accepted and transfer
performed. The channel that will be used for transfer is determined for each transfer unit after priority
has been checked.
■ Peripheral Interrupt Clear by DMA
• This DMA has a function that clears peripheral interrupts. This function works when peripheral interrupt
is selected as the DMA start source (when IS4 to IS0 =1xxxxB).
• Peripheral interrupts are cleared only for the set start sources. That is, only the peripheral functions set
by IS4 to IS0 are cleared.
● Generating timing of interrupt clear
The timing for clearing an interrupt depends on the transfer mode. (Refer to "16.7 Operation Flow".)
Block/step transfer
If block transfer is selected, a clear signal is generated after one block (step) transfer.
Burst transfer
If burst transfer is selected, a clear signal is generated after transfer is performed the specified number of
times.
■ Temporary Stop
The temporary stopping of DMA transfer occurs in the following cases.
• Setting of temporary stopping by writing to the control register (set independently for each channel or
all channels simultaneously)
If temporary stopping is set using the temporary stop bit, transfer on the corresponding channel is
stopped until release of temporary stopping is set again. You can check the DSS bits for temporary
stopping.
Transfer is restarted when temporary stopping is canceled.
• NMI/hold suppress level interrupt processing
If an NMI request or an interrupt request with a higher level than the hold suppress level occurs, all
channels on which transfer is in progress are stopped at the boundary of the transfer unit and the bus
right is opened to give priority to NMI/interrupt processing. Transfer requests accepted during NMI/
interrupt processing are retained, initiating a wait for completion of NMI processing.
Channels for which requests are retained restart transfer after NMI/interrupt processing is
completed.
394
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Operation End/Stopping
The end of DMA transfer is controlled independently for each channel. It is also possible to disable
operation for all channels at once.
● The end of transfer
If reloading is disabled, transfer is stopped, "Normal end" is displayed as the end code, and all transfer
requests are disabled after the transfer count register becomes "0". (Clear the DENB bit of DMACA.)
If reloading is enabled, the initial value is reloaded, "Normal end" is displayed as the end code, and a wait
for transfer requests starts again after the transfer count register becomes "0". (Do not clear the DENB bit
of DMACA)
● All channels operating disabled
If the operation of all channels is disabled with the DMA operation enable bit DMAE, all DMAC
operations, including operations on active channels, are stopped. Then, even if the operation of all channels
is enabled again, no transfer is performed unless a channel is restarted. In this case, no interrupt whatever
occurs.
■ Stopping due to Error
In addition to cause other than normal end after transfer for the number of times specified, stopping as the
result of various types of errors and the forced stopping are provided.
● Transfer stop requests from peripheral circuits
Depending on the peripheral circuit that outputs a transfer request, a transfer stop request is issued when an
error is detected (Example: Error when data is received at or sent from a communications system
peripheral).
The DMAC, when it receives such a transfer stop request, displays "Transfer stop request" as the end code
and stops the transfer on the corresponding channel.
Notes:
• For the availability of a transfer stop request from peripheral circuits, see the description of
specifications for transfer factor selection bit, which is bit28 to bit24 (IS4 to IS0) of DMACA
register.
• For details of the conditions under which a transfer stop request is generated, see the
specifications for each peripheral circuit.
395
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ DMAC Interrupt Control
Independent of peripheral interrupts that become transfer requests, interrupts can also be outputted for each
DMAC channel.
• Transfer end interrupt: Occurs only when operation ends normally.
• Error interrupt: Transfer stop request due to a peripheral circuit (error due to a peripheral). All of these
interrupts are outputted according to the meaning of the end code.
An interrupt request can be cleared by writing "000B" to DSS2 to DSS0 (end code) of DMACS.
Be sure to clear the end code by writing "000B" before restarting.
If reloading is enabled, the transfer is automatically restarted. At this point, however, the end code is not
cleared and is retained until a new end code is written when the next transfer ends.
Since only one end source can be displayed in an end code, the result after considering the order of priority
is displayed when multiple sources occur simultaneously. The interrupt that occurs at this point conforms to
the displayed end code.
The following shows the priority for displaying end codes (in order of decreasing priority):
• Reset
• Clear by writing "000B".
• Peripheral stop request
• Successful completion
• Channel selection and control
■ DMA Transfer in Sleep Mode
The DMAC can also operate in sleep mode.
If you anticipate operations during sleep mode, note the following:
• Since the CPU is stopped, DMAC registers cannot be rewritten. Make settings before sleep mode is
entered.
• The sleep mode is released by an interrupt. Thus, if a peripheral interrupt is selected as the DMAC start
source, interrupts must be disabled by the interrupt controller.
Similarly, if you do not want to release sleep mode with a DMAC end interrupt, disable DMAC end
interrupts.
396
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Channel Selection and Control
Up to 5 channels can be simultaneously set as transfer channels. In general, an independent function can be
set for each channel.
● Priority level for channels
Since DMA transfer is possible only on 1 channel at a time, priority must be set for the channels.
Two modes, fixed and rotation, are provided as the priority settings and can be selected for each channel
group (described later).
(1) Fixed mode
The priority is fixed by channel number in ascending order.
(ch.0 > ch.1 > ch.2 > ch.3 > ch.4)
If a transfer request with a higher priority is received during a transfer, the transfer channel becomes the
channel with the higher priority when the transfer for the transfer unit (number set in the block size
specification register x data width) ends.
When higher priority transfer is completed, transfer is restarted on the previous channel.
ch0 transfer request
ch1 transfer request
Bus operation
CPU
SA
Transfer channel
DA
SA
ch.1
DA
SA
ch.0
DA
SA
ch.0
DA
CPU
ch.1
ch0 transfer end
ch1 transfer end
(2) Rotation mode (between ch.0 and ch.1 only)
When operation is enabled, the initial states have the same order that they would have in fixed mode,
but at the end of each transfer operation, the priority of the channels is reversed. Thus, if more than one
transfer request is outputted at the same time, the channel is switched after each transfer unit.
This mode is effective when continuous or burst transfer is set.
ch0 transfer request
ch1 transfer request
Bus operation
CPU
SA
Transfer channel
DA
ch.1
SA
DA
SA
ch.0
DA
ch.1
SA
DA
CPU
ch.0
ch0 transfer end
ch1 transfer end
● Channel group
Set the selection priority as explained in the table below.
Mode
Priority
Fixed
ch.0>ch.1
ch.0>ch.1
Rotation
↑↓
Remark
The initial states have the upper order.
When the upper part is transferred, it is reversed.
ch.0<ch.1
397
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.7
Operation Flow
This section shows the flowchart of the DMAC block transfer and burst transfer.
■ Block Transfer
Figure 16.7-1 Flowchart of Block Transfer
DMA stop
DENB=>0
DENB=1
Wait start request
Reload enable
Start request
Initial
Load address, transfer
count, and block number
Address operation for
transfer source address access
Address operation for
transfer destination address access
Block number - 1
BLK=0
Transfer count - 1
At only select peripheral interrupt start source
Write back address, transfer
count, and block number
Clear interrupt
Generating interruption clear
DTC=0
DMA transfer end
Block transfer
- Starting is possible by all starting factors (option)
- Accessing is possible to all areas
- Setting of block number is possible.
- Generating interrupt clear at the block number end
- Generating DMA interrupt at designated transfer count end
398
Generating DMA interrupt
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
■ Burst Transfer
Figure 16.7-2 Flowchart of Burst Transfer
DMA stop
DENB=>0
DENB=1
Wait start request
Reload enable
Initial
Load address, transfer
count, and block number
Address operation for
transfer source address access
Address operation for
transfer destination address access
Block number - 1
BLK=0
Transfer count - 1
DTC=0
Write back address, transfer
count, and block number
At only select peripheral interrupt start source
Clear interrupt
DMA transfer end
Generating interruption clear
Generating DMA interrupt
Burst transfer
- Starting is possible by all starting factors (option)
- Accessing is possible to all areas
- Setting of block number is possible.
- Generating interrupt clear at designated transfer number end and generating DMA interrupt.
399
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
16.8
Data Path
This section shows the data transfer example of using DMAC (other sets are omitted).
■ Data Operation at Two-cycle Transfer
• Six types of transferring example are shown in the following;
(Other combinations are omitted.)
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
F-bus
F-bus
RAM
External bus I/F
CPU
I-bus
DMAC
Write cycle
CPU
DMAC
Read cycle
External bus I/F
Transfer the external area → the external area
I/O
RAM
I/O
CPU
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
Write cycle
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
External bus I/F
Read cycle
DMAC
CPU
DMAC
External bus I/F
Transfer the external area → the internal RAM area
F-bus
I/O
RAM
I/O
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
I/O
External bus I/F
CPU
I-bus
DMAC
Write cycle
CPU
DMAC
Read cycle
External bus I/F
Transfer the external area → the internal I/O area
F-bus
RAM
I/O
(Continued)
400
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
(Continued)
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
F-bus
RAM
External bus I/F
CPU
I-bus
DMAC
Write cycle
CPU
DMAC
Read cycle
External bus I/F
Transfer the internal I/O area → the internal RAM area
F-bus
RAM
I/O
I/O
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
I-bus
X-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
F-bus
RAM
External bus I/F
CPU
I-bus
DMAC
Write cycle
CPU
DMAC
Read cycle
External bus I/F
Transfer the internal RAM area → the external area
F-bus
RAM
I/O
I/O
CPU
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
X-bus
I-bus
Bus controller
D-bus
Data buffer
F-bus
F-bus
RAM
I/O
External bus I/F
X-bus
I-bus
DMAC
Write cycle
CPU
DMAC
Read cycle
External bus I/F
Transfer the internal RAM area → the internal I/O area
RAM
I/O
401
CHAPTER 16 DMAC (DMA Controller)
402
CHAPTER 17
FLASH MEMORY
This chapter describes an overview of flash memory and
the configuration and functions of registers, access
modes, automatic algorithm and sector protect
operations.
17.1 Overview of Flash Memory
17.2 Flash Memory Registers
17.3 Access Modes of Flash Memory
17.4 Starting the Flash Memory Automatic Algorithm
17.5 Automatic Algorithm Execution Status
17.6 Sector Protect Operation
403
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.1
Overview of Flash Memory
The MB91F264B contains 256 KB (2 M bits) flash memory. This internal flash memory
can be erased in all sectors together or in sector units by a single power supply voltage
of 3.3 V, and can be written in halfword (16 bits) units via the FR-CPU.
■ Overview of Flash Memory
This flash memory is an internal 256 KB flash memory that operates on 3.3 V. This is the same (except for
the capacity and some sector structures) as the Fujitsu MBM29LV400TC 4 M bits (512K bytes × 8 / 256K
bytes × 16) flash memory, and supports writing with a device-external ROM writer. In addition to the
features equivalent to the MBM29LV400TC, instructions and data can be read in word units (32 bits) when
the flash memory is used as FR-CPU internal ROM, enabling high speed device operation.
Along with this manual, refer to the MBM29LV400TC Data Sheet.
This flash memory supports the following features by combining the flash memory macro and the FR-CPU
interface circuits:
• Features for use as CPU memory, for storing programs and data
- Accessibility through 32-bit bus width when used as ROM
- Allowing read, write, and erase (automatic program algorithm*) by the CPU
• Features of a single flash memory product equivalent to MBM29LV400TC
Allowing read, write, and erase (automatic program algorithm*) by a ROM writer
*: Automatic program algorithm= Embedded Algorithm™
This section explains use of the flash memory accessed from the FR-CPU.
For information on using the flash memory accessed from a ROM writer, see the instruction manual
provided with the ROM writer.
■ Automatic Algorithm Execution Status
When the automatic algorithm is started in CPU programming mode, the operation status of the automatic
algorithm can be checked using the internal ready signal (RDY). The level of this signal can be read as the
RDY bit in the flash memory status register.
When the RDY bit is set to "0", data is being written or erased with the automatic algorithm, and no write
or erase command can be accepted. Moreover, data cannot be read from any address in flash memory.
Data read while the RDY bit set to "0" is a hardware sequence flag to indicate flash memory status (see
"17.4 Starting the Flash Memory Automatic Algorithm").
404
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
■ Writing by a ROM Writer
This flash memory can be written from a device external by using a ROM writer. In this case, a pin feature
of the single flash memory product equivalent to MBM29LV400TC is assigned to the device external pin
and the FR-CPU stops its operation. The address line connections are changed from those of the CPU
mode, and the mapping of the memory area is changed. For details, refer to "Supporting ROM Writer
Specifications".
■ Block Diagram of Flash Memory
Figure 17.1-1 Block Diagram of Flash Memory
CPU
Flash interface
CPU core
Control
signal
Control
signal
A0 to A17
Address
DQ0 to DQ15
Flash memory
Control
signal
A0 to A17
DQ0 to DQ15
Data
Control
signal
Address
Interface
with Flash
writer
(in Flash
mode)
Data
405
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
■ Sector Configuration of Flash Memory
Flash memory employs different address mapping depending on whether it is accessed from the FR-CPU or
from the ROM writer. Figure 17.1-2 and Table 17.1-1 show the mapping for access from the FR-CPU.
Figure 17.1-3 shows the mapping for access from the ROM writer.
● Mapping for Access from the FR-CPU
Figure 17.1-2 Mapping for Access from the FR-CPU
000F_FFFFH
FFFF_FFFFH
SAA4 (16 KB)
SAA9 (16 KB)
SAA3 (8 KB)
SAA8 (8 KB)
SAA2 (8 KB)
SAA7 (8 KB)
SAA1 (32 KB)
SAA6 (32 KB)
SAA0 (64 KB)
SAA5 (64 KB)
000F _8000H
000F_7FFFH
000F _4000H
000F_3FFFH
0010_0000H
000F_FFFFH
000C_0000H
Flash
memory
256 KB
000F _0000H
000E_FFFFH
000E_0000H
000D_FFFFH
000C_0000H
0000_0000H
bit
Byte position for
access in CPU mode
31
1615
0
1
0
2
3
Table 17.1-1 Sector Address List (FR-CPU Access)
Sector Address
Address Range
Bit Position
Sector Capacity
SAA9
F_8002, 3H to F_FFFE, FH
bit15 to bit0
16 KB
SAA8
F_4002, 3H to F_7FFE, FH
bit15 to bit0
8 KB
SAA7
F_0002, 3H to F_3FFE, FH
bit15 to bit0
8 KB
SAA6
E_0002, 3H to E_FFFE, FH
bit15 to bit0
32 KB
SAA5
C_0002, 3H to D_FFFE, FH
bit15 to bit0
64 KB
SAA4
F_8000, 1H to F_FFFC, DH
bit31 to bit15
16 KB
SAA3
F_4000, 1H to F_7FFC, DH
bit31 to bit15
8 KB
SAA2
F_0000, 1H to F_3FFC, DH
bit31 to bit15
8 KB
SAA1
E_0000, 1H to E_FFFC, DH
bit31 to bit15
32 KB
SAA0
C_0000, 1H to D_FFFC, DH
bit31 to bit15
64 KB
406
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
● Mapping for Access from the ROM writer
Figure 17.1-3 Address Mapping for Access from the ROM Writer
F_FFFFH
SAA9(16 KB)
F_C000H
F_BFFFH
SAA8(8 KB)
F_A000H
F_9FFFH
SAA7(8 KB)
F_8000H
F_7FFFH
SAA6(32 KB)
F_0000H
E_FFFFH
SAA5(64 KB)
E_0000H
D_FFFFH
SAA4(16 KB)
D_C000H
D_BFFFH
SAA3(8 KB)
D_A000H
D_9FFFH
SAA2(8 KB)
D_8000H
D_7FFFH
SAA1(32 KB)
D_0000H
C_FFFFH
SAA0(64 KB)
C_0000H
0 Bit position
15
1
0
Byte position (when written by the writer)
0
1
When CPU reads
407
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
Table 17.1-2 Sector Address List (ROM Writer Access)
408
Sector Address
Address Range
Bit Position
Sector Capacity
SAA9
F_C000H to F_FFFFH
bit15 to bit0
16 KB
SAA8
F_A000H to F_BFFFH
bit15 to bit0
8 KB
SAA7
F_8000H to F_9FFFH
bit15 to bit0
8 KB
SAA6
F_0000H to F_7FFFH
bit15 to bit0
32 KB
SAA5
E_0000H to E_FFFFH
bit15 to bit0
64 KB
SAA4
D_C000H to D_FFFFH
bit15 to bit0
16 KB
SAA3
D_A000H to D_BFFFH
bit15 to bit0
8 KB
SAA2
D_8000H to D_9FFFH
bit15 to bit0
8 KB
SAA1
D_0000H to D_7FFFH
bit15 to bit0
32 KB
SAA0
C_0000H to C_FFFFH
bit15 to bit0
64 KB
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.2
Flash Memory Registers
The flash memory has two types of registers - Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR)
and Flash Memory Wait Register (FLWC).
■ Register List of Flash Memory
Figure 17.2-1 shows a register list of flash memory.
Figure 17.2-1 Register List of Flash Memory
bit7
0
Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR)
bit7
0
Flash Memory Wait Register (FLWC)
Table 17.2-1 Address Map
Offset
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
007000H
FLCR[R/W] B
0110X000
–
–
–
007004H
FLWC[R/W] B
00000011
FLASH I/F
–
–
–
409
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.2.1
Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR)
The flash memory status register (FLCR) indicates the operation status of the flash
memory.
■ Configuration of Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR)
This register controls interrupt to the CUP and writing to flash memory. The FLCR can be accessed only
by CPU and cannot be accessed when a writer is installed.
Do not use read-modify-write instructions to access this register.
Figure 17.2-2 shows the bit configuration of FLCR.
Figure 17.2-2 Bit Configuration of Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR)
Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
007000h
–
R/W
0
–
R/W
1
–
R/W
1
–
R
0
RDY
R
X
–
R/W
0
WE
R/W
0
–
R/W
0
← Bit No.
← Read/Write
← Initial value
Functions of each bit in the flash memory status register (FLCR) are described below.
[bit7] (reserved)
Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "0".
[bit6] (reserved)
Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "1".
[bit5] (reserved)
Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "1".
[bit4] (reserved)
Reserved bit. This bit is read only. Write operation does not affect this bit.
[bit3] RDY: This bit indicates the operation status of the automatic algorithm.
RDY
Function
0
Writing or reading is in process, flash memory is not ready to accept a new write or erase
command.
1
Flash memory is ready to accept a new data read, write, or erase command.
[bit2] (reserved)
Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "0".
410
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
[bit1] WE: Controls the writing of data and commands to flash memory in CPU mode.
When this bit is "0", data and commands cannot be written to flash memory. In addition, data can be read
from flash memory at 32-bit access.
When this bit is "1", data and commands can be written to flash memory and the automatic algorithm can
be activated. However, data is read from and written to flash memory at 16-bit access. To access to the
flash memory, use 16-bit access only. Do not use 32-bit and 8-bit accesses.
If this bit is rewritten, confirm that the automatic algorithm has stopped by checking RDY bit.
When the RDY bit is set to "0", the value of this bit cannot be changed.
WE
Function
0
Writing to flash memory is disabled and data is read from flash memory in 32-bit access
mode.
1
Writing to flash memory is enabled and data is read from flash memory in 16-bit access
mode.
[bit0] (reserved)
Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "0".
● Restrictions
If the WE bit of the FLCR register is rewritten, be sure to execute the instruction sequence below on the
FBUS RAM (RAM installed in the CPU). When rewriting the register, do not execute DMA, interrupt, or
standby operation.
Instruction Sequence:
1: NOP
2: NOP
3: NOP
4: NOP
5: NOP
6: MUL R2,R3
//32bit dummy multiplication
7: STB R11,@R12 //Rewrite register
8: MUL R2,R3
//32bit dummy multiplication
9: NOP
411
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.2.2
Flash Wait Register (FLWC)
The flash wait register (FLWC) controls the wait status of flash memory in CPU mode.
■ Configuration of the Flash Wait Register (FLWC)
Figure 17.2-3 shows the bit configuration of FLWC.
Figure 17.2-3 Bit Configuration of Flash Wait Register (FLWC)
Address
007004H
7
6
5
4
3
–
R
0
–
R/W
0
FAC1
R/W
0
FAC0
R/W
0
–
R/W
0
2
1
0
← Bit No.
WTC2 WTC1 WTC0
R/W
R/W
R/W ← Read/Write
0
1
1
← Initial value
Functions of each bit in the flash wait register (FLWC) are described below.
[bit7, bit6] (reserved)
Reserved bits. Always set these bits to "0".
[bit5, bit4] FAC1, FAC0: These bits control the pulse width of the internal write signal.
FAC1
FAC0
ATDIN
EQIN
0
0
0.5 clock
1 clock
0
1
1 clock
1.5 clock
1
0
1.5 clock
2 clock
1
1
2 clock
2.5 clock
(Initial value)
Note:
ATDIN and EQIN are internal write signals. Use default setting for normal use.
For MASK product, always set "00B".
[bit3] (reserved)
Reserved bit. Always set this bit to "0".
412
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
[bit2 to bit0] WTC2 to WTC0: Wait cycle control bits
These bits control the wait cycle number when accessing flash memory.
WTC2
WTC1
WTC0
Wait Cycle
Reading
Writing
0
0
0
-
Setting disabled
Setting disabled
0
0
1
1
Enabled up to 33 MHz
Setting disabled
0
1
0
2
Enabled up to 33 MHz
Setting disabled
0
1
1
3
Enabled up to 33 MHz
Enabled up to 33 MHz
1
0
0
4
Setting disabled
Setting disabled
1
0
1
5
Setting disabled
Setting disabled
1
1
0
6
Setting disabled
Setting disabled
1
1
1
7
Setting disabled
Setting disabled
(Initial value)
Notes:
• Set bits to have cycle number higher than that of set by FAC1 and FAC0.
• Initial value is set for writing. If reading only (when FLCR WE=0), set the wait cycle 1 (WTC2 to
WTC0 = 001B) for reading at the highest speed.
• Initial value for the MASK product, wait cycle 3 (WTC2 to WTC0 = 011B) is set for reading. Set
the wait cycle 1 (WTC2 to WTC0 = 001B) for reading at the highest speed.
413
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.3
Access Modes of Flash Memory
FR-The following two types of access modes are available for the FR-CPU access:
• ROM mode word(32-bit) length data can be read at a time, but cannot write data.
• Programming mode word(32-bit) length access is prohibited but halfword (16-bit)
length data can be written.
■ FR-CPU ROM Mode (32/16/8-bit, Read Only)
In this mode, the flash memory serves as FR-CPU internal ROM. This mode enables to read 1 word (32
bits) length data at a time but does not enable to write to flash memory or to start the automatic algorithm.
● Mode Specification
• When specifying this mode, set the WE bit of the flash status register to "0".
• This mode is always set after a reset occurs at CPU run time.
• This mode can be set only when the CPU is running.
● Detail of Operation
• In this mode, 1 word (32 bits) length data can be read from the flash memory area at one time. 2 cycles/
1 word (1 wait) is needed for reading. This will enable instructions to be supplied to FR-CPU without
wait.
● Restrictions
• Address assignment and endians in this mode differ from those for writing with the ROM writer. In this
mode, both commands and data cannot be written to flash memory.
■ FR-CPU Programming Mode (16-bit, Read/write)
This mode enables data to be written and erased. As 1 word (32 bits) length data cannot be accessed at one
time, program execution in flash memory is disabled in this mode.
● Mode Specification
• When specifying this mode, set the WE bit of the flash status register (FLCR) to "1".
• After a reset occurs at CPU run time, the WE bit indicates "0". To set into this mode, set the WE bit to
"1". If the WE bit is set again to "0" through a writing operation or because of a reset, the device returns
into ROM mode.
• When the RDY bit of the flash memory status register (FLCR) is "0", the WE bit cannot be rewritten.
When rewriting the WE bit, ensure that the RDY bit is set to "1".
414
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
● Detail of Operation
• One half-word (16 bits) length data can be read from the flash memory area at one time.
• 4 cycles/halfword (3 waits) is needed for reading.
• The automatic algorithm can be started by writing a command to flash memory. When the automatic
algorithm starts, data can be written to or erased from flash memory. For details on the automatic
algorithm, see "17.4 Starting the Flash Memory Automatic Algorithm" and "17.5 Automatic Algorithm
Execution Status".
● Restrictions
• Address assignment and endians in this mode differ from those for writing with the ROM writer. This
mode inhibits reading data in words (32 bits).
• This mode inhibits reading data in words (32 bits).
• When switching in the programming access mode, rewrite WE bit by following the restrictions of
"17.2.1 Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR)".
415
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.4
Starting the Flash Memory Automatic Algorithm
Flash memory has an automatic algorithm. Writing to and erasing from flash memory
are executed by starting the automatic algorithm.
● Command Operation
To start the automatic algorithm, write halfword (16-bit) data into the flash memory once to six times
consecutively. It will be referred to as command. The flash memory is reset to read mode when illegal
address are data are written to it, or address and data are written in the wrong order.
Table 17.4-1 shows the command list for flash memory write/erase.
Table 17.4-1 Command List
Command
sequence
Number of
accesses
First write cycle
Address
Second write cycle
Data
Address
Data
Third write cycle
Fourth write/read
cycle
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Address
Data
Fifth write cycle
Sixth write cycle
1
XXXXH
F0H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Read/Reset
4
D5557H
AAH
CAAABH
55H
D5557H
F0H
RA
RD
-
-
-
-
Program
4
D5557H
AAH
CAAABH
55H
D5557H
A0H
Chip erase
6
D5557H
AAH
CAAABH
55H
D5557H
80H
PA
D5557H
PD
AAH
CAAABH
55H
D5557H
10H
Sector erase
6
D5557H
AAH
Read/Reset
Temporary sector erase stop
Sector erase restart
Auto Select
Continuous
mode
Continuous
write
Continuous
mode reset
CAAABH
55H
D5557H
80H
D5557H
AAH
CAAABH
55H
30H
SA
When Address=XXXXH and Data=B0H are inputted, erasing of the sector currently being erased is
temporarily stopped.
When Address=XXXXH and Data=30H are inputted, erasing is restarted after erasing of the sector
has been temporarily stopped.
CAAABH
55H
D5557H
90H
-
3
D5557H
AAH
3
D5557H
AAH
CAAABH
55H
D5557H
20H
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
XXXXH
A0H
PA
PD
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2
XXXXH
90H
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
XXXXH F0H or 00H
The commands are the same for word mode and byte mode. The data of bits that are not listed in the table
is arbitrary.
RA: Read address
PA: Write address
SA: Sector address (Specify any address in a sector.)
RD: Read data
PD: Write data
416
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
● Read/Reset Command
To return to read mode after the time limit is exceeded, a read/reset command sequence will be issued.
Data is read from flash memory in the read cycle. The flash memory remains in reading state until another
command is entered.
When the power is turned on, flash memory is automatically set to the read/reset state. In this case, data can
be read without a command of the automatic algorithm.
● Program (Write)
In CPU programming mode, data is basically written in halfword units. The write operation is performed
in four cycles of bus operation. The command sequence has two "unlock" cycles, which are followed by a
write setup command and a write data cycle. Writing to the memory starts in the last write cycle.
After an automatic write algorithm command sequence was executed, it becomes unnecessary to control the
flash memory externally. The flash memory itself internally generates write pulses to check the margin of
the cells to which data is written. The data polling function compares bit7 of the original data with bit7 of
the written data, and if these bits are the same, the automatic write operation ends (see "■Hardware
Sequence Flag" in section "17.5 Automatic Algorithm Execution Status"). The automatic write operation
then returns to the read mode and accepts no more write addresses. After that, the flash memory requests
the next valid address. In this manner, the data polling function indicates the memory is in a write
operation.
During a write operation, all commands written to the flash memory are ignored. If a hardware reset starts
during write operation, the data at the address for writing may become invalid. Writing operations can be
performed in any address sequence and outside of sector boundaries. However, write operations cannot
change a data item "0" to "1". If a "0" is overwritten with a "1", either the data polling algorithm
determines that the elements are defective, or it looks as if "1" has been written. In the latter case, however,
the respective data item is read as "0" in reset/read mode. A data item "0" can be changed to "1" only by an
erase operation. Figure 17.4-1 shows a writing sequence with using write command.
Figure 17.4-1 Writing Sequence with Using Write Command
Write starts
Write command sequence
Data polling of the device
Next address
NO
Last address?
YES
Write ends
417
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
● Chip Erase
The chip erase ("erase all sectors simultaneously") is executed in six access cycles. First, two "unlock"
cycles are executed, and then a "setup" command is written. Two more "unlock" cycles are executed to
enter the chip erase command.
During the chip erase, the user does not have to write to flash memory before the erase operation. When
the automatic erase algorithm is executed, flash memory checks cell states by writing a pattern of zeros
before automatically erasing the contents of all cells (preprogram). In this operation, flash memory does
not have to be controlled externally.
The automatic erase operation starts with the write operation of the command sequence and ends when bit7
is set to "1", where flash memory returns to the read mode. The chip erase time can be expressed as
follows: time for sector erase x number of all sectors + time for writing to the chip (preprogram).
Figure 17.4-2 shows chip erasing sequence with using chip erase command.
● Sector Erase
The sector erase is executed in six access cycles. First, two "unlock" cycles are executed, and then a
"setup" command is written. After two more "unlock" cycles, the sector erase command is entered in the
sixth cycle for starting the sector erase operation. The next sector erase command can be accepted within a
time-out period of 50 µs after the last sector erase command was written.
Multiple sector erase commands can be accepted concurrently during the six bus cycles of the writing
operation as mentioned above. This command sequence is executed by writing sector erase commands
(30H) consecutively into the addresses for sectors whose contents are to be erased simultaneously. The
sector erase operation itself starts from the end of the time-out period of 50 µs after the last sector erase
command is written. Therefore, when the contents of multiple sectors are erased simultaneously, the
subsequent sector erase commands must be inputted within the 50 µs time-out period to ensure that they are
accepted. If the commands are inputted after the 50 µs time-out period, the commands may not be
accepted. For checking whether the succeeding sector erase command is valid, read bit3 (see "■Hardware
Sequence Flag" in section "17.5 Automatic Algorithm Execution Status").
During the time-out period, any commands other than sector erase and temporary stop erase are reset to
read, and the preceding command sequence is ignored. In the case, the erase operation is completed by
erasing the contents of the sector again. Any combination and number (from 0 to 6) of sector addresses can
be entered in the sector erase buffers. The user does not have to write to flash memory before the sector
erase operation. Flash memory automatically writes to all cells in a sector whose data is automatically
erased (preprogram). When the contents of a sector are erased, the other sectors remain intact. In these
operations, flash memory does not have to be controlled externally.
The automatic sector erase operation starts from the end of the 50 µs time-out period after the last sector
erase command is written. When bit7 is set to "1", the automatic sector erase operation ends and flash
memory returns to the read mode (see "■Hardware Sequence Flag" in section "17.5 Automatic Algorithm
Execution Status"). At this time, other commands are ignored. The data polling function is enabled for any
sector address in which data has been erased. The time required for erasing the data of multiple sectors can
be expressed as follows: time for sector erase + time for sector write (preprogram) × number of erased
sectors.
Figure 17.4-2 shows chip erasing sequence with using chip erase command.
418
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
Figure 17.4-2 Chip Erasing Sequence with Using Chip Erase Command
Erase starts
Chip erase/sector erase
command sequence
Data polling of the device or
toggle bit completed
Write ends
● Temporary Stop Erase
The temporary stop erase command temporarily stops the automatic algorithm in flash memory when the
user is erasing the data of a sector, thereby making it possible to write data to and read data from the other
sectors. This command is valid only during the sector erase operation, and ignored during chip erase and
write operations. The temporary stop erase command (B0H) is effective only during sector erase operation
that includes the sector erase time-out period after a sector erase command (30H) is issued. When this
command is entered within the time-out period, time-out ends immediately and the erase operation is
suspended. The erase operation is restarted when a restart erase command was written. Temporary stop
erase and restart erase commands can be entered with any addresses.
When a temporary stop erase command is entered during sector erase operation, the flash memory needs a
maximum of 20 µs to stop the erase operation. When flash memory enters temporary erase stop mode, a
ready/busy signal and bit7 output "1", and bit6 stops to toggle. For checking whether the erase operation
has stopped, enter the address of the sector whose data is being erased and read the values of bit6 and bit7.
At this time, another temporary stop erase command entry is ignored. When the erase operation stops,
flash memory enters the temporary erase stop and read mode. Data reading is enabled in this mode for
sectors that are not subject to temporary erase stop. Other than that, there is no difference from the
standard read operation. In this mode, bit2 toggles for consecutive reading operations from sectors subject
to temporary erase stop (see "■Hardware Sequence Flag" in section "17.5 Automatic Algorithm Execution
Status").
After the temporary erase stop and read mode is entered, the user can write to flash memory by writing a
write command sequence. The write mode in this case is the temporary erase stop and write mode. In this
mode, data write operations become valid for sectors that are not subject to temporary erase stop. Other
than that, there is no difference from the standard byte writing operation. In this mode, bit2 toggles for
consecutive reading operations from sectors that are subject to temporary erase stop. The temporary erase
stop bit (bit6) can be used to detect this operation.
Note that bit6 can be read from any addresses, but bit7 must be read from write addresses. To restart the
sector erase operation, a restart erase command (30H) must be entered. Another restart erase command
entry is ignored in this point. On the other hand, a temporary stop erase command can be entered after
flash memory restarts the erase operation.
419
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.5
Automatic Algorithm Execution Status
Flash memory is provided with hardware to notify the internal operation status of flash
memory and the completion of the operation to the outside of the flash memory for
executing write/erase operations in the automatic algorithm. One is a ready/busy signal
and the other is a hardware sequence flag.
■ Ready/Busy Signal (RDY/BUSY)
The flash memory has the ready/busy signal in addition to the hardware sequence flag for indicating
whether the internal automatic algorithm is running or completed. This ready/busy signal is connected to
the flash memory interface circuit, and it can be read as the RDY bit of the flash memory status register.
Also, by starting this ready/busy signal, it can generate an interrupt request to the CPU (see "17.1
Overview of Flash Memory").
When the read value of the RDY bit is "0", the flash memory is executing a write or erase operation, where
new write and erase commands are not accepted. When the value of the RDY bit is "1", the flash memory
is in read/write state or in erase operation wait state.
■ Hardware Sequence Flag
Hardware sequence flag can be obtained as data by reading an arbitrary address (or odd number address in
byte access) of the flash memory during automatic algorithm operation. In the data, valid bits are five bits
and each of them indicates the status of the automatic algorithm. Figure 17.5-1 shows the structure of the
hardware sequence flag.
Figure 17.5-1 Structure of the Hardware Sequence Flag
During hardware read
15
8 7
(Undefined)
0
← Bit No.
0
← Bit No.
Hardware sequence flag
7
During byte read (only for odd address)
Hardware sequence flag
During halfword and byte access
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DPOLL
TOGGLE
TLOVER
Undefined
SETIMR
TOGGL2
Undefined
Undefined
← Bit No.
The hardware sequence flag becomes invalid in FR-CPU ROM mode. Always use FR-CPU programming
mode and read only in halfwords or bytes.
Table 17.5-1 shows a hardware sequence flag status list.
420
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
Table 17.5-1 Hardware Sequence Flag Status List
State
Automatic write operation
Write/erase operation in automatic erase
Read
(from the sector being erased)
Executing
Temporary Read
erase stop (from the sector not being erased)
Write
(to the sector not being erased)
Time limit Automatic write operation
exceeded Write/erase operation in automatic erase
DPOLL
(bit7)
TOGLLE TLOVER SETIMR TOGGL2
(bit6)
(bit5)
(bit3)
(bit2)
Inverted data
0
Toggle
Toggle
0
0
0
1
1
Toggle
1
1
0
0
Toggle
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Inverted data
Toggle
0
0
1 *1
Inverted data
0
Toggle
Toggle
1
1
0
1
*2
1
*1: During write operation in the temporary erase stop status, bit2 outputs logic "1" to the read of the address that
is being written to.
However, bit2 toggles to the continuous read operations from sectors in temporary erase stop status.
*2: While bit5 is "1" (the time limit is exceeded), bit2 toggles to the continuous read operations for sectors under
write/erase operation but does not toggle to the read operations for other sectors.
Each bit is explained below.
[bit7] DPOLL: Data polling
• Automatic write operation status
When read access is performed while the automatic write algorithm is being executed, flash memory
outputs the inverted data of the last data written into bit7. When read access is performed at the end of
the automatic write algorithm, flash memory outputs bit7 of the read data of the address indicated by the
address signal.
• Automatic erase operation status
When read access is performed while the automatic erase algorithm is being executed, flash memory
outputs "0" regardless of the address indicated by the address signal. In the same way, "1" is output
when it ends.
• Temporary sector erase stop status
When read access is performed during temporary sector erase stop status, flash memory outputs "1" if
the address indicated by the address signal belongs to the sector in erase status. If not, flash memory
outputs bit7 of the read value of that address. To check whether a sector is currently in temporary sector
erase stop status or not, and which sector is in erase status, read this bit together with the toggle bit or
bit6 explained later.
421
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
Note:
When automatic algorithm operation is close to its end, bit7 (data polling) is changed asynchronously
during read operation. This means that the flash memory sends the operation status information to
bit7 and the bit7 sends the defined data to the next. When the flash memory ends the automatic
algorithm and even if the bit7 outputs the defined data, other bits are undefined. Defined data of
other bits is read when executing consecutive read operation.
[bit6] TOGGLE: Toggle bit
• Automatic write/erase operation status
When continuous read operations are performed while the automatic write or erase algorithm is being
executed, flash memory outputs "1" and "0" toggling results to bit6. When automatic write or erase
algorithm ends, flash memory stops bit6 from toggling to continuous read operations and outputs valid
data.
Toggle bit becomes valid after the last write cycle of each command sequence.
If sectors to be written are rewrite assured sectors, the toggle operation ends after about 2 µs toggling
period without rewriting data. When erasing, if the all selected sectors are write assured sectors, the
operation returns into the read mode after about 100 µs toggling period without rewriting data.
• Temporary sector erase stop status
When a read operation is performed during a temporary sector erase stop operation, flash memory
outputs "1" if the address indicated by the address signal belongs to the sector in erase state. If not, flash
memory outputs bit6 of the read value at the address indicated by the address signal.
[bit5] TLOVER: Time limit over
• Automatic write/erase operation status
bit5 indicates that automatic algorithm is executed beyond the time (internal pulse count) specified
inside the flash memory. In this case, bit5 outputs "1". In other words, if this flag outputs "1" during
automatic algorithm execution, it indicates that write or erase operation fails.
In addition, bit5 fails when writing into the non-blank without erasing. In this case, defined data cannot
be read from bit7 (data polling), and bit6 keeps toggling. If the operation exceeds the time limit in this
condition, "1" is output to bit5. This status indicates that flash memory was not used correctly, not that
it was defective. Be sure to execute the reset command if this state appears.
422
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
[bit3] SETIMR: Sector erase timer
Sector erase operation status
After executing the first sector erase command sequence, the operation enters sector erase wait period.
bit3 outputs "0" during this period and outputs "1" if the operation exceeds the sector erase wait period.
Data polling and toggle bits become valid after the first sector erase command sequence is executed.
When this flag is "1" while the data polling or toggle bit function is indicating that the erase algorithm is
being executed, an internally controlled erase operation has started. Any subsequent written commands
are ignored (except for the temporary erase stop code input) until the data polling or toggle bit indicates
that the erasing is completed. When this flag is "0", flash memory accepts additional sector erase code
entry. In this case, it is recommended to check the status of this flag by software before writing the
succeeding sector erase code. If this flag is "1" at the second time of status check, the additional sector
erase code may have not been accepted. When a read operation is performed during a temporary sector
erase stop operation, flash memory outputs "1" if the address indicated by the address signal belongs to
the sector that is subject to the erase operation. If not, flash memory outputs the bit3 of the read value
at the address indicated by the address signal.
[bit2] TOGGL2: Toggle bit 2
Sector erase operation status
Together with toggle bit6, this toggle bit is used to report whether flash memory is under automatic
erase operation or in temporary erase stop status. bit2 toggles when reading continuously from a sector
in erase status during automatic erase operation. When reading continuously from a sector in temporary
erase stop read mode while flash memory is in temporary erase stop status mode, bit2 toggles.
When reading addresses continuously from a sector not subject to a temporary erase stop operation
while flash memory is in temporary erase stop write mode, bit2 becomes "1". Unlike bit2, bit6 only
toggles in normal write and erase operations, or in temporary erase stop status write operation.
For example, bit2 and bit6 are used together to detect a temporary erase stop read mode (bit2 toggles
but bit6 does not). bit2 is also used to detect sectors that are subject to erase operations. When the flash
memory is in the erase operation and if data is read from a sector that is subject to an erase operation,
bit2 toggles.
423
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
■ Example of Hardware Sequence Flag Usage
By using hardware sequence flags described above, automatic algorithm status inside the flash memory can
be confirmed. Figure 17.5-2 shows a write/erase confirm flow chart for using data polling function and
Figure 17.5-3 shows a write/erase confirm flow chart for using toggle bit function as examples.
Figure 17.5-2 Write/Erase Confirmation Flow Chart Using Data Polling Function
Write/Erase Start
VA=Write address
=Sector address erased in the
sector erase operation
=Sector address not protected in
the chip erase operation
Read (D0 to D7)
Address=VA
D7=Data ?
YES
*: D7 and D5 change concurrently.
For example, even if D5="1", it is
necessary to check D7 again.
NO
NO
D5=1 ?
YES
Read (D0 to D7)
Address=VA
D7=Data ?
*
YES
NO
Write/Erase
Fail
424
Write/Erase
Pass
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
Figure 17.5-3 Write/Erase Confirmation Flow Chart Using Toggle Bit Function
Write/Erase Start
Read (D0 to D7)
Address="H" or "L"
D6=Toggle?
NO
YES
NO
D5=1 ?
YES
Read (D0 to D7)
Address="H" or "L"
D6=Toggle?
*
NO
YES
Write/Erase
Fail
Write/Erase
Pass
*: D6 stops toggle operation when D5 changes to "1", so even if
D5=1, it is necessary to check D6 again.
425
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
17.6
Sector Protect Operation
This flash memory has a sector protection function that disables illegal write/erase
operation on a sector basis. Once the sector is protected, it will keep the protection
function unless it breaks down. However, write/erase operation can be performed on
the protected sector by canceling the protection temporarily. This canceling is
performed through the sector protect operation.
The automatic algorithms such as write/erase operations are not available in the sector
protect operation. The sector protect operation is executable in flash memory mode,
but not supported in the normal mode.
For this reason, this operation must be controlled mainly by an external pin using a
flash memory writer.
■ Sector Protect Operation List
The following three types of sector protect operations are available:
• Enable sector protect
• Verify sector protect
• Temporary sector protect cancel
Table 17.6-1 shows pin configurations for each type.
Table 17.6-1 Pin Configuration
Operation
CEX OEX WEX A1
A2
A7
Enable sector protect
L
H
L
L
H
L
Verify sector protect
L
L
H
L
H
L
Temporary sector
protect cancel
–
–
–
–
–
–
A17 to
A133
Sector
address
Sector
address
–
*: Outputs "01H" during sector protect and "00H" during sector unprotect
426
D0 to D15 RSTX
MD2
MD1
MD0
–
H
VID
H
VID
Code output
H
H
H
VID
H
H
VID
H
*
–
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
■ Enable Sector Protect
Enable sector protect operation writes into the protection circuit in the flash memory.
By this operation, write and erase operations are invalidated for any combination of ten sectors. For
MB91F264B, the protection is cancelled in all sectors at the factory setting. First in this operation, set
sector addresses (A17, A16, A15, A14, A13) of the sector to be protected to the address signal. For the
sector and sector address, see Table 17.1-1.
Writing to the protection circuit starts by trailing edge of WEX pulse after applying VID (=12 V) to MD2
and MD0 to set CEX=0, and ends by leading edge.
Keep sector addresses constant during WEX pulse. Once the sector protection is set, it cannot be canceled.
Also, write/erase operations are disables on the protected sector afterward.
■ Verify Sector Protect
Verify sector protect operation verifies the writing to the protection circuit in the flash memory. First, this
operation sets CEX and OEX to "0" and applies VID (margin mode) to MD0 while WEX is "1". When
setting a sector address to the address signal and reading under (A7, A2, A1) = (0, 1, 0) condition, it outputs
"1" to output DQ0 in the protected sector. The value "00H" is read from the unprotected sector. Table
17.6-1 shows the sector protect algorithms using enable sector protect and verify sector protect.
427
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
Figure 17.6-1 Sector Protect Algorithms Using Enable Sector Protect and Verify Sector Protect
Start
Sector address setup
A17 to A13
PLSCNT=1
MD2=MD0=VID,
MD1=HA1=CEX=WEX="L"
OEX=RSTX="H"
Apply WEX pulse
Timeout 100 µs
WEX=MD2="H"
CEX=OEX="L"
(Still MD0=VID)
Read the sector address SA
(Address=SA, A1="L",
A2="H", A7="L")
NO
Data=01H?
YES
NO
PLSCNT=50 ?
YES
Cancel MD0=VID
Write reset command
Protect other
sectors?
NO
Cancel MD0=VID
Write reset command
Fail
Sector protect end
428
YES
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
■ Temporary Sector Protect Cancel
Once a sector is protected by enable sector protect, write/erase operations are disabled unless it breaks
down. However, the temporary sector protect cancel operation can cancel the protection information in the
protected sector temporarily. This operation is set by keeping an application of VID to MD1. In this
period, the sector protection information that is set before is ignored, and so write/erase operations can be
performed in all sectors. When MD1 returns to "1" (=3.3 V), this operation is canceled and all sectors
protected before are protected again. Figure 17.6-2 shows the temporary sector protect cancel algorithm.
Figure 17.6-2 Temporary Sector Protect Cancel Algorithm
Start
MD1=VID
*1
Execute erase or write operations
MD1="H"
*1: The protection of all protected sectors is
cancelled.
*2: Sectors protected before are protected
again.
Sector protect cancellation end
*2
429
CHAPTER 17 FLASH MEMORY
430
CHAPTER 18
SERIAL PROGRAMMING
CONNECTION
This chapter describes basic configuration of serial
programming and examples of the connection.
18.1 Overview
431
CHAPTER 18 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
18.1
Overview
The MB91F264B supports the serial onboard writing (Fujitsu standard) of the flash
memory. The following explains its specification.
■ Basic Configuration of the Serial Programming Connection
Fujitsu standard serial onboard writing uses the AF220/AF210/AF120/AF110 flash microcontroller
programmer by Yokogawa Digital Computer Corporation. The writing can be done by the program of the
single-chip mode operation. Figure 18.1-1 shows the basic configuration of MB91F264B serial
programming connection.
Figure 18.1-1 Basic Configuration of Serial Programming Connection
Host interface cable
RS232C
AF220/AF210/
AF120/AF110
flash
microcontroller
programmer
+
memory card
General-purpose common cable
(AZ210)
CLK synchronous
serial connection
MB91F264B
user system
Operable in stand-alone mode
Note:
For information about the functions of and operational procedures related to AF210 flash microcontroller
programmer, the general-purpose common cable (AZ210) for connection, and the connector, please
contact Yokogawa Digital Computer Corporation.
432
CHAPTER 18 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
■ Pins Used for Fujitsu Standard Serial Onboard Writing
Pin
Function
Control to set the flash serial programming mode.
Flash serial programming mode: MD2, MD1, MD0=1, 0, 0
Reference: Single-chip mode: MD2, MD1, MD0=0, 0, 0
MD2, MD1, MD0 Mode pin
P44, P45
Writing program start pin
INIT
Reset pin
Description
Set "L" level to P44, and "H" level to P45.
–
SIN0
Serial data input pin
SOT0
Serial data output pin
SCK0
Serial clock input pin
Use UART ch.0 resource as clock synchronous mode.
VCC
Power voltage supply pin
Supply programming voltage from the user system. When connecting,
do not short with power supply of the user side.
VSS
GND pin
Must be shared with GND of the flash microcontroller programmer.
Notes:
• To use the P44, P45, SIN0, SOT0, and SCK0 pins within the user system as well, the control
circuit shown in the following figure is required.
(Using the flash microcontroller programmer’s /TICS signal, the user circuit can be disconnected
in serial programming mode.)
AF220/AF210/
AF120/AF110
write control pin
MB91F264B
write control pin
AF220/AF210/
AF120/AF110
/TICS pin
User circuit
• Connect with AF200 under the power-off state of the user power supply.
433
CHAPTER 18 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
■ Example of Serial Programming Connection
Figure 18.1-2 Example of MB91F264B Serial Programming Connection
AF200
flash microcontroller
programmer
User System
MB91F264B
Connector DX10-28S
TAUX3
(19)
MD2
74
MD1
75
MD0
76
P44
27
At serial programming 1
At serial programming 0
TMODE
(12)
At serial programming 0
User circuit
At serial programming 0
WDT
(18)
/TICS
(10)
At serial programming 1
P45
28
(5)
INITX
77
(13)
(27)
SIN0
SOT0
98
99
TCK
(6)
SCK0
100
Vcc
TVcc
(2)
(17,35,49,
67,92)
Vss
(18,37,50,
68,93)
/TRES
TTXD
TRXD
GND
(14,15,
1, 28)
User circuit
Power supplied from user (5.0 V)
Pin 14
Pin 1
DX 10-28S
Pins 3, 4, 9, 11, 16,
17, 18, 20, 23, 24, 25,
and 26 are opened.
Pin 28
Pin 15
Pin assignments of connector (Hirose Electric)
DX10-28S: Right angle type
434
CHAPTER 18 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
■ System Configuration of AF200 Flash Microcontroller Programmer (Yokogawa Digital
Computer Corporation)
Type
Main
body
Function
AF220
/AC4P
Model with built-in Ethernet interface
/100 V to 220 V power adapter
AF210
/AC4P
Standard model
/100 V to 220 V power adapter
AF120
/AC4P
One-touch key model with built-in Ethernet interface /100 V to 220 V power adapter
AF110
/AC4P
One-touch key model
AZ221
Programmer dedicated RS232C cable for PC/AT
AZ210
Standard target probe (a) length: 1 m
FF201
Fujitsu FR flash microcontroller control module
AZ290
Remote controller
/P4
For inquiries:
/100 V to 220 V power adapter
4 MB PC Card (Option) FLASH memory capacity of up to 512 KB supported
Yokogawa Digital Computer Corporation
Tel: +81-42-333-6224
■ Oscillation Clock Frequency
For the write operations on flash memory, the oscillation clock that can be used is 4 MHz.
■ Other Precautionary Information
The port state for flash memory writing via a serial programmer is the same as the reset state except the pin
used for writing operation.
435
CHAPTER 18 SERIAL PROGRAMMING CONNECTION
436
APPENDIX
This appendix contains the following items: I/O map,
interrupt vector, pin status list, notes when little endian
area is used, instruction lists, and the precautions on
handling.
APPENDIX A I/O Map
APPENDIX B Vector Table
APPENDIX C Pin Status In Each CPU State
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
APPENDIX F Precautions on Handling
437
APPENDIX A I/O Map
APPENDIX A I/O Map
The correspondence between the memory space area and each register of the
peripheral resources is shown below.
■ I/O Map
[How to read the table]
Address
000000 H
Register
+1
+2
PDR1 [R/W]
PDR2 [R/W]
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
+0
PDR0 [R/W]
XXXXXXXX
+3
PDR3 [R/W]
XXXXXXXX
Block
Port Data Register
Read/write attribute
Initial value of register after reset
Register name (Column 1 of the register is at address 4n.
Column 2 is at address 4n+2...)
Leftmost register address (For word-length access, column 1
of the register becomes the MSB side of the data.)
Notes:
• The initial value of bits in a register are indicated as follows:
"1": Initial value "1"
"0": Initial value "0"
"X": Initial value "X"
"–": No physical register at the location
• Low-order 16 bits (DTC [15:0]) of the DMACA0 to DMACA4 cannot be accessed by Byte.
438
APPENDIX A I/O Map
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map (1 / 7)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000000H
PDR0 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR1 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR2 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR3 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
000004H
PDR4 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR5 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDR6 [R/W] B
----XXXX
PDR7 [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
00000CH
PDRC [R/W] B
XXXXXXXX
PDRD [R/W] B
------XX
PDRE [R/W] B
------XX
________
000010H
PDRG [R/W] B
--XXXXXX
________
________
________
000008H
__________________
000014H
to
00003CH
Port Data Register
__________________
000040H
EIRR0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
ENIR0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
000044H
DICR [R/W] B,H,W
-------0
HRCL [R/W,R] B,H,W
0--11111
Reserved
ELVR0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
________
________
000048H
TMRLR0 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
TMR0 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
00004CH
________
TMCSR0 [R/W,R] B,H,W
---00000 00000000
000050H
TMRLR1 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
TMR1 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
000054H
________
TMCSR1 [R/W,R] B,H,W
---00000 00000000
000058H
TMRLR2 [W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
TMR2 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
00005CH
________
TMCSR2 [R/W,R] B,H,W
---00000 00000000
000060H
000064H
000068H
00006CH
000070H
000074H
SSR0 [R/W,R] B,H,W
00001000
SIDR0[R] / SODR0[W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
UTIM0 [R] H / UTIMR0 [W] H
00000000 00000000
SSR1 [R/W,R] B,H,W
00001000
SIDR1,SODR1[R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
UTIM1 [R] H / UTIMR1 [W] H
00000000 00000000
SSR2 [R/W,R] B,H,W
00001000
SIDR2,SODR2 [R/W]
B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
UTIM2 [R] H / UTIMR2 [W] H
00000000 00000000
Ext int
(INT0 to INT7)
DLYI/Hold Request
Reload Timer 0
Reload Timer 1
Reload Timer 2
SCR0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000100
SMR0 [R/W,W] B,H,W
00--0-0-
UART0
DRCL0
--------*3
UTIMC0 [R/W] B
0--00001
U-TIMER0
SCR1 [R/W] B,H,W
00000100
SMR1 [R/W] B,H,W
00--0-0-
UART1
DRCL1
--------*3
UTIMC1 [R/W] B
0--00001
U-TIMER1
SCR2 [R/W] B,H,W
00000100
SMR2 [R/W] B,H,W
00--0-0-
UART2
DRCL2
--------*3
UTIMC2 [R/W] B
0--00001
U-TIMER2
000078H
ADCH0 [R/W] B,H,W
XX000000
ADMD0 [R/W] B,H,W
00001111
ADCD01 [R] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ADCD00 [R] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
00007CH
ADCS0[R/W,W] B,H,W
00000X00
________
AICR0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
________
000080H
ADCH1 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXX0XX0
ADMD1 [R/W] B,H,W
00001111
ADCD11 [R] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ADCD10 [R] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000084H
ADCS1[R/W,W] B,H,W
00000X00
________
AICR1 [R/W] B,H,W
------00
________
A/D Converter 0 /
Analog Input
Control 0
A/D Converter 1 /
Analog Input
Control 1
439
APPENDIX A I/O Map
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map (2 / 7)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000088H
ADCH2 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXX0XX0
ADMD2 [R/W] B,H,W
00001111
ADCD21 [R] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
ADCD20 [R] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
00008CH
ADCS2[R/W,W] B,H,W
00000X00
________
AICR2 [R/W] B,H,W
------00
________
000090H
OCCPBH0, OCCPBL0[W]/OCCPH0, OCCPL0 [R] H,W OCCPBH1, OCCPBL1[W]/OCCPH1, OCCPL1 [R] H,W
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
000094H
OCCPBH2, OCCPBL2[W]/OCCPH2, OCCPL2 [R] H,W OCCPBH3, OCCPBL3[W]/OCCPH3, OCCPL3 [R] H,W
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
000098H
OCCPBH4, OCCPBL4[W]/OCCPH4, OCCPL4 [R] H,W OCCPBH5, OCCPBL5[W]/OCCPH5, OCCPL5 [R] H,W
00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
00009CH
OCSH1 [R/W] B,H,W
X1100000
OCSL0 [R/W] B,H,W
00001100
OCSH3 [R/W] B,H,W
X1100000
OCSL2 [R/W] B,H,W
00001100
0000A0H
OCSH5 [R/W] B,H,W
X1100000
OCSL4 [R/W] B,H,W
00001100
OCMOD [R/W] B,H,W
XX000000
________
0000A4H
0000A8H
CPCLRBH, CPCLRBL[W]/CPCLRH, CPCLRL[R] H,W
11111111 11111111
TCCSH [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
TCDTH, TCDTL [R/W] H,W
00000000 00000000
TCCSL [R/W] B,H,W
01000000
________
ADTRGC [R/W] B,H,W
XXXX0000
0000ACH
IPCPH0, IPCPL0 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
IPCPH1, IPCPL1 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0000B0H
IPCPH2, IPCPL2 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
IPCPH3, IPCPL3 [R] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0000B4H
PICSH01 [W] B,H,W
000000--
PICSL01 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
0000B8H
EIRR1 [R/W] B,H,W
------00
ENIR1 [R/W] B,H,W
------00
0000BCH
TMRRH0, TMRRL0 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0000C0H
TMRRH2, TMRRL2 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
ICSH23 [R] B,H,W
XXXXXX00
ELVR1 [R/W] B,H,W
-------- ----0000
________
________
0000C4H
DTCR2 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
________
0000C8H
________
SIGCR1 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
________
SIGCR2 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXX1
0000D0H
ADCOMP2 [R/W] H,W
00000000 00000000
0000D4H
to
0000DCH
ADCOMP1 [R/W] H,W
00000000 00000000
________
ADCOMPC [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXX000
________________
PWCSR0 [R/W,R] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
PWCR0 [R] H,W
00000000 00000000
0000E4H
PWCSR1 [R/W,R] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
PWCR1 [R] H,W
00000000 00000000
0000ECH
to
0000FCH
440
________
16bit ICU
Ext int
(INT8, INT9)
PDIVR0 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXX000
Waveform
Generator
A/D COMP
Reserved
0000E0H
0000E8H
16bit Free run
Timer
TMRRH1, TMRRL1 [R/W] H,W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DTCR1 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
ADCOMP0 [R/W] H,W
00000000 00000000
16bit OCU
ICSL23 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
DTCR0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
0000CCH
A/D Converter 2 /
Analog Input
Control 2
________
_________________
PWC
PDIVR1 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXX000
Reserved
APPENDIX A I/O Map
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map (3 / 7)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000100H
PRLH0 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL0 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH1 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL1 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000104H
PRLH2 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL2 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH3 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL3 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000108H
PPGC0 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC1 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC2 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC3 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
00010CH
PRLH4 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL4 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH5 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL5 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000110H
PRLH6 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL6 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH7 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL7 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000114H
PPGC4 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC5 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC6 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC7 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
000118H
PRLH8 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL8 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH9 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL9 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
00011CH
PRLH10 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL10 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH11 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL11 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000120H
PPGC8 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC9 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC10 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC11 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
000124H
PRLH12 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL12 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH13 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL13 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000128H
PRLH14 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL14 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLH15 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
PRLL15 [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
00012CH
PPGC12 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC13 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC14 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
PPGC15 [R/W] B,H,W
0000000X
000130H
TRG [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
________
GATEC [R/W] B,H,W
XXXXXX00
000134H
REVC [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000
________
________
000138H
to
0001FCH
______________
000200H
DMACA0 [R/W] B,H,W *1
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
000204H
DMACB0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
000208H
DMACA1 [R/W] B,H,W *1
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00020CH
DMACB1 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
000210H
DMACA2 [R/W] B,H,W *1
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
000214H
DMACB2 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
000218H
DMACA3 [R/W] B,H,W *1
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00021CH
DMACB3 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
000220H
DMACA4 [R/W] B,H,W *1
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
PPG0 to PPG15
Reserved
DMAC
441
APPENDIX A I/O Map
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map (4 / 7)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000224H
DMACB4 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
DMAC
000228H
to
00023CH
________
Reserved
000240H
DMACR [R/W] B
0XX00000 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DMAC
000244H
to
000398H
________
Reserved
00039CH
________
________
________
0003A0H
DSP-PC [R/W]
XXXXXXXX
DSP-CSR [R/W,R,W]
00000000
________
DSP-LY [R/W]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003A4H
DSP-OT0 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DSP-OT1 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003A8H
DSP-OT2 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DSP-OT3 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003ACH
________
________
________
________
0003B0H
DSP-OT4 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DSP-OT5 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003B4H
DSP-OT6 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
DSP-OT7 [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003B8H
to
0003ECH
________
0003F0H
BSD0 [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003F4H
BSD1 [R/W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003F8H
BSDC [W] W
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
0003FCH
BSRR [R]
XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX
Reserved
Bit Search
000400H
DDR0 [R/W] B
00000000
DDR1 [R/W] B
00000000
DDR2 [R/W] B
00000000
DDR3 [R/W] B
00000000
000404H
DDR4 [R/W] B
00000000
DDR5 [R/W] B
00000000
DDR6 [R/W] B
----0000
DDR7 [R/W] B
00000000
000408H
________
________
________
________
00040CH
DDRC [R/W] B
00000000
DDRD [R/W] B
------00
DDRE [R/W] B
------00
________
000410H
DDRG [R/W] B
--000000
________
________
________
000414H
to
00041CH
442
________
Multiplier
Accumulator
Data Direction
Register
Reserved
APPENDIX A I/O Map
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map (5 / 7)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000420H
PFR0 [R/W] B
00000000
PFR1 [R/W] B
-0000000
PFR2 [R/W] B
--00-00-
________
000424H
________
________
________
PFR7 [R/W] B
------00
000428H
00042CH
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
PFRG [R/W] B
--00--0-
________
________
________
000430H
000434H
to
00043CH
________
Reserved
000440H
ICR00 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR01 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR02 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR03 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000444H
ICR04 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR05 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR06 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR07 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000448H
ICR08 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR09 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR10 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR11 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
00044CH
ICR12 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR13 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR14 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR15 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000450H
ICR16 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR17 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR18 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR19 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000454H
ICR20 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR21 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR22 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR23 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000458H
ICR24 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR25 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR26 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR27 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
00045CH
ICR28 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR29 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR30 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR31 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000460H
ICR32 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR33 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR34 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR35 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000464H
ICR36 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR37 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR38 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR39 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000468H
ICR40 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR41 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR42 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR43 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
00046CH
ICR44 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR45 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR46 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
ICR47 [R/W,R] B,H,W
----1111
000470H
to
00047CH
____________
RSRR [R/W] B,H,W
10000000
STCR [R/W] B,H,W
00110011
TBCR [R/W] B,H,W
00XXXX00
CTBR [W] B,H,W
XXXXXXXX
000484H
CLKR [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
WPR
--------*3
DIVR0 [R/W] B,H,W
00000011
DIVR1 [R/W] B,H,W
00000000
____________
Interrupt Control
unit
Reserved
000480H
000488H
to
0005FCH
Port Function
Register
Clock Control unit
Reserved
443
APPENDIX A I/O Map
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map (6 / 7)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
+3
000600H
PCR0 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR1 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR2 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR3 [R/W] B
00------
000604H
PCR4 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR5 [R/W] B
00000000
PCR6 [R/W] B
----0000
PCR7 [R/W] B
00000000
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
PCRG [R/W] B
--000000
________
________
________
000608H
00060CH
000610H
000614H
to
000FFCH
________
001000H
DMASA0 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001004H
DMADA0 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001008H
DMASA1 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00100CH
DMADA1 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001010H
DMASA2 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001014H
DMADA2 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001018H
DMASA3 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
00101CH
DMADA3 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001020H
DMASA4 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001024H
DMADA4 [R/W] W
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
001028H
to
006FFCH
________
007000H
007004H
FLCR [R,R/W]
0110X000
FLWC [R,R/W]
00000011
Reserved
DMAC
Reserved
________
________
________
________
________
________
*2
FLASH
007008H
00700CH
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
________
007010H
007014H
to
00BFFCH
________
________
________
________
444
Pull Up Control
__________________
Reserved
APPENDIX A I/O Map
Appendix Table A-1 I/O Map (7 / 7)
Register
Address
Block
+0
+1
+2
00C000H
to
00C07CH
X-RAM (Coefficient RAM) [R/W]
00C080H
to
00C0FCH
Y-RAM (Variable RAM) [R/W]
00C100H
to
00C2FCH
I-RAM (Instruction RAM) [R/W]
00C300H
to
00FFFCH
+3
64 × 16 bit
64 × 16 bit
Multiplier
Accumulator
256 × 16 bit
________
Reserved
*1: Low-order 16 bits (DTC [15:0]) of the DMACA0 to DMACA4 cannot be accessed by Byte.
*2: The initial value of FLWC (7004H) is "00010011B" on the EVA tool. Writing "00000011B" to the EVA
product does not affect the operation.
*3: These are reserved registers. These access are prohibited.
Notes:
• Do not use RMW instructions to the register having a write-only bit.
• Data indicated as reserved or (–) is undefined.
445
APPENDIX B Vector Table
APPENDIX B Vector Table
Appendix Table B-1 shows an interrupt vector table. In this table, interrupt factors and
interrupt vector/interrupt control register allocations for MB91260B series are listed.
ICR: ICR is a register installed among the interruption controllers. ICR sets the interruption level to each
demand of the interruption. ICR is prepared for corresponding to each interruption demand.
TBR: TBR is a register that shows the first address of the vector table for EIT.
The address where TBR and the defined offset value of each EIT factor were added is a vector
address.
The area of 1 KB from an address that TBR shows is the vector area for EIT.
The size of one vector is four bytes. The relationship between the vector number and the vector address is
shown as follows.
vctadr
446
= TBR + vctofs
= TBR + (3FCH – 4 × vct)
vctadr:
Vector address
vctofs:
Vector offset
vct:
Vector number
APPENDIX B Vector Table
Appendix Table B-1 Vector Table (1 / 3)
Interrupt No.
Interrupt
level
Offset
TBR default
address
RN
00
–
3FCH
000FFFFCH
–
1
01
–
3F8H
000FFFF8H
–
System reserved
2
02
–
3F4H
000FFFF4H
–
System reserved
3
03
–
3F0H
000FFFF0H
–
System reserved
4
04
–
3ECH
000FFFECH
–
System reserved
5
05
–
3E8H
000FFFE8H
–
System reserved
6
06
–
3E4H
000FFFE4H
–
Coprocessor absence trap
7
07
–
3E0H
000FFFE0H
–
Coprocessor error trap
8
08
–
3DCH
000FFFDCH
–
INTE instruction
9
09
–
3D8H
000FFFD8H
–
System reserved
10
0A
–
3D4H
000FFFD4H
–
System reserved
11
0B
–
3D0H
000FFFD0H
–
Step trace trap
12
0C
–
3CCH
000FFFCCH
–
NMI request (tool)
13
0D
–
3C8H
000FFFC8H
–
Undefined instruction exception
14
0E
–
3C4H
000FFFC4H
–
NMI request
15
0F
15(FH) Fixed
3C0H
000FFFC0H
–
External interrupt 0
16
10
ICR00
3BCH
000FFFBCH
6
External interrupt 1
17
11
ICR01
3B8H
000FFFB8H
7
External interrupt 2
18
12
ICR02
3B4H
000FFFB4H
–
External interrupt 3
19
13
ICR03
3B0H
000FFFB0H
–
External interrupt 4
20
14
ICR04
3ACH
000FFFACH
–
External interrupt 5
21
15
ICR05
3A8H
000FFFA8H
–
External interrupt 6
22
16
ICR06
3A4H
000FFFA4H
–
External interrupt 7
23
17
ICR07
3A0H
000FFFA0H
–
Reload timer 0
24
18
ICR08
39CH
000FFF9CH
8
Reload timer 1
25
19
ICR09
398H
000FFF98H
9
Reload timer 2
26
1A
ICR10
394H
000FFF94H
10
UART0 (Reception completed)
27
1B
ICR11
390H
000FFF90H
0
UART0 (Transmission completed)
28
1C
ICR12
38CH
000FFF8CH
3
DTTI
29
1D
ICR13
388H
000FFF88H
–
DMAC0 (End or error)
30
1E
ICR14
384H
000FFF84H
–
DMAC1 (End or error)
31
1F
ICR15
380H
000FFF80H
–
DMAC2/3/4 (End or error)
32
20
ICR16
37CH
000FFF7CH
–
Interrupt factor
Decimal
number
Hexadecimal
number
Reset
0
Mode vector
447
APPENDIX B Vector Table
Appendix Table B-1 Vector Table (2 / 3)
Interrupt No.
Interrupt
level
Offset
TBR default
address
RN
21
ICR17
378H
000FFF78H
1
34
22
ICR18
374H
000FFF74H
4
UART2 (Reception completed)
35
23
ICR19
370H
000FFF70H
2
UART2 (Transmission completed)
36
24
ICR20
36CH
000FFF6CH
5
Multiplier Accumulator
37
25
ICR21
368H
000FFF68H
–
PPG0
38
26
ICR22
364H
000FFF64H
–
PPG1
39
27
ICR23
360H
000FFF60H
–
PPG2/3
40
28
ICR24
35CH
000FFF5CH
–
PPG4/5/6/7
41
29
ICR25
358H
000FFF58H
–
PPG8/9/10/11/12/13/14/15
42
2A
ICR26
354H
000FFF54H
–
External interrupt 8/9
43
2B
ICR27
350H
000FFF50H
–
Waveform 0(Underflow)
44
2C
ICR28
34CH
000FFF4CH
–
Waveform 1(Underflow)
45
2D
ICR29
348H
000FFF48H
–
Waveform 2(Underflow)
46
2E
ICR30
344H
000FFF44H
–
Time base timer overflow
47
2F
ICR31
340H
000FFF40H
–
Free-run timer (Compare clear)
48
30
ICR32
33CH
000FFF3CH
–
Free-run timer (Zero detection)
49
31
ICR33
338H
000FFF38H
–
A/D0
50
32
ICR34
334H
000FFF34H
–
A/D1
51
33
ICR35
330H
000FFF30H
–
A/D2
52
34
ICR36
32CH
000FFF2CH
–
PWC0 (Measurement completed)
53
35
ICR37
328H
000FFF28H
–
PWC1 (Measurement completed)
54
36
ICR38
324H
000FFF24H
–
PWC0 (Overflow)
55
37
ICR39
320H
000FFF20H
–
PWC1 (Overflow)
56
38
ICR40
31CH
000FFF1CH
–
ICU0 (Capture)
57
39
ICR41
318H
000FFF18H
–
ICU1 (Capture)
58
3A
ICR42
314H
000FFF14H
–
ICU2/3 (Capture)
59
3B
ICR43
310H
000FFF10H
–
OCU0/1 (Match)
60
3C
ICR44
30CH
000FFF0CH
–
OCU2/3 (Match)
61
3D
ICR45
308H
000FFF08H
–
OCU4/5 (Match)
62
3E
ICR46
304H
000FFF04H
–
Delayed interrupt factor bit
63
3F
ICR47
300H
000FFF00H
–
Interrupt factor
Decimal
number
Hexadecimal
number
UART1 (Reception completed)
33
UART1 (Transmission completed)
448
APPENDIX B Vector Table
Appendix Table B-1 Vector Table (3 / 3)
Interrupt No.
Interrupt
level
Offset
TBR default
address
RN
40
–
2FCH
000FFEFCH
–
65
41
–
2F8H
000FFEF8H
–
System reserved
66
42
–
2F4H
000FFEF4H
–
System reserved
67
43
–
2F0H
000FFEF0H
–
System reserved
68
44
–
2ECH
000FFEECH
–
System reserved
69
45
–
2E8H
000FFEE8H
–
System reserved
70
46
–
2E4H
000FFEE4H
–
System reserved
71
47
–
2E0H
000FFEE0H
–
System reserved
72
48
–
2DCH
000FFEDCH
–
System reserved
73
49
–
2D8H
000FFED8H
–
System reserved
74
4A
–
2D4H
000FFED4H
–
System reserved
75
4B
–
2D0H
000FFED0H
–
System reserved
76
4C
–
2CCH
000FFECCH
–
System reserved
77
4D
–
2C8H
000FFEC8H
–
System reserved
78
4E
–
2C4H
000FFEC4H
–
System reserved
79
4F
–
2C0H
000FFEC0H
–
80
50
2BCH
000FFEBCH
to
to
to
to
255
FF
000H
000FFC00H
Interrupt factor
Decimal
number
Hexadecimal
number
System reserved (used by REALOS)
64
System reserved (used by REALOS)
Used in INT instruction
–
–
449
APPENDIX C Pin Status In Each CPU State
APPENDIX C Pin Status In Each CPU State
This appendix describes the pin status in each CPU state.
Words and phrases used for the pin status have the following meanings.
1. Input enabled
It means that the input function is allowed to be used.
2. Input 0 fix
It means that the pin is sending "0" to the internal by blocking the external input at the input gate near
the pin.
3. Output Hi-Z
It means that the transistor for pin drive is disabled and the pin is set to high impedance.
4. Output Retention
It means that the output status used immediately before becoming this mode is output as it is.
That is, when internal peripherals are operating, the pin will output by following the peripherals in
which the output occurs. When the pin outputs as a port, it will retains the output.
5. Retention of the Status Immediately Before
It means that the output status immediately before becoming this mode is output as it is, or for input, it
means that the input is enabled.
450
APPENDIX C Pin Status In Each CPU State
[Single-Chip Mode]
Appendix Table C-1 Pin Status In Each CPU State (1 / 2)
Pin No.
At initialize
Pin name
Function
QFP LQFP
INIT=L*1
INIT=H*2
At stop
At sleep
HIZ=0
HIZ=1
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Output Hi-Z/
Input 0 fix
1
99
P23
SIN1
2
100
P24
SOT1
3
1
P25
SCK1
4, 5
2, 3
P26, P27
INT6-INT7
Input enabled
Input enabled
Input enabled
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Output Hi-Z/
Input 0 fix
6 to 9
4 to 7
P50 to 53
Port
10
8
P54
INT0
11
9
P55
INT1
12
10
P56
INT2
13
11
P57
INT3
14
12
PG0
CKI/INT4
15
13
PG1
PPG0/INT5
16
14
PG2
Port
20
18
PG3
SIN2
21
19
PG4
SOT2
22
20
PG5
SCK2
23 to
30
21 to
28
P40 to P47
Port
31, 32 29, 30
PE1, PE0
AN11, AN10
38, 39 36, 37
PD1, PD0
AN9, AN8
41 to
48
39 to
46
PC7 to PC0 AN7 to AN0
51 to
56
49 to
54
P30 to P35
RTO0 to
RTO5
57, 58 55, 56
P36, P37
IC0, IC1
59, 60 57, 58
P60, P61
IC2, IC3
61, 62 59, 60
P62, P63
INT8, INT9
63, 64 61, 62
P70, P71
TOT1, TOT2
65
63
P72
DTTI
66
64
P73
PWI0
69
67
P74
PWI1
70
68
P75
ADTG0
71
69
P76
ADTG1
72
70
P77
ADTG2
Output
Hi-Z/
Input
disabled
Output
Hi-Z/
Input
disabled
Input enabled
Input enabled
Input enabled
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Output Hi-Z/
Input 0 fix
Input enabled
Input enabled
Input enabled
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Output Hi-Z/
Input 0 fix
451
APPENDIX C Pin Status In Each CPU State
Appendix Table C-1 Pin Status In Each CPU State (2 / 2)
Pin No.
At initialize
Pin name
Function
QFP LQFP
73
71
NMI
NMI
78
76
P00
PPG1
79
77
P01
PPG2
80
78
P02
PPG3
81
79
P03
PPG4
82
80
P04
PPG5
83
81
P05
PPG6
84
82
P06
PPG7
85
83
P07
PPG8
86
84
P10
PPG9
87
85
P11
PPG10
88
86
P12
PPG11
89
87
P13
PPG12
90
88
P14
PPG13
91
89
P15
PPG14
96
94
P16
PPG15
97
95
P17
Port
98
96
P20
SIN0
99
97
P21
SOT0
100
98
P22
SCK0
INIT=L*1
INIT=H*2
Input
enabled
Input
enabled
Output
Hi-Z/
Input
disabled
Output
Hi-Z/
Input
disabled
At stop
At sleep
HIZ=0
HIZ=1
Input enabled
Input enabled
Input enabled
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Retention of
the status
immediately
before
Output Hi-Z/
Input 0 fix
*1: INIT=L: Pin status while INIT is "L".
*2: INIT=H: Pin status immediately after INIT changes from "L" to "H".
452
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
This appendix explains operating suggestions for the following items when using the
little endian area.
• C compiler
• Assembler
• Linker
• Debugger
■ C Compiler (fcc911)
Please note that operations cannot be guaranteed, if the following operations are performed to the little
endian area when programming by C language.
- Arrangement of variable with initial value
- Assignment of structure
- Operations other than character type array that uses character string operation function
- Specification of -K lib option when using character string operation function
- Use of double type and long double type
- Arrangement of stack in little endian area
● Arrangement of variable with initial value
The variable with an initial value cannot be arranged in the little endian area.
The compiler does not have a function to generate an initial value of the little endian. The variable can be
arranged in the little endian area but an initial value cannot be set to it.
Please run a process to set an initial value at the head of the program.
[Example] When setting an initial value to the variable little_data of the little endian area.
extern int little_data;
void little_init(void) {
little_data = initial value;
}
void main(void) {
little_init();
...
}
453
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
● Assignment of structure
When assigning between structures, the compiler selects the best method to transfer and transfers on a byte,
halfword, and word basis. Therefore, when the structure assignment is done between a structure variable
allocated in the normal area and a structure variable allocated in the little endian area, a correct result
cannot be obtained.
Please assign the structure member respectively.
[Example] When assigning the structure to the structure variable little_st of the little endian area.
struct tag { char c; int i; } normal_st;
extern struct tag little_st;
#define STRMOVE(DEST,SRC) DEST.c=SRC.c;DEST.i=SRC.i;
void main(void) {
STRMOVE(little_st,normal_st);
}
In addition, the arrangement of the structure member is different in each compiler. Therefore, the member's
arrangement might be different from that of the structure compiled by other compilers. In this case, a
correct result is not obtained from the above-mentioned method.
Please do not arrange the structure variable in the little endian area when the arrangement of the structure
member is different.
● Operations other than character type array that uses character string operation function
The character string operation function prepared as a standard library processes on a byte basis. Therefore,
when processing by using the character string operation function is done to the area with types other than
char, unsigned char, and the signed char type arranged in the little endian area, a correct result cannot be
obtained.
Please do not use such processing.
[Example of trouble] Transferring of word data with memcpy
int big = 0x01020304;
/* Big endian area
*/
extern int little;
/* Little endian area
*/
memcpy(&little,&big, 4);
/* Transferring by memcpy */
The above-mentioned execution result is as follows:
(Big endian area)
01 02
03
04
(Little endian area)
→ memcpy →
01
The result of transferring the word data is incorrect.
(Correct result)
454
04
03 02
01
02
03
04
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
● Specification of -K lib option when using character string operation function
When -K lib option is specified, the compiler performs inline expansion to some character string operation
functions. At this time, since the best processing method is selected, the processing may be changed to the
halfword or the word basis processing.
Therefore, processing to the little endian area is not executed correctly.
Please do not specify -K lib option when a process is executed to the little endian area by using the
character string operation function.
Also, please do not specify either -O4 option or -K speed option that including -K lib option.
● Use of double type and long double type
The access to the double type and the long double type is done by using a method of accessing to one highlevel word and one low-level word respectively. Therefore, accessing to the double type and the long
double type variables arranged in the little endian area yields an incorrect result.
The substitution of the variables of the same type allocated in the little endian area is possible. However,
these substitutions are occasionally replaced with the substitution of the constant as a result of optimization.
Please do not arrange either double type or long double type variables in the little endian area.
[Example of trouble] Transferring of double type data
double big = 1.0;
/* Big endian area
*/
extern int little;
/* Little endian area
*/
little = big;
/* Transferring of double type data */
The above-mentioned execution result is as follows:
(Big endian area)
3f
f0
00
00
00
00
(Little endian area)
00
00
→
00
00
f0
3f
00
00
00
00
The result of transferring the double type data is incorrect.
(Correct result)
00
00
00
00
00
00
f0
3f
● Arrangement of stack in little endian area
When all or a part of the stack is arranged in the little endian area, operation is not guaranteed.
455
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
■ Assembler (fasm911)
For programming using the assembler language of FR family, operating suggestions relating to the little
endian area are shown below.
● Section
The little endian area is used mainly for exchanging data to the little endian CPU. Therefore, please define
the little endian area as a data section where an initial value does not exist.
When specifying a code, a stack, or a data section with an initial value to the little endian area, the access
operation by MB91260B series cannot be guaranteed.
[Example]
/* Correct section definition in the little endian area */
.SECTION Little_Area, DATA, ALIGN=4
Little_Word:
.RES.W 1
Little_Half:
.RES.H 1
Little_Byte:
.RES.B 1
● Data access
When accessing to the little endian area data, coding can be done to the value of the data without
considering endians. However, please access to the little endian area data by using the same size access as
the data size.
[Example]
LDI
#0x01020304, r0
LDI
#Little_Word, r1
LDI
#0x0102, r2
LDI
#Little_Half, r3
LDI
#0x01, r4
LDI
#Little_Byte, r5
/* Use a ST instruction (or a LD instruction, etc.) for 32-bit data access */
ST
r0, @r1
/* Use a STH instruction (or a LDH instruction, etc.) for 16-bit data access */
STH
456
r2, @r3
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
/* Use a STB instruction (or LDB instruction, etc.) for 8-bit data access */
STB
r4, @r5
The value cannot be guaranteed when accessing it by a different data size in this MB91260B series. For
example, when two consecutive 16-bit data are accessed at a time by using a 32-bit access instruction, the
value of data cannot be guaranteed.
457
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
■ Linker (flnk911)
For making the program that uses the little endian area, operating suggestions for the section arrangement
when linking are shown below.
● Section type limitation
Only the data section without an initial value can be arranged in the little endian area.
When the data section with an initial value, stack section, and code section are arranged in the little endian
area, since the arithmetic processing of the address solution etc. is performed in the big endian inside of the
linker, so the program operation cannot be guaranteed.
● Undetected error
The linker does not recognize the little endian area. Therefore, the error message is not notified even if an
arrangement that violates the above-mentioned limitations is done. Please confirm the content of the
section arranged in the little endian area thoroughly before using the linker.
458
APPENDIX D Notes When Little Endian Area Is Used
■ Debugger (sim911, eml911, mon911)
● Simulator debugger
There is no memory space specification command to indicate the little endian area.
Therefore, memory operation commands and instruction executions that operate memory are treated as big
endian.
● Emulator debugger and monitor debugger
When the little endian area is accessed by the following commands, it is not treated as a normal value.
– set memory/show memory/enter/examine/set watch command
→ When using floating point (single/double) data, the specified value cannot be set or displayed.
– search memory command
→ When searching halfword and word data, the specified value cannot be searched.
– Line/reverse assemble (including reverse assemble display of the source window)
→ Normal instruction codes cannot be set or displayed (Please do not arrange the instruction code
in the little endian area).
– call/show call command
→ When the stack area is placed in the little endian area, it does not operate properly (Please do not
arrange the stack area in the little endian area).
459
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
FR family instruction lists are shown below.
[How to read instruction lists]
Mnemonic
ADD Rj, Rj
*ADD #s5, Rj
(1)
Type
A
C
OP
AG
A4
CYC
1
1
NZVC
CCCC
CCCC
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Operation
Ri + Rj -> Rj
Ri + s5 -> Ri
Remarks
,
,
(7)
(1) Instruction name
An asterisk (*) indicates an extended instruction that is not contained in the CPU specifications and is
obtained by extension or addition by the assembler.
(2) Symbols indicating addressing modes that can be specified for the operand.
For the meaning of symbols, see "Addressing Mode Symbols (on the next page)".
(3) Instruction format
(4) Instruction code in hexadecimal notation
(5) Number of machine cycles
a:
Memory access cycle. It may be extended by the Ready function.
b:
Memory access cycle. It may be extended by the Ready function.
However, the cycle is interlocked if the instruction immediately after refers to a targeted register
for LD operation, and the number of execution cycles is increased by 1.
c:
Interlocked if the instruction immediately after is an instruction that reads or writes to R15, SSP,
or USP, or an instruction in instruction format A. The number of execution cycles is increased by
1 and so it becomes 2.
d:
Interlocked if the instruction immediately after refers to MDH/MDL. The number of execution
cycles is increased to 2.
The minimum cycle number is 1 for each case a, b, c, and d.
(6) Indicating flag changes
Flag change
C: Change
-: No change
0: Clear
1: Set
(7) Instruction operation
460
Flag meaning
N: Negative flag
Z: Zero flag
V: Over flag
C: Carry flag
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
● Addressing mode symbols
Ri
: Register direct (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
Rj
: Register direct (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
R13
: Register direct (R13, AC)
Ps
: Register direct (Program status register)
Rs
: Register direct (TBR, RP, SSP, USP, MDH, MDL)
Cri
: Register direct (CR0 to CR15)
CRj
: Register direct (CR0 to CR15)
#i8
: Unsigned 8-bit immediate (-128 to 255)
Note: -128 to -1 is handled as 128 to 255.
#i20
: Unsigned 20-bit immediate (-0X80000 to 0XFFFFF)
Note: -0X7FFFF to -1 is handled as 0X7FFFF to 0XFFFFF.
#i32
: Unsigned 32-bit immediate (-0X80000000 to 0XFFFFFFFF)
Note: -0X80000000 to -1 is handled as 0X80000000 to 0XFFFFFFFF.
#s5
: Signed 5-bit immediate (-16 to 15)
#s10
: Signed 10-bit immediate (-512 to 508, multiples of 4 only)
#u4
: Unsigned 4-bit immediate (0 to 15)
#u5
: Unsigned 5-bit immediate (0 to 31)
#u8
: Unsigned 8-bit immediate (0 to 255)
#u10
: Unsigned 10-bit immediate (0 to 1020, multiples of 4 only)
@dir8
: Unsigned 8-bit direct address (0 to 0XFF)
@dir9
: Unsigned 9-bit direct address (0 to 0X1FE, multiples of 2 only)
@dir10
: Unsigned 10-bit direct address (0 to 0X3FC, multiples of 4 only)
label9
: Signed 9-bit branch address (-0X100 to 0XFC, multiples of 2 only)
label12
: Signed 12-bit branch address (-0X800 to 0X7FC, multiples of 2 only)
label20
: Signed 20-bit branch address (-0X80000 to 0X7FFFF)
label32
: Signed 32-bit branch address (-0X80000000 to 0X7FFFFFFF)
@Ri
: Register indirect (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@Rj
: Register indirect (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@(R13,Rj)
: Register relative indirect (Rj: R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@(R14,disp10)
: Register relative indirect (disp10: -0X200 to 0X1FC, multiples of 4 only)
@(R14,disp9)
: Register relative indirect (disp9: -0X100 to 0XFE, multiples of 2 only)
@(R14,disp8)
: Register relative indirect (disp8: -0X80 to 0X7F)
@(R15,udisp6)
: Register relative indirect (udisp6: 0 to 60, multiples of 4 only)
@Ri+
: Register indirect with post-increment (R0 to R15, AC, FP, SP)
@R13+
: Register indirect with post-increment (R13, AC)
@SP+
: Stack pop
@-SP
: Stack push
(reglist)
: Register list
461
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
● Instruction format
MSB
LSB
16bit
A
B
OP
Rj
Ri
8
4
4
OP
i8/O8
Ri
4
8
4
C
OP
u4/m4
Ri
8
4
4
ADD, ADDN, CMP, LSL, LSR, and ASR instructions only
*C'
OP
7
D
F
5
4
8
OP
SUB-OP
Ri
8
4
4
rel11
OP
5
462
Ri
u8/rel8/dir/
reglist
8
OP
E
s5/u5
11
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-1 Addition and Subtraction
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
ADD Rj, Ri
*ADD #s5, Ri
A
C’
A6
A4
1
1
CCCC
CCCC
Ri+Rj->Ri
Ri+s5->Ri
ADD #u4, Ri
ADD2 #u4, Ri
ADDN Rj, Ri
ADDN Rj, Ri
*ADDN #s5, Ri
C
C
A
A
C’
A4
A5
A7
A2
A0
1
1
1
1
1
CCCC
CCCC
CCCC
-------
Ri+extu(i4)->Ri
Ri+extu(i4)->Ri
Ri+Rj+c->Ri
Ri+Rj->Ri
Ri+s5->Ri
ADDN #u4, Ri
ADDN2 #u4, Ri
SUB Rj, Ri
SUBC Rj, Ri
SUBN Rj, Ri
C
C
A
A
A
A0
A1
AC
AD
AE
1
1
1
1
1
------CCCC
CCCC
----
Ri+extu(i4)->Ri
Ri+extu(i4)->Ri
Ri-Rj->Ri
Ri-Rj-c->Ri
Ri-Rj->Ri
Remarks
The assembler treats the
highest-order 1 bit as the
sign.
Zero extension
Minus extension
Addition with carry
The assembler treats the
highest-order 1 bit as the
sign.
Zero extension
Minus extension
Subtraction with carry
Appendix Table E-2 Comparison Operation
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
Remarks
CMP Rj, Ri
*CMP #s5, Ri
A
C’
AA
A8
1
1
CCCC
CCCC
Ri-Rj
Ri-s5
The assembler treats the
highest-order 1 bit as the sign.
CMP #u4, Ri
CMP2 #u4, Ri
C
C
A8
A9
1
1
CCCC
CCCC
Ri-extu(i4)
Ri-extu(i4)
Zero extension
Minus extension
463
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-3 Logic Operation
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
82
84
85
86
92
94
95
96
9A
9C
9D
9E
1
1+2a
1+2a
1+2a
1
1+2a
1+2a
1+2a
1
1+2a
1+2a
1+2a
CC-CC-CC-CC-CC-CC-CC-CC-CC-CC-CC-CC--
AND Rj, Ri
AND Rj, @Ri
ANDH Rj, @Ri
ANDB Rj, @Ri
OR Rj, Ri
OR Rj, @Ri
ORH Rj, @Ri
ORB Rj, @Ri
EOR Rj, Ri
EOR Rj, @Ri
EORH Rj, @Ri
EORB Rj, @Ri
Operation
RMW
Ri & = Rj
(Ri) & = Rj
(Ri) & = Rj
(Ri) & = Rj
Ri | = Rj
(Ri) | = Rj
(Ri) | = Rj
(Ri) | = Rj
Ri ^ = Rj
(Ri) ^ = Rj
(Ri) ^ = Rj
(Ri) ^ = Rj
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
Remarks
Word
Word
Halfword
Byte
Word
Word
Halfword
Byte
Word
Word
Halfword
Byte
Appendix Table E-4 Bit Manipulation Instruction
Mnemonic
Type OP
BANDL #u4, @Ri
BANDH #u4, @Ri
*BAND #u8, @Ri
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
RMW
Remarks
C
C
80
81
1+2a
1+2a
----------
(Ri)&=(0xF0+u4)
(Ri)&=((u4<<4)+0x0F)
(Ri)&=u8
❍
❍
-
Low-order 4 bits are manipulated.
High-order 4 bits are manipulated.
C
C
90
91
1+2a
1+2a
----------
(Ri) | = u4
(Ri) | = (u4<<4)
(Ri) | = u8
❍
❍
-
Low-order 4 bits are manipulated.
High-order 4 bits are manipulated.
C
C
98
99
1+2a
1+2a
----------
(Ri) ^ = u4
(Ri) ^ = (u4<<4)
(Ri) ^ = u8
❍
❍
-
Low-order 4 bits are manipulated.
High-order 4 bits are manipulated.
C
C
88
89
2+a
2+a
0C-CC--
(Ri) & u4
(Ri) & (u4<<4)
-
Low-order 4 bits are tested.
High-order 4 bits are tested.
*1
BORL #u4, @Ri
BORH #u4, @Ri
*BOR #u8, @Ri
*2
BEORL #u4, @Ri
BEORH #u4, @Ri
*BEOR #u8, @Ri
*3
BTSTL #u4, @Ri
BTSTH #u4, @Ri
*1:
The assembler generates BANDL if the bit is set at u8&0x0F, and BANDH if the bit is set at u8&0xF0. In some
cases, both BANDL and BANDH may be generated.
*2:
The assembler generates BORL if the bit is set at u8&0x0F, and BORH if the bit is set at u8&0xF0. In some cases,
both BORL and BORH are generated.
*3:
The assembler generates BEORL if the bit is set at u8&0x0F, and BEORH if the bit is set at u8&0xF0. In some cases,
both BEORL and BEORH are generated.
464
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-5 Multiplication and Division
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
A
A
A
A
E
E
E
E
E
E
AF
AB
BF
BB
97-4
97-5
97-6
97-7
9F-6
9F-7
5
5
3
3
1
1
d
1
1
1
36
CCCCCCCC-CC--------C-C
-C-C
-------C-C
Ri * Rj -> MDH, MDL
Ri * Rj -> MDH, MDL
Ri * Rj -> MDL
Ri * Rj -> MDL
-C-C
MDL / Ri -> MDL , MDL % Ri -> MDH
MUL Rj,Ri
MULU Rj,Ri
MULH Rj,Ri
MULUH Rj,Ri
DIV0S Ri
DIV0U Ri
DIV1 Ri
DIV2 Ri
DIV3
DIV4S
*DIV Ri
*2
Remarks
32bit*32bit=64bit
No sign
16bit*16bit=32bit
No sign
Step operation
32bit/32bit=32bit
MDL / Ri -> MDL , MDL % Ri -> MDH
*1
*DIVU Ri
Operation
Appendix Table E-6 Shift
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
A
C’
C
C
A
C’
C
C
A
C’
C
C
B6
B4
B4
B5
B2
B0
B0
B1
BA
B8
B8
B9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
CC-C
Ri << Rj -> Ri
Ri << u5 -> Ri
Ri << u4 -> Ri
Ri <<(u4+16) -> Ri
Ri >> Rj -> Ri
Ri >> u5 -> Ri
Ri >> u4 -> Ri
Ri >>(u4+16) -> Ri
Ri >> Rj -> Ri
Ri >> u5 -> Ri
Ri >> u4 -> Ri
Ri >>(u4+16) -> Ri
LSL Rj, Ri
*LSL #u5, Ri(u5:0 to 31)
LSL #u4, Ri
LSL2 #u4, Ri
LSR Rj, Ri
*LSR #u5, Ri(u5:0 to 31)
LSR #u4, Ri
LSR2 #u4, Ri
ASR Rj, Ri
*ASR #u5, Ri (u5:0 to 31)
ASR #u4, Ri
ASR2 #u4, Ri
Remarks
Logical shift
Logical shift
Arithmetic shift
Appendix Table E-7 Immediate Value Set/16-Bit/32-Bit Immediate Value Transfer Instruction
Mnemonic
LDI:32 #i32, Ri
LDI:20 #i20, Ri
LDI:8 #i8, Ri
*LDI # {i8|i20|i32} ,Ri
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
E
C
B
9F-8
9B
C0
3
2
1
----------
Operation
Remarks
i32 -> Ri
High-order 12 bits are zero-extended.
i20 -> Ri
High-order 24 bits are zero-extended.
i8 -> Ri
{i8 | i20 | i32} -> Ri
*3
*1:
DIV0S, DIV1 x 32, DIV2, DIV3, and DIV4S are generated. The instruction code length becomes 72 bytes.
*2:
DIV0U and DIV1 x 32 are generated. The instruction code length becomes 66 bytes.
*3:
If the immediate value is an absolute value, i8, i20, or i32 is selected automatically by the assembler.
If immediate value contains a relative value or an external reference symbol, i32 is selected.
465
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-8 Memory Load
Mnemonic
LD @Rj, Ri
LD @(R13,Rj), Ri
LD @(R14,disp10),Ri
LD @(R15,udisp6),Ri
LD @R15+, Ri
LD @R15+, Rs
LD @R15+, PS
LDUH @Rj, Ri
LDUH @(R13,Rj), Ri
LDUH @(R14,disp9), Ri
LDUB @Rj, Ri
LDUB @(R13,Rj), Ri
LDUB @(R14,disp8), Ri
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
A
A
B
C
E
E
E
A
A
B
A
A
B
04
00
2
03
07-0
07-8
07-9
05
01
4
06
02
6
b
b
b
b
b
b
1+a+b
b
b
b
b
b
b
------------------CCCC
-------------------
(Rj)->Ri
(R13+Rj)->Ri
(R14+disp10)->Ri
(R15+udisp6)->Ri
(R15)->Ri,R15+=4
(R15)->Rs,R15+=4
(R15)->PS, R15+=4
(Rj)->Ri
(R13+Rj)->Ri
(R14+disp9)->Ri
(Rj)->Ri
(R13+Rj)->Ri
(R14+disp8)->Ri
Remarks
Rs: Special register
*1
Zero extension
Zero extension
Zero extension
Zero extension
Zero extension
Zero extension
*1: In the o8 and o4 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and sets them as shown below:
disp10/4->o8, disp9/2->o8, disp8->o8, disp10, disp9, and disp8 have a sign, udisp6/4->o4 udisp6 has no sign.
Appendix Table E-9 Memory Store
Mnemonic
ST Ri,@Rj
ST Ri,@(R13,Rj)
ST Ri,@(R14,disp10)
ST Ri,@(R15,udisp6)
ST Ri,@-R15
ST Rs,@-R15
ST PS,@-R15
STH Ri,@Rj
STH Ri,@(R13,Rj)
STH Ri,@(R14,disp9)
STB Ri,@Rj
STB Ri,@(R13,Rj)
STB Ri,@(R14,disp8)
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
Operation
A
A
B
C
E
E
E
A
A
B
A
A
B
14
10
3
13
17-0
17-8
17-9
15
11
5
16
12
7
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
----------------------------------------
Ri->(Rj)
Ri->(R13+Rj)
Ri->(R14+disp10)
Ri->(R15+udisp6)
R15-=4,Ri->(R15)
R15-=4, Rs->(R15)
R15-=4, PS->(R15)
Ri->(Rj)
Ri->(R13+Rj)
Ri->(R14+disp9)
Ri->(Rj)
Ri->(R13+Rj)
Ri->(R14+disp8)
Remarks
Word
Word
Word
Rs Special register
*1
Halfword
Halfword
Halfword
Byte
Byte
Byte
*1: In the o8 and o4 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and sets them as shown below:
disp10/4->o8, disp9/2->o8, disp8->o8, disp10, disp9, and disp8 have a sign, udisp6/4->o4 udisp6 has no sign.
Appendix Table E-10 Register-to-Register Transfer
Mnemonic
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
MOV
*1:
466
Rj, Ri
Rs, Ri
Ri, Rs
PS, Ri
Ri, PS
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
A
A
E
E
E
8B
B7
B3
17-1
07-1
1
1
1
1
c
------------CCCC
Special register Rs: TBR, RP, USP, SSP, MDH, and MDL
Operation
Rj -> Ri
Rs -> Ri
Ri -> Rs
PS -> Ri
Ri -> PS
Remarks
Transfer between generalpurpose registers
Rs: Special register
Rs: Special register
*1
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-11 Normal Branch (No Delay)
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
JMP @Ri
CALL label12
CALL @Ri
RET
INT #u8
E
E
F
E
D
97-0
D0
97-1
97-2
1F
2
2
2
2
3+3a
----------------
INTE
E
9F-3
3+3a
----
RETI
BRA label9
BNO label9
BEQ label9
E
D
D
D
97-3
E0
E1
E2
2+2A
2
1
2/1
CCCC
----------
BNE label9
BC label9
BNC label9
BN label9
BP label9
BV label9
BNV label9
BLT label9
BGE label9
BLE label9
BGT label9
BLS label9
BHI label9
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
----------------------------------------
Operation
Remarks
Ri -> PC
PC+2->RP , PC+2+(label12-PC-2)->PC
PC+2->RP ,Ri->PC
RP -> PC
Return
SSP-=4, PS->(SSP), SSP-=4, PC+2->(SSP),
0->I Flag, 0->S Flag,
(TBR+0x3FC-u8 × 4)->PC
SSP-=4, PS->(SSP), SSP-=4, PC+2->(SSP),
0->S Flag,(TBR+0x3D8)->PC
For emulator
(R15)->PC,R15-=4,(R15)->PS,R15-=4
PC+2+(label9-PC-2)->PC
No branch
if(Z==1) then
PC+2+(label9-PC-2)->PC
↑ s/Z==0
↑ s/C==1
↑ s/C==0
↑ s/N==1
↑ s/N==0
↑ s/V==1
↑ s/V==0
↑ s/V xor N==1
↑ s/V xor N==0
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==1
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==0
↑ s/C or Z==1
↑ s/C or Z==0
Notes:
•
"2/1" under CYCLE indicates "2" cycles when branching occurs and "1" cycle when branching does not occur.
•
In the rel11 and rel8 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and sets them as shown below:
(label12-PC-2)/2->rel11, (label9-PC-2)/2->rel8, label12 and label9 have a sign.
•
To execute the RETI instruction, the S flag must be set to "0".
467
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-12 Delayed Branch
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
JMP:D @Ri
CALL:D label12
CALL:D @Ri
RET:D
BRA:D label9
BNO:D label9
BEQ:D label9
E
F
E
E
D
D
D
9F-0
D8
9F-1
9F-2
F0
F1
F2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
----------------------
BNE:D label9
BC:D label9
BNC:D label9
BN:D label9
BP:D label9
BV:D label9
BNV:D label9
BLT:D label9
BGE:D label9
BLE:D label9
BGT:D label9
BLS:D label9
BHI:D label9
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FE
FF
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
----------------------------------------
Operation
Remarks
Ri -> PC
PC+4->RP , PC+2+(label12-PC-2)->PC
PC+4->RP ,Ri->PC
RP -> PC
Return
PC+2+(label9-PC-2)->PC
No branch
if(Z==1) then
PC+2+(label9-PC-2)->PC
↑ s/Z==0
↑ s/C==1
↑ s/C==0
↑ s/N==1
↑ s/N==0
↑ s/V==1
↑ s/V==0
↑ s/V xor N==1
↑ s/V xor N==0
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==1
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==0
↑ s/C or Z==1
↑ s/C or Z==0
Notes:
• In the rel11 and rel8 fields of the hardware specifications, the assembler calculates values and sets them as shown below:
(label12-PC-2)/2->rel11, (label9-PC-2)/2->rel8, label12 and label9 have a sign.
• A delayed branch always occurs after the next instruction (delay slot) is executed.
• Instructions that can be placed in the delay slot are all 1-cycle, a-, b-, c-, and d-cycle instructions.
Multi-cycle instructions cannot be placed in the delay slot.
468
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-13 Other Instructions
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
NOP
ANDCCR #u8
ORCCR #u8
STILM #u8
ADDSP #s10 *1
EXTSB Ri
EXTUB Ri
EXTSH Ri
EXTUH Ri
LDM0 (reglist)
E
D
D
D
D
E
E
E
E
D
9F-A
83
93
87
A3
97-8
97-9
97-A
97-B
8C
1
c
c
1
1
1
1
1
1
---cccc
cccc
----------------------
LDM1 (reglist)
D
8D
-------
*LDM (reglist)
*2
STM0 (reglist)
D
8E
----
STM1 (reglist)
D
8F
-------
*STM (reglist)
*3
D
0F
1+a
----
LEAVE
E
9F-9
b
----
XCHB @Rj, Ri
A
8A
2a
----
ENTER #u10
*4
Operation
No change
CCR and u8 -> CCR
CCR or u8 -> CCR
i8 -> ILM
R15 += s10
Sign extension 8->32bit
Zero extension 8->32bit
Sign extension 16->32bit
Zero extension 16->32bit
(R15)->reglist,
R15 increment
(R15)->reglist,
R15 increment
(R15)->reglist,
R15 increment
R15 decrement
reglist->(R15)
R15 decrement
reglist->(R15)
R15 decrement
reglist->(R15)
R14 -> (R15 - 4),
R15 - 4 -> R14,
R15 - u10 -> R15
R14 + 4 -> R15,
(R15 - 4) -> R14
Ri -> TEMP
(Rj) -> Ri
TEMP -> (Rj)
RMW
-
Remarks
ILM Immediate set
ADD SP instruction
Load multi R0-R7
-
Load multi R8-R15
-
Load multi R0-R15
-
Store multi R0-R7
-
Store multi R8-R15
-
Store multi R0-R15
-
Entry processing of a
function
-
Exit processing of a
function
For semaphore
management
Byte data
❍
*1: For s10, the assembler calculates s10/4 and then changes to s8 to set a value. s10 has a sign.
*2: If any of R0 to R7 is specified in reglist, LDM0 is generated, and if any of R8 to R15 is specified, LDM1 is generated.
In some cases, both LDM0 and LDM1 are generated.
*3: If any of R0 to R7 is specified in reglist, STM0 is generated, and if any of R8 to R15 is specified, STM1 is generated. In
some cases, both STM0 and STM1 are generated.
*4: For u10, the assembler calculates u10/4 and then changes to u8 to set a value. u10 has no sign.
Notes:
• The number of execution cycles of LDM0(reglist) and LDM1(reglist) can be calculated as a × (n-1)+b+1 cycles if the
number of specified registers is n.
• The number of execution cycles of STM0(reglist) and STM1(reglist) can be calculated as a × n+1 cycles if the number of
specified registers is n.
469
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-14 20-Bit Normal Branch Macro Instruction
Mnemonic
Operation
*CALL20 label20,Ri
Address of the next instruction ->RP,
label20->PC
label20->PC
if(Z==1) then label20->PC
↑ s/Z==0
↑ s/C==1
↑ s/C==0
↑ s/N==1
↑ s/N==0
↑ s/V==1
↑ s/V==0
↑ s/V xor N==1
↑ s/V xor N==0
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==1
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==0
↑ s/C or Z==1
↑ s/C or Z==0
*BRA20 label20,Ri
*BEQ20 label20,Ri
*BNE20 label20,Ri
*BC20 label20,Ri
*BNC20 label20,Ri
*BN20 label20,Ri
*BP20 label20,Ri
*BV20 label20,Ri
*BNV20 label20,Ri
*BLT20 label20,Ri
*BGE20 label20,Ri
*BLE20 label20,Ri
*BGT20 label20,Ri
*BLS20 label20,Ri
*BHI20 label20,Ri
Remarks
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
[Reference 1] CALL20
(1) If label20-PC-2 is between -0x800 and +0x7fe, the following instruction will be generated:
CALL label12
(2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
CALL @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA20
(1) If label20-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
BRA label9
(2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc20
(1) If label20-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
Bcc label9
(2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP @Ri
false:
470
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-15 20-Bit Delayed Branch Macro Instruction
Mnemonic
Operation
*CALL20:D label20,Ri
*BRA20:D label20,Ri
*BEQ20:D label20,Ri
*BNE20:D label20,Ri
*BC20:D label20,Ri
*BNC20:D label20,Ri
*BN20:D label20,Ri
*BP20:D label20,Ri
*BV20:D label20,Ri
*BNV20:D label20,Ri
*BLT20:D label20,Ri
*BGE20:D label20,Ri
*BLE20:D label20,Ri
*BGT20:D label20,Ri
*BLS20:D label20,Ri
*BHI20:D label20,Ri
Address of the next instruction +2->RP,
label20->PC
label20->PC
if(Z==1) then label20->PC
↑ s/Z==0
↑ s/C==1
↑ s/C==0
↑ s/N==1
↑ s/N==0
↑ s/V==1
↑ s/V==0
↑ s/V xor N==1
↑ s/V xor N==0
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==1
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==0
↑ s/C or Z==1
↑ s/C or Z==0
Remarks
RRi: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
[Reference 1] CALL20:D
(1) If label20-PC-2 is between -0x800 and +0x7fe, the following instruction will be generated:
CALL:D label12
(2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
CALL:D @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA20:D
(1) If label20-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
BRA:D label9
(2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc20:D
(1) If label20-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
Bcc:D label9
(2) If label20-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:20 #label20,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
false:
471
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-16 32-Bit Normal Branch Macro Instruction
Mnemonic
Operation
*CALL32 label32,Ri
Address of the next instruction ->RP,
label32->PC
label32->PC
if(Z==1) then label32->PC
↑ s/Z==0
↑ s/C==1
↑ s/C==0
↑ s/N==1
↑ s/N==0
↑ s/V==1
↑ s/V==0
↑ s/V xor N==1
↑ s/V xor N==0
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==1
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==0
↑ s/C or Z==1
↑ s/C or Z==0
*BRA32 label32,Ri
*BEQ32 label32,Ri
*BNE32 label32,Ri
*BC32 label32,Ri
*BNC32 label32,Ri
*BN32 label32,Ri
*BP32 label32,Ri
*BV32 label32,Ri
*BNV32 label32,Ri
*BLT32 label32,Ri
*BGE32 label32,Ri
*BLE32 label32,Ri
*BGT32 label32,Ri
*BLS32 label32,Ri
*BHI32 label32,Ri
Remarks
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
[Reference 1] CALL32
(1) If label32-PC-2 is between -0x800 and +0x7fe, the following instruction will be generated:
CALL label12
(2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
CALL @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA32
(1) If label32-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
BRA label9
(2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc32
(1) If label32-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
Bcc label9
(2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP @Ri
false:
472
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-17 32-Bit Delayed Branch Macro Instruction
Mnemonic
Operation
*CALL32D label32,Ri
Address of the next instruction +2->RP,
label32->PC
label32->PC
if(Z==1) then label32->PC
↑ s/Z==0
↑ s/C==1
↑ s/C==0
↑ s/N==1
↑ s/N==0
↑ s/V==1
↑ s/V==0
↑ s/V xor N==1
↑ s/V xor N==0
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==1
↑ s/(V xor N) or Z==0
↑ s/C or Z==1
↑ s/C or Z==0
*BRA32:D label32,Ri
*BEQ32:D label32,Ri
*BNE32:D label32,Ri
*BC32:D label32,Ri
*BNC32:D label32,Ri
*BN32:D label32,Ri
*BP32:D label32,Ri
*BV32:D label32,Ri
*BNV32:D label32,Ri
*BLT32:D label32,Ri
*BGE32:D label32,Ri
*BLE32:D label32,Ri
*BGT32:D label32,Ri
*BLS32:D label32,Ri
*BHI32:D label32,Ri
Remarks
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 1)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 2)
Ri: Temporary register (See Reference 3)
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
[Reference 1] CALL32:D
(1) If label32-PC-2 is between -0x800 and +0x7fe, the following instruction will be generated:
CALL:D label12
(2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
CALL:D @Ri
[Reference 2] BRA32:D
(1) If label32-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
BRA:D label9
(2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
[Reference 3] Bcc32:D
(1) If label32-PC-2 is between -0x100 and +0xfe, the following instruction will be generated:
Bcc:D label9
(2) If label32-PC-2 is outside the range of (1) or contains an external reference symbol, the following instruction will be
generated:
Bxcc false
xcc is the opposite condition of cc.
LDI:32 #label32,Ri
JMP:D @Ri
false:
473
APPENDIX E Instruction Lists
Appendix Table E-18 Direct Addressing
Mnemonic
DMOV @dir10, R13
DMOV R13, @dir10
DMOV @dir10, @R13+
DMOV @R13+, @dir10
DMOV @dir10, @-R15
DMOV @R15+, @dir10
DMOVH @dir9, R13
DMOVH R13, @dir9
DMOVH @dir9, @R13+
DMOVH @R13+, @dir9
DMOVB @dir8, R13
DMOVB R13, @dir8
DMOVB @dir8, @R13+
DMOVB @R13+, @dir8
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
08
18
0C
1C
0B
1B
09
19
0D
1D
0A
1A
0E
1E
b
a
2a
2a
2a
2a
b
a
2a
2a
b
a
2a
2a
-------------------------------------------
Operation
Remarks
(dir10)-> R13
R13 ->(dir10)
(dir10)->(R13),R13+=4
(R13)->(dir10),R13+=4
R15-=4,(R15)->(dir10)
(R15)->(dir10),R15+=4
(dir9)-> R13
R13 ->(dir9)
(dir9)->(R13),R13+=2
(R13)->(dir9),R13+=2
(dir8)-> R13
R13 ->(dir8)
(dir8)->(R13),R13++
(R13)->(dir8),R13++
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Word
Halfword
Halfword
Halfword
Halfword
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Note: In the dir8, dir9, and dir10 fields, the assembler calculates values and sets them as shown below:
dir8->dir, dir9/2->dir, dir10/4->dir dir8, dir9, and dir10 have no sign.
Appendix Table E-19 Resource Instruction
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
LDRES @Ri+, #u4
C
BC
a
----
STRES #u4, @Ri+
C
BD
a
----
Operation
Resource of u4
Ri+=4
Resource of u4->(Ri)
Ri+=4
Remarks
u4: Channel No.
u4: Channel No.
Note: These instructions cannot be used in this MB91260B series since resource having channel number is not installed.
Appendix Table E-20 Coprocessor Control Instruction
{CRi|CRj} := CR0 | CR1 | CR2 | CR3 | CR4 | CR5 | CR6 | CR7 | CR8 | CR9 | CR10 | CR11 | CR12 | CR13 | CR14 | | CR15
u4: := Specify channel
u8: := Specify command
COPOP
COPLD
COPST
COPSV
Mnemonic
Type
OP
CYCLE
NZVC
#u4, #u8, CRj, Cri
#u4, #u8, Rj, Cri
#u4, #u8, CRj, Ri
#u4, #u8, CRj, Ri
E
E
E
E
9F-C
9F-D
9F-E
9F-F
2+a
1+2a
1+2a
1+2a
-------------
Operation
Note: These instructions cannot be used in this MB91260B series since coprocessor is not installed.
474
Remarks
Operation instruction
Rj -> CRi
No error stop
CRj -> Ri
CRj -> Ri
APPENDIX F Precautions on Handling
APPENDIX F Precautions on Handling
■ Common Items
● Clock controller
When inputting "L" to INIT, the oscillation stabilization wait time must be secured.
● Switching functions between port and pin
When a port serves both as a port and a pin, port and pin functions are switched by PFR (Port Function
Register). However, a bus pin is switched by external bus settings.
Note: External bus mode is not supported by the MB91260B series.
● D-bus memory
Do not set the code area in the D-bus memory.
No instruction fetch to the D-bus memory is executed. If instruction fetch to the D-bus memory is
executed, incorrect data will be interpreted as a code, causing a runaway condition.
● Low-power consumption mode
(1) To switch to standby mode, use synchronous standby mode (set by the SYNCS bit, that is bit8 of the
TBCR, time-base counter control register) and be sure to use the following sequence:
/* Writing STCR */
ldi
#_STCR, R0
; STCR register (0x0481)
ldi
#Val_of_Stby, rl
; Val_of_Stby is the write data to STCR.
stb
rl,@r0
; Writing to STCR
/* Writing STBR */
ldi
#_CTBR, r2
; CTBR register (0x0483)
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (1)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
ldi
#0xA5, rl
; Clear command (2)
stb
rl,@r2
; Writing A5 to CTBR
/* Clearing the time base counter in here */
ldub
@r0, rl
; Reading STCR
/* Starting synchronous standby transition */
ldub
nop
@r0, rl
; Reading dummy STCR
; NOP × 5 for timing adjustment
nop
nop
nop
nop
(2) When using the monitor debugger, DO NOT:
475
APPENDIX F Precautions on Handling
- Set a break point within the above sequence of instructions.
- Execute step within the above sequence of instructions.
● Notes on using PS register
PS register is processed by some instructions in advance so that exception operations as stated below may
cause breaks during interruption processing routine when using debugger and may cause updates to the
display contents of PS flags.
In either case, this device is designed to carry out reprocessing properly after returning from such EIT
events. The operations before and after the events are performed as prescribed in the specification.
1. If the instruction immediately before DIV0U/DIV0S instruction (a) receives a user interrupt/NMI, (b)
executes stepping or (c) breaks by data event or emulator menu, the following operations may be
performed.
(1) D0 and D1 flags are updated in advance.
(2) EIT handling routine (user interrupt/NMI, or emulator) is executed.
(3) After returning from the EIT, DIV0U/DIV0S instruction is executed and the D0 and D1 flags are
updated to the same values as in (1).
2. The following operations are performed if each instruction from ORCCR, STILM, MOV Ri and PS is
executed to allow an interruption while user interrupt/NMI trigger exists.
(1) PS register is updated in advance.
(2) EIT handling routine (user interrupt/NMI) is executed.
(3) After returning from the EIT, the above instructions are executed and the PS register is updated to
the same value as in (1).
● Watchdog timer function
The watchdog timer equipped in this model operates to monitor programs to ensure that they execute reset
defer function within a certain period of time and to reset the CPU if the reset defer function is not executed
due to the program runaway. Therefore, once the watchdog timer function is enabled, it keeps its operation
until it is reset.
By way of exception, the watchdog timer automatically defers a reset under the conditions where the CPU
program executions are stopped. For more detail about such conditions, refer to the description section of
the watchdog timer function.
476
APPENDIX F Precautions on Handling
■ Notes on Using Debugger
● Stepping of the RETI instruction
In the environment where interruptions occur frequently during stepping, the RETI is executed repeatedly
for the corresponding interrupt processing routines after the stepping. As the result of it, the main routine
and low-interrupt-level programs are not executed.
To avoid this situation, do not step the RETI instruction. Otherwise, perform debugging by disabling the
interruptions when the debug on the corresponding interrupt routines becomes unnecessary.
● Operand break
Do not set the access to the areas containing the address of system stack pointer as a target of data event
break.
● Debugging on unused area of FLASH memory
If debug is performed on the unused area of FLASH memory (where data is 0XFFFFH) by mistake, break
will not be accepted. To avoid this situation, the use of address mask function of debugger code event is
recommended to break when an instruction is accessing to the unused area.
● Power-on debug
When powering off by the power-on debug, be sure to power off under the condition that all the following
three requirements are met.
(1) Time taken to decrease user power supply from 0.9 VCC to 0.5 VCC is 25 µs or more.
Note: If using two power supplies, VCC is external I/O power supply voltage.
(2) CPU operating frequency is 1 MHz or higher.
(3) User program is in execution.
● Interrupt handler for NMI request (tool)
When ICE is unconnected, to prevent the malfunction caused by noise or other sources affecting DSU pin
to set a flag which is only set by the break request from ICE, add the following programs to the interrupt
handler.
ICE can be used even if this program is added.
Location to add
The following interrupt handler
Interrupt factor
: NMI request (tool)
Interrupt No.
: 13 (decimal), 0D (hexadecimal)
Offset
: 3C8H
TBR as a default address
: 000FFFC8H
Additional program
STM
(R0, R1)
LDI
#B00H, R0
LDI
#0, R1
STB
R1, @R0
LDM
(R0, R1)
; B00H is the address of break factor register of DSU.
; Clear break factor register.
RETI
477
APPENDIX F Precautions on Handling
478
INDEX
INDEX
The index follows on the next page.
This is listed in alphabetic order.
479
INDEX
Index
Numerics
A
0 Detection
A/D
0 Detection.......................................................................148
1 Detection
1 Detection.......................................................................148
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR0)................245
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR1)................247
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR2)................249
16-bit Dead Timer Register
16-bit Dead Timer Register
(TMRRH: TMRRH0 to TMRRH2,
TMRRL: TMRRL0 to TMRRL2)....................244
16-bit Free-Run Timer
16-bit Free-Run Timer Interrupt ......................................256
16-bit Free-Run Timer Register.......................................213
Notes on Using 16-bit Free-Run Timer ...........................292
Program Example of 16-bit Free-Run Timer...................294
16-bit Input Capture
16-bit Input Capture Interrupt..........................................258
16-bit Input Capture Registers.........................................215
Cautions for Use of 16-bit Input Capture ........................292
Input Timing of 16-bit Input Capture ..............................278
Operation of 16-bit Input Capture ...................................277
16-bit Output Compare
16-bit Output Compare and Free-run Timer Operation
.........................................................................273
16-bit Output Compare Interrupt .....................................257
16-bit Output Compare Register......................................214
16-bit Output Compare Timing .......................................272
Notes on Using 16-bit Output Compare ..........................292
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Inverted Mode,MOD1x=0) ............................267
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Set/Reset Mode,MOD15 to MOD10=1)
.........................................................................271
Program Example of 16-bit Output Compare..................295
16-bit Reload Register
TMRLR Register (16-bit Reload Register) .....................157
16-bit Timer Register
TMR Register (16-bit Timer Register) ............................157
8/10-bit A/D Converter
Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ......................325
Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter Pin
................................................................ 110, 329
Function of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ................................324
Interrupt of 8/10-bit A/D Converter.................................341
Pins of 8/10-bit A/D Converter........................................328
Precautions on Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter.................347
Register List of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ..........................330
A/D Startup ..................................................................... 291
A/D Startup Enable ......................................................... 291
A/D Activation
A/D Activation Via Free-run Timer................................ 266
A/D Activation Compare Registers
A/D Activation Compare Registers ................................ 217
A/D Channel Control Register
A/D Channel Control Register(ADCH: ADCH0 to ADCH2)
......................................................................... 331
A/D Control Status Register
A/D Control Status Register(ADCS: ADCS0 to ADCS2)
......................................................................... 336
A/D Conversion Data
A/D Conversion Data Protection Function ..................... 346
A/D Converter
Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ..................... 325
Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter Pin
.................................................................110, 329
Function of 8/10-bit A/D Converter................................ 324
Interrupt of 8/10-bit A/D Converter................................ 341
Pins of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ....................................... 328
Precautions on Using 8/10-bit A/D Converter ................ 347
Register List of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ......................... 330
A/D Data Register
A/D Data Register
(ADCD: ADCD00,ADCD01,ADCD10,ADCD11,
ADCD20,ADCD21)........................................ 339
A/D Mode Setting Register
A/D Mode Setting Register(ADMD: ADMD0 to ADMD2)
......................................................................... 333
A/D Trigger Control Register
A/D Trigger Control Register (ADTRGC) ..................... 226
Absence Trap
Coprocessor Absence Trap ............................................... 60
ADCD
A/D Data Register
(ADCD: ADCD00,ADCD01,ADCD10,ADCD11,
ADCD20,ADCD21)........................................ 339
ADCH
A/D Channel Control Register(ADCH: ADCH0 to ADCH2)
......................................................................... 331
ADCOMP
Compare Register 0,1,2 (ADCOMP0,ADCOMP1,
ADCOMP2) .................................................... 254
ADCOMPC
Control Register (ADCOMPC)....................................... 255
ADCS
A/D Control Status Register
(ADCS: ADCS0 to ADCS2)........................... 336
480
INDEX
Block Diagram......................... 4, 117, 131, 142, 145, 168,
298, 306, 352, 370
Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter......................325
Block Diagram of 8/10-bit A/D Converter Pin
................................................................ 110, 329
Block Diagram of Flash Memory ....................................405
Block Diagram of Multifunctional Timer .......................206
PWC Block Diagram .......................................................185
Reload Timer Block Diagram..........................................153
Addressing
Addressing Mode ............................................................ 391
Addressing Area
Direct Addressing Area ...............................................26, 44
ADMD
A/D Mode Setting Register(ADMD: ADMD0 to ADMD2)
......................................................................... 333
ADTRGC
A/D Trigger Control Register (ADTRGC) ..................... 226
Block Size
AF200 Flash
System Configuration of AF200 Flash Microcontroller
Programmer (Yokogawa Digital Computer
Corporation) .................................................... 435
AICR
Analog Input Control Register
(AICR: AICR0 to AICR2) .............................. 340
Analog Input Control Register (AICR:AICR0 to AICR2)
......................................................................... 111
Analog Input Control Register
Analog Input Control Register
(AICR: AICR0 to AICR2) .............................. 340
Analog Input Control Register (AICR:AICR0 to AICR2)
......................................................................... 111
Architecture
Block Size........................................................................390
Block Transfer
Block Transfer .................................................................398
Branch Operation
Branch Operation with Delay Slot.....................................45
Branch Operation without Delay Slot ...............................47
Branching Command
JMP Instruction (Branching Command)..........................366
BSD
0 Detection Data Register (BSD0) ..................................146
1 Detection Data Register (BSD1) ..................................146
BSDC
Change Point Detection Data Register (BSDC) ..............147
BSRR
Detection Result Register (BSRR) ..................................147
Internal Architecture.......................................................... 28
Assembler
Burst Transfer
Burst Transfer ..................................................................399
Assembler (fasm911) ...................................................... 456
Asynchronous
Asynchronous (Start-stop Synchronization) Mode
......................................................................... 314
Watchdog Timer Control Register
RSRR: Reset Source Register/watchdog Timer Control
Register.............................................................. 77
Burst Two-cycle Transfer
Burst Two-cycle Transfer ................................................388
Bus Converter
32-bit ↔ 16-bit Bus Converter .........................................30
Harvard ↔ Princeton Bus Converter ................................30
Bus Modes
Automatic Algorithm
Automatic Algorithm Execution Status .......................... 404
Bus Modes .........................................................................62
BUSY
Ready/Busy Signal (RDY/BUSY)...................................420
B
Busy Signal
Base Clock Divide Ratio Setting Register
DIVR0: Base Clock Divide Ratio Setting Register 0
........................................................................... 85
DIVR1: Base Clock Divide Ratio Setting Register 1
........................................................................... 88
Basic Block Diagram
Basic Block Diagram of I/O Ports................................... 102
Basic Configuration
Basic Configuration of the Serial Programming Connection
......................................................................... 432
Basic Programming
Basic Programming Model................................................ 33
Baud Rate
Calculation of Baud Rate ................................................ 302
Bit Ordering
Bit Ordering....................................................................... 40
Block Diagram
Basic Block Diagram of I/O Ports................................... 102
Ready/Busy Signal (RDY/BUSY)...................................420
Byte Ordering
Byte Ordering ....................................................................40
C
C Compiler
C Compiler (fcc911) ........................................................453
Calculating
Calculating Function........................................................360
Cancel
Temporary Sector Protect Cancel....................................429
Cancel Request
Hold Request Cancel Request .........................................124
Cascade Mode
Cascade Mode..................................................................302
Change Point
Change Point Detection ...................................................149
481
INDEX
Change Point Detection Data Register
Control/Status Registers
Change Point Detection Data Register (BSDC) ..............147
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Control/Status Registers A
......................................................................... 371
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Control/Status Registers B
......................................................................... 375
DSP-CSR (Control/Status Registers).............................. 355
Channel
Channel Selection and Control ........................................397
CLK
CLK Synchronous Mode .................................................315
CLKB
Conversion Mode
Operation of Continuous Conversion Mode ................... 343
Operation of Single Conversion Mode ........................... 342
Operation of Pause-conversion Mode............................. 345
CPU Clock Signal (CLKB)................................................74
CLKP
Peripheral Clock Signal (CLKP) .......................................74
CLKR
Coprocessor
Coprocessor Absence Trap ............................................... 60
Coprocessor Error Trap..................................................... 61
CLKR: Clock Source Control Register .............................83
CLKT
Count
External Bus Clock Signal (CLKT)...................................74
Clock
Count Clock Selection ............................................ 179, 193
CPU Clock Signal (CLKB)................................................74
External Bus Clock Signal (CLKT)...................................74
Internal Clock Operation .................................................158
Oscillation Clock Frequency ...........................................435
Peripheral Clock Signal (CLKP) .......................................74
Selected External Count Clock ........................................266
Selecting a Clock for the UART......................................313
Selecting the Source Clock Signal.....................................70
Clock Source Control Register
Count Clock Selection.............................................179, 193
Counter
Counter Clear .................................................................. 195
Operating States of the Counter ...................................... 161
CPCLRBH
Compare-clear Buffer Register
(CPCLRBH,CPCLRBL) ................................. 218
CPCLRBL
Compare-clear Buffer Register
(CPCLRBH,CPCLRBL) ................................. 218
CPCLRH
Compare Clear Register (CPCLRH,CPCLRL)............... 219
CLKR: Clock Source Control Register .............................83
Combinations
CPCLRL
Compare Clear Register (CPCLRH,CPCLRL)............... 219
PPG Combinations...........................................................181
Common Items
CPU
CPU ................................................................................... 30
CPU Clock Signal (CLKB)............................................... 74
CPU Control.................................................................... 392
FR-CPU Programming Mode (16-bit,Read/write)
......................................................................... 414
FR-CPU ROM Mode (32/16/8-bit, Read Only).............. 414
Common Items.................................................................475
Compare Clear Buffer
Compare Clear Buffer......................................................262
Compare Clear Register
Compare Clear Register (CPCLRH,CPCLRL) ...............219
Compare Control Register
Compare Control Register,Lower Byte
(OCSL0,OCSL2,OCSL4) ................................232
Compare Control Register,Upper Byte
(OCSH1,OCSH3,OCSH5)...............................229
Compare Mode Control Register
Compare Mode Control Register (OCMOD) ..................234
Compare Register
Compare Register 0,1,2
(ADCOMP0,ADCOMP1,ADCOMP2)
.........................................................................254
Compare-clear Buffer Register
Compare-clear Buffer Register
(CPCLRBH,CPCLRBL)..................................218
Continuous Conversion
Operation of Continuous Conversion Mode....................343
Control Register
Control Register (ADCOMPC) .......................................255
Control Status Register
Control Status Register
(TMCSR:TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)....................154
482
CTBR
CTBR: Timebase Counter Clear Register......................... 83
D
Data Access
Data Access....................................................................... 41
Data Direction Registers
Data Direction Registers (DDR:DDR0 to DDR7, DDRC,
DDRD, DDRE and DDRG) ............................ 105
Data Operation
Data Operation at Two-cycle Transfer............................ 400
Data Type
Data Type ........................................................................ 392
DDR
Data Direction Registers (DDR:DDR0 to DDR7, DDRC,
DDRD,DDRE and DDRG) ............................. 105
Dead Time Timer Mode
Operation During Dead Time Timer Mode .................... 285
Debugger
Debugger (sim911,eml911,mon911) .............................. 459
Notes on Using Debugger ............................................... 477
INDEX
Delay Slot
Branch Operation with Delay Slot .................................... 45
Branch Operation without Delay Slot ............................... 47
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR2)................249
DTTI
DTTI Interrupts................................................................290
DTTI Operation of Waveform Control Register 2
(SIGCR2).........................................................290
DTTI Pin Input Operation ...............................................289
DTTI Pin Noise Cancel Feature ......................................290
Delayed Interrupt Control Register
DICR (Delayed Interrupt Control Register).................... 143
Delayed Register
DSP-LY (Delayed Register)............................................ 358
Delayed Write Feature
Delayed Write Feature..................................................... 360
Detection
0 Detection ...................................................................... 148
1 Detection ...................................................................... 148
Change Point Detection................................................... 149
E
EIRR
External Interrupt Source Register (EIRR (EIRR0,EIRR1):
External Interrupt Request Register) ...............132
EIT
Detection Data Register
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap)...................................48
EIT Sources .......................................................................48
EIT Vector Table ...............................................................53
Reception Priority of EIT Source ......................................56
Return from EIT ................................................................48
0 Detection Data Register (BSD0) .................................. 146
1 Detection Data Register (BSD1) .................................. 146
Detection Result Register
Detection Result Register (BSRR) .................................. 147
Device States
ELVR
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register (ELVR
(ELVR0,ELVR1): External LeVel Register)
.........................................................................133
Device States and State Transitions .................................. 93
DICR
DICR (Delayed Interrupt Control Register).................... 143
DLYI Bit of DICR........................................................... 144
Direct Addressing
Direct Addressing Area ...............................................26, 44
eml911
Debugger (sim911,eml911,mon911) ...............................459
ENable Interrupt Request Register
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR (ENIR0,ENIR1): ENable
Interrupt Request Register)..............................132
DIVR
DIVR0: Base Clock Divide Ratio Setting Register 0
........................................................................... 85
DIVR1: Base Clock Divide Ratio Setting Register 1
........................................................................... 88
DLYI Bit
DLYI Bit of DICR........................................................... 144
DMA
DMA Transfer in Sleep Mode......................................... 396
Peripheral Interrupt Clear by DMA................................. 394
DMAC
DMAC Interrupt Control................................................. 396
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Control/Status Registers A
......................................................................... 371
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Control/Status Registers B
......................................................................... 375
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Overall DMAC Control
Register............................................................ 383
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Transfer Source/Transfer
Destination Address Setting Registers ............ 381
DSP-CSR
DSP-CSR (Control/Status Registers) .............................. 355
DSP-LY
DSP-LY (Delayed Register)............................................ 358
DSP-OT
DSP-OT0 to DSP-OT7 (Variable Monitor Register)
......................................................................... 358
DSP-PC
DSP-PC (Program Counter) ............................................ 357
DTCR
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR0) ............... 245
16-bit Dead Timer Control Register (DTCR1) ............... 247
End
Operation End/Stopping ..................................................395
ENIR
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR (ENIR0,ENIR1): ENable
Interrupt Request Register)..............................132
Error Trap
Coprocessor Error Trap .....................................................61
Exception
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap)...................................48
Processing of Undefined Instruction Exception ................60
External Bus Clock
External Bus Clock Signal (CLKT)...................................74
External Count Clock
Selected External Count Clock........................................266
External Interrupt
External Interrupt Request Level.....................................135
External Interrupt Source Register (EIRR (EIRR0,EIRR1):
External Interrupt Request Register) ...............132
Operating Procedure for an External Interrupt ................134
Operation of an External Interrupt...................................134
Precautions when Returning from STOP State Using
External Interrupt.............................................137
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register
External Interrupt Request Level Setting Register
(ELVR (ELVR0,ELVR1): External LeVel
Register)...........................................................133
External Interrupt Source Register
External Interrupt Source Register (EIRR (EIRR0,EIRR1):
External Interrupt Request Register) ...............132
483
INDEX
F
GATE Function Control Register
GATEC Register (GATE Function Control Register)
......................................................................... 176
fasm911
Assembler (fasm911).......................................................456
fcc911
C Compiler (fcc911) ........................................................453
Features
Gate Trigger
PPG0 Output Via Gate Trigger ....................................... 281
GATEC Register
GATEC Register (GATE Function Control Register)
......................................................................... 176
Features.......................................................... 2, 28, 48, 350
Flag
Example of Hardware Sequence Flag Usage...................424
Hardware Sequence Flag .................................................420
I-flag...................................................................................50
Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting Flags
.........................................................................316
H
Handling Devices
Handling Devices .............................................................. 22
Hardware
Flash Memory
Block Diagram of Flash Memory ....................................405
Overview of Flash Memory .............................................404
Register List of Flash Memory ........................................409
Sector Configuration of Flash Memory ...........................406
Flash Memory Status Register
Configuration of Flash Memory Status Register (FLCR)
.........................................................................410
Flash Wait Register
Configuration of the Flash Wait Register (FLWC)
.........................................................................412
FLCR
Configuration of Flash Memory Status Register(FLCR)
.........................................................................410
flnk911
Linker (flnk911)...............................................................458
Hardware Configuration..........................................114, 368
Initial Value of Each Hardware....................................... 180
Hardware Sequence Flag
Example of Hardware Sequence Flag Usage .................. 424
Hardware Sequence Flag................................................. 420
Harvard
Harvard ↔ Princeton Bus Converter ............................... 30
Hold Request
Hold Request Cancel Request......................................... 124
Hold Request Cancel Level
Hold Request Cancel Level Register (HRCL) ................ 119
Hold Request Cancel Register
Example of Using the Hold Request Cancel Register
(HRCL) ........................................................... 125
HRCL
Example of Using the Hold Request Cancel Register
(HRCL) ........................................................... 125
Hold Request Cancel Level Register (HRCL) ................ 119
FLWC
Configuration of the Flash Wait Register (FLWC)
.........................................................................412
FR-CPU Programming Mode
FR-CPU Programming Mode (16-bit,Read/write)
.........................................................................414
I
I/O Map
I/O Map ........................................................................... 438
FR-CPU ROM Mode
FR-CPU ROM Mode (32/16/8-bit, Read Only)
.........................................................................414
I/O Ports
Basic Block Diagram of I/O Ports .................................. 102
Mode for I/O Ports .......................................................... 102
Free-Run Timer
16-bit Free-Run Timer Interrupt ......................................256
16-bit Free-Run Timer Register.......................................213
Notes on Using 16-bit Free-Run Timer ...........................292
Program Example of 16-bit Free-Run Timer...................294
Free-run Timer
16-bit Output Compare and Free-run Timer Operation
.........................................................................273
A/D Activation Via Free-run Timer ................................266
ICR
ICR Bit Configuration....................................................... 51
Interrupt Control Register (ICR:ICR00 to ICR47)
......................................................................... 118
ICR Mapping
ICR Mapping..................................................................... 51
ICSH
Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2, ch.3),
Upper Byte (ICSH23) ..................................... 237
Fujitsu Standard
Pins Used for Fujitsu Standard Serial Onboard Writing
.........................................................................433
G
ICSL
Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2, ch.3),
Lower Byte (ICSL23) ..................................... 239
I-flag
I-flag.................................................................................. 50
GATE
GATE Function................................................................180
Output Status of RTO0 to RTO5 and GATE...................279
484
ILM
ILM Register ..................................................................... 50
INDEX
Initial Area
Occurrence of Interrupts and Timing for Setting Flags
.........................................................................316
Operating Procedure for an External Interrupt ................134
Operation of an External Interrupt...................................134
Operation of User Interrupt/NMI ......................................58
Peripheral Interrupt Clear by DMA.................................394
Precautions when Returning from STOP State Using
External Interrupt.............................................137
Timer Interrupt ................................................................264
Waveform Generator Interrupts.......................................259
Vector Table Initial Area................................................... 44
Initial Value
Initial Value of Each Hardware....................................... 180
Initialization
Wait Times after Setting Initialization .............................. 72
Input Capture
16-bit Input Capture Interrupt ......................................... 258
16-bit Input Capture Registers ........................................ 215
Cautions for Use of 16-bit Input Capture........................ 292
Input Timing of 16-bit Input Capture.............................. 278
Operation of 16-bit Input Capture ................................... 277
Input Capture Data Register
Input Capture Data Register (IPCPH: IPCPH0 to
IPCPH3,IPCPL: IPCPL0 to IPCPL3) ............. 236
Input Capture State Control Register
Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2,ch.3),Upper Byte
(ICSH23) ......................................................... 237
Input Capture State Control Register (ch.2,ch.3),Lower Byte
(ICSL23).......................................................... 239
Input/Output Circuit
Interrupt Control Register
Interrupt Control Register (ICR:ICR00 to ICR47)
.........................................................................118
Interrupt Enable Register
Interrupt Enable Register (ENIR (ENIR0,ENIR1): ENable
Interrupt Request Register)..............................132
Interrupt Mask
Interrupt Mask Function ..................................................264
Interruption
Interruption ......................................................................180
Inverted Mode
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Inverted Mode,MOD1x=0) ............................267
Input/Output Circuit Types ............................................... 18
Instruction
Instruction Definitions..................................................... 354
Instruction Overview......................................................... 31
JMP Instruction (Branching Command) ......................... 366
MAC Instruction.............................................................. 363
Processing of RETI Instruction ......................................... 61
STR Instruction (Transition Instruction)......................... 364
IPCPH
Input Capture Data Register (IPCPH: IPCPH0 to
IPCPH3,IPCPL: IPCPL0 to IPCPL3)..............236
IPCPL
Input Capture Data Register (IPCPH: IPCPH0 to
IPCPH3,IPCPL: IPCPL0 to IPCPL3)..............236
Instruction Operation
Instruction Operation....................................................... 359
INT
Processing of INT Instruction ........................................... 59
J
JMP Instruction
JMP Instruction (Branching Command)..........................366
INTE
Processing of INTE Instruction......................................... 59
Internal Architecture
Internal Architecture.......................................................... 28
Internal Clock
Internal Clock Operation ................................................. 158
L
Linker
Linker (flnk911) ..............................................................458
Low-power Consumption
Low-power Consumption Modes ......................................96
Internal Peripheral Request
Internal Peripheral Request ............................................. 387
Interrupt
16-bit Free-Run Timer Interrupt...................................... 256
16-bit Input Capture Interrupt ......................................... 258
16-bit Output Compare Interrupt..................................... 257
DMAC Interrupt Control................................................. 396
DTTI Interrupts ............................................................... 290
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap)................................... 48
External Interrupt Request Level .................................... 135
External Interrupt Source Register (EIRR (EIRR0,EIRR1):
External Interrupt Request Register)............... 132
Interrupt Levels ................................................................. 49
Interrupt Number............................................................. 144
Interrupt of 8/10-bit A/D Converter ................................ 341
Interrupt Stack ................................................................... 52
Interrupt/NMI Level Masking ........................................... 50
NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) ....................................... 124
M
MAC Instruction
MAC Instruction..............................................................363
Main Function
Main Function..................................................................368
Major Functions
Major Functions...............................................................114
Masking
Interrupt/NMI Level Masking ...........................................50
Measurement
Pulse Width Measurement Function................................184
Measuring
Details for Pulse Width Measuring Operation ................195
Memory Map
Memory Map .............................................................. 26, 42
485
INDEX
Microcontroller Programmer
System Configuration of AF200 Flash Microcontroller
Programmer (Yokogawa Digital Computer
Corporation).....................................................435
MOD
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Inverted Mode,MOD1x=0) ............................267
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Set/Reset Mode,MOD15 to MOD10=1)
.........................................................................271
Mode
Asynchronous (Start-stop Synchronization) Mode
.........................................................................314
Mode Setting......................................................................62
Returning from Standby Mode (Stop or Sleep Mode)
.........................................................................125
mon911
Debugger (sim911,eml911,mon911) ...............................459
Monitor Output
Variable Monitor Output .................................................361
Multifunctional Timer
Block Diagram of Multifunctional Timer........................206
Configuration of Multifunctional Timer..........................204
Operation of Multifunctional Timer ................................260
Pins of Multifunctional Timer .........................................212
Multiplier
PLL Multiplier ...................................................................71
Wait Times after the PLL Multiplier is Changed ..............72
OCCPH
Output Compare Register (OCCPH: OCCPH0 to
OCCPH5,OCCPL: OCCPL0 to OCCPL5)
......................................................................... 228
OCCPL
Output Compare Register (OCCPH: OCCPH0 to
OCCPH5,OCCPL: OCCPL0 to OCCPL5)
......................................................................... 228
OCMOD
Compare Mode Control Register (OCMOD).................. 234
OCSH
Compare Control Register,Upper Byte
(OCSH1,OCSH3,OCSH5) .............................. 229
OCSL
Compare Control Register,Lower Byte
(OCSL0,OCSL2,OCSL4) ............................... 232
Operating Mode
Operating Mode ......................................................177, 359
Operating Modes............................................................. 313
Operating States
Operating States of the Counter ...................................... 161
Operation
Overview of Operation............................................177, 385
Operation Mode
Operation Modes............................................................... 62
Selects Operation Mode .................................................. 193
Operation Start
Operation Start ................................................................ 393
Ordering
N
NMI
NMI..................................................................................136
NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt)........................................124
Operation of User Interrupt/NMI.......................................58
NMI Level
Interrupt/NMI Level Masking ...........................................50
Noise Cancel
DTTI Pin Noise Cancel Feature.......................................290
Non Maskable Interrupt
NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt)........................................124
Note
Note..................................................................................201
Notes ................................................................................162
Notes on Setting Register ................................................371
O
OCCPBH
Output Compare Buffer Register (OCCPBH: OCCPBH0 to
OCCPBH5,OCCPBL: OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5)
.........................................................................227
OCCPBL
Output Compare Buffer Register (OCCPBH: OCCPBH0 to
OCCPBH5,OCCPBL: OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5)
.........................................................................227
486
Bit Ordering ...................................................................... 40
Byte Ordering.................................................................... 40
Oscillation Clock
Oscillation Clock Frequency........................................... 435
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time.................................. 67
Output Compare
16-bit Output Compare and Free-run Timer Operation
......................................................................... 273
16-bit Output Compare Interrupt .................................... 257
16-bit Output Compare Register ..................................... 214
16-bit Output Compare Timing....................................... 272
Notes on Using 16-bit Output Compare.......................... 292
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Inverted Mode,MOD1x=0)............................ 267
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Set/Reset Mode,MOD15 to MOD10=1)
......................................................................... 271
Program Example of 16-bit Output Compare ................. 295
Output Compare Buffer Register
Output Compare Buffer Register (OCCPBH: OCCPBH0 to
OCCPBH5,OCCPBL: OCCPBL0 to OCCPBL5)
......................................................................... 227
Output Compare Register
Output Compare Register (OCCPH: OCCPH0 to
OCCPH5,OCCPL: OCCPL0 to OCCPL5)
......................................................................... 228
INDEX
Output Invert Register
REVC Register (Output Invert Register) ........................ 175
Output Status
Output Status of RTO0 to RTO5 and GATE .................. 279
Output Terminal
Output Terminal Functions ............................................. 160
Overall DMAC Control Register
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Overall DMAC Control
Register............................................................ 383
PPG
Function of PPG ..............................................................164
PPG Combinations ..........................................................181
PPG Output Operation.....................................................178
PPG0 Output Control.......................................................281
PPG0 Output Via Gate Trigger .......................................281
PPG Activation Register
TRG Register (PPG Activation Register)........................175
PPG Control Register
PPG Control Register,Lower Byte (PICSL01)................242
PPG Output Control Register
P
Package Dimension
Package Dimension ............................................................. 5
Pause-conversion Mode
Operation of Pause-conversion Mode ............................. 345
PCR
Pull-up Control Registers
(PCR:PCR0 to PCR7 and PCRG) ................... 106
PDIVR
PDIVR (Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register)
......................................................................... 191
PDR
Port Data Registers (PDR:PDR0 to
PDR7,PDRC,PDRD,PDRE and PDRG)
......................................................................... 104
Peripheral Clock
Peripheral Clock Signal (CLKP)....................................... 74
Peripheral Interrupt
Peripheral Interrupt Clear by DMA................................. 394
Peripheral Request
Internal Peripheral Request ............................................. 387
PFR
Port Function Registers
(PFR:PFR0 to PFR2,PFR7 and PFRG)........... 107
PICSH
PPG Output Control Register,Upper Byte (PICSH01)
......................................................................... 241
PICSL
PPG Control Register,Lower Byte (PICSL01)................ 242
Pin Assignment
Pin Assignment.................................................................... 7
Pin Description
Pin Description .................................................................... 9
PLL
PPG Output Control Register,Upper Byte (PICSH01)
.........................................................................241
PPGCn Register
PPGCn Register (PPGn Operation Mode Control Register)
.........................................................................172
PPGn Operation Mode Control Register
PPGCn Register (PPGn Operation Mode Control Register)
.........................................................................172
Precaution
Other Precautionary Information.....................................435
Precautions on Usage.......................................................318
Precautions when Returning from STOP State Using
External Interrupt.............................................137
Princeton
Harvard ↔ Princeton Bus Converter ................................30
Priority
Reception Priority of EIT Source ......................................56
Priority Evaluation
Priority Evaluation...........................................................120
PRLL/PRLH Register
PRLL/PRLH Register (Reload Register) ........................174
Processing
Save/Restore Processing..................................................150
Program Access
Program Access .................................................................41
Program Counter
DSP-PC (Program Counter) ............................................357
Program Example
Program Example of 16-bit Free-Run Timer ..................294
Program Example of 16-bit Output Compare..................295
Programming
FR-CPU Programming Mode (16-bit,Read/write)
.........................................................................414
Programming Model
Enabling/disabling PLL Operation.................................... 71
PLL Multiplier................................................................... 71
Wait Times after PLL Operation is Enabled ..................... 72
Wait Times after the PLL Multiplier is Changed.............. 72
Port Data Registers
Port Data Registers (PDR:PDR0 to PDR7, PDRC, PDRD,
PDRE and PDRG) ........................................... 104
Port Function Registers
Port Function Registers
(PFR:PFR0 to PFR2,PFR7 and PFRG)........... 107
Basic Programming Model ................................................33
Protect
Enable Sector Protect.......................................................427
Sector Protect Operation List ..........................................426
Verify Sector Protect .......................................................427
Protection Function
A/D Conversion Data Protection Function......................346
Pull-up Control Registers
Pull-up Control Registers (PCR:PCR0 to PCR7 and PCRG)
.........................................................................106
Power
Wait Times after the Power is Turned on.......................... 72
487
INDEX
Pulse
Request Level
Control of Pulse Pin Output.............................................179
Pulse Width
Details for Pulse Width Measuring Operation.................195
Pulse Width Measurement Function................................184
Relation between Reload Value and Pulse Width ...........178
Starting and Stopping of Pulse Width Count...................194
External Interrupt Request Level .................................... 135
Reset
Reset Operation Modes ..................................................... 69
Reset Sequence.................................................................. 66
Reset Sources .................................................................... 65
Reset Levels
PWC
PWC Block Diagram .......................................................185
Reset Levels ...................................................................... 64
Reset Source Register
PWC Control/Status Register
RSRR: Reset Source Register/watchdog Timer Control
Register ............................................................. 77
PWCSR Register (PWC Control/Status Register)...........186
PWC Data Buffer Register
PWCR0,PWCR1 Register (PWC Data Buffer Register)
.........................................................................190
Restore Processing
Save/Restore Processing ................................................. 150
RETI Instruction
PWCR
PWCR0,PWCR1 Register (PWC Data Buffer Register)
.........................................................................190
Processing of RETI Instruction......................................... 61
Return
Return from EIT................................................................ 48
Return from Standby ....................................................... 134
PWCR1 Register
PWCR0,PWCR1 Register
(PWC Data Buffer Register)............................190
PWCSR Register
Return Operation
Return Operation from STOP State ................................ 138
REVC Register
PWCSR Register (PWC Control/Status Register)...........186
REVC Register (Output Invert Register) ........................ 175
ROM
R
FR-CPU ROM Mode (32/16/8-bit, Read Only).............. 414
Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register
PDIVR (Ratio of Dividing Frequency Control Register)
.........................................................................191
ROM Writer
Writing by a ROM Writer ............................................... 405
RSRR
RSRR: Reset Source Register/watchdog Timer Control
Register ............................................................. 77
RDY
Ready/Busy Signal (RDY/BUSY)...................................420
Ready
RTO
Output Status of RTO0 to RTO5 and GATE .................. 279
Ready/Busy Signal (RDY/BUSY)...................................420
Reception Priority
Reception Priority of EIT Source ......................................56
Register
Notes on Setting Register ................................................371
Register Description ........................................................369
Registers.............................................................................34
Register List
Register List .................................115, 130, 142, 145, 152,
164, 184, 298, 305, 351
Reload Operation
Reload Operation .............................................................390
Reload Register
PRLL/PRLH Register (Reload Register).........................174
Reload Register (UTIMR: UTIMR0 to UTIMR2)
.........................................................................299
TMRLR Register (16-bit Reload Register) .....................157
Reload Timer
Reload Timer Block Diagram..........................................153
Reload Value
Relation between Reload Value and Pulse Width ...........178
Request
Internal Peripheral Request..............................................387
Software Request .............................................................387
Transfer Request Acceptance and Transfer .....................394
S
Save
Save/Restore Processing ................................................. 150
SCR
SCR (Serial Control Register)......................................... 308
Sector
Enable Sector Protect ...................................................... 427
Sector Protect Operation List .......................................... 426
Verify Sector Protect....................................................... 427
Sector Configuration
Sector Configuration of Flash Memory .......................... 406
Sector Protect
Enable Sector Protect ...................................................... 427
Sector Protect Operation List .......................................... 426
Temporary Sector Protect Cancel ................................... 429
Verify Sector Protect....................................................... 427
Serial Control Register
SCR (Serial Control Register)......................................... 308
Serial Input Data Register
SIDR: SIDR0 to SIDR2 (Serial Input Data Register)
SODR: SODR0 to SODR2
(Serial Output Data Register).......................... 310
Serial Mode Register
SMR (Serial Mode Register)........................................... 307
488
INDEX
Serial Onboard Writing
Pins Used for Fujitsu Standard Serial Onboard Writing
......................................................................... 433
Standby Control Register
STCR: Standby Control Register ......................................78
Standby Mode
Serial Output Data Register
SIDR: SIDR0 to SIDR2 (Serial Input Data Register)
SODR: SODR0 to SODR2
(Serial Output Data Register) .......................... 310
Returning from Standby Mode (Stop or Sleep Mode)
.........................................................................125
Start-stop Synchronization
Asynchronous (Start-stop Synchronization) Mode
.........................................................................314
Serial Programming Connection
Basic Configuration of the Serial Programming Connection
......................................................................... 432
Example of Serial Programming Connection.................. 434
Serial Status Register
SSR: SSR0 to SSR2 (Serial Status Register) .................. 310
Set/Reset Mode
Operation of 16-bit Output Compare
(Set/Reset Mode,MOD15 to MOD10=1)
......................................................................... 271
Setting
State Transitions
Device States and State Transitions...................................93
STCR
STCR: Standby Control Register ......................................78
Step
Processing of Step Trace Trap...........................................59
Step/block Transfer
Step/block Transfer Two-cycle Transfer .........................389
STOP
Precautions when Returning from STOP State Using
External Interrupt.............................................137
Return Operation from STOP State.................................138
Notes on Setting Register ................................................ 371
SIDR
SIDR: SIDR0 to SIDR2 (Serial Input Data Register)
SODR: SODR0 to SODR2
(Serial Output Data Register) .......................... 310
SIGCR
DTTI Operation of Waveform Control Register 2
(SIGCR2) ........................................................ 290
Waveform Control Register 1 (SIGCR1)........................ 251
Waveform Control Register 2 (SIGCR2)........................ 253
Signal
Ready/Busy Signal (RDY/BUSY) .................................. 420
sim911
Debugger (sim911,eml911,mon911)............................... 459
Single Conversion
Operation of Single Conversion Mode............................ 342
Stop
Returning from Standby Mode (Stop or Sleep Mode)
.........................................................................125
Stop Mode
Wait Times after Returning from Stop Mode....................72
Stopping
Operation End/Stopping ..................................................395
Stopping due to Error ......................................................395
STR Instruction
STR Instruction (Transition Instruction) .........................364
Synchronous Mode
CLK Synchronous Mode .................................................315
System Configuration
System Configuration of AF200 Flash Microcontroller
Programmer (Yokogawa Digital Computer
Corporation).....................................................435
Sleep Mode
DMA Transfer in Sleep Mode......................................... 396
Returning from Standby Mode (Stop or Sleep Mode)
......................................................................... 125
T
Slot
Branch Operation with Delay Slot .................................... 45
Branch Operation without Delay Slot ............................... 47
SMR
SMR (Serial Mode Register)........................................... 307
SODR
SIDR: SIDR0 to SIDR2 (Serial Input Data Register)
SODR: SODR0 to SODR2
(Serial Output Data Register) .......................... 310
Software Request
Software Request............................................................. 387
Source Clock
Selecting the Source Clock Signal .................................... 70
SSR
SSR: SSR0 to SSR2 (Serial Status Register) .................. 310
Stack
Interrupt Stack ................................................................... 52
Standby
Return from Standby ....................................................... 134
Table Base Register
TBR (Table Base Register)................................................53
TBCR
TBCR: Timebase Counter Control Register......................81
TBR
TBR (Table Base Register)................................................53
TCCSH
Timer State Control Register,Upper Byte (TCCSH)
.........................................................................221
TCCSL
Timer State Control Register,Lower Byte (TCCSL).......224
TCDTH
Timer Data Register (TCDTH,TCDTL)..........................220
TCDTL
Timer Data Register (TCDTH,TCDTL)..........................220
Temporary Sector Protect Cancel
Temporary Sector Protect Cancel....................................429
489
INDEX
Temporary Stop
Transition Instruction
Temporary Stop ...............................................................394
Timebase Counter
STR Instruction (Transition Instruction)......................... 364
Trap
Timebase Counter ..............................................................90
Coprocessor Absence Trap ............................................... 60
Coprocessor Error Trap..................................................... 61
EIT (Exception,Interrupt,and Trap) .................................. 48
Processing of Step Trace Trap .......................................... 59
Timebase Counter Clear Register
CTBR: Timebase Counter Clear Register .........................83
Timebase Counter Control Register
TBCR: Timebase Counter Control Register......................81
Timer Clear
Timer Clear ......................................................................261
Timer Control Register
Timer State Control Register,Lower Byte (TCCSL) .......224
TRG Register
TRG Register (PPG Activation Register) ....................... 175
Trigger
PPG0 Output Via Gate Trigger ....................................... 281
Two-cycle Transfer
Burst Two-cycle Transfer ............................................... 388
Data Operation at Two-cycle Transfer............................ 400
Step/block Transfer Two-cycle Transfer ........................ 389
Timer Data Register
Timer Data Register (TCDTH,TCDTL)..........................220
Timer Interrupt
Timer Interrupt.................................................................264
Timer Mode
Operation of Timer Mode ................................................283
Timer Mode .....................................................................261
U
UART
Example of Using the UART.......................................... 319
Features of UART ........................................................... 304
Selecting a Clock for the UART ..................................... 313
Timer Register
TMR Register (16-bit Timer Register) ............................157
Timer State Control Register
Timer State Control Register,Upper Byte (TCCSH)
.........................................................................221
Undefined Instruction
Processing of Undefined Instruction Exception................ 60
Underflow Operation
Underflow Operation ...................................................... 159
TMCSR
Control Status Register
(TMCSR:TMCSR0 to TMCSR2)....................154
TMR Register
UTIM
U-TIMER (UTIM: UTIM0 to UTIM2)........................... 299
UTIMC
U-TIMer Control Register
(UTIMC: UTIMC0 to UTIMC2) .................... 299
TMR Register (16-bit Timer Register) ............................157
TMRLR Register
TMRLR Register (16-bit Reload Register) .....................157
U-TIMER
U-TIMER (UTIM: UTIM0 to UTIM2)........................... 299
TMRRH
16-bit Dead Timer Register (TMRRH: TMRRH0 to
TMRRH2, TMRRL: TMRRL0 to TMRRL2)
.........................................................................244
TMRRL
U-TIMer Control Register
U-TIMer Control Register
(UTIMC: UTIMC0 to UTIMC2) .................... 299
UTIMR
Reload Register (UTIMR: UTIMR0 to UTIMR2)
......................................................................... 299
16-bit Dead Timer Register (TMRRH: TMRRH0 to
TMRRH2, TMRRL: TMRRL0 to TMRRL2)
.........................................................................244
Trace
Processing of Step Trace Trap ...........................................59
Transfer
Block Transfer .................................................................398
Burst Transfer ..................................................................399
Burst Two-cycle Transfer ................................................388
Data Operation at Two-cycle Transfer ............................400
DMA Transfer in Sleep Mode .........................................396
Step/block Transfer Two-cycle Transfer .........................389
Transfer of Operation Results..........................................360
Transfer Request Acceptance and Transfer .....................394
Transfer Sequence Selection............................................388
Transfer Source/Transfer Destination Address
Setting Registers
DMAC-ch.0,ch.1,ch.2,ch.3,ch.4 Transfer Source/Transfer
Destination Address Setting Registers.............381
Transfers
Control of Number of Transfers ......................................392
490
V
Variable Monitor Register
DSP-OT0 to DSP-OT7 (Variable Monitor Register)
......................................................................... 358
Vector Table
EIT Vector Table............................................................... 53
Vector Table Initial Area .................................................. 44
W
Wait Times
Wait Times after PLL Operation is Enabled..................... 72
Wait Times after Returning from Stop Mode ................... 72
Wait Times after Setting Initialization.............................. 72
Wait Times after the PLL Multiplier is Changed.............. 72
Wait Times after the Power is Turned on ......................... 72
INDEX
Waveform Control Register
DTTI Operation of Waveform Control Register 2
(SIGCR2) ........................................................ 290
Waveform Control Register 1 (SIGCR1)........................ 251
Waveform Control Register 2 (SIGCR2)........................ 253
Waveform Generator Interrupts.......................................259
Waveform Generator Registers .......................................216
Writer
Writing by a ROM Writer ...............................................405
Waveform Generator
Notes on Using Waveform Generator ............................. 293
491
INDEX
492
CM71-10127-2E
Fujitsu Semiconductor Device. CONTROLLER MANUAL
FR60Lite
32-BIT MICROCONTROLLER
MB91260B Series
HARDWARE MANUAL
August 2006 the second edition
Published
FUJITSU LIMITED
Edited
Business Promotion Dept.
Electronic Devices